Bachelor of Business Administration

Programme Code: BBA

Duration – 3 Years Full Time

Programme Structure
and
Curriculum and Scheme of Examination

2022-25

AMITY UNIVERSITY MADHYA PRADESH

GWALIOR
 PREAMBLE

Amity University aims to achieve academic excellence by providing multi-faceted education

to students and encourage them to reach the pinnacle of success. The University has designed
a system that would provide rigorous academic programme with necessary skills to enable
them to excel in their careers.

This booklet contains the Programme Structure, the Detailed Curriculum and the Scheme of
Examination. The Programme Structure includes the courses (Core and Elective), arranged
semester wise. The importance of each course is defined in terms of credits attached to it. The
credit units attached to each course has been further defined in terms of contact hours i.e.
Lecture Hours (L), Tutorial Hours (T), Practical Hours (P). Towards earning credits in terms
of contact hours, 1 Lecture and 1 Tutorial per week are rated as 1 credit each and 2 Practical
hours per week are rated as 1 credit. Thus, for example, an L-T-P structure of 3-0-0 will have
3 credits, 3-1-0 will have 4 credits, and 3-1-2 will have 5 credits.

The Curriculum and Scheme of Examination of each course includes the course objectives,
course contents, scheme of examination and the list of text and references. The scheme of
examination defines the various components of evaluation and the weightage attached to each
component. The different codes used for the components of evaluation and the weightage
attached to them are:

Components Codes Weightage (%)

Case Discussion/ Presentation/ Analysis C 05 - 10
Home Assignment H 05 - 10
Project P 05 - 10
Seminar S 05 - 10
Viva V 05 - 10
Quiz Q 05 - 10
Class Test CT 10 - 15
Attendance A 05
End Semester Examination EE 70

It is hoped that it will help the students study in a planned and a structured manner and
promote effective learning. Wishing you an intellectually stimulating stay at Amity
University.

July, 2022
 BBA 2019-22
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE
FIRST SEMESTER
Course Course Title Lectures Tutorial Practical Total Page
Code (L) Hours (T) Hours (P) Hours Credit No.
Per Week Per Week Per Week
BBA 101 Management Foundations 2 1 - 3
BBA 102 Business Environment 2 1 - 3
BBA 103 Managerial Economics 2 2 - 4
CSE 101 Computers in Management 2 - 1.5 3
BBA 105 Financial Accounting 2 2 - 4
BBM 101 Elementary Business Mathematics 2 1 - 3
BBA 107 Polity & Society 2 1 - 3
EVS142 Environmental Studies – I 2 - - 2
BCU 141 Communication Skills –I 1 - - -

BSU 143 Behavioural Science- I 1 - - 1

Foreign Language – I 2 - - 2
FLU 144

TOTAL 28

Note: #The students will study English from I semester but final evaluation will be done at the end of IInd
semester. However continuous evaluation will start from the Ist Semester

SECOND SEMESTER
BBA 201 Macro Economics for Business 2 2 - 4
BBA 202 Corporate Accounting 2 2 - 4

BBA 203 Organizational Behaviour 2 1 - 3

CSE 201 Computer Applications in Business 2 1 2 4
Management
BBA 205 Sales and Distribution Management 2 1 - 3
EVS 242 Environmental Studies – II 2 - - 2
BCU 241 Communication Skills –II 1 - - 3
BSU 243 Behavioural Science- II 1 - - 1
Foreign Language – II 2 - - 2
FLU 244 French

TOTAL 26

SUMMER ASSIGNMENT/ PROJECT

THIRD SEMESTER
BBM 301 Business Statistics 2 1 - 3
BBA 302 Basics of Financial Management 2 2 - 4
CSE 301 Management Information Systems 2 - 2 3
BBA 304 Marketing Management – I 2 2 - 4
BBA 305 Cost & Management Accounting 2 1 - 3
BBL 326 Business Laws 2 1 - 3
BCU 341 Communication Skills –III 1 - - 1
BSU 343 Behavioural Science- III 1 - - 1
Foreign Language – III 2 - - 2
FLU 344 French

BBA 360 Summer Assignment/ Projects - - - 3

(Evaluation)
TOTAL 27

FOURTH SEMESTER
BBA 401 Corporate Financial Management 2 2 - 4
BBA 402 Marketing Management – II 2 2 - 4
BBA 403 Research Methodology and Report 2 1 - 3
Preparation
 BBA 404 Entrepreneurship Development 2 1 - 3
BBA 405 E-Commerce 2 - 2 3
BBA 406 Human Resource Management 2 1 - 3
BCU 441 Communication Skills –IV 1 - - 1
BSU 443 Behavioural Science- IV 1 - - 1
Foreign Language – IV 2 - - 2
FLU 444 French

TOTAL 24

SUMMER TRAINING (8 WEEKS)

FIFTH SEMESTER
BBA 501 International Business Management 2 1 - 3
BBA 502 Personal Financial Planning 2 1 - 3
BBM 501 Operations Research 2 2 - 4
BCU 541 Communication Skills –V 1 - - 1
BSU 543 Behavioural Science- V 1 - - 1
Foreign Language – V 2 - - 2
FLU 544 French

BBA 550 Summer Training (Evaluation) - - - 6

Elective Courses - either 2 Marketing, 2 Finance, 2 HR, 2 IT, 2 Law courses maybe opted.
Marketing
BBA 504 Consumer Behaviour 2 2 - 4
BBA 505 Service Marketing 2 2 - 4
BBA 506 International Marketing 2 2 - 4
Finance
BBA 507 Financial Services 2 2 - 4
BBA 508 Principles of Investment 2 2 - 4
Management
BBA 509 Financial Derivatives 2 2 - 4
HR
BBA 510 Organizational Development & 2 2 - 4
Change
BBA 511 Training & Development 2 2 - 4
BBA 512 International Human Resource 2 2 - 4
Management
IT
BBA 513 Relational Database Management 2 2 - 4
System
BBA 514 Software Project Design & Analysis 2 2 - 4
BBA 515 Programming with Microsoft Visual 2 1 2 4
Basic
Law
BBA 516 Law of Crimes 2 2 - 4
BBA 517 Investment & Competition Law 2 2 - 4
BBA 518 Law & Technology 2 2 - 4
TOTAL 28

SIXTH SEMESTER
BBA 601 Business Policy & Strategic 2 1 - 3
Management
BBM 601 Analytical Skill Building 2 2 - 4
BME 601 Production & Operations 2 1 - 3
Management
BBA 604 Public Relations & Corporate Image 2 1 - 3
BCU 641 Communication Skills –VI 1 - - 1
BSU 643 Behavioural Science- VI 1 - - 1
Foreign Language – VI 2 - - 2
FLU 644 French

BBA 655 Dissertation - - - 6

Elective Courses – Either 2 Marketing, 2 Finance, 2 HR, 2 IT, 2 Law courses (same stream as chosen in the
5th semester has to be continued).
Marketing
BBA 605 Brand Management 2 2 - 4
BBA 606 Advertising & Sales Promotion 2 2 - 4
BBA 607 Retail Management 2 2 - 4
Finance
BBA 608 Corporate Tax Planning 2 2 - 4
BBA 609 Banking & Financial Institutions 2 2 - 4
BBA 610 Advanced Corporate Finance 2 2 - 4
HR
BBL 629 Industrial Relations & Labour Law 2 2 - 4
BBA 612 Performance Management System 2 2 - 4
BBA 613 Compensation & Reward 2 2 - 4
Management
IT
BBA 614 Object Oriented Programming with 2 - 4 4
Java
BBA 615 Data Communication & Network 2 - 4 4
BBA 616 Web Database Programming with 2 - 4 4
ASP
Law
BBA 617 Intellectual Property Rights 2 2 - 4
BBA 618 Human Rights 2 2 - 4
BBA 619 Industrial Relations & Labour Law 2 2 - 4
TOTAL 31
 Curriculum & Scheme of Examination

MANAGEMENT FOUNDATIONS

Course Code: BBA 101 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The aim of the course is to orient the students in theories and practices of management so as to apply
the acquired knowledge in actual business practices. This is a gateway to the real world of
management and decision-making.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction
Definition of management, Functions of Management, Levels of Management, Evolution of
Management and Principles of Management, School & Thought of Management: Classical and Neo -
Classical Theories, Systems Approach to organization, Modern Organization Theory. Management in
Indian Culture and Tradition, Function and Responsibilities of Management.

Module II: Planning

Planning objectives, significance and characteristics, Planning process, Hierarchies of planning,
Planning vs Forecasting, Strategies and Policies, Types of plans, MBO, Decision making – concepts,
significance & process, Types of decision, Concept and techniques of forecasting, Planning for start-
ups.

Module III: Organizing

Nature and Purpose of Organisation, Meaning, Importance and process of organization,
Departmentalization, Organisational Structure: types and relevance, line and staff relationship, Span
of Control, Types of Organization, Authority, Delegation of Authority, Decentralization.

Module IV: Staffing

Meaning, Job analysis, Manpower planning, Recruitment: recruitment sources & selection,
Orientation, Transfers and Promotions, Job design, Training & Career Development, Performance
appraisal, Rewards and Recognition.

Module V: Directing
Direction: Nature and Purpose, Motivation, Leadership, Co-ordination, Communication, Directing,
Creativity and Innovation.

Module VI: Controlling

Objectives and process of management control, Types of control- budgetary and non-budgetary,
Techniques and behavioral aspects of management control. An overview of Strategic Management,
SWOT Analysis, Future Management-Challenges and Skills.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Essential of Management, Koontz O' Donnel

• Management, Stoner, Freemand & Gilbert
• Principles & practice of Mgmt., L.M. Prasad
• Management Today, Burton & Thakur
• Principles & Practices of Mgmt., C.B. Gupta
 BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Course Code: BBA 102 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The aim of the course is to orient the students towards the basic concepts of Indian and global business
environment.

Course Contents:
Module I: Overview of Business Environment
Meaning and types of business environment, Internal and external environment, Micro and macro environment,
Factors (Cultural, social, Political economic legal, demographic and technological) effecting business
environment.

Module II: Indian Industrial environment

Industrial policy up to 1991, New industrial policy, Liberalisation, Privatisation and Globalization process in
India, Disinvestment, Industrial sickness, MRTP act 1969, Competition law2002, Foreign Exchange Regulation
Act and Foreign Exchange Management Act (FERA and FEMA).

Module III: Financial Environment

Indian money and capital markets: meaning, functions and constituents, Stock exchange- importance and
functions, SEBI, Capital market reforms and development, Industrial financial institutions (IDBI, SIDBI, ICICI,
IFCI etc.).

Module IV: Labour Environment

Labour legislation in India, Social security benefits, Industrial disputes- causes and preventive measures,
Settlement of disputes, International Labour Organisation (ILO), Trade union- meaning and functions, Trade
Union Act.

Module V: Economic Planning and Development

Planning in India- needs and objectives, five year plans, planning commission, NITI Aayog, Current five year
plan, Green and white revolution- achievements and failures, Second green revolution, foreign trade policy
2015, Export processing zones, Export oriented units, Special economic zones (EPZ’s, EOU’s, SEZ’s) and
trading houses in India.

Module VI: Global Environment

Bretton woods system, features of Uruguay round of negotiations, GATT/ WTO- role, functions and ministerial
conferences, IMF, World Bank (International Bank for Reconstruction and Development), Regional economic
cooperation institutions, SAARC, EU, NAFTA and ASEAN.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

(C - Case Discussion/ Presentation; HA - Home Assignment; Q – Quiz; V - Viva; CT - Class Test; A -

Attendance; EE - End Semester Examination)

Text & References:

Text:
• Francis Cherunillum, International Environment, Himalaya Publications.

References:
• Bedi Suresh, Business Environment, Excel Books, N. Delhi
• Shaikh Saleem, Business Environment, Pearson Education
• Bhatia H.L, International Economics, Vikas Publications
• Mishra S.K, and Puri V.K, Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House
• Sundharam K.P.M, Money, Banking and International trade, S. Chand & Co. New Delhi
• Rudra Dutta and Sundharam, Indian Economy, S. Chand & Co. New Delhi
• Luthans, Comparative International Management, Tata McGraw-Hill.
 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS

Course Code: BBA 103 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The purpose of this course is to apply managerial economics concepts and techniques in evaluating business
decision taken by firms. The emphasis is on explaining how the tools of standard price theory can be employed
to formulate a decision problem, evaluate alternative courses of action and finally choose among alternatives.

Course Contents:
Module I: Managerial Economics and Firm Theory
Introduction: Nature, Scope, Definitions of Managerial Economics, Significance and Evolution of Micro
Economics, Functions of Managerial Economics.
Basic Concepts in Managerial Economics: Resource Allocation; Opportunity Costs; Time Value of Money;
Marginal Analysis, Incrementalism, Firm Theory: Objectives of the firm, Theory of the Growth of the Firm.

Module II: Consumer Behaviour and Demand Analysis

Cardinal Utility Approach: Diminishing Marginal Utility, Law of Equi-Marginal Utility, Ordinal Utility
Approach: Indifference Curves Analysis: Assumptions, Properties of indifference curve, Marginal Rate of
Substitution, Budget Line and Consumer Equilibrium.
Theory of Demand: concept of Law of Demand, Demand Determinants .Movement along vs. Shift in Demand
Curve, law of supply Concept of Measurement of Elasticity of Demand, Factors Affecting Elasticity of Demand,
Income Elasticity of Demand, Cross Elasticity of Demand and supply, Theory of consumer surplus determinants
of supply, Concept of Market equilibrium.

Module III: Theory of Production and Cost

Meaning and Concept of Production, Factors of Production and Production Function, Fixed and Variable
Factors, Law of Variable Proportion (Short Run Production Analysis), Law of Returns to a Scale (Long
Analysis), Concept of Cost, Element of Cost, Cost Function, Short Run Cost, Long Run Cost, Economics and
Diseconomies of Scale, Explicit cost and Implicit Cost, Private and Social Cost.

Module IV: Price and Output Decisions under Different Market Structures
Types of Market Structure, Price and Output Decisions under Perfect Competition, Monopoly and Monopolistic
Competition - Pricing under Oligopoly - Kinked Demand Curve - Price Leadership - Pricing under Collusion,
Trade Cycles.

Module V: Application of Managerial Economics to Business,

Economic and Business forecasting: Uses of Economic Forecasts - Methods of Economic Forecasting -
Selecting a Forecast - Evaluating Forecasts.
Break-Even Analysis: Linear Break-Even Analysis- Graphical Method, Algebraic Method, Changes in Break-
Even Output, Operating leverage, Limitation of Break- Even Analysis.
Cost-Benefit Analysis: Importance, Use, Steps and Criterion of Cost-Benefit Analysis.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70
(C - Case Discussion/ Presentation; HA - Home Assignment; Q – Quiz; V - Viva; CT - Class Test; A -
Attendance; EE - End Semester Examination)

Text & References:

Text:
• Dwivedi, D. N., Managerial Economics, 7th Edition, Vikas Publishing House.
• Ahuja, H.L. Advanced Economic Theory (Micro Economics), S. Chand & Co, New Delhi
References:
• Browning Edgar K. & Jacquel Line M. Browning, Micro Economics and Application, Kalyani Publishers,
New Delhi.
• Gould John P. and Edward P. Lazear Micro Economic Theory, All India Traveller Book-seller, New Delhi.
• Koutsoviannis Modern Micro Economics, Macmillan Press Limited, New Delhi.
• Dewett. K.K. Micro Economics, S. Chand &Co, New Delhi
• Managerial economics - Christopher R Thomas, S Charles Maurice and Sumit Sarkar
• Managerial economics - Geetika, Piyali Ghosh and Purba Roy Choudhury
• Managerial economics- Paul G Keat, Philip K Y Young and Sreejata Banerjee
 COMPUTERS IN MANAGEMENT

Course Code: CSE 101 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective of this subject is to provide conceptual knowledge of the information technology to the future
Managers. This subject highlights the topics like Database Management, Networking, Internet, E-commerce
etc., which can help managers to take routine decisions very efficiently.

Course Contents:
Module I: World of Computers
Introduction to world of Computers, Computers in Home (Reference, Education & Communications,
Entertainment an Digital Media Delivery, Smart Appliances, Home Computers), Computers in Education,
Computers in workplace (productivity and decision making, customer services, communications), Computers on
the move (Portable and Hand held computers, Self-Service kiosks, GPS Applications), Support Systems -
Hardware and Software, Computer Peripherals, Memory Management.

Module II: Computer Networks

Introduction to Computer Networks, Networking components, Classification and types of Networks, Network
Topologies – Overview with Advantages and Disadvantages, Communication Channels, Client Sever
Architecture, LAN concepts.

Module III: Internet Technology & World Wide Web

Introduction to internet intranet and Extranet, Myths about the Internet, Basic concepts of internet, Domain
Name Service, Internet Protocols and Addressing, Services of internet, Internet and support Technologies,
Censorship and Privacy issues.

Module IV: E-commerce

Introduction, E-Commerce Vs E-Business, Advantages & Disadvantages, E-Commerce Business Models, E-
Commerce Technologies, Hosting E-Commerce Site – Planning and constructing web services, E-Commerce
Applications, E-Core Values – Ethical, Legal, Taxation and International issues, E-Commerce Security Issues,
Internet based Payment System.

Module V: Enterprise Resource Planning

Introduction, Scope and Benefit, ERP and related technologies (BPR, MIS, DSS, EIS, SCM, OLAP, etc), ERP
implementation methodology – implementation life cycle, ERP and its success factors, Pitfalls and management
concerns, ERP Market – renowned vendors and the packages.

Module VI: Database Management System

Introduction, Need for DBMS, Components of DBMS, Benefits of DBMS over Tradition File System,
classification and types of Database Models, Database Approach – Its benefits and Disadvantages.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

C - Case Discussion/ Presentation; HA - Home Assignment; Q – Quiz; V - Viva; CT - Class Test; A -

Attendance; EE - End Semester Examination)

Text & References:

Text:
• Deborah Morley - Understanding Computers: Today & Tomorrow, Eleventh Edition, April 11, 2007,
Thomson

References:
• Rajaraman, V. 1998, An Introduction to Computers, Prentice Hall of India.
• Nagpal, 1999, Computer Fundamentals, Wheeler Publishing, New Delhi.
• Bhatnagar, S.C. and Ramani, K.V., Computers and Information Management.
• Hunt and Shelly. 1994, Computers and Commonsense, Prentice Hall of India.
 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

Course Code: BBA 105 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To understand the basics of accounting and concepts of double entry system. The students will be given a
detailed grounding on recording of transactions and preparation of final accounting statements for business
organizations.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction to Accounting

Understanding the meaning, nature, functions and usefulness of accounting, branches of Accounting,
Accounting Equation, Accounting Concepts and Generally Accepted Accounting Principles. Difference between
Indian GAAP and US GAAP, An overview of Indian and US GAAP, Need for convergence towards Global
Standard, IFRS as Global Standard, Benefits of Convergence with IFRS.

Module II: Recording of Transactions and Subsidiary Books

Concept of Double Entry System. Understanding the Accounting cycle, Preparation of Voucher, Journal, Ledger
and Trial Balance and Numerical on the same.
Preparation of subsidiary Books including Purchase Book, Sales Book, Purchase Returns Book and Sales Return
Books (and numerical on the same),

Module III: Preparation of Cash Book & Reconciliation of Bank Statement

Cash book, types of cash book and balancing of cashbook. Numerical on single column cashbook, Double
column cashbook, triple column cashbook and petty cash book.
Causes for difference in the Balance as per Pass book and balance as per cashbook, Procedure for preparation of
bank reconciliation statement when there is favorable balance and in case of overdraft (and numerical on the
same).

Module IV: Financial Statements

Preparation of Trading Account, Manufacturing Account, Profit And Loss Account and balance sheet along
with adjustments (Closing Stock, Outstanding and Prepaid items, Depreciation, Provision for Bad Debts,
Provision for Discount on Debtors, Interest on Capital and Drawings) and non-profit making organizations an
overview.AS-1,AS-21(no numerical)

Module V: Accounting For Partnership

Introduction to Partnership Accounts, Partnership Deed. Admission of a new partner- Revaluation account,
Computation of New Profit Sharing Ratio and Sacrificing Ratio, Proportionate Capital, Treatment of goodwill in
partnership accounts and its valuation. Retirement and Death of a partner: Determining the gaining ratio,
Revaluation of assets and liabilities, Reserve, Final payment to retiring partner, Treatment and adjustment of
goodwill. Numericals on preparation of various accounts in case of retirement and death of a partner.
Dissolution of the firm: Circumstances leading to dissolution of partnership, Settlement of the accounts, Capital
ratio on insolvency, Insolvency of all partners and Garner Vs Murray decision.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)
(C - Case Discussion/ Presentation; HA - Home Assignment; Q – Quiz; V - Viva; CT - Class Test; A -
Attendance; EE - End Semester Examination)

Text & References:

Text:
• Maheshwari, S.N., Advanced Accountancy Volume-I, Ninth Edition, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
References:
• Grewal, T. S., Shukla, M .C, Advanced Accountancy, Sixteenth Edition, Sultan Chand and Sons.
• Tulsian, P.C (2009), Financial Accounting 2 nd Edition, Pearson Education.
• Narayanaswamy, R. Financial Accounting- A Managerial Perspective, Second Edition, Prentice Hall
India.
• Ramachandran, N., Kakani, R.K., Financial Accounting for Management, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Limited.
 ELEMENTARY BUSINESS MATHEMATICS
Course Code: BBM 101 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course is designed to orient the students towards the basic concepts of mathematics and its applications in
the business world.

Course Contents:

Module I: Set Theory & Functions

Theory of Sets: Meaning; Elements; Types of sets, Subsets; Super sets & Power sets;
Operation on sets, Venn diagrams, Cardinal no of a set and Applications of set theory;
Concept of inclusion-exclusion principle with simple example, Finite, Countable or Infinite sets; Cartesian
product of sets. Real number systems, Constant and variable, functions, types of functions, Some useful
functions in Business and Economics limits and continuity of a function of one variable.

Module II: Techniques of counting and Number System

Basic counting principle; Factorial notation; Binomial coefficient; Permutations and Combination; Permutation
with restriction; Circular permutation and Combination with restriction. Series and sequence-A.P. and G.P.

Module III: Simple, Compound Interest and Annuities

Simple Interest, Compound interest (Nominal and effective rate of interest), Concept of present value and
amount of sum, Concept of discount, Types of annuities, present value and amount of an annuity, including the
case of continuous compounding.

Module IV: Matrices & Determinants

Matrices; concepts and types; properties; Addition; Multiplication; Transpose and inverse of matrix; Algebra of
matrices; Adjoint of a matrix; Determinants; Properties of determinants; Solution of simultaneous Linear
Equations; Business applications of matrices; Solution using inverse of the coefficient matrix; Numerical
Problems.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70
Text & References:
Text:
• Singh J K & Singh Y P (2010), Business Mathematics, Second Edition, Brijwasi Book Distributors and
Publishers
References:
• Gupta S P, Statistical Methods, S. Chand & Co.
• Raghavachari, M, Mathematics for Management, Tata Mc. GrawHill
• Piskunov N, Differential & Integral Calculus, Moscow MIR Publishers
• Sancheti & Kapoor, Business Mathematics, Sultan Chand & Sons
• J. K. Sharma Business mathematics- Theory and Applications, Ane Books India.
 POLITY AND SOCIETY

Course Code: BBA 107 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
This paper focuses on understanding the basic concepts, theories and functioning of state and government.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
What is Polity - definition and scope,
Concept of state and its elements, Constitution – features and classification, organs of government- concepts and
function of (Legislature, executive and judiciary- judicial review and independence of judiciary) Separation of
power.

Module II: Forms of Government

Unitary and federal form of Government – features and merits and demerits, Parliamentary and Presidential
form of Government One party democracy and military rule

Module III: Public administration

Meaning scope and significance of public administration, concept of accountability and control: legislature,
executive and judicial control over administration, public policy formulation and problems of implementation.

Module IV: Introduction to society

Society – definition, aims and scope, Social structure in India - (Unity and diversity, Rural urban continuum and
Caste (and Varna), class and tribes)

Module V: Social Institutions

Basic concepts- society, community, social groups, association, institution, social stratification, status and role
and .Institutions – family, marriage, kinship, religion, education.

Module VI: NGO

Introduction to NGO, (Issues and programmes), place of NGOs in social structure of India, NGOs and judicial
activism.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• MacIver & Page ‘Society: An Introductory Analysis’; McMillon India Ltd.; N. Delhi.
• M. Haralambos ‘Sociology: Themes and perspectives’; Oxford University Press; N. Delhi.
• Eddy Asirvatham & K.K. Misra ‘Political Theory’; S. Chand & Company Ltd., Delhi.
• A.C. Kapur ‘Principles of Political Science’; S. Chand & Company Ltd., Delhi.

References:
• Myneni ‘Political Science for Law Students’; Allahabad Law Agency.
• R.L. Gupta ‘Political Theory’.
• Vishoo Bhagwan ‘Indian Political thinker’.
• Amal Ray & Bhattacharya ‘Political Theory: Ideas and Institution.
• T.B. Bottomore ‘Sociology: A Guide to problems and Literature’; Blackie & Son (India) Ltd.
• David G. Mandelbaum ‘Society in India’; Popular Prakashan, Mumbai.
• Kingsley Davis ‘Human Society’; Surjeet Publications, Delhi.
 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-I
Course Code: EVS 142 Credit Units: 02

Course Contents:

Module I: The multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies

Definition, scope and importance
Need for public awareness

Module II: Natural Resources

Renewable and non-renewable resources:
Natural resources and associated problems
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction,
mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people.
Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought,
conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems.
Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using
mineral resources, case studies.
Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing,
effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case
studies.
Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non-renewable energy sources, use
of alternate energy sources, case studies.
Land resources: Land as a resource, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion
and desertification.
Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources.
Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles.

Module III: Ecosystems

Concept of an ecosystem, Structure and function of an ecosystem, Producers, consumers and
decomposers, Energy flow in the ecosystem, Ecological succession
Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids
Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the following ecosystem:
a. Forest ecosystem
b. Grassland ecosystem
c. Desert ecosystem
d. Aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, ocean estuaries)

Module IV: Biodiversity and its conservation

Introduction – Definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity
Biogeographical classification of India
Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical aesthetic and option
values Biodiversity at global, national and local levels
India as a mega-diversity nation, Hot-spots of biodiversity
Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man wildlife conflicts, Endangered
and endemic species of India
Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ conservation of biodiversity

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)
Text & References:

• Agarwal, K.C. 2001 Environmental Biology, Nidi Publ. Ltd. Bikaner.

• Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad 380 013,
India, Email:[email protected] (R)
• Brunner R.C., 1989, Hazardous Waste Incineration, McGraw Hill Inc. 480p Clark R.S., Marine
Pollution, Clanderson Press Oxford (TB)
• Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, E & Hepworth, M.T. 2001, Environmental
Encyclopedia, Jaico Publ. House, Mumabai, 1196p
• De A.K., Environmental Chemistry, Wiley Eastern Ltd. Down to Earth, Centre for Science and
Environment (R)
• Gleick, H.P. 1993. Water in Crisis, Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev., Environment & Security.
Stockholm Env. Institute Oxford Univ. Press. 473p
• Hawkins R.E., Encyclopedia of Indian Natural History, Bombay Natural History Society, Bombay
(R) Heywood, V.H & Waston, R.T. 1995. Global Biodiversity Assessment. Cambridge Univ.
Press 1140p.
• Jadhav, H & Bhosale, V.M. 1995. Environmental Protection and Laws. Himalaya Pub. House,
Delhi 284 p. Mckinney, M.L. & School, R.M. 1996. Environmental Science Systems & Solutions,
Web enhanced edition. 639p.
• Mhaskar A.K., Matter Hazardous, Techno-Science Publication (TB) Miller T.G. Jr. Environmental
Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co. (TB)
• Odum, E.P. 1971. Fundamentals of Ecology. W.B. Saunders Co. USA, 574p
• Rao M N. & Datta, A.K. 1987. Waste Water treatment. Oxford & IBH Publ. Co. Pvt. Ltd. 345p.
Sharma B.K., 2001. Environmental Chemistry. Geol Publ. House, Meerut
• Survey of the Environment, The Hindu (M)
• Townsend C., Harper J, and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science
• Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules Guidelines, Compliances and Standards,
Vol I and II, Enviro Media (R)
• Tri
vedi R. K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to air pollution, Techno-Science Publication (TB) Wanger
K.D., 1998 Environnemental Management. W.B. Saunders Co. Philadelphia, USA 499
 Annexure’ CD-01’

UG- 01 L T P/ SW/F TOTAL

Course Title:Communication Skills-I S W CREDIT
Credit Units: 1 UNITS
Course Code: BCU141 1 0 0 0 1

Course Objective The course is intended to familiarize students with the basics of English
language and help them to learn to identify language structures for correct English usage.

Prerequisites: NIL
Course Contents / Syllabus:
1. Module I Essentials of English Grammar 30% Weightage
• Common Errors
• Parts of Speech
• Collocations, Relative Pronoun
• Subject-Verb Agreement
• Articles
• Punctuation
• Sentence Structure- ‘Wh’ Questions
2. Module II Written English Communication 30% Weightage

• Paragraph Writing
• Essay Writing
3. Module III Spoken English Communication 30% Weightage

• Introduction to Phonetics
• Syllable-Consonant and Vowel Sounds
• Stress and Intonation
4. Module IV : Prose 10% Weightage
“Friends, Romans, Countrymen, lend me your ears” Speech by Marc
Antony in Julius Caesar

❖ Comprehension Questions will be set in the End-Semester

Exam

Student Learning Outcomes:

The students should be able to :
5. • Identify Common Errors and Rectify Them
• Develop and Expand Writing Skills Through Controlled and
Guided Activities
• To Develop Coherence, Cohesion and Competence in Oral
Discourse through Intelligible Pronunciation.
6. Pedagogy for Course Delivery:
• Workshop
• Group Discussions
• Presentations
• Lectures
• Extempore
Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
Theory L/T Lab/Practical/Studio End Term
(%) (%) Examination

100% NA 70%
Theory Assessment (L&T):
Components End Term
(Drop down) CIE Mid Attendance Examination
Sem

Weightage 10% 15% 5% 70%

(%)
Text: Rosenblum, M. How to Build Better Vocabulary, London: Bloomsbury Publication
Verma, Shalini. Word Power made Handy, S. Chand Publications
High School English Grammar & Composition by Wren & Martin
References: K.K.Sinha , Business Communication, Galgotia Publishing Company.

Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals

 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - I

Course Code: BSU 143 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
This course aims at imparting:
• Understanding self & process of self exploration
• Learning strategies for development of a healthy self esteem
• Importance of attitudes and its effective on personality
• Building Emotional Competence

Course Contents:

Module I: Self: Core Competency (2 Hours)

• Understanding of Self
• Components of Self – Self identity
• Self concept
• confidence Self
• Self image

Module II: Techniques of Self Awareness (2 Hours)

• Exploration through Johari Window
• Mapping the key characteristics of self
• Framing a charter for self
• Stages – self awareness, self acceptance and self realization

Module III: Self Esteem & Effectiveness (2 Hours)

• Meaning and Importance
• Components of self esteem
• High and low self esteem
• Measuring your self esteem

Module IV: Building Positive Attitude (2 Hours)

• Meaning and nature of attitude
• Components and Types of attitude
• Importance and relevance of attitude

Module V: Building Emotional Competence (2 Hours)

• Emotional Intelligence – Meaning, components, Importance and Relevance
• Positive and Negative emotions
• Healthy and Unhealthy expression of emotions

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal (2 Hours)

▪ Viva based on personal journal
▪ Assessment of Behavioral change as a result of training
▪ Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Suggested Readings:

• Organizational Behaviour, Davis, K.

• Hoover, Judhith D. Effective Small Group and Team Communication, 2002,Harcourt College Publishers
• Dick, Mc Cann & Margerison, Charles: Team Management, 1992 Edition, viva books
• Bates, A. P. and Julian, J.: Sociology - Understanding Social Behaviour
• Dressler, David and Cans, Donald: The Study of Human Interaction
• Lapiere, Richard. T – Social Change
• Lindzey, G. and Borgatta, E: Sociometric Measurement in the Handbook of Social Psychology, Addison –
Welsley, US.
• Rose, G.: Oxford Textbook of Public Health, Vol.4, 1985.
• LaFasto and Larson: When Teams Work Best, 2001, Response Books (Sage), New Delhi
• J William Pfeiffer (ed.) Theories and Models in Applied Behavioural Science, Vol 2, Group (1996); Pfeiffer
& Company
• Smither Robert D.; The Psychology of Work and Human Performance, 1994, Harper Collins College
Publishers
 FRENCH
Course Code: FLU 144 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To familiarize the students with the French language
• with the phonetic system
• with the syntax
• with the manners
• with the cultural aspects

Course Contents:
Module A: pp. 01 to 37: Unités 1, 2, Unité 3 Object if 1, 2
Only grammar of Unité 3: object if 3, 4 and 5

Contenu lexical: Unité 1: Découvrir la langue française: (oral et écrit)

1. se présenter, présenter quelqu’un, faire la connaissance des
autres, formules de politesse, rencontres
2. dire/interroger si on comprend
3. Nommer les choses
Unité 2: Faire connaissance
1. donner/demander des informations sur une personne, premiers
contacts, exprimer ses goûts et ses préférences
2. Parler de soi: parler du travail, de ses activités, de son pays, de sa ville.

Unité 3: Organiser son temps

1. dire la date et l’heure

Contenu grammatical: 1. organisation générale de la grammaire

2. article indéfini, défini, contracté
3. nom, adjectif, masculin, féminin, singulier et pluriel
4. négation avec « de », "moi aussi", "moi non plus"
5. interrogation: Inversion, est-ce que, qui, que, quoi, qu’est-ce
que, où, quand, comment, quel(s), quelle(s)
Interro-négatif: réponses: oui, si, non
6. pronom tonique/disjoint- pour insister après une préposition
7. futur proche

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre: Campus: Tome 1

 MACRO ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS

Course Code: BBA 201 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This course deals with principles of macroeconomics. The coverage includes determination of and
linkages between major macro economic variables, the level of output and prices, inflation,
unemployment, GDP growth, interest rates and exchange rates.

Course Contents:

Module – I Introduction to Macroeconomics

The nature of macroeconomics, Mirco V/s Marco, Major Macroeconomic Issues, Macroeconomic Policy
Objectives, Macroeconomic stability and business environment, Brief introduction to major schools of thought
in Macroeconomics.

Module II- Some Important Macroeconomic Aggregates

Concept of National Income and Its Measurement, Circular flow of income in two, three, four sector economy,
relation between leakages and injections in circular flow. Estimates and Analysis(GNP, NNP,GDP,HDI),
Methods of measurement of National Income.

Module III- Rent Theory

Theory of Rent, Theory of Interest, Theories of Profit

Module IV: Theory of Full Employment and Income

Classical, Modern (Keynesian) Approach, Consumption Function, Relationship between Saving and
Consumption. Investment Function, Concept of Marginal Efficiency of Capital and Marginal Efficiency of
Investment. National Income DETERMINATION in two, three and four Sector Models. Multiplier in two, three
and four Sectors Model.

Module- V: Money Market

Definition and Function of Money, Demand Theory of Money- Fisher’s, Keynes and Friedman’s , IS-LM
Model, Source of Money Supply Inflation and Deflation, Measures to Control Inflation- Monetary Policy,
Fiscal policy

Module VI: International Linkages

Balance of Payments and Exchange Rates, Trade in Goods, Market Equilibrium and the Balance of Trade,
Capital Mobility, Exchange Rate changes and Trade adjustment; Monetary approach to Balance of Payment;
Flexible Exchange Rate, Money and Price; Interest Differentials and Exchange Rate Expectations, Exchange
Rate Fluctuation and Interdependence.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70
(C - Case Discussion/ Presentation; HA - Home Assignment; Q – Quiz; V - Viva; CT - Class Test; A -
Attendance; EE - End Semester Examination)

Text & References:

Text:
• Ahuja H.L. Macro Economics, S. Chand & Co, New Delhi

References:
• Dewett, K. K, Modern Economic Theory: S. Chand &Co, New Delhi
• Shapiro Edward, Macro Economic Analysi, Tata Mc. Graw Hill.
• Seth M.L. Macro Economics, Agarwal Publications, Agra.
• R. Dornbusch & S. Fisher, Macroeconomics, Tata Mc. Graw Hill.
• Mankiw, Principles of Macro Economics, Thomson Publication.
• Sundharam. K.P.M, Money, Banking and International Trade, S. Chand & Co, New Delhi.
 CORPORATE ACCOUNTING
Course Code: BBA 202 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This course enables the students to develop awareness about Corporate Accounting in conformity
with the Provision of Companies’ Act and latest amendments thereto with adoption of Accounting
Standards that are likely to be introduced from time to time.

Course Contents:

Module I- Introduction
Statutory records to be maintained by a company, Accounting standards - relevance and significance;
National and international accounting standards.

Module II- Accounting for share capital transactions

Accounting for share capital transactions - issue of shares at par, at premium and at discount;
forfeiture and re-issue of shares; buy-back of shares; redemption of preference shares - Statutory
requirements, Disclosure in balance sheet; Rights issue, Underwriting.

Module III- Debentures

Issue of debentures - accounting treatment and procedures; Redemption of debentures; Conversion of
debentures into shares.

Module IV- final accounts

Preparation and presentation of final accounts of joint stock companies as per company law
requirements; Provisions and reserves; Determination of managerial remuneration; Appropriation out
of profits; Transfer of profits to reserves; Payment of dividend, Transfer of unpaid dividend to
Investor Education and Protection Fund; Bonus shares and payment of interest out of capital.

Module V- Holding and subsidiary companies

Holding and subsidiary companies - Accounting treatment and disclosures; Consolidation of accounts.

Module VI - Valuation of goodwill and shares

Good will – Meaning, Definition, Elements, Types and Methods of Valuation of Goodwill, Methods
of share valuation (Equity & preference shares).

Module VII- Amalgamation, Absorption and reconstruction of companies

Accounting treatment for amalgamation, Absorption and reconstruction of companies; Internal and
external reconstruction, Liquidation- Preparation of liquidators statement & affairs, Deficiency/
surplus statement, Calculation of pro rata treatment of uncalled capital.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

C - Case Discussion/ Presentation; HA - Home Assignment; P - Project; S - Seminar; V - Viva; Q

- Quiz; CT - Class Test; A - Attendance; EE - End Semester Examination

Text & References:

• Maheswari, S.N. (2009), Principles of Management Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons, N Delhi.
• Tulsian, P C, (2009), Financial Accounting, 2 nd Edition, Pearson Education.
• Rajasekran, (2010), Financial Accounting, 1 st Edition, Pearson Education.
• Narayanaswamy, Financial Accounting
• SP Iyengar, Advanced Accountancy
• RL Gupta, Advanced Accountancy
• Jain and Narang, Corporate Accounting
 ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

Course Code: BBA 203 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the behavioral patterns of Human
beings at individual and group levels

Course Contents:

Module I: Understanding Human Behaviour

The concept, Nature and Significance of Human Behaviour, Factors Effecting Human Behaviour,
Levels of Human Behaviour; Disciplines contributing to OB. Models of OB.PP

Module II: Individual Behaviour

Individual Differences, Concept of Personality, Determinants of Personality and Types of
Personality, Theories of Personality, Perception & Perceptual Process, Learning and Behavior
reinforcement, values.

Module III: Motivation & Attitude

Concept, Type and Significance and Theories of Motivation: Maslow’s theory of hierarchical needs,
Hertzberg’s two factor theory, McClelland’s theory of needs, McGregor’s theory X and theory Y,
Vroom’s theory of expectancy, Attitudes, (Meaning and nature), Formation and change attitudes, Job
related attitudes.

Module IV: Interpersonal Behaviour, Power & Politics

Interpersonal Dimensions of Behaviour, Transactional Analysis, Implications of TA, Organizational
communication, making communication effective, Power (Concept, determinants & sources, types),
Organizational Politics, Tactics & Impression Management.

Module V: Group Behaviour and Leadership

Group Development process, Group Behaviour, Determinants of Group Behavior, Difference between
Groups & Teams Inter Group Problems, Leadership, Nature and Significance of Leadership,
Leadership Styles, Theories of Leadership, Trait Theory, Behavioral Theory (Managerial Grid).

Module VI: Change and Conflicts

Organizational conflict, Nature and types of conflict, Approaches to conflict management,
Organizational culture, Learning and maintaining organizational culture, Organizational change,
Planned change, Resistance to change, Organization development (Definition), Need for organization
development, Organization development process.

Assignment : Group Discussion & Analysis - Emerging Business Realities

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

(C - Case Discussion/ Presentation; HA - Home Assignment; P - Project; S - Seminar; V - Viva; Q

- Quiz; CT - Class Test; A - Attendance; EE - End Semester Examination)

Text & References:

Text:
• Stephen Robins, Organisational Behaviour PHI

References:
• K. Ashwathappa, Organisational Behaviour, Tata McGr
• Keith Davis, Organisational Behaviour, Tata Mc Graw-Hill
• Keith Davis, Human Behaviour at Work, Tata McGraw-Hill

Computer Application in Business Management

Course Code: CSE 201 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To provide computer skills and knowledge for commerce students, and to make them complacent with the use
of new tools of IT.
Course Contents:
Module I:
Computer applications – data processing, information processing, commercial, office automation, industry and
engineering, healthcare, education, graphics and multimedia, Von-Neumann architecture, Computer system
organization, Computer memory- primary memory and secondary memory. Secondary storage devices –
magnetic and optical media, Operating system and function, Evolution of operating system, Operating System
structure, Operating System Services.

Module II:
Data Representation: Number systems, Positional and Non-Positional Number system, Character representation
codes, Binary, octal, hexadecimal and their interconversions. Binary arithmetic,Algorithm and flowcharts,
Process Modeling – DFD, Logic Modeling – Structured English & Decision Tables.

Module III:
System & its parts, Types of Systems, Characteristics of a System, System Analyst and its responsibilities,
Types of system Analysis, Database Design, Database Management System – an introduction, Overview of Data
Models (Relational Database Model, E-R data model, Network Data model, Hierarchical Data model) Keys,
Schema & Subschema, Structure, Facilities & Users, Constraints, Anomalies, Functional Dependency,
Normalization (1NF and 2NF), Database Administrator and its functions.

Module IV:
SDLC & System Development Models (Waterfall model, Prototype model, Evolutionary model & Spiral
Model), System Planning & Selection (Identifying, Selecting, Initiating & Planning System Development
Project), Comparison between System Development models.

Module V:
Management Information System (MIS) - Concept, need and characteristics of MIS - data, information and data
life cycle, System Security: Data Security, Backup & Recovery during System & Database failure, Ethical
Issues in System Development, Threat and Risk Analysis, Audit, System Audit.

Module VI:
Introduction to computer networks, types of Network, Topology, reference models, Theoretical basis for data
communication, transmission media, error detection and correction, Basic concepts of hubs, switches, gateways,
and routers.
.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• Essentials of System Analysis & Design, Second Edition, Valacich George Hoffer, Prentice-Hall India
References:
• Analysis and Design of information systems, James A. Senn
• Computer Based Information Systems, Kroeber, Donald W. and Watron, Hugh J.
• Systems Analysis & Design, E. M. Awad.
• Systems Analysis and Design – An Applied Approach, Dennis Wixom, Wiley
 SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT

Course Code: BBA 205 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The major objective of this course is to acquaint the students with the theory and practice of Management of
Sales Operations.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Sales management- Concept, Objectives and functions. Evolution of sales management. Nature and role of
Sales Manager’s job. Sales management as a career. Emerging trends in sales management .

Module II: Sales Organization

Purpose of sales organization. Setting sales organization. Types of sales organization. Coordination of selling
functions with other marketing activities. Sales forecasting.

Module III: Controlling sales effort

Sales Budget: Purpose and budgetary procedure. Quotas: Concept, Objectives and Types. Sales Territory:
Concept and procedure of devising sales territories, Routing and Scheduling of Sales force. Sales Audit.

Module IV: Managing Sales Force

Concept of sales force management. Recruitment and Selection of sales personnel (domestic and international
perspective. Sales training. Compensating and motivating sales personnel. Controlling and evaluating sales
personnel

Module V Personal Selling

Introduction to Personal Selling: Qualities of effective sales person, Personal selling situations, Personal selling
process: Pre approach, Opening a sale, Sales Presentation and Demonstration, Handling objections and Closing
a sale, Post sales follow up.

Module VI: Distribution and Logistics Management

Distribution channels: Concept and need, Channel Conflict: Concept and stages. Conflict management.
Objectives of logistics. Concept of logistics planning: inventory management decisions, transportation
decisions, location decisions.

Project Based Learning

Sales Simulations: Small role plays throughout the semester. For this simulation, students would be given a
product to sell with a several days to research the product, industry and clients.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Still Cundiff, Sales Management Decision Strategies, Fifth Edition, Printice Hall.
• Panda Tapan K., Sahadev Sunil, Sales and Distribution Management, 2005, Oxford University
Press.
References:
• Kapoor Ramneek, Fundamentals of Sales Management, 2005, McMillan.
• Sudha GS, Sales & Advertising Management, 2005, Indus Valley Publications.
• Walker, Churchill Ford, Management of Sales Force
 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II

Course Code: EVS 242 Credit Units: 02

Course Contents:

Module I: Environmental Pollution

Definition, causes, effects and control measures of:
a. Air pollution
b. Water pollution
c. Soil pollution
d. Marine pollution
e. Noise pollution
f. Thermal pollution
g. Nuclear pollution
Solid waste management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and industrial
wastes. Role of an individual in prevention of pollution. Pollution case studies. Disaster
management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides.

Module II: Social Issues and the Environment

From unsustainable to sustainable development, Urban problems and related to energy,
Water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management
Resettlement and rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns. Case studies.
Environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions
Climate change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and
holocaust. Case studies. Wasteland reclamation, Consumerism and waste products,
Environmental Protection Act
Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, Water (Prevention and control of Pollution)
Act, Wildlife Protection Act, Forest Conservation Act
Issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation Public awareness

Module III: Human Population and the Environment

Population growth, variation among nations
Population explosion – Family Welfare Programmes
Environment and human health
Human Rights
Value Education
HIV / AIDS
Women and Child Welfare
Role of Information Technology in Environment and Human Health
Case Studies

Module IV: Field Work

Visit to a local area to document environmental assets-river / forest/ grassland/ hill/
mountain. Visit to a local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial / Agricultural. Study of
common plants, insects, birds. Study of simple ecosystems-pond, river, hill slopes, etc (Field
work equal to 5 lecture hours)

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA S/V/Q A EE
Weightage (%) 15 5 5 5 70
Text & References:

• Agarwal, K.C. 2001 Environmental Biology, Nidi Publ. Ltd. Bikaner.

• Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad 380 013,
India, Email:[email protected] (R)
• Brunner R.C., 1989, Hazardous Waste Incineration, McGraw Hill Inc. 480p Clark R.S., Marine
Pollution, Clanderson Press Oxford (TB)
• Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, E & Hepworth, M.T. 2001, Environmental
Encyclopedia, Jaico Publ. House, Mumabai, 1196p
• De A.K., Environmental Chemistry, Wiley Eastern Ltd. Down to Earth, Centre for Science and
Environment (R)
• Gleick, H.P. 1993. Water in Crisis, Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev., Environment & Security.
Stockholm Env. Institute Oxford Univ. Press. 473p
• Hawkins R.E., Encyclopedia of Indian Natural History, Bombay Natural History Society, Bombay
(R) Heywood, V.H & Waston, R.T. 1995. Global Biodiversity Assessment. Cambridge Univ.
Press 1140p.
• Jadhav, H & Bhosale, V.M. 1995. Environmental Protection and Laws. Himalaya Pub. House,
Delhi 284 p. Mckinney, M.L. & School, R.M. 1996. Environmental Science Systems & Solutions,
Web enhanced edition. 639p.
• Mhaskar A.K., Matter Hazardous, Techno-Science Publication (TB) Miller T.G. Jr. Environmental
Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co. (TB)
• Odum, E.P. 1971. Fundamentals of Ecology. W.B. Saunders Co. USA, 574p
• Rao M N. & Datta, A.K. 1987. Waste Water treatment. Oxford & IBH Publ. Co. Pvt. Ltd. 345p.
Sharma B.K., 2001. Environmental Chemistry. Geol Publ. House, Meerut
• Survey of the Environment, The Hindu (M)
• Townsend C., Harper J, and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science
• Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules Guidelines, Compliances and Standards,
Vol I and II, Enviro Media (R)
• Tri
vedi R. K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to air pollution, Techno-Science Publication (TB) Wanger
K.D., 1998 Environnemental Management. W.B. Saunders Co. Philadelphia, USA 499p
 Annexure’ CD-01’
UG: Semester II
Course Title: Communication Skills-II L T P/ SW/F TOTAL
Course Code: BCU 241 S W CREDIT
Credit Units: 1 UNITS
1 0 0 0 1
Course Objectives:

To understand the different aspects of communication using the four macro skills –
LSRW (Listening, Speaking, Reading, Writing)
Prerequisites: NIL
Course Contents / Syllabus:
1. Module I Communication 35%
Weightage
• Process and Importance
• Models of Communication (Linear & Shannon Weaver)
• Role and Purpose
• Types & Channels
• Communication Networks
• Principles & Barriers
2. Module II Verbal Communication 25%
Weightage
Oral Communication: Forms, Advantages & Disadvantages
Written Communication: Forms, Advantages & Disadvantages
Introduction of Communication Skills (Listening, Speaking, Reading,
Writing)
3. Module III Non-Verbal Communication 30%
Weightage
• Principles & Significance of Nonverbal Communication
• KOPPACT (Kinesics, Oculesics, Proxemics, Para-Language,
Artifacts, Chronemics, Tactilics)
• Visible Code
4. Module IV : Prose 10%
Weightage

TEXT: APJ Abdul Kalam and Arun Tiwari. Wings of Fire: An Autobiography,
Universities Press, 2011

Comprehension Questions will be set in the End-Semester Exam

5. Student Learning Outcomes:

The students should be able to :

• Apply Verbal and Non-Verbal Communication Techniques in the Professional
Environment
6. Pedagogy for Course Delivery:

• Extempore
• Presentations
• Lectures
7. Assessment/ Examination Scheme:

Theory L/T (%) Lab/Practical/Studio (%) End Term Examination

100% NA 50%
Theory Assessment (L&T):
Components End Term
(Drop down) CIE Mid Sem Attendance Examination

Weightage (%) 10% 15% 5% 70%

Text: Rosenblum, M. How to Build Better Vocabulary, London: Bloomsbury Publication.

Verma, Shalini. Word Power made Handy, S. Chand Publications.
High School English Grammar & Composition by Wren & Martin
Reference: K.K.Sinha , Business Communication, Galgotia Publishing Company.
Alan Pease : Body Language

Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals

 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - II
Course Code: BSU 243 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
This course aims at enabling students towards:
• Understand the importance of individual differences
• Better understanding of self in relation to society and nation
• Facilitation for a meaningful existence and adjustment in society
• Inculcating patriotism and national pride

Course Contents:

Module I: Individual differences & Personality (2 Hours)

• Personality: Definition& Relevance
• Importance of nature & nurture in Personality Development
• Importance and Recognition of Individual differences in Personality
• Accepting and Managing Individual differences
• Intuition, Judgment, Perception & Sensation (MBTI)
• BIG5 Factors

Module II: Managing Diversity (2 Hours)

• Defining Diversity
• Affirmation Action and Managing Diversity
• Increasing Diversity in Work Force
• Barriers and Challenges in Managing Diversity

Module III: Socialization (2 Hours)

• Nature of Socialization
• Social Interaction
• Interaction of Socialization Process
• Contributions to Society and Nation

Module IV: Patriotism and National Pride (2 Hours)

• Sense of pride and patriotism
• Importance of discipline and hard work
• Integrity and accountability

Module V: Human Rights, Values and Ethics (2 Hours)

• Meaning and Importance of human rights
• Human rights awareness
• Values and Ethics- Learning based on project work on Scriptures like- Ramayana, Mahabharata, Gita etc.

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal (2 Hours)

▪ Viva - Voce based on personal journal
▪ Assessment of Behavioral change as a result of training
▪ Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Examination Scheme:
Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for
Test (CT) Success (JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25
 FRENCH
Course Code: FLU 244 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to overcome the fear of speaking a foreign language and take position as a foreigner
speaking French.
To make them learn the basic rules of French Grammar.

Course Contents:
Module A: pp.38 – 47: Unité 3: Object if 3, 4, 5. 6

Module B: pp. 47 to 75 Unité 4, 5

Contenu lexical: Unité 3: Organiser son temps

1. donner/demander des informations sur un emploi du temps, un horaire SNCF –
Imaginer un dialogue
2. rédiger un message/ une lettre pour …
i) prendre un rendez-vous/ accepter et confirmer/ annuler
ii) inviter/accepter/refuser
3. Faire un programme d’activités
4. imaginer une conversation téléphonique/un dialogue
5. Propositions- interroger, répondre
Unité 4: Découvrir son environnement
1. situer un lieu
2. s’orienter, s’informer sur un itinéraire.
3. Chercher, décrire un logement
4. connaître les rythmes de la vie
Unité 5: s’informer
1. demander/donner des informations sur un emploi du temps passé.
2. donner une explication, exprimer le doute ou la certitude.
3. découvrir les relations entre les mots
4. savoir s’informer

Contenu grammatical: 1. Adjectifs démonstratifs

2. Adjectifs possessifs/exprimer la possession à l’aide de:
i. « de » ii. A+nom/pronom disjoint
3. Conjugaison pronominale – négative, interrogative -
construction à l'infinitif
4. Impératif/exprimer l’obligation/l’interdiction à l’aide de « il
faut…. »/ «il ne faut pas… »
5. passé composé
6. Questions directes/indirectes

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre: Campus: Tome 1

 BUSINESS STATISTICS
Course Code: BBM 301 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
To provide basic understanding of quantitative tools and their elementary application to business problems.

Course Contents:
Module I: Basics of Statistics & Measures of Central Tendency
Definitions, Functions of Statistics, Statistics and Computers, Limitation of Statistics, Graphic Representation of
Data, Measure of central tendency- Mean, Median and Mode for Grouped and ungrouped data. Combined-
Mean.

Module II: Measures of Dispersion

Measures of dispersion; Range, Mean Deviation, Standard deviation, coefficient of variation, Quartile.
Deviation, skew ness and kurtosis, Difference between these measures and their interpretation

Module III: Correlation and Regression

Correlation: simple, coefficient of correlation-Karl Pearson and Rank correlation partial and Multiple
correlation Analysis, Regression analysis Estimation of regression line in a bivariate distribution - Least squares
method, interpretation of regression coefficients.

Examination Scheme:
Components Mid term HA//C/V EE
Weightage (%) 15 5 70

Text & References:

• Allen, R.G.D, Mathematical Analysis for Economics, Macmillan Press, London.
• Black, J. and J.F. Bradley, Essential Mathematics for Economics, John Wiley and Sons.
• Chiang, A.C, Fundamental Method of Mathematical Economics, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
• Croxton, F.E., D.J. Cowden and S. Klein, Applied General Statistics, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.
• Gupta, S.C. and V.K. Kapoor, Fundamentals of Applied Statistics, S.Chand and Sons, New Delhi.
• Speigal, M.R, Theory and Problems of Statistics, McGraw-Hill Book, London.
 BASICS OF FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code: BBA 302 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To take decisions which are effective, a manager in any of the functional areas be it Marketing, HR or IT
requires a thorough cost and benefit analysis and a feel for Finance so as to look at the long term implications of
his/her decision. This course is a "nut and bolts" course on Finance where the basic Financial decisions will be
explained through problems and exercises, thus giving the student an understanding and a feel for Financial
decision making.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction to Financial Management

Evolution of Financial Management, Key activities of Finance Manager Changing Role of Finance Managers,
Key Decision Areas in Financial Management, Objectives of the firm.
Module II: Financial Statement Analysis
Introduction, objectives of financial statement analysis, Techniques-Ratio analysis, Comparative analysis and
limitations of financial statement analysis, AS-20 (no numerical)
Module III: Valuation Concepts
Concept of Time value of Money, Process of Compounding and Discounting, Future Value of a Single amount,
Future Value of an Annuity, Present Value of a Single Amount, Present Value of an Annuity, Future value of
annuity due, Present value of annuity due, Concept of perpetuity, Concept and calculation of Effective Interest
rate (EIR)
Module IV: Financing Decision
Asset-Based Financing – Introduction; Lease Financing; Hire Purchase Financing; Infrastructure Project
Financing, Corporate Credit Policy: Nature and Goals; Collection Procedures; Nature of Inventory
Module V: Investment Decision
Basics of Capital Budgeting, Types of capital budgeting decisions, Estimating cash flows for project appraisal,
Green capital budgeting, Non-discounted Cash Flow Techniques: Payback Period, ARR, Discounted Cash Flow
Techniques: NPV, IRR, PI. Risk Analysis of Capital Budgeting: Risk adjusted discount rate, Certainty
Equivalent Approach.
Module VI: Working Capital Management
Meaning and importance of adequate working capital, Excess or inadequate working capital, Determinants of
working capital requirement, Cash management, Receivable management and Inventory management – Sources
of working capital.

Module VII: Risk Analysis in Financial Management

Measures of risk in financial analysis- Define and measure risk for individual assets, calculation of standard
deviation and variance of returns, Computation of historical average return of securities and market premium,
difference between relevant and irrelevant risks.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE

Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)
Text & References:

Text:

• Pandey, I. M, (2010), Financial Management. 10 th Edition, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.

References:
• Van Horne, J.C (2008), Financial Management & Policy, 13th Edition, Prentice Hall

• Chandra, P., Fundamentals of Financial Management, Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill.

Brearly R.A. and Myers, S.C. Principles of Corporate Finance, 8 th Edition, Tata Mc-Graw Hill
 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS

Course Code: CSE 301 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
This course focuses on the relationships among management, information, and systems as well as the
relationship between a manager's need for information and his/her position in the organization, how hardware,
software, data, people, and procedures are combined to form an information system, how information
technology can be used by a business organization to gain a competitive advantage why a knowledge of
information systems is crucial to anyone who plans a career in business Organization.

Course Contents:
Module I: Organizations, Management and Information
Meaning of MIS, Components of MIS, IS in Business, Data Information and knowledge, Characteristics of
Information in context, Issues with Information, System and Subsystems, Organization as a System, Different
Organizational Structures: Hierarchical Structure – (Different Levels of Management, Information disposition at
different levels), Matrix Structure, Business Process (Management, Operational and Support).

Module II: Information Technology Architecture

Managing Hardware Assets – Considerations in Procurement and installation, Managing Software Assets –
Consideration in procurement and configuration, Data Resource Management (Database Management System –
Types and Structure of Database, Data Warehousing – Phases in building Data Warehouses in an organization,
Data Mining – Data Mining Applications, Data Banking)

Module III: Management and Organizational Support Systems for the Firm
Information, Decision and Management, Decision Support System (Phases in Decision Making, Problems and
Decision Types, DSS components, and Analytical Models in Decision Making), Executive Information System
– Characteristics and benefits, Managing Knowledge (Knowledge Engineering, Knowledge Management
Activities and Knowledge Representation Methodologies), Artificial Intelligence (Domains of AI, AI in
Business), Expert System (Components, Benefits and Limitations, Suitability Criteria for ES)

Module IV: Building Information Systems in the Digital Firm

Organizational Planning – Planning at distinct Managerial Levels, Approaches in Planning (Top Down, Bottom
Up, Planning through CSF), IT and IS Planning – Prerequisites and factors, IT and IS Architecture (Centralized,
Decentralized and Distributed), Implementing IT and IS (Factors and Resistance in implementation), Change
Management with BPR, System Development (System Development Life Cycle-Overview, Prototyping),
Evaluating Factors for IT and IS services.

Module V: Managing Information Systems in the Digital Firm

Managing Security (Security Challenges of IT, Business and Technological Ethics), Computer Crime (Tools for
Computer Crime, Tools for Security Management), IS Security Management Control (Information System
Control, Auditing the Security), Managing World Wide Information System (Managing Multi Site IT and IS –
Cultural and Technical Differences), World Wide IT and IS Strategies (Multinational, International and Global
Strategies)

Module VI: Key System Applications for the Digital Age

Enterprise Systems – Supply Chain Management & Customer Relationship Management Systems, Using
Enterprise Applications and Achieving Operational Excellence & Customer Intimacy, E-Commerce: Digital
Market & Digital Goods, M-Commerce: Services & Applications, Enterprise Applications: New Opportunities
and Challenges.
Examination Scheme:
Components Mid Term Exam Attendance Project/Assignment/Quiz/Numerical/Presentation ESE
Weightage 70
15 marks 5 marks 10 marks
(%) Marks
Text & References:
Text:
• Data Communication and Teleprocessing System, Trevor Housley

References:
• Data Communication and Distributed Networks, Uyless D. Black
 MARKETING MANAGEMENT – I
Course Code: BBA 304 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The main objective of this course is to give students an elementary knowledge of the fundamentals in the field
of marketing. The focus will be both on developing and helping them imbibe basic marketing principles and
establishing an appreciation of contemporary realities. However, in order to do justice to the varying diversity of
a real market place, the course shall be taught over two semesters- semester III and IV.In semester III, emphasis
will be on the core concepts in marketing, thereby giving the students an understanding of the environment in
which marketing works.
In semester IV, the students will be introduced to the greater and finer details of how marketing works.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to Marketing
Meaning of marketing, Core concepts of marketing, Evolution and its role in the changing business
environment, various marketing management philosophies, viz., the production concept, the product concept,
selling concept and the marketing concept, The newer definitions of marketing- societal marketing and
relationship marketing.

Module II: Relationship between Marketing and Strategic Planning

Introduction to Strategic Planning with marketing perspective, Marketing process and Marketing Plan.

Module III: Analyzing marketing opportunities

Internal and External Marketing Environment Analysis, Introduction to Marketing Information System and
Marketing Research, BCG matrix, GE 9 cell model, Intensive growth strategies.

Module IV: Studying Consumer Behaviour

Buying Behaviour for Consumer Markets and Industrial Markets, Types of Buying Situations, Buying Decision
Process and Factors Affecting Buyer Behaviour, Consumer Adoption Process.

Module V: Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning

Concept of Market Segmentation, Bases for segmenting Consumer and Business markets, Approaches for
Targeting, Differentiation and Positioning.

Module VI: Emerging Marketing Paradigms

Concept of E-marketing, Global marketing, Mobile marketing, Kiosk marketing, Green marketing, Tele
marketing, Multi level marketing, Rural marketing.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• Marketing Management, Philip Kotler, Eleventh Edition

References:
• Principles of Marketing, Philip Kotler and Gray Armstrong
• Marketing Management, Michael R. Czinkota and Masaaki Kotabe
• Marketing, Charles W. Lamb, Joseph F. Hair, and Carl McDaniel
• Fundamentals of Marketing, Stanton, Ezel, etc.
 COST AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Course Code: BBA 305 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course aims at developing an insight into cost accounting, its need and the various methods used to
determining the cost of production, preparation of cost sheet, allocation and absorption of overheads, break even
analysis, variance analysis and budgeting.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction to Cost Accounting

Meaning, nature and scope of cost accounting. Differentiate cost accounting from management accounting and
financial accounting. Methods of costing. Cost concepts and numerical on preparation of cost sheet. Relevant
costs for decision-making.
Module II: Material Pricing & Methods of Costing
Methods of pricing materials. Actual cost method, First in First out method, Last in First out method, Weighted
Average method (numericals), Highest in First out method, Replacement Cost method, Introduction to various
methods used in costing: job costing, batch costing, contract costing, single costing, process costing, services or
operating costing (no numericals).
Case Study: “Cortland Manufacturing, Inc” (http://www.chegg.com/homework-help/questions-and-
answers/manegerial-accounting-case-study-case-assignment-1-cortland-manufacturing-inc)

Module III: Overhead Allocation and Absorption

Introduction and classification of overheads. Accounting for factory overheads, Accounting for the
administration overheads. Definition and classification of Selling and Distribution overheads and numericals on
the same. Introduction to Activity Based Costing.
Module IV: Marginal Costing and Cost Volume Profit Analysis
Marginal Costing – Fixed & variable cost, meaning & characteristics of marginal costing profit/volume ratio.
Limiting or key factor, break-even analysis and calculation of sales for desired profit and numericals on the
same.

Module V: Budgetary Control

Budgetary Control, objective of budgetary control, preparation of purchase budget, production budget, cash
budget, fixed & flexible budgets and zero base budgeting.

Module VI: Variance Analysis

Concept of variance. Material Cost Variance, Material Price Variance and numericals on the same. Labour cost
Variance, Labour Rate Variance and numericals on the same. Concept of overhead variance.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE

Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• Cost Accounting, S.P Jain & K.L Narang

References:
• Management Accounting, MY Khan & PK Jain, Third Edition, Tata McGraw Hill
• Advanced Management Accounting, Robert S Koplan, Anthony A Atkinson, Third Edition, Printice Hall.
 BUSINESS LAWS
Course Code: BBL 326 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to acquaint the students with the fundamentals of business related laws, which
have an important role over smooth conduct of business.

Course Contents:
Module I: Legal Environment of Business
Importance of Law, Legal environment of business, sources of law, function of law.

Module II: Indian Contract Act, 1872

Nature and kinds of Contracts, Concepts related to offer, Acceptance and Consideration, Principles Governing
Capacity of Parties and Free Consent, Legality of Objects, Performance and Discharge of Contract, Breach of
Contract and its Remedies, Basic Elements of Law Relating to Agency, Guarantee and Pledge.

Module III: Indian Sale of Goods Act, 1930

Sale and Agreement to Sell, Hire Purchase – Pledge – Mortgage – Hypothecation Lease. Goods – Different
types of Goods, Passing of Property in Goods, Conditions and Warranties, Doctrine of Caveat emptor, Rights of
an unpaid Seller.

Module IV: Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881

Meaning of Negotiability and Definition of Negotiable Instruments, Features, Cheques, Bill of Exchange and
Promissory Note, Holder in Due Course, Crossing of Cheques, Endorsement and Dishonour of Cheques.

Module V: Elements of Company Law

Meaning and types of companies, Formation of a company, Memorandum and Articles of Association,
Prospectus and Issue of Shares, Share Capital and Shareholders, Company Meetings and Proceedings, Powers
and Liabilities of Directors, meeting, Managerial Remuneration and Winding up of Company.

Module VI: Consumer Protection Act 1986 and Torts

Need for Consumer Protection – Meaning of Consumer – Different Redressal Forums for Consumers, Rights of
Consumers, Unfair Trade Practices, and Procedure for Filing Complaints. Meaning of tort, Application of
Tortuous Liability in Business Situations.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Mercantile Law N.D. Kapoor.
• Prof (Cmde) P.K Goel, Business Law for managers Biztantra.

References:
• Dr. S.M. Shukla and Dr. O P Gupta Mercantile Law.
• S. S. Gulshan Excel Book Mercantile Law.
• Maheshwari & Maheshwari Business Law.
 Annexure’ CD-01’

L T P/ SW/F TOTAL
UG: Semester III S W CREDIT
Course Title: Effective Written Communication / UNITS
1 0 0 0 1
Communication Skills-III
Credit Units: 1
Course Code: BCU 341
Course Objective:
To emphasize the essential aspects of effective written communication necessary for
professional success.
Prerequisites: NIL

Course Contents / Syllabus:

1. Module I Principles of Effective Writing 35%
Weightage
• Spellings-100 Most Misspelled Words in English
• Web Based Writing
• Note Taking: Process & Techniques
2. Module II Formal Letter Writing 35%
Weightage
• Block Format
• Types of Letters
• E-mail
• Netiquette
3. Module III Business Memos 20%
• Format & Characteristics Weightage
4. Module IV Short Stories 10%
Weightage
• Stench of Kerosene-Amrita Pritam
• A Flowering Tree-A.K. Ramanujan
• The Gift of the Magi- O. Henry
• A Fly in Buttermilk-James Baldwin

Student Learning Outcomes:

5. The students should be able to write correctly and properly with
special reference to Letter writing.
6. Pedagogy for Course Delivery:
• Workshop
• Group Discussions
• Presentations
• Lectures
 Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
Theory L/T (%) Lab/Practical/Studio (%) End Term Examination

100% NA 70%
7.

Theory Assessment (L&T):

Components End Term
(Drop down) ClE Mid Sem Attendance Examination

Weightage (%) 10% 15% 5% 70%

Text: Rai, Urmila & S.M. Rai. Business Communication, Mumbai: Himalaya Publishing House,
2002.
K.K.Sinha, Business Communication, Galgotia Publishing Company.
Reference: Sanjay Kumar & Pushp Lata, Communication Skills, Oxford University Press.

Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals

 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - III

Course Code: BSU 343 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
To enable the students:
• Understand the process of problem solving and creative thinking.
• Facilitation and enhancement of skills required for decision-making.
Course Contents:

Module I: Thinking as a tool for Problem Solving (2 Hours)

• What is thinking: The Mind/Brain/Behavior
• Critical Thinking and Learning:
- Making Predictions and Reasoning
- Memory and Critical Thinking
- Emotions and Critical Thinking
• Thinking skills
Module II: Hindrances to Problem Solving Process (2 Hours)
• Perception
• Expression
• Emotion
• Intellect
• Work environment
Module III: Problem Solving (2 Hours)
• Recognizing and Defining a problem
• Analyzing the problem (potential causes)
• Developing possible alternatives
• Evaluating Solutions
• Resolution of problem
• Implementation
• Barriers to problem solving:
- Perception
- Expression
- Emotion
- Intellect
- Work environment
Module IV: Plan of Action (2 Hour)
• Construction of POA
• Monitoring
• Reviewing and analyzing the outcome
Module V: Creative Thinking (2 Hours)
• Definition and meaning of creativity
• The nature of creative thinking
- Convergent and Divergent thinking
- Idea generation and evaluation (Brain Storming)
- Image generation and evaluation
- Debating
• The six-phase model of Creative Thinking: ICEDIP model
Suggested Readings:

• Michael Steven: How to be a better problem solver, Kogan Page, New Delhi, 1999
• Geoff Petty: How to be better at creativity; Kogan Page, New Delhi, 1999
• Richard Y. Chang and P. Keith, Kelly: Wheeler Publishing, New Delhi, 1998.
• Phil Lowe Koge Page: Creativity and Problem Solving, New Delhi, 1996
• J William Pfeiffer (ed.) Theories and Models in Applied Behavioural Science, Vol 3, Management (1996);
Pfeiffer & Company
• Bensley, Alan D.: Critical Thinking in Psychology – A Unified Skills Approach, (1998), Brooks/Cole
Publishing Company.
 FRENCH

Course Code: FLU 344 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To provide the students with the know-how
To master the current social communication skills in oral and in written.
To enrich the formulations, the linguistic tools and vary the sentence construction without repetition.

Course Contents:
Module B: pp. 76 – 88 Unité 6

Module C: pp. 89 to103 Unité 7

Contenu lexical: Unité 6: se faire plaisir

1. acheter: exprimer ses choix, décrire un objet (forme, dimension, poids et
matières) payer
2. parler de la nourriture, deux façons d’exprimer la quantité, commander un
repas au restaurant
3. parler des différentes occasions de faire la fête

Unité 7: Cultiver ses relations

1. maîtriser les actes de la communication sociale courante
2. (Salutations, présentations, invitations, remerciements)
3. annoncer un événement, exprimer un souhait, remercier,
4. s’excuser par écrit.
5. caractériser une personne (aspect physique et caractère)
Contenu grammatical:
1. accord des adjectifs qualificatifs
2. articles partitifs
3. Négations avec de, ne…rien/personne/plus
4. Questions avec combien, quel…
5. expressions de la quantité
6. ne…plus/toujours - encore
7. pronoms compléments directs et indirects
8. accord du participe passé (auxiliaire « avoir ») avec
l’objet direct
9. Impératif avec un pronom complément direct ou indirect
10. construction avec « que » - Je crois que/ Je pense que/ Je
sais que

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre: Campus: Tome 1

 SUMMER ASSIGNMENT/ PROJECTS
Course Code: BBA 360 Credit Units: 03

GUIDELINES FOR PROJECT FILE

Research experience is as close to a professional problem-solving activity as anything in the curriculum. It
provides exposure to research methodology and an opportunity to work closely with a faculty guide. It usually
requires the use of advanced concepts, a variety of experimental techniques, and state-of-the-art instrumentation.

Research is genuine exploration of the unknown that leads to new knowledge which often warrants publication.
But whether or not the results of a research project are publishable, the project should be communicated in the
form of a research report written by the student.

The project should build the attributes like intellectual ability, professional judgment and decision making
ability, inter-disciplinary approach, skills for data handling, ability in written and oral presentation, and sense of
responsibility

1. SCOPE
The relevant topic has to be defined with the mutual consent with your guide. The project is to study the selected
problem, quality and shortcomings of available solutions. Your project must also include any new solution you
can think of and general comments on why the problem is important. It is important to note that it takes time to
write a good report.

2. TOPIC
It is the sole discretion of your faculty guide to allot you a topic for the project. If you have been thinking of
some topic over a period of time and do the research work on the same, than it has to be with the consent of your
guide.
Normally, the topic must be picked carefully keeping in mind
✓ Related to one or more subjects or areas of study within the core program.
✓ Clearly focused so as to facilitate an in-depth approach for finding the solution.
✓ Subject to availability of relevant information and to you knowledge
✓ Relevant to the current business scenario
✓ It is of interest to you and will lead to you all round development.

3. PLANNING YOUR PROJECT

The planning of the project is always recommended since it is an outline of what you intend to do. It will
schedule you working and act as a guideline right from the outset.
The planning should entail the following:
✓ Defining aims and objectives of the project
✓ Formulating questions to be investigated
✓ Calculating the feasibility of the investigations.
✓ Working out various stages of the project
✓ Devising a time table to see the timely completion of different stages as per the schedule.

Benefits of planning
✓ Formulating a plan is creating an ideal model of your project, thus builds up your confidence.
✓ Make aware your guide to provide constructive comments as each stage of your project and provide you
appropriate feedback of your work.
✓ It helps you concentrate on your thoughts.
✓ A plan can act as a guideline which helps you to keep check with the proceedings and direction.

4. MAKING A PROJECT DIARY

This includes the following:

✓ Making a note of everything you read; including those discarded.

✓ Ensuring that when recording sources, author’s name and initials, date of publication, title, place of
publication and publisher are included. (You may consider starting a card index or database from the
outset). Making an accurate note of all quotations at the time you read them.
✓ Make clear what is a direct a direct quotation and what is your paraphrase.

5. GUIDELINES FOR A PROJECT FILE/REPORT

The file aims to encourage keeping a personal record of your learning and achievement throughout the project.
The file is a document that helps the evaluator assess your analytical skills & ability and present the evidence of
the serious work carried out by you.
In general, file should be comprehensive and include:
✓ A short account of the activities that were undertaken as part of the project;
✓ A statement about the extent to which the project has achieved its stated goals.
✓ A statement about the outcomes of the evaluation and dissemination processes engaged in as part of the
project;
✓ Any activities planned but not yet completed as part of the project, or as a future initiative directly resulting
from the project;
✓ Any problems that have arisen that may be useful to document for future reference.

6. LAYOUT OF THE PROJECT/FILE

The format of the report should comprise of the following components

1. Title/cover page
It should detail the project title, student’s name, course, year, guide name, date of submission (As per
the format in annexure-1)

2. Acknowledgements
Acknowledgement to any advisory / financial assistance received while working on the project may be
given.
The writer recognizes his indebtedness for guidance and assistance of the advisor/guide. Courtesy
demands that he also recognize specific contributions by the other persons and institutions like
libraries. Acknowledgements should be expressed very simply.

3. Abstract
An abstract is a brief or condensed statement by the writer, or the essential ideas of the writer’s work. It
should be straight to the point, not too descriptive but highly informative. It is a statement of the
problem, a summary of the scope, methods and procedures, findings and results of the project.

4. Table of contents
This gives page references for each chapter and section. Titles and subtitles are to correspond exactly
with those in the report.

5. Introduction
This brief documentation provides with the following facts about the project
✓ The background of the project,
✓ The objectives of the project
✓ The rationale for the project
✓ The limitations of the project should also be listed.

6. Materials and methods

This section should aim at the methodology, research design, sampling and fieldwork (if any)
Research methodology should be explained including modifications if any
Reflect the reliability and validity of the methods
Analysis and interpretation is to be shown.

7. Result and discussions

In this section emphasis should be laid down on
✓ What is performed and achieved in the project rather that the available literature in the context
of the project.
✓ Discussion on your results with reference to the literature review.
✓ Matching your own results against what was established in the literature review. From this
you should draw conclusion and make comments.
✓ Add value to the results with your own comments
✓ Highlight and provide analysis of any new themes that have emerged from your own research.

8. Conclusions and recommendations

In this section the outcome of the work is mentioned briefly. This should be a conclusion to the whole
project. Check that your work answers the following questions:
✓ Did the research project meet its aims (check back to introduction for stated aims)?
✓ What are the main findings of the research?
✓ Are there any recommendations?
✓ Do you have any conclusion on the research process itself?

9. Future prospects
This section must give clear picture of where should further research be focused and for what other
projects this project could be taken as input?
10. Appendices
 It contains the material which is of interest to the reader but not an integral part of the project and
statements of pros and cons that may be useful to document for future reference.
11. References
In this section you should give a list of all the references you have used. This should be cross
referenced with you text. This includes papers and books referred to the body of the report.
For books, the following details are required:
Levi, M. 1996, International Financial Management, Prentice Hall, New York, 3rd Ed, 1996
For articles from journals,
Draper P and Pandyal K. 1991, The Investment Trust Discount Revisited, Journal of Business Finance
and Accounting, Vol18, No6, Nov, pp 791-832.

7. ASSESSMENT OF THE PROJECT FILE

The weightage of the report will be based on the following criteria
✓ The quality of the report.
✓ The technical merit of the project which attempts to access the depth of the intellectual efforts
put into the project.
✓ The project execution is concerned with how much work has been put in.
The file should fulfill the following assessment objectives
✓ Has the student made a clear statement of the objective or objective(s)?
✓ If there is more than one objective, do these constitute parts of a whole?
✓ Has the student developed an appropriate analytical framework for addressing the problem at
hand?
✓ Is this based on up-to-date developments in the topic area?
✓ Has the student collected information / data suitable to the frameworks?
✓ Are the techniques employed by the student to analyze the data / information appropriate and
relevant?
✓ Has the student succeeded in drawing conclusion form the analysis?
✓ Do the conclusions relate well to the objectives of the project?
✓ Has the student been regular in his work?
✓ Is the layout of the written report is as per the format?

8. EVALUATION SCHEME
The total weightage of the Project is 100 Marks. The evaluation of the project should be as per the
following heads
✓ Faculty Guide 20
✓ Viva 20
✓ Presentation 20
✓ Report 40
Content and layout 10
Conceptual framework 10
Objectives and methodology 10
Implication and conclusions 10

9. PROJECT SCHEDULING
1. Registration
First week of the last academic month
Allotment of Faculty Guide takes place in accordance to the area of interest / stream chosen by the
student at the time of registration.

2. Allotment of project topic

Week following the ‘week of registration’

3. Submission of synopsis to faculty guide

Prior to the completion of End-Term Examination. The synopsis could be submitted any time after the
allotment of project topic but certainly must be before completion of last examination.

4. Duration of Project
The project stretches for the full duration of the Semester break
5. Submission of Reports
First Report – After 20 Days from the commencement of the project
Second Report – 20 days after submission of the first report.
The first and second reports could be submitted through e-mail or any other medium as per the consent
of faculty guide.
Rough Draft – Within first week of rejoining of institution
Final Report – Within second week of rejoining of institution
6. Evaluation
Evaluation of project should be done as per the scheme in the first week of August.
 CORPORATE FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code: BBA 401 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
In today’s world, every manager is a decision-making unit. To take decisions which are effective, a manager
should understand all areas of management. The objective of this course is to develop an understanding of short
term and long-term financial decisions of a firm and various financial tools used in taking these decisions. It is
also aimed to develop the understanding of the financial environment in which a company operates and how it
copes with it.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction to Financial Management

Indian Financial System (Meaning, importance and role). Sources of finance – Debt: Term Loans, Debentures.
Equity: Ordinary Shares. Hybrid: Preference, Warrants, Convertible securities, ADRs, GDRs.

Module II: Cost of capital

Concept significance assumptions, Computation of cost of capital of various sources: Equity, Debt, Reserve &
Surplus and Preference shares. Weighted average cost of capital. Book value weights v/s market value weights.

Module III: Leverage Analysis and Capital Structure Theories

Leverage Analysis: Operating Leverage, Financial Leverage & Combined Leverage.
Factors affecting Capital Structure decisions, Theory of Capital Structure Decisions, MM Theory, NI, NOI and
traditional theory.

Module IV: Dividend Decisions

Importance of dividend decisions, Theories of Dividend decisions: Irrelevance theory, optimal dividend
decision, relevance theory, Issues in dividend policy: Bonus Shares, Stock Splits & Buyback of shares.

Module V: Introduction to Derivatives

Meaning and Concept of Derivatives, Conceptual understanding of Futures and Options, Use of Derivative in
financial investment decision.

Module VI: Marketing of Financial Services

Introduction to Financial Services, Features of marketing these services, Recent developments.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE

Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• Pandey, I .M. Ninth Edition, Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.

References:
• Chandra, P. Fundamentals of Financial Management, Sixth Edition, Tata Mc-Graw Hill.
• Brearly R.A. and Myers, S.C. Eighth Edition Principles of Corporate Finance, Tata Mc-Graw Hill.
Horne.V.Tenth Edition, Financial Management and Policy, Prentice Hall of India
 MARKETING MANAGEMENT – II

Course Code: BBA 402 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To expose the students to the advance concepts of Marketing and to help them analyze the recurrent issues in
Marketing with the help of cases.

Course Contents:
Module I: Product Mix Strategy
Product: concept & levels, Classification of products consumer and industrial, product differentiation, product
mix, Product Life Cycle and various strategies, Branding: concept and challenges, brand decisions. Packaging
and labeling.

Module II: Product Development Decision

Product Line Decision, New Product Development: Challenges & Process, Consumer Adoption Process,
Diffusion of Innovation.

Module III: Pricing Considerations and Strategies

Introduction to various objectives of pricing, Pricing Process. Adapting the price: Concept of geographical
pricing, promotional pricing, discriminatory pricing. Understanding various pricing strategies and their
application.

Module IV: Distribution and Logistics Decision

Nature of Marketing Channels, Channel Functions and Flows, Channel Design and Management Decisions,
Channel Dynamics. Introduction to Wholesaling, Retailing and Logistics.

Module V: Deciding on the Marketing Communications Mix

The process of deciding the Marketing communication mix, Marketing communication budget. Introduction to
various elements of integrated marketing communications briefly.

Module VI: Introduction to global market place

Challenges and opportunities of Globalization. Factors governing entry into foreign markets. Marketing Mix for
Global Markets. Trends in international marketing

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• Kotler Philip Marketing Management, Eleventh Edition, Pearson.

References:
• Kotler Philip and Armstrong Gray, Principles of Marketing, Eleventh Edition, Pearson Education.
• Ramaswamy VS, Namakumari S, Marketing Management, Planning Implementation & Control, Third
Edition, MacMillan.
 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND REPORT PREPARATION

Course Code: BBA 403 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
To understand the way in which systematic research can be conducted to describe, explain, and predict
phenomena of interest; To develop practical knowledge and skills to understand and carry out research projects;
To develop understanding of the basic techniques and tools for conducting research;To develop contents and
organization of both the written report and oral presentation for which the research study was done.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Meaning and Importance of Research, Conceptualization and Formulation of a Research Problem, Introduction
to Research Design, Scales and Measurements: Ordinal, Nominal, Ratio, Interval, Likert. Preliminary Research:
Literature Review, Construction of Hypotheses

Module II: Data collection methods

Primary And Secondary Data; Data Collection Methods: Observation, Survey, Questionnaire; Steps in
Constructing Questionnaire, Type of Questions, Introduction to Projective techniques

Module III: Sampling

Nature of Sampling, Steps of Sampling Design, Sampling Frame, Sample Selection Methods - Probability and
Non Probability, Sample Size, Sampling Errors and Principles of Sampling.

Module IV: Data Collection Field Work

Fieldwork procedure, Common sources of error in the fieldwork, Minimizing fieldwork errors, Tabulation of
collected data

Module V: Data Analysis

Data analysis-I: Test of significance Z, t, F and chi-square, Data analysis-II: Correlation and Regression
techniques, Data analysis – III: Introduction to Statistical Package

Module VI: Report Writing

Research presentation and research process examination; Report writing – Format and Types of research report.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
Cooper D R, Schindler P S and Sharma J K (2012),Business Research Methods(11thedition), Tata McGraw-Hill

References:
Luck, David J and Rubin, Ronald S., Marketing Research(7th edition), Prentice Hall of India
Aaker, David A; Kumar V and George S., Marketing Research(6th edition), John Wiley & Sons.
Boyd, Harper W, Westphall, Ralph & Stasch, Stanely F, Market Research : Text & Cases, Richard D. Irwin Inc.
 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT

Course Code: BBA 404 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to provide students an understanding of entrepreneurship & the process of creating
and grooving a new venture. The course also focuses on giving the students the concept of an entrepreneurs
who is willing to accept all the risks & put forth the effort necessary to create a new venture.

Course Contents:

Module I: Basic Concepts

Qualities, Characteristics of an entrepreneur, Venture idea generation, Ideas and the entrepreneurship, Women
entrepreneurs, Preliminary Screening, Drawbacks or Problems of entrepreneurship, Reasons of failure,
Overview of setting up an enterprise with organizational forms – MSMED Act.
Project Based Learning -1
Group task: studying various success stories of entrepreneurs and discussing their characteristics and reasons for
success.

Module II: Project Appraisal

Pre-feasibility Report, Project Report, Comparative Rating of Product ideas, Cash Flow, Financial Analysis and
Planning, Sources of Finance. Stages of Project Feasibility Analysis-Market, Technical, Financial, Social
Analysis, Project Implementation Stages.
Project Based Learning – 2
Activities and assignments: Students asked to finalize on their ideas and start writing business plans.

Module III: Financial Analysis

Financing the project, Sources of finance, Venture Capital Sources, What Investor looks in the Investment
Proposal, Outline for a Venture Capital Proposal.

Module IV: Market and Materials Management Analysis

Vendor development, vendor selection decision factors, methods of price determination, direct and hidden cost
in material management, market development, market feasibility, activities and decisions in materials
management – International Markets.

Module V: Project Management

Steps and procedure for setting up small scale, Role of Banks and Financial Institutions in Development, E-
Commerce, E-Business, E-Auction. Project management problems. SEZ, Cluster Development. Legal Issues
for the Entrepreneur: Patents, Trademarks, Copyrights.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Developing Entrepreneurship, Udai Pareek Sanjeev & Rao T.V, Printers, Ahmedabad
• Issues and Problems: Small: 1, Sharma, S.V.S., Industry Extension Training Institute, Hyderabad

References:
• A Practical Guide to Industrial Entrepreneurs; Srivastave, S.B., Sultan Chand & Sons
• Entrepreneurship Development; Bhanussali, Himalaya Publishing, Bombay
 E-COMMERCE

Course Code: BBA 405 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
In the changed business environment of today, it has become imperative for businesses to understand, appreciate
and learn to create their presence in cyber space. This course focuses on exposing the students to the world of e-
commerce, the opportunities, and the threats and teaches them the strategies of making businesses viable and
successful.

Course Contents:
Module I: Understanding E-commerce
Electronic Commerce (Overview, Definitions, Advantages, Issues & Constraints), Myths allied with E-
Commerce, E-Commerce Vs E-Business, Role of E-Strategy, Value Chain in E-Commerce, E-Commerce
Business Models, Managerial Prospective in E-Commerce, E-Governance.

Module II: Planning, Implementing and Controlling of e-Business:

Creating the Marketing Mix, Organizational and Managerial issues, Financial Planning and Working with
Investors, Implementation and Control of the e-Business Plan.

Module III: E-Strategies and Tactics

Building E-Presence, Building life cycle – a website, Web site evaluation and usability testing, Web Portals &
Web Services, Internet marketing (pros and cons, techniques, E-Cycle of Internet), E-Commerce Transaction
Models (B2B, B2C, C2B, C2C), Integrating E-Commerce & Business Activities (SCM, ERP), E-Core values
(Ethical, Legal, Taxation & International Issues).

Module IV: E-Commerce and Payment Systems

Real world Cash, Electronic Money, Analyzing Cash, Cheques and Credit Cards, Internet based payment system
(requirement and models), payments methods & its types, B2B & E-Payment, M-commerce and M-Payment,
Guidelines to E-Payments, Issues and Implications of E-Payment. Wireless technology and Mobile-Commerce,
Electronic Data Interchange.

Module V: E-Commerce and Business Applications

E-Commerce Banking (Changing dynamics in banking industry, Home banking implementation approach),
Retailing (Online retailing dynamics, Mercantile Models from the consumer’s prospective and management
challenges), Online Publishing (Edutainment, Advertising), Supply chain Management, Customer Asset
Management, Sales force automation, Service and support, Logistics Management.

Module VI: Security Threats with E-Commerce

Security in Cyber Space, Kinds of thefts and Crime, Security protection and recovery, Designing the security,
Online Money Laundering, Managerial Implications, Encryption and Basic Algorithms, Authentication and
Trust (Digital Signatures & Certificates), Managing Cryptography, Internet Security Protocols and Standards
(SSL, HTTPS), Government regulation and security issues.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)
Text & References:
Text:
• Electronic Commerce from Vision to fulfilment, Third Edition, Elias M Awad, Pearson Education

References:
• Electronic Commerce – A manager’s Guide, Ravi Kalakota & Andrew B. Shinston, Pearson Education.
• Electronic Commerce - Technologies & Applications, Bhaskar Bharat, Tata McGraw Hill.
• Global E-Commerce, University Press, J. Christopher & T.H.K. Clerk.
 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Course Code: BBA 406 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objectives of this course are to help the students develop an understanding of the dimensions of the
management of human resources, with particular reference to HRM policies and practices in India.

Course Contents:

Module I: Fundamentals of HRM

Introduction, Concept and Functions, Scope and Significance of Human Resource Management, Differnce
between Personnel Management and HRM, Overview of basic HRM Model, Role and Responsibilities of the
Human Resource Manager and essentials of Sound HR Policies.

Module II: Acquisition of Human Resources

Objectives, Policies and Process of Human Resource Planning, Job Analysis, Recruitment (process, methods:
internal, external), Selection (process, tests, interviews), Induction, Placement.

Module III: Development of Human Resources

Training and Development(process, methods: On-the job, Off-the job), Evaluation of training( Kirkpatrick
model) and Performance Appraisal-concept, significance, process, methods
Module IV: Maintenance of Human Resources
Job Evaluation: concept, process, compensation: concept, components, Designing and Administering the Wage
and Salary Structure, Grievance Procedure and Handling.

Module V: Retention and Separation Processes

Discharge, Retirement, Layoff, Retrenchment, VRS, Promotion and Transfer, exit interview, attrition and
retention (concept, significance, determinants and strategies).

Module VI: Current Issues in HRM

Increased concern for HRM( Sound IR, dual career couples, flexi-working hours, work-from home facility),
International Human Resource Management-Managing inter country differences, SHRM, talent management,
Employee engagement, HR audit.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• Garry Dessler, Human Resource Management, Pearson Publications

References:
• Edward, B Flippo, Personnel Management, Mc Graw hill International Ed.
• Dale Yoder, Personnel Management and Industrial Relation,
• Monappa & Sayiaddin, Personnel Management, Vikas Publishing Company
• Desimone; Human Resource Development, Thomson Learning
• VSP Rao, Human Resource Management, Excel Publications
• K Aswathappa; Human Resource and Personnel Management; McGraw- Hill Companies
• Bohlander; Managing Human Resources; Thomson Learning. Ed. 13 2004
UG: Semester IV
Course Title: Communication Skills-IV Annexure’ CD-01’

Credit Units: 1 L T P/ SW/F TOTAL

Course Code: BCU 441 S W CREDIT
UNITS
Course Objective: 1 0 0 0 1

This course is designed to develop the skills of the students in preparing job search artifacts
and negotiating their use in GDs and interviews.
Prerequisites: NIL
Course Contents / Syllabus:
1. Module I Employment-Related Correspondence 35%
Weightage
• Resume Writing
• Covering Letters
• Follow Up Letters
2. Module II Dynamics of Group Discussion 35%
Weightage
• Significance of GD
• Methodology & Guidelines
3. Module III Interviews 20%
• Types & Styles of Interviews Weightage
• Fundamentals of facing Interviews
• Interview-Frequently Asked Questions
4. Module IV Short Stories 10%
Weightage
• Proof of the Pudding - O. Henry
• “The Lottery” 1948 – Shirley Jackson
• The Eyes Have it- Ruskin Bond
• Kallu- Ismat Chughtai
All the four stories will be discussed in one class.
One Long Question will be set in the Exam from the Text.
Student Learning Outcomes:
5. • Develop a resume for oneself

• Ability to handle the interview process confidently

• Learn the subtle nuances of an effective group discussion
6. Pedagogy for Course Delivery:
• Workshop
• Group Discussions
• Presentations
• Lectures
7. Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
Theory L/T (%) Lab/Practical/Studio (%) End Term
Examination
100% NA 70%

Theory Assessment (L&T):

Components CIE Attendance End Term Examination
(Drop down)
Weightage (%) 25% 5% 70%
Text: Sharma, R.C. & Krishna Mohan. Business Correspondence and Report Writing: A
Practical approach to Business & Technical Communication, New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill & Co.
Ltd., 2002.
Rai, Urmila & S.M. Rai. Business Communication, Mumbai: Himalaya Publishing House,
2002.
Rizvi, M.Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication, New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill,
2007.
Reference: Brusaw, Charles T., Gerald J. Alred & Walter E. Oliu. The Business Writer’s
Companion, Bedford: St. Martin’s Press, 2010.
Lewis, Norman. How to Read Better and Faster. New Delhi: Binny Publishing House.
Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals
 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - IV
Course Code: BSU 443 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
To inculcate an elementary level of understanding of group/team functions.
To develop team-spirit and to know the importance of working in teams.

Course Contents:
Module I: Group formation
Definition and Characteristics
Importance of groups
Classification of groups
Stages of group formation
Benefits of group formation
Module II: Group Functions
External Conditions affecting group functioning: Authority, Structure, Org. Resources, Organizational policies
etc.
Internal conditions affecting group functioning: Roles, Norms, Conformity, Status, Cohesiveness, Size, Inter
group conflict.
Group Cohesiveness and Group Conflict
Adjustment in Groups
Module III: Teams
Meaning and nature of teams
External and Internal factors effecting team
Building Effective Teams
Consensus Building
Collaboration
Module IV: Leadership
Meaning, Nature and Functions
Self leadership
Leadership styles in organization
Leadership in Teams
Module V: Power to empower: Individual and Teams
Meaning and Nature
Types of power
Relevance in organization and Society
Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal
Viva based on personal journal
Assessment of Behavioural change as a result of training
Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Examination Scheme:

Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for

Test (CT) Success (JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25

Text & References:

• Organizational Behaviour, Davis, K.
• Hoover, Judhith D. Effective Small Group and Team Communication, 2002, Harcourt College Publishers
• Dick, Mc Cann & Margerison, Charles: Team Management, 1992 Edition, viva books
• LaFasto and Larson: When Teams Work Best, 2001, Response Books (Sage), New Delhi
• Smither Robert D.; The Psychology of Work and Human Performance, 1994, Harper Collins College
Publishers
 FRENCH
Course Code: FLU 444 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students:
To develop strategies of comprehension of texts of different origin
To present facts, projects, plans with precision

Course Contents:
Module C: pp. 104 – 139: Unités 8, 9

Contenu lexical: Unité 8: Découvrir le passé

1) parler du passé, des habitudes et des changements.
2) parler de la famille, raconter une suite
3) d’événements/préciser leur date et leur durée.
4) connaître quelques moments de l’histoire

Unité 9: Entreprendre
1. faire un projet de la réalisation: (exprimer un besoin,
2. préciser les étapes d’une réalisation)
3. parler d’une entreprise
4. parler du futur

Contenu grammatical: Imparfait

1) Pronom « en »
2) Futur
3) Discours rapporté au présent
4) Passé récent
5) Présent progressif

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre: Campus: Tome 1

 INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

Course Code: BBA 501 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
To introduce students to the contemporary issues in International Business that illustrate the unique challenges
faced by manages in the international business environment.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to International Business
Nature and scope of international business. International business environment.
Classical theory of international trade: Absolute cost advantage theory, comparative cost theory, and Modern
theory of international trade. Michael Porter model of competitive advantage of nations.
Globalization – forces, Meaning, dimensions and stages in Globalization. Contemporary Issues in International
Business.

Module II: International Business Environment

Tariff and non-tariff barriers.General Agreement on Trade and Tariffs (GATT), World Trade Organization.
Important Ministerial Conferences & their outcomes. Dispute settlement mechanism under WTO. Regional
Integrations, Trade Blocks – nature and levels of integration – arguments for and against regional integration.

Module III: Modes of International Entry

International Business – Entry modes - Franchising, Exporting, Licensing, International Agents, International
Distributors, Cross Border Mergers & Acquisitions, Strategic Alliances, Joint Ventures, Overseas Manufacture
and International Sales Subsidiaries, Outsourcing, FDI, FII.

Module IV: International Financial Management

Introduction to International Financial Management –International Monetary System, exchange rate system
(floating and fixed) Financial Markets and Instruments- Introduction to Export and Import Finance – ECGC &
EXIM Bank, Methods of payment in International Trade: Letter of Credit, Banker’s Acceptance, Draft.

Module V: Forex Exposure

Country Risk Analysis – Political, Social and Economic. Types of Forex Exposure: Accounting, Operating &
Transaction – their management. An introduction to interest rate exposure

Module VI: Foreign Trade Procedure

An Introduction to Foreign trade Policy, Foreign trade Policy 2021-26 and its impact on different sectors of the
Economy. Documentation Framework: Types, and Characteristics of Document, Export Contract - INCO Terms
- Processing of an Export Order.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Charles W L Hill. and Arun Kumar Jain. International Business: competing in the global market place, Mc
Graw-Hill, 2007.
References:
• John D. Daniels Lee H Radebaugh, International Business: Environments and Operations. Addison Wesley,
2007.
• Cherulinam, Francis, International Business, 3 rd edition, Prentice Hall India
 PERSONAL FINANCIAL PLANNING

Course Code: BBA 502 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
Post Liberalization, India has witnessed a phenomenal growth in her GDP. With the advent of MNC’s, and
growth in private business, individuals income and saving pattern has changed. Therefore the need arises to
manage these funds in a manner that it is no more called as savings but addressed as a need for Personal
financial planning. This course is essential for every student irrespective of the specialization as every individual
needs to plan his finances.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction to personal financial planning and personal accounting

Concept of Personal Financial Planning: Need, Significance, Scope; Ethical issues in Personal Financial
Planning; Changing per capita investors. Need to maintain Accounts, Methods: Traditional & Using Electronic
Media. Applying for PAN & filing of Income Tax returns.

Module II: Investment Avenues

Real Assets: Investment in Real Assets: Real Estate, Precious Metals, Other Fixed assets. Their relative merits
& demerits. Change in their returns over the past few years.
Financial Assets: Investments in securities: Through IPO, Secondary Market. Investment in G-sec; Debt
instruments, Post Office instruments, Insurance Policies, Mutual Funds, Certificate of Deposits, Foreign Market .

Module III: Introduction to Income tax and Income from salary

Introduction to Income tax act 1961 and Finance Act. Previous year, Assessment year, Income, Total Income,
Gross Total Income, Capital and Revenue Receipts / Expenditures, Exempted Incomes, Residential Status and
incidence of Tax. Salary, Exemption:- Leave encashment, Gratuity, Pension, Annuity, Pension fund, Allowance
(HRA, Entertainment, Special allowance – dependent of expense ad not dependent on expenae, perquisites –
rent free accommodation, Leave travel concession, medical facility), Deductions 80c to 80u. ). Sections (2(9),
2(31), 2(7), 2(24), 3, 6, 14, 288A, 288B, 2(17), 4, 9, 45, 9(1)(ii), 9(1)(iv), 9(1)(v), 10, 11, 12, 17(1), 22

Module IV: Income from house property, capital gains and other sources
Income from House Property(Types of house property, Exempted house property income, Computation of GAV
and NAV, Treatment of unrealized, recovered and arrears of rent), Capital Gains and other Sources (Short term
& Long term capital gain, Cost of acquisition, Cost of improvement, Index cost, Income that are taxed under
other sources, Deduction under other sources, Tax treatment of lotteries, puzzles. Sections 23, 24, 2528, 30, 31,
32.

Module V: Tax planning

Concept, significance and problems of tax planning, Tax evasion and tax avoidance, Individual Taxation Slabs,
Wealth Tax, Gift Tax, Capital Gains Tax, Service tax, Recent Tax saving schemes

Module VI: Retirement & Goal Planning

Concept of risk assessment of individual, Introduction to portfolio management, Retirement planning &
investment: Income generation after retirement, liability management, anticipation of expenses. Investment for
major goals: House, Family, Education, Medical, Wealth Management/ Financial Advisory companies. Their
role, significance & growth

Module VII Insurance Planning (Life & Medical)

Concept of Insurance, Characteristics of insurance, Concept of risk financing, Nature, Functions of Insurance
and Types of Insurance, Requirements of an Insurable risk, Advantages and Disadvantages of Insurance,
Approaches of life insurance. Medical Insurance, Its Features, advantages & Disadvantages.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70
Text & References:
Text:
• Chandra P, Investment analysis and Portfolio Management, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw Hill
• Lal & Vashisht, Direct Taxes, 29th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill.
References:
• V.K.Bhalla, Security analysis and Portfolio Management, 16th edition, S.Chand
 OPERRATIONS RESEARCH

Course Code: BBM 501 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of this paper is to make students familiar with basic concept and tools in
Operations Research. These techniques assist in solving complex problems and help in
decision making.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction
Introduction to Operations Research, Definition, scope and limitations of Operations
Research

Module II: Linear Programming

Linear Programming – Basic Concepts, Model formulation; Solution methods – Graphical
Solution method, Simplex method (problems involving only upto 3 constraints and of
inequality <), Application of LPP in business decision making.

Module III: Transportation Problem

Transportation problem- Initial Basic feasible solution (North West corner rule, Vogel’s
approximation method), Test for optimality (The Modified Distribution (MODI) method)

Module IV: Assignment Problem

Assignment Problem – Introduction, Approach of the Assignment model, Solution Methods
(Hungarian method)

Module V: Game Theory

Game Theory- Concept and definition; Solution methods of Pure Strategy games (with
saddle point), Significance of Game Theory.
Module VI: Queuing & Simulation
Introduction, Elementary queuing system, Introduction to Single – channel queuing model
(with Poisson arrivals and Exponential service times), (no numerical); Introduction to
Simulation, applications, advantages and drawbacks of simulation, Introduction to Monte –
Carlo Simulation, Role of computers in Simulation

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Kapoor V K, Operations Research (Techniques for Management), Seventh edition,
Sultan Chand & Sons.
References:
• Sharma J K, Operations Research (Theory & Practices), Second edition, Macmillan
India Ltd.
• Hamdy A Taha, Operations Research, Seventh edition, Prentice Hall India
• Kothari C R, An introduction to Operations Research, Third edition, Vikas Publishing
House
 Annexure’ CD-01’
UG: Semester V
Course Title: Communication Skills-V L T P/ SW/F TOTAL
Credit Units: 1 S W CREDIT
Course Code: BCU 541 UNITS
1 0 0 0 1
Course Objective:

• To enable the students to adopt strategies for effective reading and writing
skills.
• The course would enhance student’s vocabulary, language and fluency. It
would also teach the students to deliver professional presentations.
Prerequisites: NIL
Course Contents / Syllabus:
1. Module I Vocabulary 35%
Weightage
• Define Vocabulary
• Significance of Vocabulary
• One Word Substitution, Synonyms & Antonyms and
Idioms &
Phrases
• Define and Differentiate Homonyms, Homophones and
Homographs
• Vocabulary Drills
• Foreign Words
2. Module II Comprehension Skills 25%
Weightage
• Reading Comprehension-SQ3R Reading Techniques
• Summarising and Paraphrasing
• Précis Writing
• Listening Comprehension
3. Module III Presentation Skills 30%
• Discussing the Significance of Audio-visual Aids, Weightage
Audience and Feedback in Presentation Skills
• Analyzing the Significance of Non-Verbal
Communication
4. Module IV Prose 10%
• How Far is the River-Ruskin Bond Weightage
• My Wood-E.M.Forster
• I have a Dream-Martin Luther King
• Spoken English and Broken English-G.B. Shaw
5. Student Learning Outcomes:
• Communicate fluently and sustain comprehension of an extended
discourse.
• Demonstrate ability to interpret texts and observe the rules of good
writing.
• Prepare and present effective presentations aided by ICT tools.
Pedagogy for Course Delivery: Workshop
6.
• Group Discussions
• Presentations
• Lectures
7. Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
 Theory L/T (%) Lab/Practical/Studio (%) End Term
Examination
100% NA 70%

Theory Assessment (L&T):

Components End Term Examination
(Drop down) CIE Attendance
Weightage
(%) 25% 5% 70%

Text: Jaffe, C.I. Public Speaking: Concepts and Skills for a Diverse Society, 4th ed. Belmont,
CA: Wadsworth, 2004.
Effective English for Engineering Students, B Cauveri, Macmillan India
Creative English for Communication, Krishnaswamy N, Macmillan
Reference: A Textbook of English Phonetics, Balasubramanian T, Macmillan

Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals

 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - V

Course Code: BSU 543 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
This course aims at enabling students towards:
Understand the importance of individual differences
Better understanding of self in relation to society and nation
Facilitation for a meaningful existence and adjustment in society
To inculcate patriotism and National pride.
To enhance personal and professional excellence
Course Contents:
Module I: Individual differences & Personality
Personality: Definition& Relevance
Importance of nature & nurture in Personality Development
Importance and Recognition of Individual differences in Personality
Accepting and Managing Individual differences (Adjustment Mechanisms)
Intuition, Jugement, Perception & Sensation (MBTI)
BIG5 Factors

Module II: Socialization

Nature of Socialization
Social Interaction
Interaction of Socialization Process
Contributions to Society & Nation

Module III: Patriotism and National Pride

Sense of Pride and Patriotism
Importance of Discipline and hard work
Integrity and accountability

Module IV: Human Rights, Values and Ethics

Meaning of Human Rights
Human Rights Awareness
Importance of human rights
Values and Ethics- Learning based on project work on Scriptures like Ramayana, Mahabharata, Gita etc

Module V: Personal and Professional Excellence

Personal excellence:
Identifying Long-term choices and goals
Uncovering talent, strength and style
Alan P. Rossiter’s eight aspects of Professional Excellence
Resilience during challenge and loss
Continued Reflection (Placements, Events, Seminars, Conferences, Projects, Extracurricular Activities, etc.)

Examination Scheme:

Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for

Test (CT) Success (JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25

Text & References:

• Bates, A. P. and Julian, J.: Sociology - Understanding Social Behaviour
• Dressler, David and Cans, Donald: The Study of Human Interaction
• Lapiere, Richard. T – Social Change
• Rose, G.: Oxford Textbook of Public Health, Vol.4, 1985.
• Robbins O.B. Stephen;. Organizational Behaviour
 FRENCH
Course Code: FLU 544 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To furnish some basic knowledge of French culture and civilization for understanding an authentic document
and information relating to political and administrative life

Course Contents:
Module D: pp. 131 – 156 Unités 10,11

Contenu lexical: Unité 10: Prendre des décisions

1. Faire des comparaisons
2. décrire un lieu, le temps, les gens, l'ambiance
3. rédiger une carte postale

Unité 11: faire face aux problèmes

1) Exposer un problème.
2) parler de la santé, de la maladie
3) interdire/demander/donner une autorisation
4) connaître la vie politique française

Contenu grammatical:
1) comparatif - comparer des qualités/ quantités/actions
2) supposition: Si + présent, futur
3) adverbe - caractériser une action
4) pronom "Y"

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre: Campus: Tome 1

 SUMMER TRAINING

Course Code: BBA 550 Credit Units: 06

GUIDELINES FOR INTERNSHIP FILE

There are certain phases of every Intern’s professional development that cannot be effectively taught in the
academic environment. These facets can only be learned through direct, on-the-job experience working with
successful professionals and experts in the field. The internship program can best be described as an attempt to
institutionalise efforts to bridge the gap between the professional world and the academic institutions. Entire
effort in internship is in terms of extending the program of education and evaluation beyond the classroom of a
university or institution. The educational process in the internship course seeks out and focuses attention on
many latent attributes, which do not surface in the normal class room situations. These attributes are intellectual
ability, professional judgment and decision making ability, inter-disciplinary approach, skills for data handling,
ability in written and oral presentation, sense of responsibility etc.

In order to achieve these objectives, each student will maintain a file (Internship File). The Internship File aims
to encourage students to keep a personal record of their learning and achievement throughout the Programme. It
can be used as the basis for lifelong learning and for job applications. Items can be drawn from activities
completed in the course modules and from the workplace to demonstrate learning and personal development.

The File will assess the student’s analytical skills and ability to present supportive evidence, whilst
demonstrating understanding of their organization, its needs and their own personal contribution to the
organization.

The layout guidelines for the Internship File

• A4 size Paper
• font: Arial (10 points) or Times New Roman (12 points)
• line spacing: 1.5
• top and bottom margins: 1 inch/ 2.5 cm; left and right margins: 1.25 inches/ 3 cm

The File will include five sections in the order described below. The content and comprehensiveness of the main
body and appendices of the report should include the following:

1. The Title Page--Title - An Internship Experience Report For (Your Name), name of internship organization,
name of the Supervisor/Guide and his/her designation, date started and completed, and number of credits for
which the report is submitted.
2. Table of Content--an outline of the contents by topics and subtopics with the page number and location of
each section.
3. Introduction--short, but should include how and why you obtained the internship experience position and the
relationship it has to your professional and career goals.
4. Main Body--should include but not be limited to daily tasks performed. Major projects contributed to, dates,
hours on task, observations and feelings, meetings attended and their purposes, listing of tools and materials and
their suppliers, and photographs if possible of projects, buildings and co-workers.
5. Appendices--include pamphlets, forms, charts, brochures, technical and descriptive literature, graphs and
other information related to your Internship experience.

The Main Body will have three sections and will include the following items which will be evaluated for the
final assessment:-

1. An analysis of the company/organization in which the student is working

2. A personal review of the student’s management skills and how they have been developed through the
programme.
3. The research report that the student has prepared on the project assigned to him by the organization.
(Incase a student is not assigned a specific research project in the organization, he has to select any one
aspect of the organization and prepare a research report on it).

ASSESSMENT OF THE INTERNSHIP FILE

The student will be provided with the Student Assessment Record (SAR) to be placed in front of the Internship
File. Each item in the SAR is ticked off when it is completed successfully. The faculty will also assess each item
as it is completed. The SAR will be signed by the student and by the faculty to indicate that the File is the
student’s own work. It will also ensure regularity and meeting the dealines.
STUDENT ASSESSMENT RECORD (SAR)

Management File Item Criteria for successful completion of the item

1. Analysis of organization (1500- • Clear presentation of ideas and analysis
2000 words) • Provides an organizational diagram, following organization
presentation conventions
• Analysis covers the organization’s:
➢ Business strategy and mission
➢ Structure
➢ Resources and assets
➢ Current financial performance
➢ Leadership/decision-making style
➢ Staffing and skill base
➢ Products/services and customers
2. Personal review of Management • Clear presentation of ideas and analysis
skills development • Demonstrate awareness of own management skills
(1000-1500 words) • Presents critical analysis of own management effectiveness,
supported with examples
• Provides evidence of development of specific management skills e.g.
strategic, financial, leadership
• Explains how new skills and learning have benefited the
organization and self
3. Design of Research Project • Clear presentation of ideas and analysis
(1500- 2000 words) • Justifies the choice of subject for the research project and why this
might be beneficial to the organization
• Selects and justifies appropriate research methods for the project
• Demonstrate understanding of the key stages in undertaking a
research project
• Indicates which analytical/statistical tools would be most appropriate
and why
• The design plan takes account of the resourcing implications of
carrying out the research e.g. staffing and other costs

Examination Scheme:
Report by Student (Internship File)
a. Organization & Presentation/Language and clarity /substance
of Contents covered and Comprehensiveness 20%
b. Research Report 30%

Industry Feedback (continuous) 20%

Presentation & Viva (At the end) 30%

Total 100%
 CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR
Course Code: BBA 504 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To develop an understanding of how consumers behave and use the knowledge to adopt appropriate marketing
strategies.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Consumer Behaviour: Definition and significance. Understanding consumer and market. Difference in
individual buyer behaviour and organizational buyer behaviour. Market segmentation: lifestyle and
demographic segmentation, usage segmentation, benefit segmentation. Product positioning.

Module II: Environmental influences

Culture: Meaning and Characteristics. Cross Cultural understanding of Consumer Behaviour. Subculture. Social
Groups: Meaning and formation of a group. Reference groups. Influence of reference groups on consumer
behaviour. Family: Lifecycle and it’s significance on consumer behaviour. Family purchase decision process.

Module III: Personal influence and Diffusion of Innovation

Concept, nature and significance of personal influence. Opinion leadership and its role in consumer behaviour.
Concept of product adoption and adoption process. Diffusion of innovation and process of diffusion.

Module IV: Individual determinants of Consumer Behaviour

Personality and self concept and it’s relevance in consumer behaviour. Motivation: Nature and role of motives
and their significance in marketing. Information processing: Concept and Process. Attitudes: Characteristics,
functions and it’s importance in buyer behaviour.

Module V: Consumer Decision process

Consumer decision process model. Problem Recognition, Search and Evaluation, Purchasing Process. Post-
purchase Behaviour: Post Purchase evaluation and Product disposition.

Module VI: Organizational buyer behaviour

Nature of Organizational Buying. Factors influencing organizational buyer behaviour. Types of decision
situations. Organizational buyers decision process.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Loudon David L. & Della Bitta Albert J. Consumer Behaviour, Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill.

References:
• Schiffman and Kanuk, Consumer Behaviour, Eighth Edition, Printice Hall.
• Hawkins, Best, Coney, Consumer Behaviour, Building Marketing Strategy, Ninth Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill.
 SERVICE MARKETING
Course Code: BBA 505 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The course has been designed to familiarize students with characteristics of services, their design and delivery
and the complexities of handling intangibles.

Course Contents:

Module I: Services an Overview

Services: concept, characteristics. Marketing of goods v/s marketing of services. Significance of services
marketing. Role of services sector in economy. Growth of service sector. Services- Global and Indian Scenario.
Introduction to service marketing mix: Seven Ps of Service Marketing, Classification of services,

Module II: Consumer Behaviour in Services

Consumer decision-making process. Consumer Expectations: Concept. Factors influencing customer
expectation of services. Service encounter and moments of truths. Managing Customer Satisfaction. Service
failure and recovery.

Module III: Service Quality & Productivity

Managing service operations. Concept of productivity in service context. Approaches to improve productivity.
Managing service demand and capacity: Understanding capacity constraints, understanding demand patterns.
Strategies for matching demand and supply; service blueprinting, physical evidence & Servicescape.

Module IV: Service Quality

Concept of service quality, Gap model of service quality, measuring & improving service quality, concept of
SERVQUAL system, concept of CRM & enhancing quality through it. Introduction to Six Sigma.

Module V: Managing Service Personnel

Role of service personnel and developing customer-focused personnel. Job characteristics. Internal marketing,
Strategies for delivering quality through people.

Module VI: Pricing and Distribution for Services

Price determinants, pricing modifications. Approaches to pricing services. Pricing strategies linking to value
definitions. Customer-focused pricing. Channel structures, distribution-growth options. Service industries:
insurance, banking, air transportation, courier, education etc.

Project Based Learning

Service Marketing Project Presentation: Presentations should provide details about the chosen firm and identify
the challenges facing this firm in the current environment. Following this brief introduction, groups will present
their solution.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Clow Kenneth E. and Kurtz David L., Services marketing operations, management and strategy, biztantra
innovations in management, John Willey & Sons
References:
• Valarie A Zeithaml and mary J Bitner, Services Marketing, Third Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Companies
• Christopher lovelock, Service Marketing (people, technology and strategy), 2001, Fifth Edition, Pearson
Education.
• Rampal M.K., Gupta S.L., Service Marketing, 2006 Galgotia Publishing Company.
 INTERNATIONAL MARKETING
Course Code: BBA 506 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
After giving students an introduction of marketing management, it is necessary to give them an overview about
the international scenario keeping in view the ever growing importance of international market.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Meaning, scope and challenges of international marketing. International dimensions of marketing, international
marketing v/s domestic marketing. Benefits of International Marketing.

Module II: Global Business Environment

WTO and its impact on international business operations. Tariff and non-tariff barriers. Regional economic
groupings and their significance.

Module III: International Marketing Environment

International marketing environment- Geographical, demographic, economic, political, legal, socio cultural
environment- Elements of culture. Cultural challenges Business customs and practices. Emerging markets and
marketing challenges.

Module IV: Planning for International Marketing

International Marketing Research and Information System. Modes of entering into foreign markets.
International Product Life Cycle. International market segmentation, targeting and positioning.

Module V: International Marketing Decisions

International pricing strategy- Factors influencing price, pricing methods. Global Branding Decisions.
International distribution – Types and functions of foreign distribution channels; distribution logistics.
Promotion Decisions- International advertising, selection of media, challenges of international advertising,
personal selling publicity and sales promotion.

Module VI: The Indian Scenario

The Export Import Scene in India. EXIM Policy. Export Documentation, Export Procedure

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Onkvist Sak Onkvist, Shaw John J. International Marketing Analysis & Strategy, Third Edition, Prentice
Hall.

References:
• Graham Cateora, International Marketing, Twelfth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill.
• Keegan Warren J. Global Marketing Management, Seventh Edition, Prentice Hall.
 FINANCIAL SERVICES

Course Code: BBA 507 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The aim of the course is to orient the student to the recent changes in the financial institutions and financial
services industry and their link to economic development. The financial institutions and services are changing
rapidly. A course that merely describes the existing institutions and services will not prepare you for the change.
Thus you must familiarize yourself with the services available in the industry today and understand why they are
the way they are and why they are changing. An Indian perspective will be given.

Course Contents:

Module I: Financial Services

Introduction: An Overview of Indian Financial System, Coponents of Indian Financial System, Role of
Financial Services in economic development. Evolution of Financial Services Sector in India. Investment
Banking: Introduction and Functions

Module II: Venture Capital & Depository System

Venture Capital , Stages of Venture Capital Financing, International Experiences in Venture Capital Financing,
Venture Capital Financing in India, Pitfalls to be Avoided.
Overview of Depository system, Key features of depository system in India, Agreement between depository
and Issuer, Organisation and functions of NSDL and CDSL. Brief introduction of BSE, NSE, NYSE AND
NASDAQ

Module III: Factoring & Forfaiting

Factoring Services – Features, Merits and Demerits, Cost Benefit Analysis. Forfaiting: Features, Merits &
Limitations

Module IV: Leasing and Hire Purchase

Development and Definition of Leasing and Hire Purchase, Types of Leasing, Differences between Leasing and
Hire-Purchase. Pricing Methodology and Financial Analysis, Taxation, Legal Framework for Leasing and Hire
Purchase Companies.

Module V: Mutual funds

The concept & Role of M/Fs, History of M/Fs in India, Types of M/Fs, Fund Structure & Constituent,
Selecting the Right Investment Products for Investors, Comparison of Investment products, Measuring of Risk
In M/Fs, Recommending model Portfolios & selecting the right funds.

Module VI: Credit rating

Credit rating concept of Credit rating, Types of credit rating, Advantages and Disadvantages of credit rating,
Credit rating agencies and their methodology and process, Individual Credit rating, Sovereign Credit Rating
Practices.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Khan, M. Y. Indian Financial System, Tata McGraw Hill
• Khan, M.Y. Financial Services, Tata McGraw Hill
 PRINCIPLES OF INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT
Course Code: BBA 508 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The course aims at equipping the undergraduate students with financial tools, which help in making decisions
for investment in financial securities. It is also aimed at imparting a basic understanding of the influence of
changing economic scenario on the decisions and important theories and models, techniques and regulations
underlying these decisions.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to Investments
Investments: Introduction, Avenues for Investment including introduction to derivatives, Investments and
Speculation, Features of a Good Investment programme, Process of Investment Decision Making, Risks
involved in Investments including the concept of beta, Principle of Dominance.

Module II: The Stock Markets in India

Nature and Functions of the Stock Market, OTCEI & BSE, NSE & Role of Depositories, Market Indices, The
Brokerage Business

Module III: Valuation of Securities

Bond Valuation and Analysis, Preference share Valuation and Analysis, Equity Share Valuation

Module IV: Security Analysis

Fundamental Security Analysis, Technical Security Analysis

Module V: Portfolio Analysis and Management

Portfolio Analysis: Risk and Return, Portfolio Choice: Utility Theory and Indifference Curves, Markowitz:
Portfolio Selection Model, Capital Asset Pricing Model, Sharpe's Single Index Model and Portfolio Evaluation
Treynor, Sharpe and Jensen.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Sharpe, William F. Alexander and Bailey, Investments, Sixth Edition Prentice - Hall, India

References:
• Fisher, Donald E & Jordan, Ronald., Securities Analysis & Portfolio Management:, Sixth Edition, Prentice
Hall
• Haugen, Robert. Modern Investment Theory, Fifth Edition, Prentice Hall
• Bhalla, V. K. Investment Management, S. Chand & Co.
 FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES
Course Code: BBA 509 Credit Units: 04
Course Objective:
This course attempts to give an overview of the derivatives market with special reference to India. A financial
manager must understand how derivatives can be used to the advantage of the firm. An introduction to
Derivatives will equip the students to understand the mechanics of this highly intriguing & innovative field of
study

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to financial derivatives
Introduction to derivative trading, Characteristics of derivatives, Underlying assets (Equity Bonds/loans,
Foreign Currency, and Commodity), Importance of derivatives as an investment option, introduction to types of
derivatives, Participants in derivatives market (Hedgers, Speculators, Arbitrageurs). Evolution of Derivative
markets in India.

Module II: Forwards & Futures

Forward contracts: Limitations of forward markets, Differences between forwards and futures, Early delivery,
extension & cancellation of forward contracts, Futures terminology, pricing of futures contract, Introduction to
currency futures, Interest rate futures, Treasury bond futures, Eurodollar futures, commodity futures, Index
futures & Stock Futures (Hedging, speculation and arbitrage).

Module III: Options: Fundamentals

Terminology - call, put, writer, buyer, premium, intrinsic value, time value, expiry date, settlement date, strike
price, ATM, OTM & ITM, Options positions(payoff graphs), Types of Stock options, futures options vs spot
options, Options on stock Indices, currencies & futures, Warrants & executive stock options, Exotic options

Module IV: Principles of trading & Hedging with Options

Option Valuation: The BS-Merton Model (Solving for BS model, assumption application and criticism),
Trading strategies - Option trading using bull and bear spreads (payoff graphs)
Module V: Swaps
Terminology:- LIBOR, MIBOR, Swap basis, Interest rate swaps, Determining LIBOR/MIBOR swap zero rates,
Currency swaps: Various types of swaps & features, Introduction to Swaptions.

Module VI: Recent Developments

New Derivative contracts including Credit Derivatives, Weather Derivatives, Energy Derivatives, etc. Role of
derivatives in the economic meltdown of 2007 - 2008, Major Derivative mishaps in the world including The
Baring Bank disaster (1995), The Sumitomo corporation scandal(1996) the Swiss Bank scam (2011), US
Subprime Crisis (2008), Forex derivatives scam by Indian banks (25 lakh crores)

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Hull, John C, An introduction to futures and options markets, Second Edition Prentice Hall of India

References:
Gupta, S .L., Financial Derivatives Theory, Concepts and Problem 2005, Prentice - Hall, India
 ORGANISATIONAL DEVELOMENT AND CHANGE
Course Code: BBA 510 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
It aims to provide a conceptual input of meaning, characteristics, process and influences of organizational
development and change management. It gives comprehensive overview of human capital from the prospective
of organizational excellence in the light of transitional phase of Indian Industries. It gives the imperatives,
assumptions, role and skills of O.D. specialists through experiential learning methods it facilitates teamwork,
team building and the concepts of transformational Leadership.

Course Contents:

Module I: Organizational Development

Nature, basic assumptions, characteristics & importance, values and assumption underlying organization
development (OD).

Module II: Organizational Development Process

OD process, Steps involved in OD, Role of Managers, Factors affecting OD, Techniques of organizational
diagnosis - Questionnaires, interviews

Module III: Structural and Comprehensive OD interventions

Classification of OD interventions: Human Process, Techno structural, HRM, Strategic interventions,
Evaluation and institutionalization of interventions.

Module IV: Change Management

Need for the change, Factors causing change, environmental, Technological, Legal, Political, Social and cultural
factors of change, Models and Techniques involved in change management,

Module V: Implementation of Change Models

Lewin’s force field analysis, Kotler’s eight step model, action research model.
Total Quality Management, Business Process Reengineering, Learning Organization.

Module VI: Trends in OD

Role & styles of OD practitioners, OD-HRD interface; OD in global settings; contemporary OD issues for
today’s managers.

Assignment : Experiential learning: Managing leadership talent to support change (Class activity) Designing
organizational diagnosis tool (Class activity)
Cases study: Change management success and failure

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• French W L & Bell, Organizational Development, Prentice Hall of India
• Ravishankar S & Mishra R.K., Organizational Development, Visison Books Pvt. Ltd.
References:
• Pereek U &Rao T V, Designing &Managing HR System, Oxford &IBH Publishing company
• Pereek U & Rao T V Making Organization Roles Effective, TATA McGraw Hill
 TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT
Course Code: BBA 511 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to help students acquire and enhance their knowledge of how to plan, develop,
carry out, and evaluate training and executive development programmes in Business Organizations.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction
Meaning and definition of training, Training vs education, Culture and Context, Introduction to training
Strategy.

Module II: Process of Training

Establishing objectives, training need assessment (Person Analysis, Task Analysis, Organization Analysis,
designing the programs, training methods, trainers and training styles, Introduction to Management
Development program.

Module III: Evaluation of Training & Development

Training Evaluation – Need for evaluation, Measuring Training Effectiveness, Concept of Return on
Investment, Cost – Benefit Analysis, Models of Training Evaluation.

Module IV: Training Systems

Action Research for better training, knowledge management, career development, succession planning, diversity
training, orientation training.

Module V: Changes in Training Needs for Modern Organizations.Concept and Need for Learning
Organizations, Trainer Identification) & Training for Trainers, Leadership, Basics of Sensitivity Training,
Computer Based Training. Training transfer to workplace

Module VI: Development

Executive Development – significance & nature, identifying development needs and setting objectives.
Techniques of development and advantages. Role of HRD in 21 st Century.

Assignment – Visit an Organization & find out their training needs.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Lynton R.P and Pareek U (1990). Training for Development. Vistaar Publications, New Delhi

References:
• Goldstein, Training in Organizations, Thomson Learning.
• Pareek Udai, Training and Development, Tata McGraw Hill.
• Srivastava, S., Recruitment, Selection & Retention, ABS Course pack, 1999.
Wexley, K & Lathan Gary, Developing & Training HR in Organization. P. Hall, 2002.
 INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Course Code: BBA 512 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The main objective of this course is to explore the dynamics of global business development and to prepare the
students about examining significant business investment opportunities and maximization of returns in context
with human resources.

Course Contents:
Module I: Internationalization
Broad overview of International Human Resource Management features, elements, benefits and limitations,
Domestic and International HRM, Factors influencing the global work environment.

Module II: Strategic Human Resource Management

Strategic HRM, Aims of SHRM, Integrating the business and HR strategies, Formulating HR strategy, Content
of HR strategies, Relationship between International Strategy and SIHRM.

Module III: Cross-Cultural Management

Cultural diversity in consortia formation, Developing cognitive framework to appreciate the impact of culture
on managerial behaviour, Introduction, Understanding Culture, Key Concepts, Determinants of Cultural
Identity, Frameworks for Mapping the Culture, Concept of Geert Hofstede

Module IV: International Recruitment, Training and Rewards

Recruiting from Host country, Reward strategies for international execution, the expatriate approach,
international values and reward policy, designing rewards for the international business unit, Training Global
executives.

Module V: Performance Management and Compensation in International Business

Context for international performance management, framework for performance management, Compensation,
issue of double taxation.

Module VI: Best HR Practices

Emerging Trends, North America, South America, some key pointers, Northern Europe, Value based
management in Nordic countries, China emerging economy,, Japan – a culture of enfolding relationship, Trends
and Future of HR in high performing Co., Essay on Dream Organisational.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Dowling, Peter; Title: International human resource management - Managing people in a multinational
context; Publisher: Thompson.

References:
• By Monir H. Tayeb International Human Resource Management: A Multinational Company Perspective,
Oxford University Press.
• By Paul Sparrow, Chris Brewster, Hilary Harris; Pub. Taylor and Francis, Globalizing Human Resource
Management; Oxford University Press.
 RELATIONAL DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Course Code: BBA 513 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to give knowledge of the Relational Database Management Software, in particular
ORACLE. It is expected that a student at the end of the course would attain a good conceptual and practical
understanding of databases.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to RDBMS
RDBMS: Introduction, Relational Model concept and Relational data structure, Relational Model constrains as
domain constraints, Key constraints, Entity integrity constraints, Referential Integrity constraints.

Module II: Introduction to oracle

Tools of Oracle, Features of oracle.

Module III: SQL

Overview of SQL, Component of SQL (DDL, DML, DCL), Advantage of SQL, Basics of syntax writing, Data
Definition Language, Create command, Data type, Constraints, ALTER & DROP, UPDATE & DELETE
Commands, Substitutions variables, Run time Environments variables, SELECT Commands Basic Constructs,
Functions, Nested Queries, Correlated queries, Views, Sequence, User Management Commands.

Module IV: PL/SQL

Basic features, Block Structure of a PL/SQL Programs, Control Structures, Exception Handling, Cursor,
Procedure, Functions and Triggers, Internet features of Oracle.

Module V: Database Technologies

Client/Server Databases, Distributed Databases, Web Databases

Module VI: Administration of Oracle databases

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

• Oracle8i: The Complete Reference, McGraw Hill

 SOFTWARE PROJECT DESIGN AND ANALYSIS
Course Code: BBA 514 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This module will introduce and develop concepts that are seen as central to the effective management of
software projects. You will be expected to develop an appreciation of key, generic project management concepts
and techniques as well as those techniques and approaches that are specific to the management of software
projects. As well as knowing the core techniques, you will be expected to apply them across a limited range of
software project management scenarios.

Course Contents:
Module I: An Introduction to Software Project Management
Management Spectrum, People, Product, Process, Project the W5HH Principle. The Profile of a Project, Project
start-up; development; completion; operation, Role of SDLC models (such as the waterfall model, incremental
model, spiral model) and structured methods (such as SSADM)

Module II: Project Metrics

Measures, Metrics & Indicators, Metrices in the process & project domain, Metrics for software quality.

Module III: Software Project Planning

Discussion of network diagrams and critical path analysis (CPA). Planning aids, simple manual techniques such
as Gantt charts through to more complex and sophisticated planning tools, Estimation tools (Delphi technique,
CoCoMo)

Module IV: Risk Analysis & Management

Risks Risk Identification, Risk Projection, Risk Refinement, Mitigation, Monitoring & Management.

Session V: Scheduling and Resourcing

Concepts of lateness, Defining task set for software project, Defining a Task Network, Scheduling, Earned value
analysis, error tracking, project plan

Module VI: Software Configuration Management

Baselines, SCM Process, Identification of objects in s/w configuration, version control, change control,
Configuration audit, status reporting, hands on MS-Project.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Software Engineering by Pressmann.

• Structured System Analysis & Design by Whitten
 PROGRAMMING WITH MICROSOFT VISUAL BASIC
Course Code: BBA 515 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to offer the students all key concepts and capabilities to be bound in Microsoft
Visual Basic. This course seeks to provide very clear and straightforward implementation of key features of
Visual Basic with explanations of each work. The student should walk away with an in-depth understanding of
how to utilize all of Visual Basic’s capabilities for building industrial strength enterprise application and
understand the process of software development. The course will make the students learn real world context.

Course Contents:
Module I: Visual Basic Overview
Opening, writing and running Visual Basic Program, Working with controls and defining their properties,
working with menus and dialog boxes.

Module II: Programming Fundamentals

Visual Basic Variables and Operators, using Decision Structure, using Iterations and Timers.

Module III: Creating the Perfect User Interface

Working with Forms, Printers and Error Handling, adding Artwork and Special Effects

Module IV: Managing Corporate Data

Using Modules and Procedures, working with Arrays, exploring text files and string processing, managing
access databases.

Module V: Professional Edition Tools and Techniques

Word Processing with the Rich Text box control, Displaying progress and status information, Integrating music
and video with the multimedia MCI control, using the windows API.

Module VI: Advanced Database Programming

Managing data with the Flex Grid Control, Exploring database handling using DAO, RDO and ADO, Handling
the Recordset.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• Michael Halvorson: Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0 – Prentice Hall of India P Ltd.

References:
• Noel Jerke: The Complete Reference Visual Basic 6.0 – Tata Mc-Graw Hill
• Smith & Amundsen: Database Programming with Visual Basic 6 – Techmedia
• Rob Thayer: Visual Basic 6 Unleashed – Techmedia
 LAW OF CRIMES
Course Code: BBA 516 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The basic objective of this course is to give an insight of the basic principles of crime and the law determining
criminal liability and punishment.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to Law of Crimes
Extent and operation of the Indian Penal Code, Definition of Crime, Fundamental elements of crime, Stages in
commission of a crime, Intention, Preparation, Attempt: Essentials of the attempt, Impossible attempt,
attempt and preparation distinguished

Module II: General Explanations and Exceptions

Definitions, Constructive joint liability, Mistake, Judicial and Executive acts, Accident, Necessity, Infancy,
Insanity, Intoxication, Consent,. Good faith Private Defense

Module III: Abetment and Criminal Conspiracy

Law relating to Abetment, Accomplice vs. Co-accused.

Module IV: Punishment

Theories: Deterrent, Retributive, Preventive, Expiatory and Reformative Theory Punishment under the IPC:
Fine, Life Imprisonment, And Death Sentence/Capital Punishment

Module V: Offences affecting Body

Offences affecting the Human body, Offences against Women and Offences against Property.

Module VI: Offences: Defamation and related to property

Defamation and offences relating to documents and property marks

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• Ratanlal & Dhirajlal – The Indian Penal Code
• H.S. Gaur – Penal Law of India

References:
• Glanville Williams – Textbook of criminal law
• Russel on Crime
 INVESTMENT AND COMPETITION LAW

Course Code: BBA 517 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
Understanding the basics of investment and competition laws of India in the contest of new economic order.

Course Contents:
Module I: Competition Law
Background, Prohibitions and Competition Commission of India

Module II: Corporate Finance and regulatory framework

Security Contract (Regulation) Act 1956, Depositories Act 1996, The Securitization and Reconstruction of
Financial Assets and enforcement of security Interest Act, 2002

Module III: Regulatory framework for foreign trade, multinational companies

Foreign Trade (Development & Regulation) Act 1992, UNCTAD Draft Model on Trans – national
Corporations, Control and regulation of foreign companies in India, Foreign collaborations and joint ventures

Module IV: Foreign Exchange Management

Background, Policies and Authorities and FERA Vs FEMA

Module V: Investor’s Protection Law

Provisions under SEBI Act, Important provisions of Consumer Protection Act, IRDA

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

(Compulsory Readings (Latest editions only): Competition Act 2002)

• Security Contract (Regulation ), Act 1956

• SEBI, Act 1992
• Depositories, Act 1996
• Foreign Trade (Development & Regulation), Act 1992
• Foreign Exchange Management, Act 1999
• Taxman’s Student’s Guide to Economic Laws
 LAW AND TECHNOLOGY
Course Code: BBA 518 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
Understanding the legal measures for handling issues related Technological development in various fields. To
develop a better understanding of Techno- legal aspects for the development of society and business.

Course Contents:
Module I: E-Commerce
Online contracting, online securities offering and E-Banking

Module II: Cyber Crimes

Obscenity, Defamation, Hacking and Cracking Crime through Mobile Phones

Module III: Genetic and Medical Technologies

Regulation of Genetic Technology and Laws for Medical Technology

Module IV: Broadcasting

Regulation and Control of Broadcasting and Law relating to Cable Television Network

Module V: Jurisdiction
Concept of Territorial Jurisdiction for Handling Technological issues. And Protection against the anticipated
threats (outcome of technological advancement)

Module VI: Information Technology Act, 2000

Introduction to Information Technology: Meaning and Definition, Digital Signature, electronic governance,
offences Cyber regulation Appellate Tribunal

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Compulsory Readings (Latest editions only)

Text:
• Relevant Legislations and Conventions
• Information Technology Act - Prof. S. R. Bhansali
• Cyber Law ( Text and Cases ), Gerald R. Ferrera, WEST THOMSON

References:
• Cyber Crime - Vakul Sharma
 BUSINESS POLICY AND STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
Course Code: BBA 601 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The aim of the course is to orient the students in theories and practices of Strategic Management so as to apply
the acquired knowledge in formulation and implementation of strategies for better decision-making. This is a
gateway to the real world of management and decision-making.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Planning, Evolution of strategic management, Concept of corporate strategy, Patterns of strategy developments,
Levels of strategy.

Module II: Mission and Vision

Vision and Mission, Formulation of Vision and Mission Statements, Different Perspectives on Vision and
Mission, Business Definition and concept of a business model.

Module III: Strategic Analysis

Competitor Analysis using Porter’s 5-Forces model, Environment Threat and Opportunity Profile (ETOP),
Internal Analysis: Building Organization Capability Profile and Strategic Advantage Profile (SAP), Building
competencies using Value Chain Analysis, Environmental analysis and dealing with uncertainty, Scenario
analysis and SWOT analysis.

Module IV: Strategic Choice

Strategic alternatives at corporate level: expansion, stability, retrenchment and combination, Strategic choice
models for multi-business companies- BCG, GE Nine Cell Matrix, Hofer's Model, Strickland's Grand Strategy
Selection Matrix, Strategic Choice - Michael Porter's Approach: Michael Porter's Model, Generic competitive
strategies, Cost advantage, Differentiation, Technology and Competitive advantage, Co-evolving, Patching.

Module V: Strategic Implementation

Operationalizing strategy, Institutionalizing strategy - Developing short-term objectives and policies, Functional
tactics and rewards. Structural implementation, Strategic control, Mc Kinsey 7-S Framework

Module VI: Recent Developments

Recent Developments in the field of strategy: Use of Balanced Scorecard approach, Corporate Governance and
Corporate Social Responsibility, Corporate sustainability.

Examination Scheme:

Components Mid term HA//C/V EE

Weightage (%) 15 5 70

(Home Assignment; Class Test; Viva, A - Attendance; EE - End Semester Examination)

Text & References:

Text:
• Business Policy and Strategic Management, Jauch & Glueck
• Strategic Management, Formulation, Implementation & Control, Pearce & Robinson (McGraw Hill),
(9th Edition)

References:
• Corporate Strategy, Lynch (Pearson),(4 th Edition)
• Strategic Planning, Ramaswamy & Namakumari
• Competitive Advantage, Michael E. Porter
• Crafting & Executing Strategy, The Quest for Competitive Advantage, Thomson, Strickland, Gamble
& Jain (McGraw Hill, (12th Ed.)
 ANALYTICAL SKILL BUILDING
Course Code: BBM 601 Credit Units: 04
Course Objective:
To develop in students skills of analytical and logical reasoning which will be a great asset
for them in their future careers.
Course Contents:

Module I: Quantitative Reasoning

Number System & Number Theory, Percentage method, Profit & Loss, Speed, Time &
Distance

Module II: Quantitative Reasoning

Ratio, Proportion, Mixtures & Alligations, Set Theory, Co-ordinate Geometry (2-D only),
Mensuration

Module III: Data Interpretation

Bar Graph / Line Graph / Pie Chart / Table / Table Three Dimensional or Triangular Bar
Diagram / Misc. (Radar, Area, Network) / Caselets.

Module IV: Data Sufficiency & Logical reasoning

Mathematical / reasoning based. Data Decoding: Analytical: Assumption, Courses of Action,
Argument, Weak / Strong, Pictorial Analysis
Examination Scheme:
Components A CT C EE
Weightage (%) 5 15 5 70

Text & References:

• The practice of Questions can be done from any reasoning book.

Course Outcomes
• This course is aimed at enhancing students’ skills in the Quantitative aptitude.
 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Course Code: BME 601 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course is oriented to familiarize the students with fundamentals of Production and Operations Management,
and tools and techniques used in taking decisions in operating and controlling the Production and Service
Industries. Further this course will familiarize the students with Quality Management and Current Quality Tools
used in Production and Service Industries.

Course Contents:

Module I: Overview of Production and Operation Management

Brief history of Production and Operation Management, The Service Revolution, Definition, Factors Affecting
Operations Management, Role- Scope and Function of Production and Operation Management, Criteria of
Performance for the Production and Operation Management, Operation Strategies, Effect of Growth of Service
Sector on Operations Management.

Module II: Demand Forecasting & Capacity Planning

Qualitative Forecasting Methods (Educated Guess, Consensus, Delphi Method, Historical Analogy, Market
Research), Quantitative Forecasting (Linear Regression, Moving Average, Weighted Moving Average,
Exponential Smoothing with Numerical), Definition of Production Capacity.

Module III: Facility Location and Facility Layout

Factors Affecting Location Decisions, Quantitative Techniques in Facility Location (Factor Rating Method,
Centre of Gravity Method, Load Distance Method, Break Even Analysis Method – Numerical for each method),
Utilization of GIS in Plant Location.
Principles of Facility Layout, Types of Layout (Process Layout, Product or Line Layout, Fixed Position Layout),
Basics of Line Balancing -No Numerical), Merits and Demerits of Product and Process Layout.

Module IV: Production Planning and Control

Capacity Planning, Aggregate Planning, Master Production Scheduling.
Production Planning and Control Systems (Push System, Pull System).
Job Shop Scheduling and its Criteria (Mean Flow Time, Mean Tardiness, Number of Tardy Jobs - Numerical),
Single Processor Job Shop Scheduling (Due Date Method, Shortest Processing Time Method - Numerical).
Two Machines Scheduling – Johnson’s Rule – Numerical,.
General Job Shop Scheduling – Earliest Due Date Method – Numerical.

Module V: Inventory Management, Supply Chain Management & Logistics Management

Basic Concepts of Inventory Management, Lead time, Safety Stock, Elements of Inventory Costs.
Inventory Models – EOQ –Derivation and Numerical, EOQ with Quantity Discount – Numerical, Fixed Order
Quantity Model - No Numerical, Fixed Order Period Model - No Numerical.
Basic Concepts, Objectives of Supply Chain Management, Decision Phases in Supply Chain Management.
Basic Concepts of Logistics Management, Warehousing, Material Handling Equipments.

Module VI: Foundations of Quality, Quality Control, TQM

Concept of Quality - Gurus of quality a Comparative Discussion on Edward Deeming, David Juran and Philip
Crosby - their Philosophy contribution and limitations.
Statistical Quality Control (Mean and Range Charts, c Chart, p Chart – Numerical), Basic Concepts of
Acceptance Sampling, OC Curves – No Numerical.
Basic Concepts of TQM, 5 –S and Kaizen, 6-Sigma.
ISO Standards, and ISO Certification.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70
Text & References:
Text:
• Buffa, E.S, Sarin RK,2008, Modern Production/ Operations Management, John Wiley & Sons

References:
• Chary SN, 2008, Production and Operations Management, McGraw Hill.
• Gaither N, Greg F, 2002, Operations Management, Thompson South Western.
• Everett E., Adam Jr. & Ronald J Ebert, Production and Operation Management, Fifth edition, Prentice Hall
of India.
• Monden Y, 1993, Toyota Production System, Industrial Engineering and Management Press – Institute of
Industrial Engineering, Norcross, Georgia.
 PUBLIC RELATIONS AND CORPORATE IMAGE
Course Code: BBA 604 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course is aimed at developing in students an understanding of Corporate Image and the tools of Public
relations applicable in today’s business scenario.

Course Contents:
Module I: Corporate image
Understanding Corporate Image, Corporate Image Building: A Marketing Exercise, an overview to Marketing,
understanding the Marketing Mix – Product, Price, Place, Promotion

Module II: Marketing Communications

Role in Corporate Image Building, introduction to the tools used for marketing communication – Advertising,
Visual Corporate Identity, Public Relations, Sales Promotion, Direct Marketing, Sales Management,
Sponsorships, Exhibitions, Packaging, Merchandising and Point-of-Purchase Materials, E-Marketing and
Customer Service

Module III: Corporate Image and Society

Ways to build corporate image and sustainable reputation, concept of corporate social responsibility and
building corporate image though its relationship between identity image and reputation.

Module IV: Public Relations

Understanding Public Relations, Role and Scope of PR, Corporate Image and PR, PR as part of Marketing
Communications. In-house PR, PR Agencies, Modes of PR and Media Handling, PR Events, Crisis
Management in Public Relations.

Module V: PR Publications
In-house Journals, Ghost Writing, Media Writing, Press releases, brochures.

Module VI: Research in Public Relations

Building Information Resources, Areas of PR research: Public Opinion Research, Media Tracking, Content
Analysis, Campaign Examination, Benchmark Studies

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Public Relations: Principles, Cases and Problems, H. Frazier Moore, Frank B. Kalupa

References:
• Marketing Management, Philip Kotler
• Integrated Marketing Communications, PR Smith with Jonathan Taylor
• IMC, Tom Duncan
 -

Annexure’ CD-01’

UG: Semester VI
L T P/ SW/F TOTAL
Course Title: Communication Skills VI
Credit Units: 1 S W CREDIT
Course Code: BCU 641 UNITS
Course Objective: The main emphasis of this course is to enable 1 0 0 0 1
students to learn the dynamics of social communication and to demonstrate the ability to learn the
nuances of informal communication.
Prerequisites: NIL

Course Contents / Syllabus:

1. Module I Social Communication Essentials 30% Weightage
• Small talk
• Building rapport
• Expand social and Corporate Associations
• Informal Communication: Grapevine, Chat
2. Module II Workplace Interpersonal Skills 25% Weightage
• Understanding Social Communication in Workplace
environment.
• Employee feedback: Assess employee performance and
satisfaction.
• Simulation
➢ Humour in Communication-Use of ‘Puns’
➢ Entertainment and Communication (Infotainment)
• Infotainment and Social Media
• Entertainment in Journalism
➢ Social Networking
3. Module III Visual Code / Social Etiquette 35% Weightage
• Power Dressing
• Fine Dining
• Office Party Etiquette
• Business Travel Etiquette
➢ Work Place and Business Etiquette
• Proper Greetings
• Thank You Notes
• Telephonic Manners/ Voice Mail Etiquette
• Business Salutation Etiquette
• Guest Etiquette
• Cubicle Etiquette
• Business Card Etiquette
➢ Different Cultural Etiquette & Protocol
4. Module IV Prose 10% Weightage
• Secret of Socrates - Dale Carnegie
• My Financial Career-Stephen Leacock
• The Luncheon - W. Somerset Maugham
• The National Flag - Jawahar Lal Nehru
All the four stories will be discussed in one class
One Long Question will be set in the Exam from the Text
Student Learning Outcomes:
• To communicate contextually in specific personal and
5. professional situations with courtesy.
• To inject humour in their regular interactions.
 • To strengthen their creative learning process through
individual expression and collaborative peer activities.
Pedagogy for Course Delivery:
• Workshop
6. • Group Discussions
• Presentations
• Lectures
Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
7. Theory L/T Lab/Practical/Studio End Term
(%) (%) Examination
100% NA 70%
Theory Assessment (L&T):
Continuous Assessment/Internal
End Term
Assessment
Examination
Components
(Drop CIE Attn
down)
Weightage 25% 5% 70%
(%)
Text: Krizan, Merrier, Logan & Williams. Effective Business Communication, New Delhi: Cengage,
2011
• Communication and Organizational Culture. Keyton. Joann. Sage Publications
• Social Communication (Frontiers of Social Psychology).Fiedler, Klaus. Psychology Press
Reference: Cypherpunks: Freedom and the Future of the Internet. Assange, Julian Assange. OR Books.
Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals
 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - VI

Course Code: BSU 643 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
To develop an understanding the concept of stress its causes, symptoms and consequences.
To develop an understanding the consequences of the stress on one’s wellness, health, and work performance.

Course Contents:

Module I: Stress
Meaning & Nature
Characteristics
Types of stress

Module II: Stages and Models of Stress

Stages of stress
The physiology of stress
Stimulus-oriented approach.
Response-oriented approach.
The transactional and interactional model.
Pressure – environment fit model of stress.

Module III: Causes and symptoms of stress

Personal
Organizational
Environmental

Module IV: Consequences of stress

Effect on behaviour and personality
Effect of stress on performance
Individual and Organizational consequences with special focus on health

Module V: Strategies for stress management

Importance of stress management
Healthy and Unhealthy strategies
Peer group and social support
Happiness and well-being

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal

Viva based on personal journal
Assessment of Behavioural change as a result of training
Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Examination Scheme:

Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for

Test (CT) Success (JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25

Text & References:

• Blonna, Richard; Coping with Stress in a Changing World: Second edition

• Pestonjee, D.M, Pareek, Udai, Agarwal Rita; Studies in Stress and its Management
• Pestonjee, D.M.; Stress and Coping: The Indian Experience
• Clegg, Brian; Instant Stress Management – Bring calm to your life now
 FRENCH
Course Code: FLU 644 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To strengthen the language of the students both in oral and written so that they can:
i) express their sentiments, emotions and opinions, reacting to information, situations;
ii) narrate incidents, events;
iii) perform certain simple communicative tasks.

Course Contents:
Module D: pp. 157 – 168 – Unité 12

Unité 12: s'évader

1) présenter, caractériser, définir
2) parler de livres, de lectures
3) préparer et organiser un voyage
4) exprimer des sentiments et des opinions
5) téléphoner
6) faire une réservation

Contenu grammatical:
1) proposition relative avec pronom relatif "qui", "que", "où" - pour
caractériser
2) faire + verbe

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre: Campus: Tome 1

 DISSERTATION

Course Code: BBA 655 Credit Units: 06

The Aims of the Dissertation

The aim of the dissertation is to provide you with an opportunity to further your intellectual and personal
development in your chosen field by undertaking a significant practical unit of activity, having an educational
value at a level commensurate with the award of your degree

The dissertation can be defined as a scholarly inquiry into a problem or issues, involving a systematic approach
to gathering and analysis of information / data, leading to production of a structured report.

The Dissertation Topic

It is usual to give you some discretion in the choice of topic for the dissertation and the approach to be adopted.
You will need to ensure that your dissertation is related to your field of specialisation.

Deciding this is often the most difficult part of the dissertation process, and perhaps, you have been thinking of a
topic for some time.

It is important to distinguish here between ‘dissertation topic’ and ‘dissertation title’. The topic is the specific
area that you wish to investigate. The title may not be decided until the dissertation has been written so as to
reflect its content properly.

Few restrictions are placed on the choice of the topic. Normally we would expect it to be:
relevant to business, defined broadly;
related to one or more of the subjects or areas of study within the core program and specialisation stream;
clearly focused so as to facilitate an in-depth approach, subject to the availability of adequate sources of
information and to your own knowledge;
of value and interest to you and your personal and professional development.

Planning your dissertation

This will entail following:
• Selecting a topic for investigation.
• Establishing the precise focus of your study by deciding on the aims and objectives of the dissertation, or
formulating questions to be investigated. Consider very carefully what is worth investigating and its
feasibility.
• Drawing up initial dissertation outlines considering the aims and objectives of the dissertation. Workout
various stages of dissertation
• Devising a timetable to ensure that all stages of dissertation are completed in time. The timetable should
include writing of the dissertation and regular meetings with your dissertation guide.

The dissertation plan or outline

It is recommended that you should have a dissertation plan to guide you right from the outset. Essentially, the
dissertation plan is an outline of what you intend to do, chapter wise and therefore should reflect the aims and
objectives of your dissertation.

There are several reasons for having a dissertation plan

• It provides a focus to your thoughts.
• It provides your faculty-guide with an opportunity, at an early stage of your work, to make constructive
comments and help guide the direction of your research.
• The writing of a plan is the first formal stage of the writing process, and therefore helps build up your
confidence.
• In many ways, the plan encourages you to come to terms with the reading, thinking and writing in a
systematic and integrated way, with plenty of time left for changes.
• Finally, the dissertation plan generally provides a revision point in the development of your dissertation
report in order to allow appropriate changes in the scope and even direction of your work as it progresses.

Keeping records
This includes the following:

• Making a note of everything you read; including those discarded.

• Ensuring that when recording sources, author’s name and initials, date of publication, title, place of
publication and publisher are included. (You may consider starting a card index or database from the outset).
Making an accurate note of all quotations at the time you read them.
• Make clear what is a direct a direct quotation and what is your paraphrase.

Dissertation format
All students must follow the following rules in submitting their dissertation.
• Front page should provide title, author, Name of degree/diploma and the date of submission.
• Second page should be the table of contents giving page references for each chapter and section.
• The next page should be the table of appendices, graphs and tables giving titles and page references.
• Next to follow should be a synopsis or abstract of the dissertation (approximately 500 words) titled:
Executive Summary.
• Next is the ‘acknowledgements’.
• Chapter I should be a general introduction, giving the background to the dissertation, the objectives of the
dissertation, the rationale for the dissertation, the plan, methodological issues and problems. The limitations
of the dissertation should also be hinted in this chapter.
• Other chapters will constitute the body of the dissertation. The number of chapters and their sequence will
usually vary depending on, among others, on a critical review of the previous relevant work relating to your
major findings, a discussion of their implications, and conclusions, possibly with a suggestion of the
direction of future research on the area.
• After this concluding chapter, you should give a list of all the references you have used. These should be
cross - references with your text. For articles from journals, the following details are required e.g.

Draper P and Pandyal K. 1991, The Investment Trust Discount Revisited, Journal of Business Finance and
Accounting, Vol18, No6, Nov, pp 791-832.

For books, the following details are required:

Levi, M. 1996, International Financial Management, Prentice Hall, New York, 3rd Ed, 1996

• Finally, you should give any appendices. These should only include relevant statistical data or material that
cannot be fitted into the above categories.

Guidelines for the assessment of the dissertation

While evaluating the dissertation, faculty guide will consider the following aspects:

Has the student made a clear statement of the objective or objective(s).

If there is more than one objective, do these constitute parts of a whole?
Has the student developed an appropriate analytical framework for addressing the problem at hand.
Is this based on up-to-date developments in the topic area?
Has the student collected information / data suitable to the frameworks?
Are the techniques employed by the student to analyse the data / information appropriate and relevant?
Has the student succeeded in drawing conclusion form the analysis?
Do the conclusions relate well to the objectives of the project?
Has the student been regular in his work?
Layout of the written report.

Examination Scheme:

Contents & Layout of the Report 30

Conceptual Framework 10
Objectives & Methodology 15
Implications & Conclusions 15
Viva/ Presentations 30

Total 100
 BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code: BBA 605 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to help the students understand and appreciate the theoretical concepts of brands.
To generate the ability to apply the concepts in real life.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction
Meaning and importance of brands. Brands v/s products. Challenges and opportunities of branding. Concept of
Brand Equity. Brand management process. Role of CRM in building brands.

Module II: Brand Positioning and value

Sources of brand equity. Brand Building. Implications of brand building. Brand positioning: Brand value.
Internal branding.

Module III: Brand Marketing

Criteria for choosing Brand elements. Building brand equity: Product strategy, pricing strategy. Integrated
marketing communication. Brand Personality, Brand Image, Celebrity endorsements. Concept of co-branding

Module IV: Brand Performance and Branding strategies

Brand value chain, Brand equity management system. Brand hierarchy. Designing branding strategy. Brand
extension: Concept, Advantages and disadvantages. Evaluating opportunities of brand extension , Managing
Brands over time ,Branding strategy over PLC.

Module V: Managing Brands

Brand Audit: Meaning, Need and Significance, Reinforcing Brands. Brands revitalization Managing brands
internationally, Standardization v/s customization. Global Brand strategy.
Project Based Learning
Branding of Product / Service /Brand Thyself
Your task is to develop a branding proposal of a product, Service or yourself.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Keller Kevin Lane, Strategic Brand Management: Building, Measuring and Managing Brand Equity,
Second Edititon, Printice Hall.
References:
• Jean Noel Kampferer, Kogan Page, Strategic Brand Management, Second Edition
• Understanding Brands, Cowley D.
 ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION
Course Code: BBA 606 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to familiarize students with advertising concepts and strategies, the methods and
tools used. Enabling them to develop advertising strategies and plans and to develop the judgment parameters
required in product management, to evaluate advertising.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Role of Promotion in Marketing Mix. Components of promotion mix viz Advertising Publicity, Personal selling,
Public relations and Sales promotion. Concept of integrated marketing communication.

Module II: Advertising

Need, scope objectives and importance of advertising, Strengths and Weaknesses of Advertising as a Promotion
Tool, role of advertising in current market, advertising and society- latest trends in advertisements different
types of advertisements.

Module III: Advertising Campaign Planning

Setting advertising goals and objectives- The DAGMAR Approach. Message strategies and tactics- Creative
approaches, Copywriting and testing. Advertising copy design. Copy layout, Advertising appeals and themes,
Classification of advertisement copies-Essentials of a good copy Ethics in advertising.

Module IV: Advertising Media and Agencies

Types of media, media planning and scheduling. Advertising budgets. Approaches to advertising budgeting.
Measuring advertising effectiveness. Advertising business in India. Rural advertising. Legal and ethical aspects
of advertising, Advertising and society. Advertising in international perspective.

Module V: Sales Promotion

Need, scope objectives and importance of sales promotion. Management of sales Promotion at the consumer,
trade and sales force levels. Strengths and weaknesses of Sales Promotion.

Module VI: Sales Promotion Strategy

Planning and designing sales promotion programme with specific reference to sales contest, trade in discount
coupons etc. sales display and merchandising. Latest trends in sales promotion.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Belch and Belch, Advertising and Promotion, Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill

References:
• Batra Rajeev, Aaker, David A and Myere John G. Advertising Management, Fifth Edition, Pearson
Education
• Advertising Management – Chunawalla
 RETAIL MANAGEMENT
Course Code: BBA 607 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
Keeping in view the growth of retail industry, the course has been designed to familiarize students with the
basics of retail industry and give them an overview about rural marketing practices.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Nature, scope and importance of retailing, retail competition theories, Retail management process, Influence of
changing environment on retailing viz demographic changes, lifestyle changes, technology changes (e-
business), Retail Environment.

Module II: Consumer Behavior in Retailing

Consumer Behavior in retailing, Buying decision process in retailing, Types of buying decision, market
segmentation for retailing, generational cohorts.

Module III: Retail Marketing Strategy& Customer Service

Types of retailers, multichannel retailing, Retail strategy concept & its elements, Strategic retail planning
process, Retail Pricing, Retail Promotion tool, Customer Loyalty Programme, global retailing growth strategies
& international market entry strategies, Advantages through customer service, Customer evaluation of service
quality, GAP model for improving service.

Module IV: Merchandise management

Retail Information system & supply chain management, Concept of merchandise management. Planning
Merchandise – organizing buying process, developing an assortment plan, allocating merchandise to stores
meeting vendors and establishing strategic relations with them, branding strategies for retail (e.g., private
labels).

Module V: Store management & visual merchandising

Store layout & space planning, atmospherics, Choosing store location, visual merchandising, Recruitment,
selection, Training, motivation, Compensation and Control of store employees.

Module VI: Rural Retailing

Introduction to rural retailing, Relevance, Importance and the Emerging Scenario of Rural markets, Major
problem areas in rural retailing, Strategies for Rural Retailing, Social and sustainability aspects of rural retailing.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Levy & Weitz, Retailing Management, Fifth edition, Tata McGraw Hill,
• Kashyap Pradeep, Raut Siddhartha, The Rural Marketing Book, 2006, Biztantra.

References:
• Retailing management, Swapna Pradhan, 3rd edition Tata McGrawhill.
• Retail Marketing Management, David Gilbert.
• Barry Berman & Joel R. Evans, Retail Management, A Strategic Approach, Ninth Edition, Pearson
Education.
 CORPORATE TAX PLANNING

Course Code: BBA 608 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To provide understanding of Direct Tax including Rules pertaining there to and application to different business
situations. To understand principles underlying the Service Tax and concepts of VAT .
Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction to Tax Management

Concept of tax planning, Tax avoidance and tax evasions, Corporate taxation.

Module II Income from business

Residential Status of companies, Taxable income under Business and Profession, Computation of Profit and
Gains from business profession, Deemed business profits, Assessment of Retail Business, Deemed incomes
(cash credit, unexplained investments, un explained money and other assets, unexplained expenditures,
investments and valuable articles not fully disclosed in books of accounts).

Module III: Deductions allowed under business and profession

Deduction Expressly allowed section 30-35, Depreciation deduction calculation, Setoff and carry forward of
unabsorbed depreciation section 32(2). Determining Actual Cost43(1), Set-off and Carry Forward Losses,
Bonus or commission to employees section, Interest on borrowed capital, Insurance premium 36(1(i)),
Employees contribution to provident fund, Bad debts 36, Revenue expenditure incurred by statutory
corporation, Banking transaction tax, Security transaction tax, Commodity transaction tax, provision for
adminisibility of general deduction 37(1),

Module IV: International accounting and Taxation

Comparison of GST of Two Western Country with India. Analysis of foreign financial statement, Accounting
standard: US GAAP, Indian GAAP, IAS, IFRS. Transfer Pricing – Meaning, measurement, strategic
considerations Norms & Practices, tax havens, Double taxation agreement among countries, Tax implication of
activities of foreign enterprise in India: Mode of entry and taxation respectively.
Module V: Introduction to Goods and Services Tax (GST)

Meaning, Scope and Significance of GST, Principles of sub summation and taxes subsumed, Classification of
goods and services with GST rates, Basic terminologies- CGST/SGST, IGST, Input Tax Credit, Transitional
Provisions, Electronic Commerce.

Module VI: Tax Planning and Financial Management Decisions

Tax planning relating to capital structure decision, Dividend policy, Inter – corporate, dividends and bonus
shares, Tax provisions relating to free trade zones, Infrastructure sector and backward areas, Tax incentives for
exports. Tax deductions and collection at source, Advance payment of tax.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & Reference:

Text:
• Lal & Vashisht, Direct Taxes, 29th Edition, Pearson

References:
• Singhania & Singhania, Income Tax, 39th Edition, Taxmann
 BANKING AND FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS
Course Code: BBA 609 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The aim of the course is to orient the finance students to the change in the banking industry. The financial
industry much like the computer industry is changing rapidly. The students will be familiarized with institutions
of today and developing an understanding why they are the way they are, and why they are changing is the core
aim of the course. An Indian perspective will be added but conceptually the Global frameworks will be used.

Module I: Introduction
Money, Process of Capital Formation., Banking and Financial Institutions and economic development, Role of
Development Banks in Industrial Financing.

Module II: Banking System & Operations.

Banking system and structure in India- Types of banks in operation and their functions, Retail and Wholesale
Banking, Near Banks, Rural Banking. Cooperative Banking. Universal Banking, Payment Banks, NBFCs- its
types; comparison between Banks and NBFCs; International Banking- financing exporters and importers –
Important ECGC Policies and guarantees governing export financing) Banking Operation: An overview
Principles of Lending, Study of Borrowers & Project Evaluation Criteria

Module III: Banking Sector Reforms

Provisions of Banking Regulation Act, Prudential Norms - Narsimhan Committee Recommendations,
Regulatory Institutions RBI & SEBI, Basle Committee Recommendations- I, II, III & IV. Asset Liability
Management in Commercial Banks.

Module IV: Insurance & Pension Institutions

Introduction to Insurance – Elements of Insurance Risk, Principles of Insurance, Types of Insurance – Life
Insurance and General Insurance Products including unit linked plans, Re-insurance, regulatory institution:
IRDA – Objective and key functions; Bancassurance- concepts, critical issues & functional aspects. Role of
Insurance companies in Industrial Financing, New Pension Scheme, Pension Fund Regulatory and
Development Authority (PFRDA) Role and guidelines.

Module V: Financial Inclusion

Concept, Financial Inclusion in India: Challenges, Scope of Financial Inclusion in banking activities & financial
services. Micro Finance as a tool of Financial inclusion: Evolution: Grameen Model, Self Help groups. Progress
in India, Principles of microfinance- institutional structures and delivery mechanisms. Enforcement and savings

Module VI: Trends in Banking

Banking Innovations. Marketing of banking services; Latest Banking Technology - Core banking solution
(CBS); RTGS, Internet banking, Personal Banking, ATMs, mobile banking; Banking Technology - ECS, debit,
credit and smart cards, Securitization (SARFAECI Act, SPV, ARC)

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE

Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• Khan,M. 3rd Reprint, 1998, Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Limited.
References:
• Cornett and Sauunders, 1999, Fundamentals of Financial Institutions Management, 1999
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited.
 ADVANCED CORPORATE FINANCE
Course Code: BBA 610 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The basic objective of this course is to acquaint the students with the latest developments in the field of
corporate finance. This course will be a step above Financial Management II where they will learn advanced
topics related to behavioural finance, corporate restructuring & corporate governance

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Objectives of Corporate finance. Shareholder wealth maximization. Agency Problems, Management
Compensation & measurement of Performance

Module II: Valuation Concepts

Valuation Models, Application of Valuation Model, EVA/MVA, Balanced scorecard and other
methods/measures of financial performance.

Module III: Corporate restructuring

Differential Efficiency & Financial Synergy: Theory of Mergers, Operating Synergy & Pure Diversification:
Theory of mergers, Costs and Benefits of Merger, Evaluation of Merger as a Capital Budgeting Decision,
Poison Pills, Turnaround Strategies, Tax Planning relating to mergers and Amalgamation

Module IV: Corporate Governance & Business Ethics

Implementation of Corporate Governance, Ethics and finance, Ethical practices in market place, corporate
responsibility, social audit and ethical investing.

Module V: Behavioural Finance

Introduction and Expected Utility, Non-Expected Utility Preferences, A review of classical probability theory,
Beliefs, Biases and Heuristics, Preferences and Anomalies in the Financial markets

Module VI: Strategic Cost management

Financial aspects of supply chain management, Operations management perspective on Costs, Strategic cost
analysis (using activity based costing, target costing and life cycle costing) and product pricing at Different
stages of product’s life cycle

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Brealey and Myers, Priciples of Corporate Finance, Eighth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited.

References:
• Ross, Westerfield and Jaffe, Seventeenth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill.
• Quiry, P., Dallocohio, M., YannLE Fur,.Antonio Salvi, Seventh Edition, John Wiley and Sons
 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND LABOUR LAW

Course Code: BBL 629 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to acquaint students with the origin and importance of Labour laws governing
general functioning of employees in an organisation and also to educate student with the important provisions
under these laws .This will enable them to develop the right perspective of this delicate responsibility to deal
with union constructively and to maintain industrial democracy.

Course Contents:

Module I: Basic Concepts

Background Study of Industrial Relations in India, Industrial Relations, Industrial Peace, Industrial unrest and
Industrial Discipline, Labour-Management Relations During Five Year Plans.Technological Change and
Industrial Relations.

Module II: Laws Relating to Industry

The factories Act, 1948 - Definition - Approval licencing and registration of factories - Notice by occupier,
Health, and welfare measures - weekly holidays. Leave with wages, Employment of women and young person -
Penalties and returns. The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947 - Definition – conciliation, court of enquiry and
voluntary process for the settlement of industrial disputes - power of the Govt. under ID Act - Instrument of
economic coercion - Strike & lock out, Lay off Retrenchment, Transfer and closures - Discharge and Dismissal -
Managements prerogative during pendency of proceeding – Work Committee, arbitration and adjudication.

Module III: Laws Relating to Remuneration

The Payment of Wages Act, 1936 - Definition - Rules for payment of wages and deductions from wage. The
Minimum Wages Act 1948 - Fixing of minimum wages, Procedure for raising minimum wage - Concept of
living wages, Fair wage and minimum wage. The Employees State Insurance Act 1948 - Definition -
Applicability of the Act - Insurable workmen - Contribution Benefit – Penalties,The Maternity Benefit Act 1961

Module IV: Laws Relating to Trade Union

The Trade Union Act 1926. Statutory Definition - Registration of TU Immoduley granted to Registered Trade
Union - Recognition of TU.

Module V: Laws relating to Compensation and Insurance

The workmen's compensation Act 1923 - Definition - Rules regarding workmen's compensation - Defense
available to employer and employees.

Module VI: Laws relating to Provident Fund, Bonus and Gratuity

The Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 and Employees family pension scheme
- definition - Coverage of the organization and employees under the Act - Employees Provident Fund and
pension fund scheme - Calculation of contribution withdrawal of Provident Fund amount - Penalties for offence.
The. The Payment of Bonus Act 1965 - Applicability of Act - Coverage of employee - Calculation of bonus
Rate of Payable bonus - available surplus - allocable surplus Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 - Definition - Scope
and Coverage of the Act - Eligibility criteria - Calculation of Gratuity Nomination

Assignment :
1.Students need to select an organization and gather information of any industrial dispute in the said
organization. Each student is required to articulate on the following:
1. The key issues in the situation
2. The key role players in solving or increasing the conflict
3. To give suggestions as how such situations can be avoided in future.

Case Study Air India Pilots, Monnapa Arun, Industrial Relations, Pages(218-242), TataMacGrow Hill,2010.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• P L Malik, Handbook of Labour and Industrial Law Eastern Book Publication 9th Edition 2005
References:
• R. C. Chawla and K.C. Garg, “Industrial Law”, Ludhiana, Kalyani Publishers, 1993.
• P.L. Malik, “Industrial Law”, Lucknow, Eastern Book Co., 1995.19th edition reprinted 2006
• J.K. Bareja, “Industrial Law”, New Delhi, Galgotia Publishing Co., 2001.
• M.Y. Pylee and George Simon, “Industrial Relations and Personnel Management”, New Delhi, Vikas
Publishing House, 1996.
• P. Subba Rao, “Essentials of Human Resource Management and Industrial Relations: Text, Cases and
Games”, Mumbai, Himalaya, 2000.
• S.C. Shrivastava, “Industrial Relations and Labour Laws”, New Delhi, Vikas Publishing House, 2000
Fourth revised Edition. Reprinted 2006
 PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Course Code: BBA 612 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This course will help students understand the significance of appraisal for an organization and individuals. It
will develop an understanding of various Performance Appraisal tools and their applications and potential
appraisal. Further it will develop a right perspective in them towards managing and improving performance.

Course Contents:
Module I: Overview of Performance Management
Employee Motivation & Needs (Vroom’s & Adam’s Theory of Motivation), Performance Appraisal: The past &
the future, Human Resource Development & Performance Appraisal, Planning Performance & Role Clarity,
Accountability and Effectiveness.

Module II: Process of Performance Appraisal

Measuring Performance Appraisal – Objectives & Indicators, Methods of Appraisal – Contemporary & Modern
methods, Performance feedback & counseling, PMS.

Module III: 360 degree Feedback

Definition, methodology, advantages/disadvantages of Feedback, RSDQ Model, and Criteria for success,
Experiences in 360 appraisals.

Module IV: Potential Appraisal

Concept, difference between performance appraisal and potential appraisal, Competency mapping & potential
appraisal –case studies

Module V: Performance Management in application

Performance Management and development, Performance Management and Pay, Creating High Performance
organization.

Module VI: Emerging Concerns & Performance Management

Appraisal for future – going beyond tangible performance, HR Scorecard.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• T.V. Rao; Performance Management and Appraisal; Jaico Publication
• Dinesh K. Srivastava, “Strategies for Performance Management”, New Delhi, 2005, Excel Books,

References:
• K Aswathappa; Human Resource and Personnel Management; McGraw- Hill Companies
• Desimone; Human Resource Development Thomson Learning
 COMPENSATION AND REWARD MANAGEMENT
Course Code: BBA 613 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of this course is to familiarize students with the dynamics of wage and salary administration and
current trends in India.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction
Overview of Compensation Management, Wage and Salary Administration – Nature, Importance, Philosophy,
Objectives, Definition, Goals Role of various parties – Employees, Employers, Unions & Government and
Consequences of pay, Legislations for compensation – PF, Gratuity, Pension, Bonus

Module II: Developing Compensation Programs

Job Evaluation, Basic systems Time wage, Piece wage, Incentives, Wage payments and Total Salary Structure,
Compensation Surveys, Hay Plan, Developing Competitive Compensation Programs, Developing Salary
Structures

Module III: Derivatives of Compensation

Pay for Performance, Merit pay and Performance Evaluation, Performance based rewards, Performance Criteria
Choices, and Performance based Compensation Schemes, Benefits.

Module IV: Incentive Plans

Incentive Plans: individual and group incentive plans, Productivity Gain sharing plans, Profit Sharing Plans,
Non - Financial and Financial incentives,

Module V: Employee Benefits

Employee Benefits: Supplemented Pay benefits (pay for time not worked) insurance benefits, Retirement
benefits, Employees’ service benefits, Introduction to ESOPs, Flexible benefits and Benefit Surveys. Measuring
Cost- to – Company (CTC)

Module VI: Current Trends

Current Trends in Compensation and Reward Management.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• Garry Dressler, “Personnel / Human Resource Management”, London, Prentice Hall, 1994.
• William B. Werther Jr. and Keith Davis “Human Resource Management”. New Jersey: McGraw Hill.
(1993)
• Milkovich & Newman, Compensation, Irwin/McGraw-Hill 8th Ed.

References:
• Frans Poets, The Art of HRD – Job Evaluation & Remuneration, Crest Publishing, Volume7 1 st Edition
• Michael Armstrong, Helen Murlis, The Art of HRD – Reward Management, Crest Publishing
• Michael Armstrong, Employee Reward, (University Press)
• P. Zingheim, The New Pay, Linking Employee & Organization Performance, Schuster, (Jossey-Bass)
• Sara Rynes, Compensation in Organization, Gerhart (Jossey BASS)
• Wendell L French, “Human Resource Management”, USA, Houghton Mifflin Company, 1994.
• David D. Decenzo and Stephen P. Robbins, “Human Resource Management”, New Delhi, Prentice Hall, 3 rd
Edn., 1988.
 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING WITH JAVA
Course Code: BBA 614 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to give knowledge of 5the Object Oriented approach to development of software
using Java Language, It is expected that a student at the end of the course would attain a good conceptual
understanding and logical approach of software development

Course Contents:
Module I: Basics of OOPS
Object, Class, Abstraction & Encapsulation, Inheritance, Polymorphism Genesis and overview of Java The
creation of Java, Java’s importance to the Internet, Lexical issues (White space, Identifiers, Literals, Comments,
Separators, Keywords), The Java Class Libraries.

Module II: Data types, variables and arrays

Integer Data Type, Floating Data Type, Characters, Booleans, Literals, Variables, Type Conversion & Casting,
Arrays & Strings Operators Arithmetic Operators, The Bitwise Operators, Relational Operators, Boolean
Logical Operators, the Assignment Operator, the ? Operator.

Module III: The Control Statements

Selection Statements, Iteration Statements, Jump Statements Classes, Class Fundamentals, Declaration of
Object, introducing Methods, Constructors, a Stack Class, Overloading Methods and Constructors, Argument
Passing, Objects as Parameters, Returning Objects, introducing Final & understanding Static

Module IV: Inheritance

Inheritance Basics, Using Super, Multilevel Hierarchy, Method Overriding, Dynamic Method Dispatch, using
Abstract Classes, Exception handling Fundamentals of Exception Handling, Exception Types, using Try and
Catch, Throw and Throws, nested Try statements.

Module V: I/O Applets

I/O basics, Reading console inputs and outputs, The Print Writer Class, Applet fundamentals, the Transient and
Volatile modifiers, native methods and their problems. The Java Libraries String Handling, Exploring Java.lang,
the collections framework with java.util, managing Input/ Output by exploring java.io.

Module VI: The Applet Class

Applet architecture, an applet skeleton, Applet display methods, passing parameters to Applets, Applet context
and show Document. Networking Java and the net, InetAddress, TCP/IP Client and Server Socket, URL
Connections.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• Herbert Schildt: The Complete Reference – Java 2, Fourth Edition. Tata McGraw-Hill.

References:
• C. Thomas Wu - An introduction to Object Oriented Programming with Java 2nd Edition. Tata Mc-Graw
Hill
• Cay S. Horstmann, Gary Cornell – Core Java. Pearson Education Asia
• Deitel & Deitel – Java, How to Program, 3rd Edition. Pearson Education Asia
 DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORK
Course Code: BBA 615 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to give knowledge of the Object Oriented approach to development of software
using C++ Language. It is expected that a student at the end of the course would attain a good conceptual
understanding and logical approach of software development.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Introduction to Computer Networking, Computing Models and Network development. Required Network
Elements, Networking Services, Common Networking Services File Service, Print Services, Message services,
Application Services, Database services Centralized versus Distributed Network Services.

Module II: Transmission Media

Transmission Media, Introduction to Transmission Media, Common Computer Network Transmission Media,
Public and Private Network, Transmission Media Connections Introducing Transmission Media Connections,
Networking Connectivity Hardware.

Module III: Networking Protocol and Models

Networking Protocol and Models, Need of Rules, Moving from Rules to Models, OSI Model, Leading Protocol
Stack for Computer Networking, Internet protocol, Transmission Control Protocol.

Module IV: LAN terminology & Components

LAN terminology & Components, LAN architecture, protocols and Addressing, Ethernet LANs, Token Ring &
FDDI, LAN Networking Devices, Common approaches to LAN Management, Concept of N/w Design.
Introduction to WAN: Private& Public, VPN: How it works, VPN security, Technologies.

Module V: Overview of ATM Technology

Overview of ATM Technology, VoIP, Frame Relay, Gigabit Ehernet, Wireless Communications Convergence
of Telecom, IT & Management, Telecommunication as a strategic weapon-some, Satellite communication, V-
SAT.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

Text:
• Computer Networks & Internets, D.E. Comer
• Data & Computer Communications, William Stallings

References:
• Introduction to Networking, Barry Nance
• Computer Communication Networks, A. Shanmugam and S. Rajeev
• Computer Networks, Tanenbaum
 WEB DATABASE PROGRAMMING WITH ASP

Course Code: BBA 616 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to capacitate students to build and deploy dynamic web applications that interact
with a powerful database. The modules provide background on subjects such as HTML, client side scripting and
relational databases. At the end of the course, the students will be able to set up their own personal dynamic web
site using a Microsoft web server to illustrate web site creation and administration principles. The curriculum
will make the students learn real world context.

Course Contents:
Module I: ASP Fundamentals
Software requirements, Installing personal web server, Installing IIS, IIS service features, Hardware
requirement, ASP connection with IIS, Built in objects.
Understanding request and response objects.
The ASP request object, Requesting information from forms, QueryString collection & Server variables,
cookies, ASP response object, response object methods and properties.

Module II: Understanding VB Script Language

Scripting, VB Scripting, understanding variables Integerating Script with HTML, Client side and server side
scripting, Converting variable types, Operators, Message Box, Accessing objects, Using built in functions and
statements, Program control statements.
Error Handling
ASP Error Handling.

Module III
Understanding Procedures and Classes
Understanding procedures, Sub-procedures, Functions, Classes, Methods, Events.
Session and Application Objects
The Session Object and collection of Session Object, Methods, properties and events, the application object
collections and methods. Using session and application objects.

Module IV: The ADO connect Object

Data Access components, Universal data access architecture, ADO, DAO, RDO architectures, OLE DB and
ODBC, The ADO connection object, Creating and opening connection object, Creating DSN, connection with
ODBC, connecting with OLE DB, using ADO connection and SQL statements.

Module V: ADO Recordset Object

Creating and opening a recordset object, moving through a recordset, The fields collection, using ADO
recordset, Bookmarks, Filtering Recordsets, Searching for records, Modifying Records, The Get String method.
The ADO command object
Creating a command object, using a stored procedure, using stored procedure with parameters, return values,
output parameters and the command object.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Joline Morrison, Mike Morrison: Database Driven Web Sites, Second Edition - Thomson.

References:
• Bhanu Pratap: Understanding Active Server Pages – Cyber Tech Publication
• Patrick Carey: New Perspective on HTML, XHTML, and Dynamic HTML, Comprehensive, Third Edition
- Thomson
• Keith Morneau, Jill Batistick: Active Server Pages – Thomson
 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS
Course Code: BBA 617 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of this course is to acquaint the students with basics of intellectual property rights with special
reference to Indian law and practice.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Types of Intellectual Property Rights, Inventions vs. Discoveries, Conventions

Module II: Copyright

Nature and Meaning, Scope of protection, Procedure for protection and Enforcement and Remedies

Module III: Patents

Nature and Meaning, Scope of protection, Procedure for protection and Enforcement and Remedies

Module IV: Trademarks

Nature and Meaning, Scope of protection, Procedure for protection and Enforcement and Remedies

Module V: Designs
Nature and Meaning, Scope of protection, Procedure for protection and Enforcement and Remedies

Module VI: Current Scenario:

Role of WTO and essential elements under TRIPS.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Compulsory Readings (Latest editions only)

Text:
• Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property, 1883
• Berne Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic Works, 1886
• Indian Copyright Act, 1957
• Indian Patents Act, 1970
• Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights, 1994 (the TRIPS Agreement)
• Indian Trademarks Act, 1999
• Indian Designs Act, 2000
• Patents Amendment Ordinance, 2004.

References:
• Nair and Kumar, eds., Intellectual Property Rights (N. Delhi: Allied, 1994)
• Narayanan, P., Patent Law, Kolkata: Eastern Law House, 1998)
 HUMAN RIGHTS
Course Code: BBA 618 Credit Units: 04

Course objective:
The objective of this course is to lay the foundation of the Human Rights law and acquaint the students with
basic human rights institutions.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Concept & development of Human Rights.

Module II: UN Charter and Human Rights

Contribution of United Nations in the development &implementation of Human Rights, Universal Declaration
of Human Rights, International Covenants

Module III: Human Rights and the Indian Constitution

Fundamental Rights & Directive principles of State Policy.

Module IV: Protection of Human Rights Act 1993

Meaning & scope, Nature of Human Rights violations Role of National Human Rights Commission, role of
NGO’s, The Judiciary

Module V: Group Rights

Rights of Marginalised Groups
Women
Children
Refugees
Refugees
Prisoners
Disabled

Module VI: Protection of Human Rights

Role of National Human Rights Commission, role of NGO’s, the role of Judiciary, Recent developments in
Human Rights.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

(Compulsory Readings)

Text:
• UN Charter
• Constitution of India
• Human Rights Act 1993
• Sinha, M.K. – Implementation of Non-Derogation Human Rights (Delhi 1999)

References:
• D.D. Basu – Human Rights
• Upender Baxi – Human Rights
• Thomas Buergenthal – Human Rights
• Henry Steiner & Philip Alston – International Human Rights Law
• B.G. Ramcharan – International Human Rights (Oxford, 1998)
• Y.K. Tyagi – British Yearbook (2001).
 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND LABOUR LAW
Course Code: BBA 619 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to acquaint student’s with the origin and importance of Labour laws governing
general functioning of employees in an organisation. And also to educate student with the important provisions
under these laws .This will enable them to develop the right perspective of this delicate responsibility to deal
with union constructively and to maintain industrial democracy.

Course Contents:
Module I: Basic Concepts
Industrial Relations, Industrial Peace, Industrial unrest and Industrial Discipline

Module II: Laws Relating to Industry

The factories Act, 1948 - Definition - Approval licensing and registration of factories - Notice by occupier,
Health, and welfare measures - weekly holidays. Leave with wages, Employment of women and young person -
Penalties and returns. The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947 - Definition - Persuasive, conciliation and voluntary
process for the settlement of industrial disputes - power of the Govt. under ID Act - Instrument of economic
coercion - Strike & lock out, Lay off Retrenchment, Transfer and closures - Discharge and Dismissal -
Managements prerogative during pendency of proceeding

Module III: Laws Relating to Remuneration

The Payment of Wages Act, 1936 - Definition - Rules for payment of wages and deductions from wage. The
Minimum Wages Act 1948 - Fixing of minimum wages, Procedure for raising minimum wage - Concept of
living wages, Fair wage and minimum wage. The Employees State Insurance Act 1948 - Definition -
Applicability of the Act - Insurable workmen - Contribution Benefit - Penalties. The Employees Provident Fund
and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 and Employees family pension scheme - definition - Coverage of the
organization and employees under the Act - Employees Provident Fund and pension fund scheme - Calculation
of contribution withdrawal of Provident Fund amount - Penalties for offence. The Payment of Gratuity Act,
1972 - Definition - Scope and Coverage of the Act - Eligibility criteria - Calculation of Gratuity Nomination.
The Payment of Bonus Act 1965 - Applicability of Act - Coverage of employee - Calculation of bonus Rate of
Payable bonus - available surplus - allocable surplus.

Module IV: Laws Relating to Trade Union

The Trade Union Act 1926. Statutory Definition - Registration of TU Immoduley granted to Registered Trade
Union - Recognition of TU.

Module V: Compensation and Insurance

The workmen's compensation act 1923 - Definition - Rules regarding workmen's compensation - Defense
available to employer and employees, E.S.I.C. Act, 1948, The Maternity Benefit Act 1961

Module VI: Misc Acts

The Industrial Employment (standing order) Act 1946 - Scope and coverage of the Act - Concept of standing
order - its certification process - Modification - interpretation and enforcement of standing orders.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• P L Malik, Handbook of Labour and Industrial Law Eastern Book Publication 9th Edition 2005

References:
• R. C. Chawla and K.C. Garg, “Industrial Law”, Ludhiana, Kalyani Publishers, 1993.
• P.L. Malik, “Industrial Law”, Lucknow, Eastern Book Co., 1995.19 th edition reprinted 2006
• J.K. Bareja, “Industrial Law”, New Delhi, Galgotia Publishing Co., 2001.
• M.Y. Pylee and George Simon, “Industrial Relations and Personnel Management”, New Delhi, Vikas
Publishing House, 1996.
• P. Subba Rao, “Essentials of Human Resource Management and Industrial Relations: Text, Cases and
Games”, Mumbai, Himalaya, 2000.
• S.C. Shrivastava, “Industrial Relations and Labour Laws”, New Delhi, Vikas Publishing House, 2000.
Fourth revised Edition. Reprinted 2006
 Bachelor of Arts (Honours) - Economics

Programme Code: BAE

Duration – 3 Years Full Time

Programme Structure
and
Curriculum & Scheme of Examination

AMITY UNIVERSITY MADHYA PRADESH

GWALIOR
 PREAMBLE

Amity University aims to achieve academic excellence by providing multi-faceted

education to students and encourage them to reach the pinnacle of success. The
University has designed a system that would provide rigorous academic programme
with necessary skills to enable them to excel in their careers.

This booklet contains the Programme Structure, the Detailed Curriculum and the
Scheme of Examination. The Programme Structure includes the courses (Core and
Elective), arranged semester wise. The importance of each course is defined in terms of
credits attached to it. The credit units attached to each course has been further defined
in terms of contact hours i.e. Lecture Hours (L), Tutorial Hours (T), Practical Hours
(P). Towards earning credits in terms of contact hours, 1 Lecture and 1 Tutorial per
week are rated as 1 credit each and 2 Practical hours per week are rated as 1 credit.
Thus, for example, an L-T-P structure of 3-0-0 will have 3 credits, 3-1-0 will have 4
credits, and 3-1-2 will have 5 credits.

The Curriculum and Scheme of Examination of each course includes the course
objectives, course contents, scheme of examination and the list of text and references.
The scheme of examination defines the various components of evaluation and the
weightage attached to each component. The different codes used for the components of
evaluation and the weightage attached to them are:

Components Codes Weightage (%)

Case Discussion/ Presentation/ Analysis C 05 - 10

Home Assignment H 05 - 10
Project P 05 - 10
Seminar S 05 - 10
Viva V 05 - 10
Quiz Q 05 - 10
Class Test CT 10 - 15
Attendance A 05
End Semester Examination EE 70

It is hoped that it will help the students study in a planned and a structured manner and
promote effective learning. Wishing you an intellectually stimulating stay at Amity
University.

July, 2011
 PROGRAMME STRUCTURE

FIRST SEMESTER
Course Course Title Lecture (L) Tutorial (T) Practical (P) Total Page
Code Hours Per Hours Per Hours Per Credits No.
Week Week Week
BAE 101 Principles of Economics 4 - - 4
BAE 102 Micro Economics - I 3 1 - 4
BAE 103 Mathematical Methods for 3 1 - 4
Economics
BAE 104 Economic History of India 4 - - 4
(1857-1947)
BAE 105 Environmental Studies 4 - - 4
English 1 - - 1
BAE 143 Behavioural Science – I 1 - - 1
Foreign Language - I 2 - - 2
BAE 144 French
BAE 145 German
BAE 146 Spanish
BAE 147 Japanese
BAE 148 Chinese
TOTAL 24

SECOND SEMESTER
BAE 201 Micro Economics - II 3 1 - 4
BAE 202 Indian Economic 4 - - 4
Development since 1947
BAE 203 Statistical Methods in 3 1 - 4
Economics - I
BAE 204 Agricultural Economy of 3 1 - 4
India
BAE 205 Mergers & Acquisitions 4 - - 4
BAE 240 English 1 - - 3
BAE 243 Behavioural Science – II 1 - - 1
Foreign Language - II 2 - - 2
BAE 244 French
BAE 245 German
BAE 246 Spanish
BAE 247 Japanese
BAE 248 Chinese
TOTAL 26

TERM PAPER DURING SUMMER (03 CREDITS)

THIRD SEMESTER
BAE 301 Macro Economics - I 4 - - 4
BAE 302 Public Finance 3 1 - 4
BAE 303 Industrial Economics 3 1 - 4
BAE 304 Legal Aspects of Business 3 1 - 4
BAE 305 Statistical Methods in 3 1 - 4
Economics - II
BAE 330 Term Paper (Evaluation) - - - 3
BAE 341 Communication Skills - I 1 - - 1
BAE 343 Behavioural Science - III 1 - - 1
Foreign Language - III 2 - - 2
BAE 344 French
BAE 345 German
BAE 346 Spanish
BAE 347 Japanese
BAE 348 Chinese
TOTAL 27
FOURTH SEMESTER
BAE 401 International Economics 3 1 - 4
BAE 402 Business Information & Data 3 1 - 4
Base System
BAE 403 Principles of Management 4 - - 4
BAE 404 Comparative Economic 3 1 - 4
Development (1850 –1950)
BAE 405 Research Methodology 3 1 - 4
BAE 441 Communication Skills - II 1 - - 1
BAE 443 Behavioural Science - IV 1 - - 1
Foreign Language - IV 2 - - 2
BAE 444 French
BAE 445 German
BAE 446 Spanish
BAE 447 Japanese
BAE 448 Chinese
TOTAL 24

SUMMER TRAINING

FIFTH SEMESTER
BAE 501 Macro Economics - II 4 - - 4
BAE 502 Operations Research 4 - - 4
BAE 503 Money & Financial Markets 4 - - 4
BAE 504 Business Environment 4 - - 4
BAE 505 Strategic Management 3 1 - 4
BAE 550 Summer Training - - - 9
(Evaluation)
BAE 541 Communication Skills - III 1 - - 1
BAE 543 Behavioural Science – V 1 - - 1
Foreign Language - V 2 - - 2
BAE 544 French
BAE 545 German
BAE 546 Spanish
BAE 547 Japanese
BAE 548 Chinese
TOTAL 33

SIXTH SEMESTER
BAE 601 Economic System & Society 3 1 - 4
BAE 602 Economic Growth & 3 1 - 4
Development
BAE 603 Econometrics—Basic Theory 3 1 - 4
& Application
BAE 604 Business Ethics & Corporate 3 1 - 4
Governance
BAE 655 Dissertation - - - 9
BAE 641 Communication Skills - IV 1 - - 1
BAE 643 Behavioural Science – VI 1 - - 1
Foreign Language - VI 2 - - 2
BAE 644 French
BAE 645 German
BAE 646 Spanish
BAE 647 Japanese
BAE 648 Chinese
TOTAL 29
 Curriculum & Scheme of Examination

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS

Course Code: BAE 101 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The main objective of this paper is to introduce the students into the field of economics basic concept of
the area what they are going to study. It aims at providing the relevant inputs to the participant so that
they could study systematically the various areas of Economics.

Course Contents:
Module I: Exploring the subject matter of Economics
Why study Economics? Scope and Method of Economics; The Economic Problem: Scarcity and Choice;
the question of What to Produce, How to Produce and How to Distribute Output; Science of Economics;
Relation of Economics with other social sciences, Property Rights and Profits: Incentives and
Information, Rationing; Opportunity Sets; Economic Systems; Reading and Working with Graphs.

Module II: Supply and Demand: How markets work, Markets and Welfare
Markets and Competition; Determinants of individual demand/supply, Demand/Supply schedule and
demand/supply curve, Market versus individual demand/supply, Shifts in the demand/supply curve,
Demand and Supply together, How Prices allocate resources. Elasticity and its application; Controls on
Prices; Taxes and the Costs of Taxation; Consumer, Producers and the Efficiency of the Markets.

Module III: The Firm Perfect Market Structure & Input Markets
Financing, controlling and managing firms -- The firm's legal form, Corporate Finance, why corporations
care about financial structure, takeover and the market for managers, making decisions, centralization
and decentralization, the boundaries of the firm. Behaviour of profit maximizing firms and the
production process, Short run costs and output decisions, costs and output in the long run.
Monopoly Imperfect information in the product market.
Labour and Land Markets--Basic concepts [derived demand, productivity of an input, marginal product
of labour, marginal revenue product]; demand for labour; input demand curves; shifts in input demand
curves;.

Module IV: Exploring International Economics

The International Economy--Trade surpluses and deficits, the economic basis for trade—absolute
advantage versus comparative advantage, terms of trade, exchange rates; Sources of comparative
advantage - Heckscher-Ohlin Theorem and other explanations. Trade Barriers--tariffs, subsidies and
quotas; free trade or protection--case for free trade, case for protection.

Module V: Exploring the Macroeconomics of an Open Economy

Balance of Payments------the current and capital account ;Open economy with flexible exchange rates,
factors affecting exchange rates, effects of exchange rates on the economy .

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Karl E. Case - Ray C. Fair (2002), Principles of Economics, Pearson Education Asia, Low price edition.
• N. Gregory Mankiw, (2002), Principles of Economics, Thomson
• Edwin Mansfield Applied Microeconomics

References:
• J.E. Stiglitz, and C.E. Walsh (2002), Principles of Economics, 3rd Edition, W.W. Norton & Company, New
York
• R. Stone & G Stone (1962), National Income & Expenditure, Bowes & Bowes, London.
• Liesey & Chrystal- Principles of Economics.
• K.K. Dewett: Modern Economics Theory, New Delhi, Shyam Lal Charitable Trust
 MICRO ECONOMICS - I
Course Code: BAE 102 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The course aims at familiarizing the students with Economic Theories; Concepts of models so that they
can apply economic theories and models in the execution of managerial problems & functions.

Course Contents:

Module I: Consumer Behaviour:

The consumption decisions -- budget constraints, consumption and income/price changes, demand for all
other goods and price changes, Description of preferences [Representing preferences with indifference
curves. Properties of Indifference curves], Consumers’ optimum choice, income and substitution
effects.(Hicks and Slutsky), ordinary and compensated demand curves, inferior goods and Giffen goods,
price consumption and income consumption curves, derivation of labour supply and intertemporal
choice (saving and borrowing ) Revealed preference----weak axiom and substitution effect

Module II: Production and Costs:

Technology, Isoquants, production with one and more variable inputs, Returns to scale, short run and
long run costs, cost curves in the short run and long run, total, average, and marginal product, cost
minimization and expansion path, elasticity of substitution, Cobb Douglas, Linear, and CES production
function.

Module III: Market Structure

Review of perfect competition and monopoly; Pricing with market power; price discrimination, peakload
pricing, two-part tariff; monopolistic competition and oligopoly.

Module IV: Market Failure

Externalities, public goods, markets with asymmetric information

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Robert S. Pindyk and D.L. Rubinfeld, (2000), Microeconomics, 3rd edition, Prentice Hall India.
• Ferguson & Gould- Micro Economic Theory, Cambridge University Press

References:
• Koutsoyiannis, Modern Microeconomics, Macmillan.
• M.L. Trivedi, Managerial Economics- Theory & Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.
• W.J. Baumol, Economic Theory & Operations Analysis, Prentice Hall.
 MATHEMATICAL METHODS FOR ECONOMICS

Course Code: BAE 103 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The main objective of inclusion of this course in Economics is to familiarize the students with basic
quantitative & algebraic tools & techniques which will be needed for the understanding of the core
subject and the students can apply the quantitative techniques in the analysis of managerial problems.

Course Contents:
Module I: Elementary Linear Algebra
2-, 3-, and n-dimensional row and column vectors; vector addition and scalar multiplication; length of a
vector, scalar products, orthogonality. Geometric representation, lines and planes in R 2 and R3. Linear
and convex combinations of vectors, Linear independence. Convex sets.
Matrics and matrix operations; addition, scalar multiplication, matrix multiplication. The transpose. The
inverse of a square matrix. Rank. Elementary row operations and computation of rank. Invertibility and
rank for square matrics, Matrix methods of solution &(Cramers rule)
Determinants: definition, properties, minors and cofactors, the Laplace expansion, expansions by alien
cofactors; singularity and invertibility; the adjoint matrix and formula for the inverse.

Module II: Applications of Calculus

The limit of f(x) as x---->a. Continuity. The intermediate-value theorem.
The derivative of a function. Differentiability and continuity. Techniques of differentiation; sums,
products and quotients of functions; composite functions and the chain rule. Inverse functions. Implicit
differentiation. Second and higher order derivatives. Points of inflexion. Differentials and linear
approximation.
Exponential and logarithmic functions. Logarithmic differentiation. Examples of the use of the exp and
log functions (proportional rates of change, elasticities, continuous compounding etc.)
Optimization: stationary points, local and global optima; location of turning points and points of inflexion
using derivatives; the role of concavity and convexity. Applications.

Module III: Functions of Several Variables

[The emphasis throughout should be on functions of two variables (and related geometrical
interpretation) without however, restricting the discussion only to this case.]
Partial differentiation; Tangent planes to a surface. Higher-order partial derivatives, Young’s Theorem.
Partial derivatives in economics.
Homogeneous and homothetic functions.
Maxima and minima, saddlepoints, unconstrained optimization, necessary and sufficient conditions for
local optima.
Constrained optimization (equality constraints). The method of Lagrange multipliers. Interpretation of
the necessary conditions and of the Lagrange multiplier; Sufficient conditions. Envelope results.
Economic examples.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Mabbett. A.J:, Workout Mathematics for Economists, Macmillan, London.
• Mehta & Madnani, Mathematics for Economics, Sultan Chand, New Delhi.

References:
• Knut Sydsaeter and Peter. J. Hammond (2002) Mathematics for Economic Analysis, Pearson
Educational Asia: Delhi (reprint of 1st 1995 edition).
• Alpha C. Chiang (1984) Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics. McGraw Hill (3 rd
edition).
 ECONOMIC HISTORY OF INDIA (1857-1947)

Course Code: BAE 104 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
It will throw light on the economic history which will subsequently help the students to understand the
trend of economic growth & development.

Course Contents:
Module I: Colonial India: An Overview

Module II: Trends in macroeconomic aggregates

Population, labour force and occupational structure; National Income; Foreign trade and Balance of
Payments; Saving and Investment; Money supply and prices.

Module III: Railways and Economic Change

Module IV: Agriculture, land, labour, capital, technology, commercialization, famines and environment.

Module V: Traditional and Modern Industry

The deindustrialization hypothesis, rise of the modern industrial sector during the pre-war and the
interwar period, industrial labour, growth of entrepreneurship.

Module VI: The Indian Economy at Independence

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Tirthankar Roy (2000), The Economic History of India, 1857-1974, Oxford University Press, Ch.
3,4,7,8 & 9.
• Rajnarayan Chandavarkar (1985), “Industrialization in India before 1947: Conventional Approaches
and Alternative Perspectives”, Modern Asian Studies.
• Rajat Ray (1979), Industrialization in India, Oxford University Press, Ch. 4.

References:
• A.K. Bagchi (1976), “Deindustrialization in India in the Nineteenth Century: Some theoretical
implications”, Journal of Developmental Studies.
• A.K. Bagchi (1972), Private Investment in India, Orient Longman (1st ed), Ch.2.
• J.N. Bhagwati and Padma Desai (1970), India, Planning for Industrialization, Oxford University
Press, Chs. 2 & 3.
• Morris D. Morris (1965), The Emergence of an Industrial Labour Force in India: A Study of the
Bombay Cotton Mills 1854-1947, Oxford University Press, last chapter.
• Rajat Ray (ed) (1992), Entrepreneurship and Industry in India, 1800-1947, Oxford University Press.
 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Course Code: BAE 105 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The term environment is used to describe, in the aggregate, all the external forces, influences and
conditions, which affect the life, nature, behaviour and the growth, development and maturity of living
organisms. At present a great number of environment issues, have grown in size and complexity day by
day, threatening the survival of mankind on earth. A study of environmental studies is quite essential in
all types of environmental sciences, environmental engineering and industrial management. The objective
of environmental studies is to enlighten the masses about the importance of the protection and
conservation of our environment and control of human activities which has an adverse effect on the
environment.

Course Contents:
Module I: The multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies
Definition, scope and importance
Need for public awareness

Module II: Natural Resources

Renewable and non-renewable resources:
Natural resources and associated problems
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams
and their effects on forests and tribal people.
Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over
water, dams-benefits and problems.
Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources,
case studies.
Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern
agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies.
Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non-renewable energy sources, use of alternate
energy sources, case studies.
Land resources: Land as a resource, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and
desertification.
Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources.
Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles.

Module III: Ecosystems

Concept of an ecosystem
Structure and function of an ecosystem
Producers, consumers and decomposers
Energy flow in the ecosystem
Ecological succession
Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids
Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the following ecosystem:
a. Forest ecosystem
b. Grassland ecosystem
c. Desert ecosystem
d. Aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, ocean estuaries)

Module IV: Biodiversity and its conservation

Introduction – Definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity
Biogeographical classification of India
Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical aesthetic and option values
Biodiversity at global, national and local levels
India as a mega-diversity nation
Hot-spots of biodiversity
Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man wildlife conflicts
Endangered and endemic species of India
Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ conservation of biodiversity
Module V: Environmental Pollution
Definition
Causes, effects and control measures of:
Air pollution
Water pollution
Soil pollution
Marine pollution
Noise pollution
Thermal pollution
Nuclear pollution
Solid waste management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes.
Role of an individual in prevention of pollution.
Pollution case studies.
Disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides.

Module VI: Social Issues and the Environment

From unsustainable to sustainable development
Urban problems and related to energy
Water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management
Resettlement and rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns. Case studies.
Environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions
Climate change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust. Case
studies.
Wasteland reclamation
Consumerism and waste products
Environmental Protection Act
Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act
Wildlife Protection Act
Forest Conservation Act
Issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation
Public awareness

Module VII: Human Population and the Environment

Population growth, variation among nations
Population explosion – Family Welfare Programmes
Environment and human health
Human Rights
Value Education
HIV / AIDS
Women and Child Welfare
Role of Information Technology in Environment and Human Health
Case Studies

Module VIII: Field Work

Visit to a local area to document environmental assets-river / forest/ grassland/ hill/ mountain.
Visit to a local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial / Agricultural
Study of common plants, insects, birds
Study of simple ecosystems-pond, river, hill slopes, etc (Field work equal to 5 lecture hours)

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA S/V/Q A EE
Weightage (%) 15 5 5 5 70

Text & References:

• Agarwal, K.C. 2001 Environmental Biology, Nidi Publ. Ltd. Bikaner.

• Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad 380 013, India,
Email:[email protected] (R)
• Brunner R.C., 1989, Hazardous Waste Incineration, McGraw Hill Inc. 480p
• Clark R.S., Marine Pollution, Clanderson Press Oxford (TB)
• Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, E & Hepworth, M.T. 2001, Environmental Encyclopedia,
Jaico Publ. House, Mumbai, 1196p
• De A.K., Environmental Chemistry, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
• Down to Earth, Centre for Science and Environment (R)
• Gleick, H.P. 1993. Water in Crisis, Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev., Environment & Security.
Stockholm Env. Institute Oxford Univ. Press. 473p
• Hawkins R.E., Encyclopedia of Indian Natural History, Bombay Natural History Society, Bombay
(R)
• Heywood, V.H & Waston, R.T. 1995. Global Biodiversity Assessment. Cambridge Univ. Press 1140p.
• Jadhav, H & Bhosale, V.M. 1995. Environmental Protection and Laws. Himalaya Pub. House, Delhi
284 p.
• Mckinney, M.L. & School, R.M. 1996. Environmental Science Systems & Solutions, Web enhanced
edition. 639p.
• Mhaskar A.K., Matter Hazardous, Techno-Science Publication (TB)
• Miller T.G. Jr. Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co. (TB)
• Odum, E.P. 1971. Fundamentals of Ecology. W.B. Saunders Co. USA, 574p
• Rao M N. & Datta, A.K. 1987. Waste Water treatment. Oxford & IBH Publ. Co. Pvt. Ltd. 345p.
• Sharma B.K., 2001. Environmental Chemistry. Geol Publ. House, Meerut
• Survey of the Environment, The Hindu (M)
• Townsend C., Harper J, and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science
• Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules Guidelines, Compliances and Standards, Vol
I and II, Enviro Media (R)
• Trivedi R. K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to air pollution, Techno-Science Publication (TB)
• Wanger K.D., 1998 Environnemental Management. W.B. Saunders Co. Philadelphia, USA 499p
 ENGLISH

Course Objective:
The course is intended to give a foundation of English Language. The literary texts are indented to help
students to inculcate creative & aesthetic sensitivity and critical faculty through comprehension,
appreciation and analysis of the prescribed literary texts. It will also help them to respond form different
perspectives.

Course Contents:
Module I: Vocabulary
Use of Dictionary
Use of Words: Diminutives, Homonyms & Homophones

Module II: Essentials of Grammar - I

Articles
Parts of Speech
Tenses

Module III: Essentials of Grammar - II

Sentence Structure
Subject -Verb agreement
Punctuation

Module IV: Communication

The process and importance
Principles & benefits of Effective Communication

Module V: Spoken English Communication

Speech Drills
Pronunciation and accent
Stress and Intonation

Module VI: Communication Skills-I

Developing listening skills
Developing speaking skills

Module VII: Communication Skills-II

Developing Reading Skills
Developing writing Skills

Module VIII: Written English communication

Progression of Thought/ideas
Structure of Paragraph
Structure of Essays

Module IX: Short Stories

Of Studies, by Francis Bacon
Dream Children, by Charles Lamb
The Necklace, by Guy de Maupassant
A Shadow, by R.K.Narayan
Glory at Twilight, Bhabani Bhattacharya

Module X: Poems
All the Worlds a Stage Shakespeare
To Autumn Keats
O! Captain, My Captain. Walt Whitman
Where the Mind is Without Fear Rabindranath Tagore
Psalm of Life H.W. Longfellow

Examination Scheme:

Components A CT HA EE
Weightage (%) 05 15 10 70

Text & References:

• Madhulika Jha, Echoes, Orient Long Man

• Ramon & Prakash, Business Communication, Oxford.
• Sydney Greenbaum Oxford English Grammar, Oxford.
• Successful Communications, Malra Treece (Allyn and Bacon)
• Effective Technical Communication, M. Ashraf Rizvi.

* 30 hrs Programme to be continued for Full year

 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - I
(UNDERSTANDING SELF FOR EFFECTIVENESS)

Course Code: BAE 143 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
This course aims at imparting an understanding of:
Self and the process of self exploration
Learning strategies for development of a healthy self esteem
Importance of attitudes and its effect on personality
Building emotional competence

Course Contents:
Module I: Self: Core Competency
Understanding of Self
Components of Self – Self identity
Self concept
Self confidence
Self image

Module II: Techniques of Self Awareness

Exploration through Johari Window
Mapping the key characteristics of self
Framing a charter for self
Stages – self awareness, self acceptance and self realization

Module III: Self Esteem & Effectiveness

Meaning & Importance
Components of self esteem
High and low self esteem
Measuring your self esteem

Module IV: Building Positive Attitude

Meaning and Nature of Attitude
Components and Types of Attitudes
Relevance and Importance of Attitudes

Module V: Building Emotional Competence

Emotional Intelligence – Meaning, Components, Importance and Relevance
Positive and Negative Emotions
Healthy and Unhealthy expression of Emotions

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal

Viva based on personal journal
Assessment of Behavioural change as a result of training
Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Examination Scheme:

Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for

Test (CT) Success (JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25

Text & References:

• Dressler, David and Cans, Donald: The Study of Human Interaction

• Lindzey, G. and Borgatta, E: Sociometric Measurement in the Handbook of Social
Psychology, Addison – Welsley, US.
• J William Pfeiffer (ed.) Theories and Models in Applied Behavioural Science, Vol 2, Group (1996);
Pfeiffer & Company
 FRENCH - I

Course Code: BAE 144 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To familiarize the students with the French language
• with the phonetic system
• with the syntax
• with the manners
• with the cultural aspects

Course Contents:

Module A: pp. 01 to 37: Unités 1, 2, Unité 3 Object if 1, 2

Only grammar of Unité 3: object if 3, 4 and 5

Contenu lexical: Unité 1: Découvrir la langue française: (oral et écrit)

1. se présenter, présenter quelqu’un, faire la connaissance des
autres, formules de politesse, rencontres
2. dire/interroger si on comprend
3. Nommer les choses
Unité 2: Faire connaissance
3. donner/demander des informations sur une personne, premiers
contacts, exprimer ses goûts et ses préférences
4. Parler de soi: parler du travail, de ses activités, de son pays, de sa ville.

Unité 3: Organiser son temps

1. dire la date et l’heure

Contenu grammatical: 1. organisation générale de la grammaire

2. article indéfini, défini, contracté
3. nom, adjectif, masculin, féminin, singulier et pluriel
4. négation avec « de », "moi aussi", "moi non plus"
5. interrogation: Inversion, est-ce que, qui, que, quoi, qu’est-ce
que, où, quand, comment, quel(s), quelle(s)
Interro-négatif: réponses: oui, si, non
6. pronom tonique/disjoint- pour insister après une préposition
7. futur proche

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Campus: Tome 1

 GERMAN - I
Course Code: BAE 145 Credit Units: 02
Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of
grammar, which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic opportunities
available in Germany

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Self introduction: heissen, kommen, wohnwn, lernen, arbeiten, trinken, etc.
All personal pronouns in relation to the verbs taught so far.
Greetings: Guten Morgen!, Guten Tag!, Guten Abend!, Gute Nacht!, Danke sehr!, Danke!, Vielen Dank!,
(es tut mir Leid!),
Hallo, wie geht’s?: Danke gut!, sehr gut!, prima!, ausgezeichnet!,
Es geht!, nicht so gut!, so la la!, miserabel!

Module II: Interviewspiel

To assimilate the vocabulary learnt so far and to apply the words and phrases in short dialogues in an
interview – game for self introduction.

Module III: Phonetics

Sound system of the language with special stress on Dipthongs

Module IV: Countries, nationalities and their languages

To make the students acquainted with the most widely used country names, their nationalitie and the
language spoken in that country.

Module V: Articles
The definite and indefinite articles in masculine, feminine and neuter gender. All Vegetables, Fruits,
Animals, Furniture, Eatables, modes of Transport

Module VI: Professions

To acquaint the students with professions in both the genders with the help of the verb “sein”.

Module VII: Pronouns

Simple possessive pronouns, the use of my, your, etc.
The family members, family Tree with the help of the verb “to have”

Module VIII: Colours

All the color and color related vocabulary – colored, colorful, colorless, pale, light, dark, etc.

Module IX: Numbers and calculations – verb “kosten”

The counting, plural structures and simple calculation like addition, subtraction, multiplication and
division to test the knowledge of numbers.
“Wie viel kostet das?”

Module X: Revision list of Question pronouns

W – Questions like who, what, where, when, which, how, how many, how much, etc.
Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch
• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1, 2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH – I

Course Code: BAE 146 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire the relevance of the Spanish language in today’s global context, how to greet
each other. How to present / introduce each other using basic verbs and vocabulary

Course Contents:

Module I
A brief history of Spain, Latin America, the language, the culture…and the relevance of Spanish
language in today’s global context.
Introduction to alphabets

Module II
Introduction to ‘Saludos’ (How to greet each other. How to present / introduce each other).
Goodbyes (despedidas)
The verb llamarse and practice of it.

Module III
Concept of Gender and Number
Months of the years, days of the week, seasons. Introduction to numbers 1-100, Colors, Revision of
numbers and introduction to ordinal numbers.

Module IV
Introduction to SER and ESTAR (both of which mean To Be).Revision of ‘Saludos’ and ‘Llamarse’. Some
adjectives, nationalities, professions, physical/geographical location, the fact that spanish adjectives have
to agree with gender and number of their nouns. Exercises highlighting usage of Ser and Estar.

Module V
Time, demonstrative pronoun (Este/esta, Aquel/aquella etc)

Module VI
Introduction to some key AR /ER/IR ending regular verbs.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español, En Directo I A
• Español Sin Fronteras
 JAPANESE - I

Course Code: BAE 147 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to learn the basic rules of grammar and Japanese language to be used in daily life
that will later help them to strengthen their language.

Course Contents:
Module I: Salutations
Self introduction, Asking and answering to small general questions

Module II: Cardinal Numbers

Numerals, Expression of time and period, Days, months

Module III: Tenses

Present Tense, Future tense

Module IV: Prepositions

Particles, possession, Forming questions

Module V: Demonstratives
Interrogatives, pronoun and adjectives

Module VI: Description

Common phrases, Adjectives to describe a person

Module VII: Schedule

Time Table, everyday routine etc.

Module VIII: Outings

Going to see a movie, party, friend’s house etc.

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the basic language describing above mentioned topics

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments and role-plays will support classroom
teaching

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – I

Course Code: BAE 148 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
There are many dialects spoken in China, but the language which will help you through wherever you go
is Mandarin, or Putonghua, as it is called in Chinese. The most widely spoken forms of Chinese are
Mandarin, Cantonese, Gan, Hakka, Min, Wu and Xiang. The course aims at familiarizing the student
with the basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin, the language of Mainland China. The course aims
at training students in practical skills and nurturing them to interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Show pictures, dialogue and retell.
Getting to know each other.
Practicing chart with Initials and Finals. (CHART – The Chinese Phonetic Alphabet Called “Hanyu
Pinyin” in Mandarin Chinese.)
Practicing of Tones as it is a tonal language.
Changes in 3rd tone and Neutral Tone.

Module II
Greetings
Let me Introduce
The modal particle “ne”.
Use of Please ‘qing” – sit, have tea ………….. etc.
A brief self introduction – Ni hao ma? Zaijian!
Use of “bu” negative.

Module III
Attributives showing possession
How is your Health? Thank you
Where are you from?
A few Professions like – Engineer, Businessman, Doctor, Teacher, Worker.
Are you busy with your work?
May I know your name?

Module IV
Use of “How many” – People in your family?
Use of “zhe” and “na”.
Use of interrogative particle “shenme”, “shui”, “ma” and “nar”.
How to make interrogative sentences ending with “ma”.
Structural particle “de”.
Use of “Nin” when and where to use and with whom. Use of guixing.
Use of verb “zuo” and how to make sentences with it.

Module V
Family structure and Relations.
Use of “you” – “mei you”.
Measure words
Days and Weekdays.
Numbers.
Maps, different languages and Countries.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• “Elementary Chinese Reader Part I” Lesson 1-10

 MICROECONOMICS - II
Course Code: BAE 201 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The main objective of the course is to provide a deeper knowledge on some specific field of
Microeconomics such as game theory, factor pricing, oligopoly & welfare.

Course Contents:
Module I: Decision theory under uncertainty: Utility functions and expected utility
Risk aversion and risk preference, insurance and investor’s choice.
Asymmetric information- Adverse selection of moral hazard (concept only)

Module II: Basic notions of non-cooperative game theory

Complete information games in extensive from (relatively informal introduction) and strategic form;
pure and mixed strategies; dominant strategies equilibrium, Nash equilibrium and subgame perfect
equilibrium.

Module III: Oligopoly

Conjectural variation & reaction functions, analysis of Cournot & Stackelberg, Collusive Oliogopoly and
application of Prisoner’s Dilemma of Nash equilibrium.

Module IV: Factor Pricing

Derived demand for a single input and multiple inputs in competitive & imperfect competition markets,
firm demand and industry demand, collective bargaining and exploitation rent & quasi rent.

Module V: Welfare Economics

Conditions of pareto optimality in pure exchange and with production, optimality of perfect competition.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• W.S. Baumol, ‘Economic Theory and Operational Analysis’, Prentice hall
• Ferguson, ‘Microeconomic Theory’, Cambridge University Press.

References:
• A K Koutsyanni’s, ‘Modern Microeonomics’, Macmillan.
• L.M.B. Cabral, (2000) Introduction to Industrial Organization, MIT Press.
• P.K. Dutta (1999) Strategies and Games: Theory and Practice, MIT Press.
• Formson & Gould – Microeconomic Theory
 INDIA’S ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT SINCE 1947

Course Code: BAE 202 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This subject covers the major features of Indian Economy at Independence in the field of agriculture
industry and other infrastructure of the economy. It also deals with growth of development of different
phases on the current issues in Indian economy policy.

Course Contents:
Module I
Major features of Indian Economy since Independence

Module II: Growth, Development and Structural Change

The experience of growth and development: planning and the market.
Growth and development experience in different phases of growth defined broadly (but not exclusively)
by reference to changes in policy regimes and goals of development
i). Growth and structural change
ii). Growth and distribution
iii). Human development and environment
iv). Regional contrasts
Indian development experience in international perspective: factors, strategy and policy

Module III: Issues in Indian economic policy

Population and Human resource Development
Growth, unemployment and poverty
Macroeconomic stabilization: Trade, Fiscal and Monetary policy issues
Agriculture, industry, services and trade

Module IV: India’s development prospects-looking ahead

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• V.M. Dandekar (1992), Forty Years after Independence in B. Jalan (ed.), The Indian Economy,
Problems and Prospects, Viking Press.
• Sebastian Morris (2001), Issues in Infrastructure Development Today: The Interlinkages, in India
Infrastructure Report, OUP.

References:
• Montek Ahluwalia, (2002), State level Performance under Economic Reforms in India, in A.O.
Krueger(ed), Economic Policy Reforms and the Indian Economy, Univ. of Chicago Press.
• Pranab Bardhan(2003), Poverty, Agrarian Structure and Political Economy in India: Selected Essay,
OUP, CH.5.
• Jagdish Bhagwati, (1993), India in Tansition, Freeing the Economy, Clarendon Press, Ch. 2.
• J. Bhagwati and Padma Desai (1970), India: Planning for Industrialization, Ch 2 OUP.
• S. Chakravarty (1987), Development Planning: The Indian Experience, Clarendon Press.
• Jean Dreze and Amartya Sen (2002), India: Development and Participation, OUP, Chs. 2, 3,5,6,9.
• B.S. Minhas (1991), Public vs Private sectors: Neglect of Lessons of Economics in Indian Policy
Formulation, R.R. Kale Lecture, Gokhale Institute of Politics & Economics, Pune.
• Mihir Rakshit (2001), On Correcting Fiscal Imbalances In the Indian Economy: Some Perspectives,
• Money and Finance, ICRA Bulletin, July-Sept 2001.
 STATISTICAL METHODS IN ECONOMICS - I
Course Code: BAE 203 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This subject will deal with all fundamental statistical methods of tools which the students have to use in
economic analysis and decision making problems.

Course Contents:
Module I: Elementary Distribution Theory
Univariate Frequency Distributions, measures of location, Dispersion, Skewness and Kurtosis; the first
four moments about zero and central moments.

Module II: Bivariate Distributions and Simple Linear Regression:

Marginal and conditional distributions: discrete case; Covariance and correlation: rank correlation.

Simple linear regression; method of least squares; Derivation of the normal equation; standard error of
regression (SER), properties of the least squares estimator, Gauss- Markov Theorem, Simple tests of
hypothesis on regression coefficients,

Module III: Time series analysis, linear and exponential trend, forecasting

Module IV: Index Numbers

Concept of an index number. Laspeyer’s, Paasche's and Fisher's Index Numbers; Time Reversal, Factor
reversal and circular tests; Chain base index; Problems in the Construction of an index number; splicing;
base shifting and use of index number for deflating other series.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Allen Webster, Applied Statistics for Business and Economics, (3rd edition), McGraw Hill,
International Edition 1998.

References:
• P.H. Karmel and M. Polasek, Applied Statistics for Economists (4th edition), Pitman, Australia.
• M.R. Spiegel (2nd edition), Theory and Problems of Statistics, Schaum Series.
 AGRICULTURAL ECONOMY OF INDIA

Course Code: BAE 204 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This subject is aimed at providing knowledge on the agricultural economy of India, its development,
productivity, rural indebtedness and defects in the agricultural market and to develop a critical study on
recent agricultural crises in India
To familiarize the agricultural situation in India
To provide sound knowledge base on India’s Agricultural economy before green revolution and after it.
To develop a critical study on recent Agricultural crises in India.

Course Contents:
Module I
Features of Agriculture - Importance of Agriculture in the Indian Economy – Relationship between
Agriculture and Non-Agriculture sectors.

Module II
Agriculture Development in India - Subdivision and Fragmentation of holdings in India and causes -
Land Tenure and Land Reforms.
Productivity in Agriculture - New Agriculture Strategy - Green Revolution - Nature of Food Economy -
Agriculture price policy in India - Public Distribution system.

Module III
Rural Indebtedness - Causes of Rural Indebtedness - Sources of Agricultural Finance.
Market and Marketed Surplus - Defects in marketing Agricultural produce – Regulated markets - Co-
operative marketing - Farmers Market.
Current Issues in Indian Agriculture (Selected Topics)
Sustainable Agricultural growth- Concepts & Constraints

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Ruddar Dutt and K P M Sundaram Indian Economy, S. Chand & Co. Ltd, New Delhi.
• Bansil.B.C. Agricultural Problems of India, Vikas Publishing House. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

References:
• Misra and Puri, Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay.
• Sankaran.A. Agricultural Economy of India, Progressive Corporation. Pvt. Ltd., Bombay.
• Srivastava.O.S. Agricultural Economics, Rawat Publications, Jaipur, 1996.
• Ashok Gulati (2000), Indian Agriculture in an Open Economy: Will it Prosper? In Ahluwalia & Little
(eds) India’s Economic reforms & developmet: Essay for Manmohan Singh, Oxford University Press.
 MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS

Course Code: BAE 205 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The main objective of this course is to familiarize the students with the basic aspects of mergers and
acquisitions.

Course Contents:
Module I: Mergers and Acquisitions – Overview
Introduction – Forms of Corporate Restructuring – Expansion – Mergers and Acquisitions – Tender
Offers – Joint Ventures – Sell Offs – Spin Offs – Split Offs – Split Ups – Divestitures – Equity Carve outs
- Corporate Control – Premium Buy Backs – Standstill Agreements – Anti- Takeover Amendments –
Proxy Contests - Changes in Ownership Structures - Share Repurchases – Exchange Offers – Leveraged
Buy – out – Going Private – Issue Raised by Restructuring – History of Merger Movements.

Module II: Mergers and Acquisitions

Economic Rationale for Major Types of Mergers - Horizontal Mergers – Vertical Mergers –
Conglomerate Mergers - Concentric Mergers.

Module III: Theories of Mergers

Efficiency Theories – Differential Efficiency - Inefficient Management – Operating Synergy – Pure
Diversification - Financial Synergy – Strategic Realignment to Changing Environments –
Undervaluation – Information and Signaling – Agency Problems and Managerialism - Takeovers as a
Solution to Agency Problems

Module IV: Divestment of Public Sector Undertakings and Leveraged Buy-outs

General Economic and Financial Factors illustration of an LBO
Takeover Defenses
Anti-Takeover Amendments, Any case study

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• The Complete Guide to Mergers and Acquisitions : Process Tools to Support M & A Integration at
Every Level – Timothy J Galpin and Mark Herndon, 2007
• Mergers – What Can Go Wrong and How to Prevent it – Patrick A Gaughan (Wiley Finance)

References:
• Mergers and Acquisitions – Fred Weston
• M & A and Corporate Restructuring - Patrick A Gaughan (Wiley Finance Series)
 ENGLISH

Course Code: BAE 240 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course is intended to give a foundation of English Language. The literary texts are indented to help
students to inculcate creative & aesthetic sensitivity and critical faculty through comprehension,
appreciation and analysis of the prescribed literary texts. It will also help them to respond form different
perspectives.

Course Contents:
Module I: Vocabulary
Use of Dictionary
Use of Words: Diminutives, Homonyms & Homophones

Module II: Essentials of Grammar - I

Articles
Parts of Speech
Tenses

Module III: Essentials of Grammar - II

Sentence Structure
Subject -Verb agreement
Punctuation

Module IV: Communication

The process and importance
Principles & benefits of Effective Communication

Module V: Spoken English Communication

Speech Drills
Pronunciation and accent
Stress and Intonation

Module VI: Communication Skills-I

Developing listening skills
Developing speaking skills

Module VII: Communication Skills-II

Developing Reading Skills
Developing writing Skills

Module VIII: Written English communication

Progression of Thought/ideas
Structure of Paragraph
Structure of Essays

Module IX: Short Stories

Of Studies, by Francis Bacon
Dream Children, by Charles Lamb
The Necklace, by Guy de Maupassant
A Shadow, by R.K.Narayan
Glory at Twilight, Bhabani Bhattacharya

Module X: Poems
All the Worlds a Stage Shakespeare
To Autumn Keats
O! Captain, My Captain. Walt Whitman
Where the Mind is Without Fear Rabindranath Tagore
Psalm of Life H.W. Longfellow

Examination Scheme:

Components A CT HA EE
Weightage (%) 05 15 10 70
Text & References:

• Madhulika Jha, Echoes, Orient Long Man

• Ramon & Prakash, Business Communication, Oxford.
• Sydney Greenbaum Oxford English Grammar, Oxford.
• Successful Communications, Malra Treece (Allyn and Bacon)
• Effective Technical Communication, M. Ashraf Rizvi.
 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - II
(PROBLEM SOLVING AND CREATIVE THINKING)

Course Code: BAE 243 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
To enable the students:
Understand the process of problem solving and creative thinking.
Facilitation and enhancement of skills required for decision-making.

Course Contents:

Module I: Thinking as a tool for Problem Solving

What is thinking: The Mind/Brain/Behaviour
Thinking skills
Critical Thinking and Learning:
Making Predictions and Reasoning
Memory and Critical Thinking
Emotions and Critical Thinking

Module II: Hindrances to Problem Solving

Perception
Expression
Emotion
Intellect
Work environment

Module III: Problem Solving Process

Recognizing and Defining a problem
Analyzing the problem (potential causes)
Developing possible alternatives
Evaluating Solutions
Resolution of problem
Implementation

Module IV: Plan of Action

Construction of POA
Monitoring
Reviewing and analyzing the outcome

Module V: Creative Thinking

Definition and meaning of creativity
The nature of creative thinking
Convergent and Divergent thinking
Idea generation and evaluation (Brain Storming)
Image generation and evaluation
Debating
The six-phase model of Creative Thinking: ICEDIP model

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal

Viva based on personal journal
Assessment of Behavioural change as a result of training
Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Examination Scheme:
Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for
Test (CT) Success (JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25
Text & References:

• Michael Steven: How to be a better problem solver, Kogan Page, New Delhi, 1999
• Geoff Petty: How to be better at creativity; Kogan Page, New Delhi, 1999
• Phil Lowe Koge Page: Creativity and Problem Solving, New Delhi, 1996
• Bensley, Alan D.: Critical Thinking in Psychology – A Unified Skills Approach, (1998),
Brooks/Cole Publishing Company.
 FRENCH - II
Course Code: BAE 244 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to overcome the fear of speaking a foreign language and take position as a
foreigner speaking French.
To make them learn the basic rules of French Grammar.

Course Contents:

Module A: pp.38 – 47: Unité 3: Object if 3, 4, 5. 6

Module B: pp. 47 to 75 Unité 4, 5

Contenu lexical: Unité 3: Organiser son temps

1. donner/demander des informations sur un emploi du temps, un
horaire SNCF – Imaginer un dialogue
2. rédiger un message/ une lettre pour …
i) prendre un rendez-vous/ accepter et confirmer/ annuler
ii) inviter/accepter/refuser
3. Faire un programme d’activités
imaginer une conversation téléphonique/un dialogue
Propositions- interroger, répondre
Unité 4: Découvrir son environnement
1. situer un lieu
2. s’orienter, s’informer sur un itinéraire.
3. Chercher, décrire un logement
4. connaître les rythmes de la vie
Unité 5: s’informer
1. demander/donner des informations sur un emploi du temps passé.
2. donner une explication, exprimer le doute ou la certitude.
3. découvrir les relations entre les mots
4. savoir s’informer

Contenu grammatical: 1. Adjectifs démonstratifs

2. Adjectifs possessifs/exprimer la possession à l’aide de :
i. « de » ii. A+nom/pronom disjoint
3. Conjugaison pronominale – négative, interrogative -
construction à l'infinitif
4. Impératif/exprimer l’obligation/l’interdiction à l’aide de « il
faut…. »/ «il ne faut pas… »
5. passé composé
6. Questions directes/indirectes

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Campus: Tome 1

 GERMAN – II
Course Code: BAE 245 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of
grammar, which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic opportunities
available in Germany
Introduction to Grammar to consolidate the language base learnt in Semester I

Course Contents:
Module I: Everything about Time and Time periods
Time and times of the day.
Weekdays, months, seasons.
Adverbs of time and time related prepositions

Module II: Irregular verbs

Introduction to irregular verbs like to be, and others, to learn the conjugations of the same, (fahren,
essen, lessen, schlafen, sprechen und ähnliche).

Module III: Separable verbs

To comprehend the change in meaning that the verbs undergo when used as such
Treatment of such verbs with separable prefixes

Module IV: Reading and comprehension

Reading and deciphering railway schedules/school time table
Usage of separable verbs in the above context

Module V: Accusative case

Accusative case with the relevant articles
Introduction to 2 different kinds of sentences – Nominative and Accusative

Module VI: Accusative personal pronouns

Nominative and accusative in comparison
Emphasizing on the universal applicability of the pronouns to both persons and objects

Module VII: Accusative prepositions

Accusative propositions with their use
Both theoretical and figurative use

Module VIII: Dialogues

Dialogue reading: ‘In the market place’
‘At the Hotel’

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch

• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1, 2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH – II
Course Code: BAE 246 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire more vocabulary, grammar, Verbal Phrases to understand simple texts and
start describing any person or object in Simple Present Tense.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of earlier modules.

Module II
Some more AR/ER/IR verbs. Introduction to root changing and irregular AR/ER/IR ending verbs

Module III
More verbal phrases (eg, Dios Mio, Que lastima etc), adverbs (bueno/malo, muy, mucho, bastante, poco).
Simple texts based on grammar and vocabulary done in earlier modules.

Module IV
Possessive pronouns

Module V
Writing/speaking essays like my friend, my house, my school/institution, myself….descriptions of people,
objects etc, computer/internet related vocabulary

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español, En Directo I A
• Español Sin Fronteras
 JAPANESE - II
Course Code: BAE 247 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse in the language with the help of basic particles and be able to define
the situations and people using different adjectives.

Course Contents:
Module I: Verbs
Transitive verbs, intransitive verbs

Module II: More prepositions

More particles, articles and likes and dislikes.

Module III: Terms used for instructions

No parking, no smoking etc.

Module IV: Adverbs

Different adverbial expression.

Module V: Invitations and celebrations

Giving and receiving presents,
Inviting somebody for lunch, dinner, movie and how to accept and refuse in different ways

Module VI: Comprehension’s

Short essay on Family, Friend etc.

Module VII: Conversations

Situational conversations like asking the way, at a post office, family

Module VIII: Illness

Going to the doctor, hospital etc.

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the language describing above-mentioned topics.

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments.
➢ Use of library, visiting and watching movies in Japan and culture center every Friday at
6pm.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – II
Course Code: BAE 248 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
Chinese is a tonal language where each syllable in isolation has its definite tone (flat, falling, rising and
rising/falling), and same syllables with different tones mean different things. When you say, “ma” with a
third tone, it mean horse and “ma” with the first tone is Mother. The course aims at familiarizing the
student with the basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin, the language of Mainland China. The
course aims at training students in practical skills and nurturing them to interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Drills
Practice reading aloud
Observe Picture and answer the question.
Tone practice.
Practice using the language both by speaking and by taking notes.
Introduction of basic sentence patterns.
Measure words.
Glad to meet you.

Module II
Where do you live?
Learning different colors.
Tones of “bu”
Buying things and how muchit costs?
Dialogue on change of Money.
More sentence patterns on Days and Weekdays.
How to tell time. Saying the units of time in Chinese. Learning to say useful phrases like – 8:00, 11:25,
10:30 P.M. everyday, afternoon, evening, night, morning 3:58, one hour, to begin, to end ….. etc.
Morning, Afternoon, Evening, Night.

Module III
Use of words of location like-li, wais hang, xia
Furniture – table, chair, bed, bookshelf,.. etc.
Description of room, house or hostel room.. eg what is placed where and how many things are there in it?
Review Lessons – Preview Lessons.
Expression ‘yao”, “xiang” and “yaoshi” (if).
Days of week, months in a year etc.
I am learning Chinese. Is Chinese difficult?

Module IV
Counting from 1-1000
Use of “chang-chang”.
Making an Inquiry – What time is it now? Where is the Post Office?
Days of the week. Months in a year.
Use of Preposition – “zai”, “gen”.
Use of interrogative pronoun – “duoshao” and “ji”.
“Whose”??? Sweater etc is it?
Different Games and going out for exercise in the morning.

Module V
The verb “qu”
− Going to the library issuing a book from the library
− Going to the cinema hall, buying tickets
− Going to the post office, buying stamps
− Going to the market to buy things.. etc
− Going to the buy clothes …. Etc.
Hobby. I also like swimming.
Comprehension and answer questions based on it.
Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• “Elementary Chinese Reader Part I” Lesson 11-20

 MACRO ECONOMICS - I

Course Code: BAE 301 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This course aims at introducing the fundamentals of Macro economic theories, policies and models in a
historical perspective. It will enable the students o develop a critical insight on Classical and Keynesian
macro economic models, to understand the relationship between inflation and employment by providing
exposure to the constructions of Friedman, Phelps & Phillips.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to Macroeconomics
The roots of macroeconomics, macroeconomic concerns, the role of government in the macroeconomy,
the components of the macroeconomy, the methodology of macroeconomics.

Module II: Introduction to National Income Accounting

Concepts of GDP and national income, approaches to calculating GDP, GDP and personal income,
Nominal and real GDP, Limitations of the GDP concept, GDP and the black economy.

Module III: The Classical System: The Full-Employment Model

Macroeconomic Equilibrium, the labour market, the product market, the capital market; extending the
full employment model

Module IV: The Simple Keynesian Model

Aggregate expenditure and equilibrium output--aggregate output and aggregate income, equilibrium
aggregate output; Government participation in the economy; Fiscal policy at work--The Multiplier effect.

Module V: Money in the Modern Economy

Characteristics of a monetary economy; The demand for money; The supply of money and overall
liquidity position; credit creation.

Module VI: Inflation

The causes of inflation, level of prices and the value of money, The Fisher effect, The cost of inflation.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Mc Connell. C.R & H.C. Gupta, “Introduction to Macro Economics”, Tata McGraw Hill, Delhi
• Gardner Ackeley, “Macro Economics”.

References:
• J.E. Stiglitz, and C.E. Walsh (2002), Principles of Economics, 3rd Edition, W.W. Norton & Company,
New York.
• R. Stone and G. Stone (1962), National Income and Expenditure, Bowes and Bowes London.
• Lipsey & Chrystal- Principles of Economics
• K.K. Dewett: Modern Economic Theory, New Delhi, Shyamlal Charitable Trust.
 PUBLIC FINANCE
Course Code: BAE 302 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This subject is primarily aimed at introducing principles of public finance, role of different governments,
public expenditure, taxation, budget and fiscal policy in India. To give exposure to the student, the role
and the function of the government in a modern economy. The government plays different roles and
performs varied functions which are different from earlier societies. In this context the public financial
functions of the government need to be understood by a student, by studying the relevant theory and
empirical analysis.

Course Contents:
Module I
Role of government in managing the economy under different economic systems – Social Welfare
Function. Theory of Public goods - Market failure - Externalities - problems in Allocation of Resources -
theoretical developments in Demand revelation for social goods -Public choice.

Module II: Public Expenditure

Theories of Public Expenditure -Structure and Growth of Public Expenditure - Criteria for public
investment - Income Redistribution – Expenditure Programmes for the poor - Social Insurance:
Unemployment Insurance, Health Care, and Education - Social cost-benefit analysis - benefit estimation
and evaluation.

Module III: Taxation

Theory of Taxation - Benefit and ability-to-pay approaches - Indian Direct and Indirect Taxes - Tax
reforms since 1975 - Chelliah Committee Report - Evaluation of Tax Reforms -Taxation Incidence and
alternative concepts of Incidence.

Module IV
Budget - Concept of PPB - Zero-based Budgeting - Deficit Budgeting - Types of Deficits - Public Debt:
Trends and composition of Indian Public Debt - Debt management.

Module V
Fiscal Policy - Role of Fiscal Policy in India - Principles of Fiscal federalism in India - Vertical and
horizontal imbalance - Finance Commissions and Planning Commission -
Issues in Revenue devolutions and Grants -in- Aid - Local Finance.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Musgrave, R.A. and P.A Musgrave (1976), Public Finance in Theory and Practice, McGraw- Hill
Kogakusha, Tokyo.
• Raghbendra Jha : (1998), Modern Public Economics.
• Rosen, Harway, S. - Public Finance, IVth Edn. Irwin.

References:
• Mueller, D.C. (1979), Public Choice, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
• Brown, C.V. and Jackson - Public Sector Economics
• Raja J. Chellia et al. - Trends in Federal Finance.
• Reports of Finance Commissions.
 INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS
Course Code: BAE 303 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The core idea behind the inclusion of this subject is to introduce the students on the industrial
developmental side of India, its different facts, different arena, policies & future prospect.

Course Contents:

Module I: Overview of the Industrial Scene in India

Trends in growth and productivity; Competitiveness and changes in Policy Regimes

Module II: Issues relating to the Composition of Indian Industry

Small vs. Large Industry
Public vs. Private Sector, with emphasis on:
Performance of the public sector
Privatisation
Dynamics of the Industrial Sector: Growth and Sickness

Module III: Trends in Industrial Regulation and Control

Pricing in the public and private sectors
Employment growth in the industrial sector

Module IV: Policy Issues and Future Prospects

Infrastructure; Technology

Module V: Issues of Management

Limiting market abuses
FDIs/FIIs

Module VI: Financing of Industry

Ownership and Efficiency
Equity markets

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Dilip Mookherjee, ed. (1995), Indian Industry, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

References:
• J. Bhagwati (1993), India in Transition: Freeing the Economy, Clarendon Oxford 1993
• Mrinal Datta Chaudhri (1990), Market Failure and Government Failure: Journal of Economic
Perspectives
• NCAER The India Infrastructure Report (Rakesh Mohan Committee)
• Department of Disinvestment, White Paper, 2000
 LEGAL ASPECTS OF BUSINESS

Course Code: BAE 304 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
Law and business go hand in hand. In fact, every business activity to be successful must have the backing
and a sanction of law. With increasing globalization and governmental regulation for all business
activities, the survival and growth of the organizations depend to a large extent on their compliance of
existing regulations individually, as well as their ability to influence public policies in the area of their
concern collectively. However, the course is designed to provide a broad understanding of legal issues
impacting upon business and the legal processes involved in the management of an organization. Besides
the legal aspects of contract management, the course will focus on important legal issues in business and
management especially in today's knowledge economy and the internet environment.

Course Contents:
Module I
An Introduction to Legal Aspects in Management, Contract Formulation & its Management

Module II
Performance and Remedies for Breach of Contract, Company as Dominant Form of Business
Organization

Module III
Company Formation: Basic Documents & their Implications, An invitation to investment: Prospectus,
Shares and Debentures

Module IV
Management of a Company: Duties and Liabilities of Directors, Administration of Company Affairs:
Minority protection & Prevention of Oppression and Mismanagement

Module V
Environmental Law and Corporate Environmental Liability, Intellectual Property Law & Management

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Akhileswar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, 3rd Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill Co.

References:
• Dr. Avtar Singh, Company Law (In Nutshell), Latest Edition, Eastern Book Company
• Principle of Mercantile Law (latest edition) by Dr. Avtar Singh.
 STATISTICAL METHODS IN ECONOMICS - II

Course Code: BAE 305 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This subject will lead the students into the field of probability and hypothesis testing. Each one of them
has a lot of application in the practical problems of economics.

Course Contents:
Module I: Probability Theory
Elements of Probability Theory: Sample space Events, meaning of probability Classical definition of
probability, The addition rule, Multiplication Rule, Theorems of total probability, conditional and
statistical independence, limitation of classical definition, Bayes formula, random variable, expectation
and variance of random variable (for random sampling with or without replacement)

Module II: Univariate Probability Distributions

Binomial, Poisson, Normal distribution, The standard normal distribution—Mean, Variance, Skewness,
Importance of Normal Distribution in Statistics.

Module III: Introduction to Estimation and Hypothesis Testing

Methods of sampling; sampling distribution of a statistic; distribution of the sample mean; sampling
error and standard error of a statistic with special reference to the mean; Point and interval estimation of
parameters; properties of an estimator; unbiasedness, relative efficiency and consistency.
Testing of Hypothesis; type I and type II errors, power of a test; large sample tests, “t“ test for the mean;
one tail and two tail tests for difference of means; Chi-square test for (i) goodness of fit and (ii)
independence of two attributes.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Allen Webster, Applied Statistics for Business and Economics, (3rd edition), McGraw Hill,
International Edition 1998.

References:
• P.H. Karmel and M. Polasek, Applied Statistics for Economists (4th edition), Pitman, Australia. M.R.
Spiegel (2nd edition), Theory and Problems of Statistics, Schaum Series.
 TERM PAPER
Course Code: BAE 330 Credit Units: 03

GUIDELINES FOR TERM PAPER

A term (or research) paper is primarily a record of intelligent articulation through several sources on a
particular topic of a given subject.
The students will choose the topic at the beginning of the session in consultation with the faculty
assigned/chosen. The progress of the paper will be monitored regularly by the faculty. At the end of the
semester the detailed paper on the topic will be submitted to the faculty assigned/chosen. The evaluation
will be done by Board of examiners comprising of the faculties.

The procedure for writing a term paper may consists of the following steps:
Choosing a topic
1. Finding sources of material
2. Collecting the notes
3. Outlining the paper
4. Writing the first draft
5. Editing & preparing the final paper

1. Choosing a Topic
The topic chosen should not be too general. Student will normally consult the faculty guide
while finalizing the topic.

2. Finding Sources of material

• The material sources should be not more than 5 years old unless the nature of the paper
is such that it involves examining older writings from a historical point of view.
• Begin by making a list of subject-headings under which you might expect the topics to be
listed.
• The sources could be books and magazines articles, news stories, periodicals, journals,
internet etc.

3. Collecting the notes

Skim through sources, locate the useful material, make notes of it, including quotes and
information for footnotes.
• Get facts, not just opinions. Compare the facts with author's conclusion(s)/recommendations.
• In research studies, notice the methods and procedures, results & conclusions.
• Check cross references.

4. Outlining the paper

• Review notes to find main sub-divisions of the topic.
• Sort the collected material again under each main division to find sub-sections for outline
so that it begins to look more coherent and takes on a definite structure. If it does not, try
going back and sorting again for main divisions, to see if another general pattern is
possible.

5. Writing the first draft

Write the paper around the outline, being sure that you indicate in the first part of the paper
what its purpose is. You may follow the following:
• statement of purpose/objectives
• main body of the paper
• statement of summary and possible conclusion(s)/recommendations
Avoid short, bumpy telegraphic sentences and long straggling sentences with more
than one main ideas.
6. Editing & preparing the final paper
a) Before writing a term paper, you should ensure you have an issue(s) which you attempt to
address in your paper and this should be kept in mind throughout the paper. Include only
information/ details/ analyses that are relevant to the issue(s) at hand. Sometimes, the relevance
of a particular section may be clear to you but not to your readers. To avoid this, ensure that you
briefly explain the relevance of every section.
b) Read the paper to ensure that the language is not awkward, and that it "flows" smoothly.
c) Check for proper spelling, phrasing and sentence construction.
d) Check for proper form on footnotes, quotes, and punctuation.
e) Check to see that quotations serve one of the following purposes:
(i) Show evidence of what an author has said.
(ii) Avoid misrepresentation through restatement.
(iii) Save unnecessary writing when ideas have been well expressed by the original author.
f) Check for proper form on tables and graphs. Be certain that any table or graph is self-
explanatory.

Term papers should be composed of the following sections:

1) Title page
2) Abstract
3) Introduction
4) Review of the Literature
5) Discussion & Conclusion
6) References
7) Appendix

Generally, the introduction, discussion, conclusion and references should account for a third of the paper
and the review part should be two thirds of the paper.

Discussion
The discussion section either follows the results or may alternatively be integrated in the results
section. The section should consist of a discussion of the results of the study focusing on the
question posed in the paper.

Conclusion
The conclusion is often thought of as the easiest part of the paper but should by no means be
disregarded. There are a number of key components which should not be omitted. These include:
a) summary of objectives and issues raised.
b) summary of findings
c) summary of limitations of the study at hand
d) details of possibilities for related future research

References
From the very beginning of the research work, one should be careful to note all details of articles
or any other material gathered. The Reference part should list ALL references included in the
paper. References not included in the text in any form should NOT be listed here. The key issue
here is consistency. Choose a particular convention and stick to this.

The Conventions
Monographs
Crystal, D. (2001), Language and the internet. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Edited volumes
Gass, S./Neu, J. (eds.) (1996), Speech acts across cultures. Challenges to communication in a
second language. Berlin/ NY: Mouton de Gruyter.
[(eds.) is used when there is more than one editor; and (ed.) where there is only one editor. In
German the abbreviation used is (Hrsg.) for Herausgeber].

Edited articles
Schmidt, R./Shimura, A./Wang, Z./Jeong, H. (1996), Suggestions to buy: Television commercials
from the U.S., Japan, China, and Korea. In: Gass, S./Neu, J. (eds.) (1996), Speech acts across
cultures. Challenges to communication in a second language. Berlin/ NY: Mouton de Gruyter:
285-316.

Journal articles
McQuarrie, E.F./Mick, D.G. (1992), On resonance: A critical pluralistic inquiry into advertising
rhetoric. Journal of consumer research 19, 180-197.

Electronic book
Chandler, D. (1994), Semiotics for beginners [HTML document]. Retrieved [5.10.'01] from the
World Wide Web, http://www.aber.ac.uk/media/Documents/S4B/.

Electronic journal articles

Watts, S. (2000) Teaching talk: Should students learn 'real German'? [HTML document]. German
as a Foreign Language Journal [online] 1. Retrieved [12.09.'00] from the World Wide Web,
http://www.gfl-journal.com/.

Other websites
Verterhus, S.A. (n.y.), Anglicisms in German car advertising. The problem of gender assignment
[HTML document]. Retrieved [13.10.'01] from the World Wide Web,
http://olaf.hiof.no/~sverrev/eng.html.

Appendix
The appendix should be used for data collected (e.g. questionnaires, transcripts etc.) and for tables and
graphs not included in the main text due to their subsidiary nature or to space constraints in the main
text.

The Layout Guidelines for the Term Paper

• A4 size Paper
• Font: Arial (10 points) or Times New Roman (12 points)
• Line spacing: 1.5
• Top and bottom margins: 1 inch/ 2.5 cm; left and right margins: 1.25 inches/ 3 cm

Assessment Scheme:
Continuous Evaluation: 40%
(Based on abstract writing, interim draft, general approach,
research orientation, readings undertaken etc.)

Final Evaluation: 60%

(Based on the organization of the paper, objectives/
problem profile/ issue outlining, comprehensiveness of the
research, flow of the idea/ ideas, relevance of material used/
presented, outcomes vs. objectives, presentation/ viva etc.)
 COMMUNICATION SKILLS – I

Course Code: BAE 341 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
To form written communication strategies necessary in the workplace

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to Writing Skills
Effective Writing Skills
Avoiding Common Errors
Paragraph Writing
Note Taking
Writing Assignments

Module II: Letter Writing

Types
Formats

Module III
Memo
Agenda and Minutes
Notice and Circulars

Module IV: Report Writing

Purpose and Scope of a Report
Fundamental Principles of Report Writing
Project Report Writing
Summer Internship Reports

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 CAF V GD GP A

Weightage (%) 20 20 25 10 10 10 5

CAF – Communication Assessment File

GD – Group Discussion
GP – Group Presentation

Text & References:

• Business Communication, Raman – Prakash, Oxford

• Creative English for Communication, Krishnaswamy N, Macmillan
• Textbook of Business Communication, Ramaswami S, Macmillan
• Working in English, Jones, Cambridge
• A Writer's Workbook Fourth edition, Smoke, Cambridge
• Effective Writing, Withrow, Cambridge
• Writing Skills, Coe/Rycroft/Ernest, Cambridge
• Welcome!, Jones, Cambridge
 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE – III
(INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION AND RELATIONSHIP
MANAGEMENT)

Course Code: BAE 343 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
This course aims at imparting an understanding of:
• Interpersonal communication and relationship.
• Strategies for healthy interpersonal relationship
• Effective management of emotions.
• Building interpersonal competence.

Course Contents:
Module I: Interpersonal Communication
Importance of Behavioural/ Interpersonal Communication
Types – Self and Other Oriented
Rapport Building – NLP, Communication Mode
Steps to improve Interpersonal Communication

Module II: Interpersonal Styles

Transactional Analysis
Life Position/Script Analysis
Games Analysis
Interact ional and Transactional Styles
Bridging differences in Interpersonal Relationship through TA
Communication Styles

Module III: Conflict Management and Negotiation

Meaning and Nature of conflicts
Styles and techniques of conflict management
Meaning of Negotiation
Process and Strategies of Negotiation
Interpersonal Communication: Conflict Management and Negotiation
Module IV: Interp ersonal Relationship Development
Importance of Interpersonal Relationships
Interpersonal Relationship Skills
Types of Interpersonal Relationships
Relevance of Interpersonal Communication in Relationship Development

Module V: Impression Management

Meaning & Components of Impression Management
Impression Management Techniques
Impression Management Training-Self help and Formal approaches

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal

Viva based on personal journal
Assessment of Behavioural change as a result of training
Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Examination Scheme:
Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for
Test (CT) Success (JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25

Text & References:

• Vangelist L. Anita, Mark N. Knapp, Inter Personal Communication and Human

Relationships: Third Edition, Allyn and Bacon
• Julia T. Wood. Interpersonal Communication everyday encounter
• Beebe, Beebe and Redmond; Interpersonal Communication, 1996; Allyn and Bacon
Publishers.
• Rosenfeld, P., Giacalone, R.A. and Catherine, A.R. (2003). Impression Management:
Building and Enhancing Reputations at Work. Thomson Learning, Singapore.
 FRENCH - III
Course Code: BAE 344 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To provide the students with the know-how
• To master the current social communication skills in oral and in written.
• To enrich the formulations, the linguistic tools and vary the sentence construction without repetition.

Course Contents:
Module B: pp. 76 – 88 Unité 6

Module C: pp. 89 to103 Unité 7

Contenu lexical: Unité 6: se faire plaisir

1. acheter : exprimer ses choix, décrire un objet (forme, dimension,
poids et matières) payer
2. parler de la nourriture, deux façons d’exprimer la quantité,
commander un repas au restaurant
3. parler des différentes occasions de faire la fête

Unité 7: Cultiver ses relations

1. maîtriser les actes de la communication sociale courante
(Salutations, présentations, invitations, remerciements)
2. annoncer un événement, exprimer un souhait, remercier,
s’excuser par écrit.
3. caractériser une personne (aspect physique et caractère)
Contenu grammatical:
1. accord des adjectifs qualificatifs
2. articles partitifs
3. Négations avec de, ne…rien/personne/plus
4. Questions avec combien, quel…
5. expressions de la quantité
6. ne…plus/toujours - encore
7. pronoms compléments directs et indirects
8. accord du participe passé (auxiliaire « avoir ») avec
l’objet direct
9. Impératif avec un pronom complément direct ou indirect
10. construction avec « que » - Je crois que/ Je pense que/ Je
sais que

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Campus: Tome 1

 GERMAN – III

Course Code: BAE 345 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of
grammar, which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic opportunities
available in Germany

Course Contents:
Module I: Modal verbs
Modal verbs with conjugations and usage
Imparting the finer nuances of the language

Module II: Information about Germany (ongoing)

Information about Germany in the form of presentations or “Referat”– neighbors, states and capitals,
important cities and towns and characteristic features of the same, and also a few other topics related to
Germany.

Module III: Dative case

Dative case, comparison with accusative case
Dative case with the relevant articles
Introduction to 3 different kinds of sentences – nominative, accusative and dative

Module IV: Dative personal pronouns

Nominative, accusative and dative pronouns in comparison

Module V: Dative prepositions

Dative preposition with their usage both theoretical and figurative use

Module VI: Dialogues

In the Restaurant,
At the Tourist Information Office,
A telephone conversation

Module VII: Directions

Names of the directions
Asking and telling the directions with the help of a roadmap

Module VIII: Conjunctions

To assimilate the knowledge of the conjunctions learnt indirectly so far

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch

• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1,2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH – III
Course Code: BAE 346 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire knowledge of the Set/definite expressions (idiomatic expressions) in Spanish
language and to handle some Spanish situations with ease.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of earlier semester modules
Set expressions (idiomatic expressions) with the verb Tener, Poner, Ir….
Weather

Module II
Introduction to Gustar…and all its forms. Revision of Gustar and usage of it

Module III
Translation of Spanish-English; English-Spanish. Practice sentences.
How to ask for directions (using estar)
Introduction to IR + A + INFINITIVE FORM OF A VERB

Module IV
Simple conversation with help of texts and vocabulary
En el restaurante
En el instituto
En el aeropuerto

Module V
Reflexives

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español, En Directo I A
• Español Sin Fronteras -Nivel Elemental
 JAPANESE - III
Course Code: BAE 347 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse in the language with the help of basic verbs and to express themselves
effectively and narrate their everyday short encounters. Students are also given projects on Japan and
Japanese culture to widen their horizon further.
Note: The Japanese script is introduced in this semester.

Course Contents:
Module I: Verbs
Different forms of verbs: present continuos verbs etc

Module II
More Adverbs and adverbial expressions

Module III: Counters

Learning to count different shaped objects,

Module IV: Tenses

Past tense, Past continuous tense.

Module V: Comparison
Comparative and Superlative degree

Module VI: Wishes and desires

Expressing desire to buy, hold, possess. Usage in negative sentences as well.
Comparative degree, Superlative degree.

Module VII: Appointment

Over phone, formal and informal etc.

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the language and can describe themselves and situations effectively
➢ They also gain great knowledge in terms of Japanese lifestyle and culture, which help them at the
time of placements.

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments.
➢ Use of library, visiting and watching movies in Japan and culture center every Friday at 6pm.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – III

Course Code: BAE 348 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
Foreign words are usually imported by translating the concept into Chinese, the emphasis is on the
meaning rather than the sound. But the system runs into a problem because the underlying name of
personal name is often obscure so they are almost always transcribed according to their pronciation
alone. The course aims at familiarizing the student with the basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin,
the language of Mainland China. The course aims at training students in practical skills and nurturing
them to interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Drills
Dialogue practice
Observe picture and answer the question.
Introduction of written characters.
Practice reading aloud
Practice using the language both by speaking and by taking notes.
Character writing and stroke order

Module II
Measure words
Position words e.g. inside, outside, middle, in front, behind, top, bottom, side, left, right, straight.
Directional words – beibian, xibian, nanbian, dongbian, zhongjian.
Our school and its different building locations.
What game do you like?
Difference between “hii” and “neng”, “keyi”.

Module III
Changing affirmative sentences to negative ones and vice versa
Human body parts.
Not feeling well words e.g. ; fever, cold, stomach ache, head ache.
Use of the modal particle “le”
Making a telephone call
Use of “jiu” and “cal” (Grammar portion)
Automobiles e.g. Bus, train, boat, car, bike etc.
Traveling, by train, by airplane, by bus, on the bike, by boat.. etc.

Module IV
The ordinal number “di”
“Mei” the demonstrative pronoun e.g. mei tian, mei nian etc.
use of to enter to exit
Structural particle “de” (Compliment of degree).
Going to the Park.
Description about class schedule during a week in school.
Grammar use of “li” and “cong”.
Comprehension reading followed by questions.

Module V
Persuasion-Please don’t smoke.
Please speak slowly
Praise – This pictorial is very beautiful
Opposites e.g. Clean-Dirty, Little-More, Old-New, Young-Old, Easy-Difficult, Boy-Girl, Black-White,
Big-Small, Slow-Fast … etc.
Talking about studies and classmates
Use of “it doesn’t matter”
Enquiring about a student, description about study method.
Grammar: Negation of a sentence with a verbal predicate.
Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• “Elementary Chinese Reader Part I, Part-2” Lesson 21-30

 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS

Course Code: BAE 401 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This course focuses on the basic issues, concepts and theories related to the international economics. It
includes different trade policy & welfare, international trading system, WTO, Balance of Payments Fixed
and Flexible exchange rate systems, IMF & others.

Course Contents:
Module I
The subject matter of international economics
Comparative advantage: Ricardian, specific-factors, and Heckscher-Ohlin models.
Terms of trade, immiserising growth, and the transfer problem.
New trade theories: economies of scale and imperfect competition
International factor movements: labour migration and foreign investment.
Trade policy and welfare, with special reference to developing countries.
The international trading system: WTO and preferential trading agreements.

Module II
Review of national income and balance of payments accounting.
The foreign exchange market and exchange rate determination.
Open economy macro-economics: Determination of output, interest rates and exchange rates in the long
and short runs.
Macro-economic policy in an open economy and international policy coordination: fixed and flexible
exchange rates.
International monetary institutions and issues: IMF, currency crises, stabilization and other
contemporary issues.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Paul Krugman and Maurice Obstfeld, International Economics: Theory and policy, latest edition,
Pearson Education low-price edition, distributed in India by Addison-Wesley Longman.
• Amitav K. Dutt (1995), "The Open Economy" in Prabhat Patnaik (ed.), Macro-economics, OUP,
Delhi.

References:
• W.M. Corden (1974), Trade Policy and Welfare, Clarendon Oxford, Chapters 1, 2 and 9.
• T.N. Srinivasan (1998), Developing Countries and the Multilateral Trading System, OUP, Delhi,
Chapters 5-8.
 BUSINESS INFORMATION AND DATA BASE SYSTEM

Course Code: BAE 402 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This subject aims at providing the basic knowledge on Business information and Data Base System. To
enable students to gain knowledge on effectiveness and efficiency of information systems in business
functions. To develop skills on internet, communication channels and communication network.

Course Contents:
Module I
Business Information Systems- Meaning and Evolution- Types- System Concepts- Components-
Information System Activities.

Module II
Strategies, Uses of Information Systems - Strategy and Strategic Moves- Achieving Competitive
Advantage.

Module III
Information System in Business Function- Effectiveness and Efficiency- Manufacturing and Inventory
Control- Enterprise and Resource Planning.

Module IV
Database Management- Foundation Data Concepts- Database Management Approach- Types of
Database.

Module V
Data Warehouses - Data Mining - Databases on the Web knowledge Management- Internet
communication channels and communication networks.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Brien James A. - Management Information System.
• Economics of Operational Analyses- Willam J. Bamoul

References:
• Sen- Management Information System.
• Lucas- Management Information System.
 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT

Course Code: BAE 403 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To provide a basis of understanding to the students with reference to working of business organization
through the process of management. On completion of the syllabi the student will understand the basic
principles of management - will acquaint himself with management process, functions and principles.

Course Contents:
Module I: Nature of Management
Meaning, Definition, it's nature purpose, importance & functions, Management as Art, Science &
Profession- Management as Social System Concepts of management-Administration-Organization

Module II: Evolution of Management Thought

Contribution of F.W. Taylor, Henri Fayol, lton Mayo, Chester Barhard & Peter Drucker to the
management thought. Various approaches to management (i.e. Schools of management thought) Indian
Management Thought

Module III: Functions of Management

Planning - Meaning - Need & Importance, types levels – advantages & limitations. Forecasting - Need &
Techniques Decision making - Types - Process of rational decision making & techniques of decision
making, Organizing - Elements of organizing & processes: Types of organizations, Delegation of
authority - Need, difficulties in delegation – Decentralization, Staffing - Meaning & Importance, Direction
- Nature – Principles Communication - Types & Importance, Motivation - Importance – theories,
Leadership - Meaning - styles, qualities & functions of leaders, Controlling - Need, Nature, importance,
Process & Techniques, Coordination - Need – Importance

Module IV: Recent Trends in Management

Social Responsibility of Management – environment friendly management, Management of Change,
Management of Crisis, Total Quality Management, Stress Management, International Management

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Principles of Management, by Tripathi, Reddy Tata McGraw Hill
• Principles & practice of management - Dr. L.M. Parasad, Sultan Chand & Sons - New Delhi

References:
• Business Organization & Management - Dr. Y.K. Bhushan
• Management: Concept and Strategies by J. S. Chandan, Vikas Publishing
 COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT (1850-1950)

Course Code: BAE 404 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of this course is to make a comparative study of the economic development among the
developed countries- Britain, German, USA, Japan & USSR. The student will also get to know about the
role of the state in economic development.

Course Contents:
Module I: Perspectives on Comparative Economic Development
(a)Features of and trends in Modern Economic Growth -- a brief discussion of Kuznets' findings (b)
Gerschenkron's hypothesis of Economic Development in Historical Perspective.

Module II
An overview of economic development of the countries selected for case studies -- Britain, Germany,
U.S.A., Japan and USSR.

Module III
Changes in the structure of agriculture and economic development -- Britain, Japan and U.S.S.R.
Role and pattern of industrialisation in Britain, Japan and U.S.S.R.

Module IV
Labour markets and labour processes - Britain and Japan
Financial institutions and economic development in Germany, U.S.A and Japan

Module V
Foreign trade and economic development -- Britain, Japan and USA.
Role of the State in economic development (regulatory and developmental role) -- Japan, USA and USSR.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Richard A. Easterlin, Davis and Parker (1972) American Economic Growth: An economist’s History of
the United States. Harper & Row Chs. 1, 9, 14 and 17.
• Maurice Dobb (1977), Soviet Economic Development since 1917 ed.6, Routledge & Kegan Paul, Chs. 9,
10
• Paul R Gregory and Robert C. Stuart (1986), Soviet Economic Structure and Performance, Harper &
Row (3rd ed) Chs. 1, 4, 5 & 7.
• E.J. Hobsbawm (1968), Industry and Empire: An Economic History of Britain since 1750. Weidenfeld
& Nicholson, Chs.1, 2, 3, 5, 6.
• Richard Tilly, "German Banking" in Journal of European Economic History, 1986, Vol. 15. No.1.

References:
• W.W. Lockwood (1966), Economic Development of Japan, Expanded edition, Princeton University
Press, Chs.6,7 & 10
• Peter Mathias (1983), The First Industrial Nation, An Economic History of Britain, 1700- 1914. 2nd
edn, Methuen Chs.1, 3, 8 and 15.
• Roderick Floud and D. McCloskey (ed) (1981), Economic History of Britain Since 1700, Cambridge
University Press, (2nd ed) Ch. 12.
• T. Nakamura (1983) Economic Growth in Pre-War Japan, Tr. by Robert A Feldman, Yale University
Press, Chs. 1, 2, 3, 5 and 6.
• Alec Nove (1969) An Economic History of USSR, Penguin, 1969, Chs.5,6,7,8
 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

Course Code: BAE 405 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The need of this subject is for those concerned with research to pay due attention to the designing and
adhering to the appropriate methodology for improving the quality of research.

Course Contents:
Module I
Research methods versus methodology; Criteria for good research problem encountered by researchers
in India.

Module II
Planning a research prospect, problem identification & formulation, Research Design: Exploratory,
Descriptive & Experimental Research.

Module III
Data Collection Methods, Primary & Secondary data, Observation method, Interview method,
Questionnaire method, Steps in constructing a Questionnaire, types of questions, Altitude measurement
& scaling techniques, Ordinal, nominal, ratio, interval, scales: Likert Scale, Sampling decisions; sample
selection methods- productivity & non-probability sample size.

Module IV
Data Collection & field force, Field work procedure, common sources of error in the field work,
tabulation of collected data.

Module V
Test of significance & report writing
z, t, f, x2, correlation & regression techniques, Pre-writing considerations & presentation of research
report.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Marketing Research- An applied orientation-By Naresh K. Malhotra
• Kothari, C.R., Research Methodology, Wiley Eastern Ltd, New Delhi

References:
• Amarchand, D. Research Methods in Commerce, Emerald Publishers, Chennai.
• Marketing Research (Text & Cases) nu Rajendra Nargundkar, Tata McGrwa Hill
 COMMUNICATION SKILLS – II

Course Code: BAE 441 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
To teach the participants strategies for improving academic reading and writing.
Emphasis is placed on increasing fluency, deepening vocabulary, and refining academic language
proficiency.

Course Contents:
Module I: Social Communication Skills
Small Talk
Conversational English
Appropriateness
Building rapport

Module II: Context Based Speaking

In general situations
In specific professional situations
Discussion and associated vocabulary
Simulations/Role Play

Module III: Professional Skills

Presentations
Negotiations
Meetings
Telephony Skills

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 CAF V GD GP A

Weightage (%) 20 20 25 10 10 10 5

CAF – Communication Assessment File

GD – Group Discussion
GP – Group Presentation

Text & References:

• Essential Telephoning in English, Garside/Garside, Cambridge

• Working in English, Jones, Cambridge
• Business Communication, Raman – Prakash, Oxford
• Speaking Personally, Porter-Ladousse, Cambridge
• Speaking Effectively, Jermy Comfort, et.al, Cambridge
• Business Communication, Raman –Prakash, Oxford
 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - IV
(GROUP DYNAMICS AND TEAM BUILDING)

Course Code: BAE 443 Credit Units:

01

Course Objective:
To inculcate an elementary level of understanding of group/team functions
To develop team-spirit and to know the importance of working in teams

Course Contents:
Module I: Group formation
Definition and Characteristics
Importance of groups
Classification of groups
Stages of group formation
Benefits of group formation

Module II: Group Functions

External Conditions affecting group functioning: Authority, Structure, Org. Resources,
Organizational policies etc.
Internal conditions affecting group functioning: Roles, Norms, Conformity, Status,
Cohesiveness, Size, Inter group conflict.
Group Cohesiveness and Group Conflict
Adjustment in Groups

Module III: Teams

Meaning and nature of teams
External and Internal factors effecting team
Building Effective Teams
Consensus Building
Collaboration

Module IV: Leadership

Meaning, Nature and Functions
Self leadership
Leadership styles in organization
Leadership in Teams

Module V: Power to empower: Individual and Teams

Meaning and Nature
Types of power
Relevance in organization and Society

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal

Viva based on personal journal
Assessment of Behavioural change as a result of training
Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Examination Scheme:

Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for

Test (CT) Success (JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25

Text & References:

• Organizational Behaviour, Davis, K.

• Hoover, Judhith D. Effective Small Group and Team Communication, 2002,Harcourt College
Publishers
• Dick, Mc Cann & Margerison, Charles: Team Management, 1992 Edition, viva books
• LaFasto and Larson: When Teams Work Best, 2001, Response Books (Sage), New Delhi
• Smither Robert D.; The Psychology of Work and Human Performance, 1994, Harper Collins
College Publishers
 FRENCH – IV

Course Code: BAE 444 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students:
• To develop strategies of comprehension of texts of different origin
• To present facts, projects, plans with precision

Course Contents:
Module C: pp. 104 – 139: Unités 8, 9

Contenu lexical: Unité 8: Découvrir le passé

1. parler du passé, des habitudes et des changements.
2. parler de la famille, raconter une suite
d’événements/préciser leur date et leur durée.
3. connaître quelques moments de l’histoire

Unité 9: Entreprendre
1. faire un projet de la réalisation: (exprimer un besoin,
préciser les étapes d’une réalisation)
2. parler d’une entreprise
3. parler du futur

Contenu grammatical: 1. Imparfait

2. Pronom « en »
3. Futur
4. Discours rapporté au présent
5. Passé récent
6. Présent progressif

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Campus: Tome 1

 GERMAN - IV

Course Code: BAE 445 Credit

Units: 02
Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of
grammar, which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic opportunities
available in Germany.
Introduction to Advanced Grammar Language and Professional Jargon

Course Contents:
Module I: Present perfect tense
Present perfect tense, usage and applicability
Usage of this tense to indicate near past
Universal applicability of this tense in German

Module II: Letter writing

To acquaint the students with the form of writing informal letters.

Module III: Interchanging prepositions

Usage of prepositions with both accusative and dative cases
Usage of verbs fixed with prepositions
Emphasizing on the action and position factor

Module IV: Past tense

Introduction to simple past tense
Learning the verb forms in past tense
Making a list of all verbs in the past tense and the participle forms

Module V: Reading a Fairy Tale

Comprehension and narration
▪ Rotkäppchen
▪ Froschprinzessin
▪ Die Fremdsprache

Module VI: Genitive case

Genitive case – Explain the concept of possession in genitive
Mentioning the structure of weak nouns

Module VII: Genitive prepositions

Discuss the genitive propositions and their usage: (während, wegen, statt, trotz)

Module VIII: Picture Description

Firstly recognize the persons or things in the picture and identify the situation depicted in the picture;
Secondly answer questions of general meaning in context to the picture and also talk about the personal
experiences which come to your mind upon seeing the picture.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch
• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant - 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1,2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH – IV

Course Code: BAE 446 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire working knowledge of the language; to give them vocabulary, grammar, voice
modulations/intonations to handle everyday Spanish situations with ease.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of earlier semester modules
Introduction to Present Continuous Tense (Gerunds)

Module II
Translation with Present Continuous Tense
Introduction to Gustar, Parecer, Apetecer, doler

Module III
Imperatives (positive and negative commands of regular verbs)

Module IV
Commercial/ business vocabulary

Module V
Simple conversation with help of texts and vocabulary
En la recepcion del hotel
En el restaurante
En la agencia de viajes
En la tienda/supermercado

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español Sin Fronteras (Nivel – Elemental)

 JAPANESE – IV

Course Code: BAE 447 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to comfortably interact using basic Japanese.
Note: Teaching is done in roman as well as Japanese script, students will be taught katankana (another
form of script) in this semester i.e. to be able to write all the foreign words in Japanese.

Course Contents:

Module I
Comparison using adjectives, making requests

Module II
Seeking permission

Module III
Practice of conversations on:
Visiting people, Party, Meetings, after work, at a ticket vending machine etc

Module IV
Essays, writing formal letters

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the language describing above-mentioned topics.

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments, role-plays.
➢ Students are also encouraged to attend Japanese film festival and other such fairs and
workshops organized in the capital from time to time.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – IV

Course Code: BAE 448 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
How many characters are there? The early Qing dynasty dictionary included nearly 50,000 characters the
vast majority of which were rare accumulated characters over the centuries. An educate person in China
can probably recognize around 6000 characters. The course aims at familiarizing the student with the
basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin, the language of Mainland China. The course aims at
training students in practical skills and nurturing them to interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Dialogue Practice
Observe picture and answer the question
Pronunciation and intonation
Character writing and stroke order.
Electronic items

Module II
Traveling – The Scenery is very beautiful
Weather and climate
Grammar question with – “bu shi …. Ma?”
The construction “yao … le” (Used to indicate that an action is going to take place)
Time words “yiqian”, “yiwai” (Before and after).
The adverb “geng”.

Module III
Going to a friend house for a visit meeting his family and talking about their customs.
Fallen sick and going to the Doctor, the doctor examines, takes temperature and writes prescription.
Aspect particle “guo” shows that an action has happened some time in the past.
Progressive aspect of an actin “zhengzai” Also the use if “zhe” with it.
To welcome someone and to see off someone …. I cant go the airport to see you off… etc.

Module IV
Shipment. Is this the place to checking luggage?
Basic dialogue on – Where do u work?
Basic dialogue on – This is my address
Basic dialogue on – I understand Chinese
Basic dialogue on – What job do u do?
Basic dialogue on – What time is it now?

Module V
Basic dialogue on – What day (date) is it today?
Basic dialogue on – What is the weather like here.
Basic dialogue on – Do u like Chinese food?
Basic dialogue on – I am planning to go to China.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• “Elementary Chinese Reader, Part-2” Lesson 31-38

 MACRO ECONOMICS - II

Course Code: BAE 501 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The course mainly aims to lead the students to a higher level of macro economics. It will deal with, New
Keynesian models:- Keynesian & classical unemployment & structuralist macroeconomics.

Course Contents:
Module I: The Economy in the Long Run
The classical analysis of the real sector, determination of employment, income and interest rate
Golden rule of accumulation, impact of changes in saving propensity, population growth and
technological
Progress.

Module II: Recent developments in macroeconomics

Rational Expectations, real business cycle
Lucas critique; policy ineffectiveness; time inconsistency; Dornbusch's overshooting model

Module III: New Keynesian Models

(a) Real and nominal price rigidity: menu costs; co-ordination failures; imperfect competition
(b) Real and nominal wage rigidity: insider-outsider models; efficiency wages; implicit contracts.

Module IV: Non Walrasian Economics

Dual decision hypothesis; Keynesian and Classical unemployment

Module V: Structuralist Macroeconomics

Closed and open economy structuralist models.

Module VII: Exploring the Macroeconomics of an Open Economy

Balance of Payments--The current and capital account; Determining equilibrium output in an open
economy; Open economy with flexible exchange rates--Markets for foreign exchange, Factors affecting
exchange rates, effects of exchange rates on the economy.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• M. Hoy, J. Livernois, C. McKenna, R. Rees, T. Stengos (1996), Mathematics for Economics, Addison-
Wesley.
• A.C. Chiang (1992), Elements of Dynamic Optimization, McGraw Hill.
• C. Jones (1998), Introduction to Economic Growth, Norton.

References:
• O. Blanchard and S. Fischer (1989), Lectures on Macroeconomics, MIT.
• W. Scarth (1996), Macroeconomics, Dryden.
• S. Sheffrin (1996), Rational Expectations, Cambridge University Press.
• R. Dornbusch (1980), Open Economy Macroeconomics, Basic Books.
• N. Mankiw and D. Romer (1991), ed., New Keynesian Economics, MIT, 2 volumes. Selected Readings.
 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

Course Code: BAE 502 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
Operations Research provides managers with qualitative basis for decision making or enhances a
managers’ ability to make long range plans and to solve the everyday problems of running a concern.
Linear programming is used to find a solution for optimizing a given objective, similarly Network
analyses help the manager to plan, schedule monitor & control large projects. Queuing theory deals with
the situation in which queue is formed.

Course Contents:
Module I: Basics of Operations Research
Definition of Operations Research, Characteristics of operations research, necessity of operations
research in industry, Scope of operations research, operations research & decision making

Module II: Linear Programming

Requirement for a Linear Programming Problem, Graphical solution of two variable, Linear
Programming Problems some exceptional cases, Simplex Method, Duality, Dual Simplex, Limitations of
Linear programming Problem.

Module III: Transportation Model

Definition of Transportation Model, Mathematical Formulation of the problem, Methods for Initial basic
feasible solution, North-west Corner method, Matrix Minima, Vogel’s Approximation (VAM),
Optionality test.

Module IV: Assignment Models

Definitions, Formulation & Solution of Assignment Models.

Module V: PERT &CPM

Introduction, Forward pars, backward pars computations, How CPM differs from PERT ?
Critical Path- determination

Module VI: Queuing Models

Introduction & application of Queuing Models, MM-I Models- Single- Channel Queuing theory.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Operations Research: Theory & Applications 3rd E, Sharma J K., Macmillan India Limited

References:
• Methods of Operations Research, by Morse Philip Mccord, Dover Publication
 MONEY AND FINANCIAL MARKETS

Course Code: BAE 503 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The main objective of the course is to impart knowledge about money & financial markets, financial
instruments & money; Demand for & Supply of money, financial deepening etc.

Course Contents:
Module I: Money in the Financial System
Money and its functions; financial markets, financial instruments and money; Demand for money --
various approaches, Money and Capital market, Financial deepening.

Module II: Money Supply Analysis

Theory of money supply; money multiplier analysis; monetary aggregates; monetary aggregates in India;
financial innovations
Central Bank's Functions, Reserve/High Powered Money.
Monetary Survey and Central Bank's Balance sheet.

Module III: Analysis of Interest Rates

Interest rates in closed and open economies; Theories of term structure

Module IV: Financial Markets

Banking system, bond market, foreign exchange market, equity market, Introduction to the concept of
Derivatives Futures, Options, Call/Put.

Module V: Monetary Policy

Goals, targets, indicators and the transmission mechanism; instruments of monetary policy

Module VI: Monetary Management in an Open Economy

International capital markets, portfolio diversification; the international monetary system; monetary
policy in India's open economy; financial sector reforms in India. The Narasimham Committee Report.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• M.R. Baye, D.W. Jansen (1996), Money Banking and Financial Markets, AITBS, (Indian
Edition)W.S. Baumol, ‘Economic Theory and Operational Analysis’, Prentice hall
• L.M. Bhole (1999), Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata Mcgraw Hill

References:
• M.K. Lewis (2000), Monetary Economics, OUP
• Maurice Levi (1999), International Finance, Tata McGraw Hill
• R.B.I. Bulletin, Annual Report; Report on Currency and Finance
• R.B.I. - Report of the Committee on the Financial System (Narasimham Committee Report I)
 BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

Course Code: BAE 504 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To develop your capacity to think strategically about a company, its business position, how it can develop
a sustainable competitive advantage and how its strategy can be implemented and executed successfully.
To build your skills in conducting strategic analysis in a variety of industries and competitive situations
and, especially, to provide you with a stronger understanding of the competitive challenges of a global
market environment. To integrate the knowledge gained in earlier courses in order to achieve sound
strategic options, evaluate action alternatives, assess its business risk and create action oriented plans.

Course Contents:
Module I: Historical and Social Roots of Indian Business Environment
Evolution of market economy in India - Comparison between Planned economy and market economy---
Socialist system and market economy.

Module II: Evolution of Politico-Economic Ideology in the Post-Independence period

Determinants of economic growth: Role of Institutions and geography-India’s development strategy and
economic performance-Corporate social responsibility

Module III: Economic and social transformation in the planning period and implications for business
Industrial climate - perspective - Industrial Policy

Module IV: International Business Environment

Theories of Comparative Advantage - Foreign Exchange: The International Payments Process -
Globalization in China and India - A comparison - International Business - Trading and regulatory
environment - Country risk analysis

Module V: Change in the Indian Business Environment: Economic Reform in India

Forces of globalization: effects on India

Module VI: Implication of Globalization for Indian Business

Agreement establishing the WTO --- India’s patent policy and TRIPs

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

• Sundaram, A.K. and J.S. Black, The International Business Environment (IBE), Prentice Hall, New
Delhi
 STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT

Course Code: BAE 505 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of this course is to develop an understanding of:
• The integrative role of all areas of management in business.
• The prescriptive and descriptive ideas of theorist’s practitioners and researchers in the field.
• The principles of management and their relevance in business.
• The methods and techniques of strategic choice and strategic implementation over different
industries
• Measurement of performance in various business and effect of strategies
• Difference between traditional and contemporary business management

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Concept of Planning, Evolution of Strategic Management, Corporate Strategy, Patterns of Strategy
Development, Levels of Strategy, Competitive scope and value chain

Module II: Strategic Analysis

Mission, Vision and Business Definition, Environmental
Threat and Opportunity Profile (ETOP), Industry Analysis,
Strategic Advantage Profile (SAP), Competitor analysis,
market analysis, environmental analysis and dealing with
uncertainty, scenario analysis and SWOT Analysis.
Module III: Strategic Choice
Traditional Approach - Strategic Alternatives, Various models like BCG, GE Nine Cell Matrix, Hofer’s
Model, Strickland’s Grand Strategy Selection Matrix, Basis of Choice; Michael Porter’s Approach -
Generic competitive strategies, Cost advantage, differentiation, technology and competitive advantage,
substitution, competitor, complementary products and competitive advantage, strategic vision vs.
strategic opportunism, Coevolving and patching.

Module IV: Offensive and Defensive Competitive Strategies

Industry scenarios, advantages and disadvantages of defensive strategies, advantages and disadvantages
of offensive strategies.

Module V: Strategic Implementation

Operationalizing Strategy, Institutionalizing Strategy, Strategic Control, Balanced Scorecard – Concepts
and applications in strategy implementation.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Azhar Kazmi, Business Policy and Strategic Management, 2 nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill.
• Kaplan Robert & Norton David P., 2001, Strategic Focused Organization, 1 st Ed., Harvard Business
School Press.
References:
• Pearce John A & Robinson R B, 1977, Strategic Management: Strategy Formulation and
Implementation, 3rd Ed., A.I.T.B.S. Publishers & Distributors.
• Aaker David, Strategic Market Management, 8 th Ed., John Wiley and Sons
• Regular reading of all latest Business Journals: HBR, Strategist, Business World, Business India,
Business Today.
• Porter Michael, Competitive Advantage: Creating and sustaining superior performance, Free press.
• Thomson & Strickland, Business Policy and Strategic Management, 14 th Ed., Tata Mc Graw Hill

SUMMER TRAINING

Course Code: BAE 550 Credit Units: 09

GUIDELINES FOR INTERNSHIP FILE AND INTERNSHIP REPORT

(These guidelines will be useful for undertaking an internship programme during the summer or at any other
time wherein the student/ researcher works full time with a company/organisation)

There are certain phases of every Intern’s professional development that cannot be effectively taught in
the academic environment. These facets can only be learned through direct, on-the-job experience
working with successful professionals and experts in the field. The internship programme can best be
described as an attempt to institutionalize efforts to bridge the gap between the professional world and
the academic institutions. Entire effort in internship is in terms of extending the program of education
and evaluation beyond the classroom of a university or institution. The educational process in the
internship course seeks out and focuses attention on many latent attributes, which do not surface in the
normal class room situations. These attributes are intellectual ability, professional judgment and decision
making ability, inter-disciplinary approach, skills for data handling, ability in written and oral
presentation, sense of responsibility etc.

In order to achieve these objectives, each student will maintain and submit a file (Internship File) and a
report (Internship Report).

INTERNSHIP FILE
The Internship File aims to encourage students to keep a personal record of their learning and
achievements throughout the Programme. It can be used as the basis for lifelong learning and for job
applications. Items can be drawn from activities completed in the course modules and from the workplace to
demonstrate learning and personal development.

The File will assess the student’s analytical skills and ability to present supportive evidence, whilst
demonstrating understanding of their organization, its needs and his/her own personal contribution to the
organization.

The File is essentially a comprehensive documentation of how one proceeds while working on the
assignment and should be regularly checked by the faculty guide/ supervisor, issues discussed with the
students, doubts if any clarified and signed as having done so. This will form the basis of continuous
evaluation of the project.

The File will include five sections in the order described below.

1. The Title Page – An Internship Experience Report For (Your Name), name of internship
organization, name of the Supervisor/Guide and his/her designation, date started and completed,
and number of credits for which the report is submitted.
2. Table of Content – An outline of the contents of the file by topics and subtopics with the page
number and location of each section.
3. Introduction – Short, but should include how and why you obtained the internship experience
position and the relationship it has to your academic/professional and career goals.
4. Main Body – Should include a brief summary/ executive summary of the Internship Project
Report that the student has worked on, an analysis of the company/organization in which the
student is working, a personal review of the student’s management skills and how they have been
developed through the programme, the daily tasks performed, major projects contributed to,
dates and hours spent on a task, observations and feelings, meetings attended and their purposes,
 listing of tools and materials and their suppliers, and photographs if possible of projects,
buildings and co-workers.
5. Appendices – Include pamphlets, forms, charts, brochures, technical and descriptive literature,
graphs and other information related to your Internship experience.

INTERNSHIP REPORT
The Internship Report is the research report that the student has to prepare on the project assigned by the
organization. (Incase a student is not assigned a specific research project in the organization, he has to
select any one aspect of the organization and prepare a research report on it). The lay out of the report
should be as per the standard layout prescribed by the organization wherein the student undertakes the
Internship. In case, there is no layout prescribed by the organization the following components should be
included in the report:
➢ Title or Cover Page.
The title page should contain Project Title; Student’s Name; Programme; Year and Semester and
Name of the Faculty Guide.

➢ Acknowledgements
Acknowledgment to any advisory or financial assistance received in the course of work may be given.
It is incomplete without student’s signature.

➢ Abstract
A good "Abstract" should be straight to the point; not too descriptive but fully informative. First
paragraph should state what was accomplished with regard to the objectives. The abstract does not
have to be an entire summary of the project, but rather a concise summary of the scope and results of
the project. It should not exceed more than 1000 words.

➢ Table of Contents
Titles and subtitles are to correspond exactly with those in the text.

➢ Introduction
Here a brief introduction to the problem that is central to the project and an outline of the structure of the
rest of the report should be provided. The introduction should aim to catch the imagination of the reader, so
excessive details should be avoided.

➢ Materials and Methods

This section should aim at experimental designs, materials used (wherever applicable). Methodology
should be mentioned in details including modifications undertaken, if any. It includes organization
site(s), sample, instruments used with its validation, procedures followed and precautions.

➢ Results and Discussion

Present results, discuss and compare these with those from other workers, etc. In writing this section,
emphasis should be laid on what has been performed and achieved in the course of the work, rather than
discuss in detail what is readily available in text books. Avoid abrupt changes in contents from section to
section and maintain a lucid flow throughout the thesis. An opening and closing paragraph in every chapter
could be included to aid in smooth flow.

Note that in writing the various secions, all figures and tables should as far as possible be next to the
associated text, in the same orientation as the main text, numbered, and given appropriate titles or captions.
All major equations should also be numbered and unless it is really necessary, do not write in “point” form.

While presenting the results, write at length about the the various statistical tools used in the data
interpretation. The result interpretation should be simple but full of data and statistical analysis. This data
interpretation should be in congruence with the written objectives and the inferences should be drawn on
data and not on impression. Avoid writing straight forward conclusion rather, it should lead to
generalization of data on the chosen sample.

Results and its discussion should be supporting/contradicting with the previous research work in the given
area. Usually one should not use more than two researches in either case of supporing or contradicting the
present case of research.

➢ Conclusion(s) & Recommendations

A conclusion should be the final section in which the outcome of the work is mentioned briefly.
Check that your work answers the following questions:
• Did the research project meet its aims (check back to introduction for stated aims)?
• What are the main findings of the research?
• Are there any recommendations?
 • Do you have any conclusion on the research process itself?

➢ Implications for Future Research

This should bring out further prospects for the study either thrown open by the present work or with
the purpose of making it more comprehensive.

➢ Appendices
The Appendices contain material which is of interest to the reader but not an integral part of the
thesis and any problem that have arisen that may be useful to document for future reference.

➢ References
References should include papers, books etc. referred to in the body of the report. These should be written
in the alphabetical order of the author's surname. The titles of journals preferably should not be abbreviated;
if they are, abbreviations must comply with an internationally recognised system.

The Layout Guidelines for the Internship File & Internship Report:

• A4 size Paper
• Font: Arial (10 points) or Times New Roman (12 points)
• Line spacing: 1.5
• Top and bottom margins: 1 inch/ 2.5 cm; left and right margins: 1.25 inches/ 3 cm

Assessment Scheme:
Continuous Evaluation: 30%
(based on Internship File and the observations of
the faculty guide/ supervisor)

Feedback from Company/ Organization: 10%

Final Evaluation:
(Based on Internship Report, Viva/ Presentation) 60%
 COMMUNICATION SKILLS - III

Course Code: BAE 541 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
To equip the participant with linguistic skills required in the field of science and technology while guiding
them to excel in their academic field.

Course Contents:
Module I
Reading Comprehension
Summarising
Paraphrasing

Module II
Essay Writing
Dialogue Report

Module III
Writing Emails
Brochure
Leaflets

Module IV: Introduction to Phonetics

Vowels
Consonants
Accent and Rhythm
Accent Neutralization
Spoken English and Listening Practice

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 CAF V GD GP A
Weightage (%) 20 20 25 10 10 10 5

CAF – Communication Assessment File

GD – Group Discussion
GP – Group Presentation

Text & References:

• Effective English for Engineering Students, B Cauveri, Macmillan India

• Creative English for Communication, Krishnaswamy N, Macmillan
• A Textbook of English Phonetics, Balasubramanian T, Macmillan
 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - V
(INDIVIDUAL, SOCIETY AND NATION)

Course Code: BAE 543 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
This course aims at enabling students towards:
• Understand the importance of individual differences
• Better understanding of self in relation to society and nation
• Facilitation for a meaningful existence and adjustment in society
• To inculcate patriotism and National pride.
• To enhance personal and professional excellence

Course Contents:
Module I: Individual differences & Personality
Personality: Definition& Relevance, Importance of nature & nurture in Personality Development,
Importance and Recognition of Individual differences in Personality, Accepting and Managing Individual
differences (Adjustment Mechanisms), Intuition, Judgment, Perception & Sensation (MBTI), BIG5
Factors

Module II: Socialization

Nature of Socialization
Social Interaction
Interaction of Socialization Process
Contributions to Society & Nation

Module III: Patriotism and National Pride

Sense of Pride and Patriotism
Importance of Discipline and hard work
Integrity and accountability

Module IV: Human Rights, Values and Ethics

Meaning of Human Rights
Human Rights Awareness
Importance of human rights
Values and Ethics- Learning based on project work on Scriptures like Ramayana,
Mahabharata, Gita etc

Module V: Personal and Professional Excellence

• Personal excellence:
o Identifying Long-term choices and goals
o Uncovering talent, strength and style
Alan P. Rossiter’s eight aspects of Professional Excellence
Resilience during challenge and loss
Continued Reflection (Placements, Events, Seminars, Conferences, Projects, Extracurricular
Activities, etc.)

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal

Viva based on personal journal
Assessment of Behavioural change as a result of training
Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Examination Scheme:
Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for
Test (CT) Success (JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25

Text & References:

• Bates, A. P. and Julian, J.: Sociology - Understanding Social Behaviour

• Dressler, David and Cans, Donald: The Study of Human Interaction
• Lapiere, Richard. T – Social Change
• Rose, G.: Oxford Textbook of Public Health, Vol.4, 1985.
• Robbins O.B.Stephen;. Organizational Behaviour
 FRENCH - V

Course Code: BAE 544 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To furnish some basic knowledge of French culture and civilization for understanding an authentic document
and information relating to political and administrative life

Course Contents:
Module D: pp. 131 – 156 Unités 10, 11

Contenu lexical: Unité 10: Prendre des décisions

1. Faire des comparaisons
2. décrire un lieu, le temps, les gens, l'ambiance
3. rédiger une carte postale

Unité 11: faire face aux problèmes

1. Exposer un problème.
2. parler de la santé, de la maladie
3. interdire/demander/donner une autorisation
4. connaître la vie politique française

Contenu grammatical:
1. comparatif - comparer des qualités/ quantités/actions
2. supposition : Si + présent, futur
3. adverbe - caractériser une action
4. pronom "Y"

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre: Campus: Tome 1

 GERMAN - V
Course Code: BAE 545 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of
grammar, which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic opportunities
available in Germany
Introduction to Advanced Grammar and Business Language and Professional Jargon

Course Contents:
Module I: Genitive case
Genitive case – Explain the concept of possession in genitive
Mentioning the structure of weak nouns

Module II: Genitive prepositions

Discuss the genitive propositions and their usage: (während, wegen, statt, trotz)

Module III: Reflexive verbs

Verbs with accusative case
Verbs with dative case
Difference in usage in the two cases

Module IV: Verbs with fixed prepositions

Verbs with accusative case
Verbs with dative case
Difference in the usage of the two cases

Module V: Texts
A poem ‘Maxi’
A text Rocko

Module VI: Picture Description

Firstly recognize the persons or things in the picture and identify the situation depicted in the picture;
Secondly answer questions of general meaning in context to the picture and also talk about the personal
experiences which come to your mind upon seeing the picture.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch

• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1, 2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH - V

Course Code: BAE 546 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire working knowledge of the language; to give them vocabulary, grammar, voice
modulations/intonations to handle everyday Spanish situations with ease.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of earlier semester modules

Module II
Future Tense

Module III
Presentations in English on
Spanish speaking countries’
Culture
Sports
Food
People
Politics
Society
Geography

Module IV
Situations:
En el hospital
En la comisaria
En la estacion de autobus/tren
En el banco/cambio

Module V
General revision of Spanish language learnt so far.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español Sin Fronteras, Greenfield

 JAPANESE - V
Course Code: BAE 547 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write language comfortably and be able to converse using
different patterns and forms taught through out. Students are taught and trained enough to get placed
themselves in Japanese companies.
Note: Teaching is done in roman as well as Japanese script.

Course Contents:

Module I
Dictionary form of the verbs, joining of verbs
Negative form of verbs
Potential form

Module II
Joining of many actions together
Usage of dictionary form of the verbs in sentences
Introducing colloquial language.

Module III
Direct form of the speech, quotations,
Expressing thoughts
Actions and reasoning

Module IV
Conclusion
Receiving and giving things, favour etc.
Different forms like ‘tara’ form.

Module V
Revision of the whole syllabus

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak and use different patterns, ways to describe a particular situation and can
converse comfortably in mentioned situations through out.
➢ Students can appear in the interviews for placements in Japanese companies.

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Teaching will be supported by handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments and role plays.
➢ Use of library, visiting and watching movies in Japan and culture center every Friday at
6pm.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – V
Course Code: BAE 548 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
What English words come from Chinese? Some of the more common English words with Chinese roots
areginseng, silk, dim sum, fengshui, typhoon, yin and yang, T’al chi, kung-fu. The course aims at
familiarizing the student with the basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin, the language of Mainland
China. The course aims at training students in practical skills and nurturing them to interact with a
Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Drills
Dialogue practice
Observe picture and answer the question.
Pronunciation and intonation.
Character writing and stroke order

Module II
Intonation
Chinese foods and tastes – tofu, chowmian, noodle, Beijing duck, rice, sweet, sour….etc. Learning to say
phrases like – Chinese food, Western food, delicious, hot and spicy, sour, salty, tasteless, tender,
nutritious, god for health, fish, shrimps, vegetables, cholesterol is not high, pizza, milk, vitamins, to be
able to cook, to be used to, cook well, once a week, once a month, once a year, twice a week……
Repetition of the grammar and verbs taught in the previous module and making dialogues usingit.
Compliment of degree “de”.

Module III
Grammar the complex sentence “suiran … danshi….”
Comparison – It is colder today than it was yesterday…..etc.
The Expression “chule….yiwai”. (Besides)
Names of different animals.
Talking about Great Wall of China
Short stories

Module IV
Use of “huozhe” and “haishi”
Is he/she married?
Going for a film with a friend.
Having a meal at the restaurant and ordering a meal.

Module V
Shopping – Talking abut a thing you have bought, how much money you spent on it? How many kinds
were there? What did you think of others?
Talking about a day in your life using compliment of degree “de”. When you get up? When do you go for
class? Do you sleep early or late? How is Chinese? Do you enjoy your life in the hostel?
Making up a dialogue by asking question on the year, month, day and the days of the week and answer
them.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• “Elementary Chinese Reader ” Part-II Lesson 39-46

 ECONOMIC SYSTEM AND SOCIETY
Course Code: BAE 601 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This course will reflect the socio-economic change in historical perspective, capitalism as an economic
system, structure of capitalism and capitalism in global context.

Course Contents:
Module I
Analyzing Socio-Economic Change in Historical Perspective

Module II
Capitalism as an economic system
Origins, nature and structure of capitalism; Accumulation and crisis; Alternative perspectives on
capitalism.

Module III
The transition from feudalism to capitalism

Module IV: The evolving structure of capitalism

Monopoly capitalism, The modern corporation: divorce between ownership and control; The institutional
diversity of capitalism; Alternative perspectives on the role of state.

Module V: Capitalism in Global Context

Multinational corporations and their impact on the developing economics; imperialism.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• J. Schumpeter (1942), Capitalism, Socialism and Democracy, George Allen and Unwin (1976 edition).
• T. Bottomore (1985), Theories of Modern Capitalism, Allen & Unwin. Chapters on Weber &
Schumpeter.

References:
• D. Foley (1983), “Commodity”, in T. Bottomore et al(ed.), The Dictionary of Marxist Thought., OUP,
(Indian edition, Maya Blackwell, 2000)
• R. Blackburn (ed.) (1972), Ideology in Social Science, Chapter 8, Fontana
• Rodney Hilton(ed.) The Transition from Feudalism to Capitalism, Introduction
• P. Hirst and J. Zeitiln (1997), “Flexible Specialization: Theory and Evidence in the Analysis of
Industrial Change”, in R. Boyer et al (ed.), Contemporary Capitalism, Cambridge University Press.
 ECONOMIC GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT
Course Code: BAE 602 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This course will enable the students to acquire advanced knowledge as to how policies facilitate the
economic growth and development in advanced countries. It also enables the students to understand
important growth models and help them to familiarize with factors that contribute to economic growth. It
will provide a strong knowledge base on India’s economy both during pre and post reform periods and
help in developing a critical study on recent development in the Indian Economy in the context of the
world economic scenario.

Course Contents:
Module I
Economic growth, Economic Development and sustainable Development – Measurement of Development:
Conventional, HDI and Physical Quality of life Indies (PQLI) – Factors Determining Economic
development – Obstacles of Economic development: vicious circle of poverty.

Module II
Growth Theories-Adam Smith-Ricardo-Malthus- Karl Marx-Schumpeter’s theory of Development-
Keynes-Rostow’s stages of Economic Growth-Big Bush theory.

Module III
Doctrine of balanced growth-Concept of unbalanced growth-Dualistic theories-Myrdal theory- Growth
Models-Harrod-Domar – Joan Rabinson’s model of capital accumulation-Meade’s neoclassical model-
Solow Model of Long Run Growth-Kaldor’s model of growth-Models of Technical Change – Mahalanobis
Model.

Module IV
Economic planning-Planning process in a mixed economy-Growth Models in Indian Planning- Need for
Foreign Capital-Forms of Foreign Capital-Multinational Corporations and foreign collaborations –
India’s Balance of Payments.

Module V
Current Economic Issues- New Economic Policies since 1980-Privatisation: Policies and practices-
Deregulations and Delicensing – Globalisation – Public Sector Disinvestments- Liberal foreign trade
regime – WTO - Structural adjustments in the Indian Economy.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• R.C. Agarwal and M.L. Seth: Economic of Development and Planning, Lakshmi Narain Agarwal,
Agra.
• A.N. Agarwal and Kundanlal: Economics of Development and Planning, Vikas Publishing House Pvt
Ltd.

References:
• The Economics of Development and Planning (with special reference to India) Vani education books.
 ECONOMETRICS - BASIC THEORY AND APPLICATION

Course Code: BAE 603 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
This course presents the basic econometrics techniques emphasizing numerical estimation of economic
relationships as applied to practical economic and managerial problems. To enable the students to learn
the basic econometric techniques relating to the estimation of parameters. On successful completion of the
course the students should have understood the estimation techniques, learned the difficulties involved in
the estimation process, evaluation of parameters and enable understanding of scientific decision making
process.

Course Contents:
Module I: Nature and scope of econometrics

Module II: Classical Linear Regression Model: Two Variable Case

Descriptive Aspects
Properties of Least Squares estimates; tests of hypotheses and confidence intervals; Gauss - Markov
Theorem
Forecasting

Module III: Classical Multiple Linear Regression Model.

Descriptive Aspects: Least Squares Estimation; R2 and Adjusted R2; Partial Correlations
The Classical Model: Gauss - Markov Theorem; Standard Error of Estimate Standard errors of
regression coefficients
Functional Forms of Regression Models
Dummy Variables-distributed lags - need, limitation and interpretation in Economics

Module IV: Violations of Classical Assumptions and Remedies

Multicollinearity
Heteroscedasticity
Auto-correlation

Module V: Specification Analysis

Omission of a relevant variable
Inclusion of irrelevant variable
Tests of Specification Errors

Module VI: Simple Applications of Least Square

Estimation of Cobb-Douglas Production function
Estimation of Consumption function

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• A Koutsoyiannis, “Theory of Econometrics: An Introduction Exposition of Econometric Methods”,
Educational Low-Priced Books Scheme, McMillan Education Ltd. (1992).
• Damodar Gujarathi "Basic Econometrics", Tata McGraw Hill Ltd, 1999. 4th ed.

References:
• A.S. Goldberger (1998), Introductory Econometrics, Harvard University Press, Cambridge.
• Suresh K.Ghose “Econometrics”, Prentice Hall of India private limited, New Delhi.
 BUSINESS ETHICS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Course Code: BAE 604 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to help the students understand the nature of business ethics and issues in
corporate governance and its application to the Indian corporate scene.

Course Contents:
Module I
Introduction to Business Ethics, ethics, Morals and values, Concepts of Utilitarianism and Universalism-
Theory of rights, Theory of justice- Virtue ethics- ethics of care- Law and Ethics- the Nature of Ethics in
Management- Business Standards and Values- Value Orientation of the firm.

Module II: Typical Problem in Business Ethics

Environmental Pollution & Society- marketing Ethics (in Products, Pricing, Promotion and Place) and
Consumer protection- Ethics in Human Resources Management (Recruitment and promotion policies,
Working Conditions, Down Sizing Workforce),

Module III: Complexity of Ethical Issues

Conflicts in decision making from ethical and economic point of view- Ethical Dilemma- Solving ethical
dilemma, Managerial integrity and decision making.

Module IV: Corporate Governance

History of Corporate form and models- Corporate Objectives and goals, ownership pattern- Issues in
Managing public limited firms- Agency problems.

Module V: Internal Corporate Governance Mechanism

Board of Directors- Functional Committees of Board; Code of Conduct, whistle blowers.

Module VI: External Corporate Governance Mechanism

Regulators, Gate keepers, Institutional Investors, Corporate raiders & Corporate Governance in India.

Examination Scheme:
Components P0 P1 C1 CT EE1
(Attendance )
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 15 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Business Ethics: Concepts & Cases, Velasques, M.G., PHI
• Corporate Governance, Eric Banks, John Wiley

References:

• Corporate Governance, Fernando Pearson Education

 DISSERTATION
Course Code: BAE 655 Credit Units: 09

GUIDELINES FOR DISSERTATION

The aim of the dissertation is to provide you with an opportunity to further your intellectual and personal
development in your chosen field by undertaking a significant practical unit of activity, having an
educational value at a level commensurate with the award of your degree

The dissertation can be defined as a scholarly inquiry into a problem or issues, involving a systematic
approach to gathering and analysis of information / data, leading to production of a structured report.

Selecting the Dissertation Topic

It is usual to give you some discretion in the choice of topic for the dissertation and the approach to be
adopted. You will need to ensure that your dissertation is related to your field of specialization.

Deciding this is often the most difficult part of the dissertation process, and perhaps, you have been
thinking of a topic for some time.

It is important to distinguish here between ‘dissertation topic’ and ‘dissertation title’. The topic is the
specific area that you wish to investigate. The title may not be decided until the dissertation has been
written so as to reflect its content properly.

Few restrictions are placed on the choice of the topic. Normally we would expect it to be:
• relevant to business, defined broadly;
• related to one or more of the subjects or areas of study within the core program and specialisation
stream;
• clearly focused so as to facilitate an in-depth approach, subject to the availability of adequate sources
of information and to your own knowledge;
• of value and interest to you and your personal and professional development.

Planning the Dissertation

This will entail following:
• Selecting a topic for investigation.
• Establishing the precise focus of your study by deciding on the aims and objectives of the dissertation,
or formulating questions to be investigated. Consider very carefully what is worth investigating and its
feasibility.
• Drawing up initial dissertation outlines considering the aims and objectives of the dissertation.
Workout various stages of dissertation
• Devising a timetable to ensure that all stages of dissertation are completed in time. The timetable
should include writing of the dissertation and regular meetings with your dissertation guide.

The Dissertation plan or outline

It is recommended that you should have a dissertation plan to guide you right from the outset. Essentially,
the dissertation plan is an outline of what you intend to do, chapter wise and therefore should reflect the
aims and objectives of your dissertation.

There are several reasons for having a dissertation plan

• It provides a focus to your thoughts.
• It provides your faculty-guide with an opportunity, at an early stage of your work, to make
constructive comments and help guide the direction of your research.
• The writing of a plan is the first formal stage of the writing process, and therefore helps build up your
confidence.
• In many ways, the plan encourages you to come to terms with the reading, thinking and writing in a
systematic and integrated way, with plenty of time left for changes.
• Finally, the dissertation plan generally provides a revision point in the development of your
dissertation report in order to allow appropriate changes in the scope and even direction of your work
as it progresses.

Keeping records
This includes the following:
• Making a note of everything you read; including those discarded.
• Ensuring that when recording sources, author’s name and initials, date of publication, title, place of
publication and publisher are included. (You may consider starting a card index or database from the
outset). Making an accurate note of all quotations at the time you read them.
• Make clear what is a direct a direct quotation and what is your paraphrase.
Dissertation format
All students must follow the following rules in submitting their dissertation.
• Front page should provide title, author, Name of degree/diploma and the date of submission.
• Second page should be the table of contents giving page references for each chapter and section.
• The next page should be the table of appendices, graphs and tables giving titles and page references.
• Next to follow should be a synopsis or abstract of the dissertation (approximately 500 words) titled:
Executive Summary.
• Next is the ‘acknowledgements’.
• Chapter I should be a general introduction, giving the background to the dissertation, the objectives of
the dissertation, the rationale for the dissertation, the plan, methodological issues and problems. The
limitations of the dissertation should also be hinted in this chapter.
• Other chapters will constitute the body of the dissertation. The number of chapters and their sequence
will usually vary depending on, among others, on a critical review of the previous relevant work
relating to your major findings, a discussion of their implications, and conclusions, possibly with a
suggestion of the direction of future research on the area.
• After this concluding chapter, you should give a list of all the references you have used. These should
be cross - references with your text. For articles from journals, the following details are required e.g.

Draper P and Pandyal K. 1991, The Investment Trust Discount Revisited, Journal of Business Finance
and Accounting, Vol18, No6, Nov, pp 791-832.

For books, the following details are required:

Levi, M. 1996, International Financial Management, Prentice Hall, New York, 3rd Ed, 1996

• Finally, you should give any appendices. These should only include relevant statistical data or material
that cannot be fitted into the above categories.

The Layout Guidelines for the Dissertation:

• A4 size Paper
• Font: Arial (10 points) or Times New Roman (12 points)
• Line spacing: 1.5
• Top and bottom margins: 1 inch/ 2.5 cm; left and right margins: 1.25 inches/ 3 cm

Guidelines for the Assessment of the Dissertation

While evaluating the dissertation, faculty guide will consider the following aspects:

1. Has the student made a clear statement of the objective or objective(s).

2. If there is more than one objective, do these constitute parts of a whole?
3. Has the student developed an appropriate analytical framework for addressing the problem at hand.
4. Is this based on up-to-date developments in the topic area?
5. Has the student collected information / data suitable to the frameworks?
6. Are the techniques employed by the student to analyse the data / information appropriate and
relevant?
7. Has the student succeeded in drawing conclusion form the analysis?
8. Do the conclusions relate well to the objectives of the project?
9. Has the student been regular in his work?
10. Layout of the written report.

Assessment Scheme:
Continuous Evaluation: 40%
(Based on Abstract, Regularity,
Adherence to initial plan, Records etc.)

Final Evaluation: Based on, 60%

Contents & Layout of the Report, 25
Conceptual Framework, 10
Objectives & Methodology and 10
Implications & Conclusions 15
 COMMUNICATION SKILLS – IV

Course Code: BAE 641 Credit

Units: 01

Course Objective:
To enhance the skills needed to work in an English-speaking global business environment.

Course Contents:
Module I: Business/Technical Language Development
Advanced Grammar: Syntax, Tenses, Voices
Advanced Vocabulary skills: Jargons, Terminology, Colloquialism
Individualised pronunciation practice

Module II: Social Communication

Building relationships through Communication
Communication, Culture and Context
Entertainment and Communication
Informal business/ Technical Communication

Module III: Business Communication

Reading Business/ Technical press
Listening to Business/ Technical reports (TV, radio)
Researching for Business /Technology

Module IV: Presentations

Planning and getting started
Design and layout of presentation
Information Packaging
Making the Presentation

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 CAF V GD GP A

Weightage (%) 20 20 25 10 10 10 5

CAF – Communication Assessment File

GD – Group Discussion
GP – Group Presentation

Text & References:

• Business Vocabulary in Use: Advanced Mascull, Cambridge

• Business Communication, Raman – Prakash, Oxford
• Business Communications, Rodgers, Cambridge
• Working in English, Jones, Cambridge
• New International Business English, Jones/Alexander, Cambridge
 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - VI
(STRESS AND COPING STRATEGIES)

Course Code: BAE 643 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
• To develop an understanding the concept of stress its causes, symptoms and consequences.
• To develop an understanding the consequences of the stress on one’s wellness, health, and work
performance.

Course Contents:

Module I
Stress
Meaning & Nature
Characteristics
Types of stress

Module II
Stages and Models of Stress
Stages of stress
The physiology of stress
Stimulus-oriented approach.
Response-oriented approach.
The transactional and interactional model.
Pressure – environment fit model of stress.

Module III
Causes and symptoms of stress
Personal
Organizational
Environmental

Module IV
Consequences of stress
Effect on behaviour and personality
Effect of stress on performance
Individual and Organizational consequences with special focus on health

Module V
Strategies for stress management
Importance of stress management
Healthy and Unhealthy strategies
Peer group and social support
Happiness and well-being

Module VI
End-of-Semester Appraisal
Viva based on personal journal
Assessment of Behavioural change as a result of training
Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer
Examination Scheme:

Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for

Test (CT) Success (JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25

Text & References:

• Blonna, Richard; Coping with Stress in a Changing World: Second edition

• Pestonjee, D.M, Pareek, Udai, Agarwal Rita; Studies in Stress And its Management
• Pestonjee, D.M.; Stress and Coping: The Indian Experience
• Clegg, Brian; Instant Stress Management – Bring calm to your life now
 FRENCH - VI

Course Code: BAE 644 Credit

Units: 02

Course Objective:
To strengthen the language of the students both in oral and written so that they can:
i) express their sentiments, emotions and opinions, reacting to information, situations;
ii) narrate incidents, events ;
iii) perform certain simple communicative tasks.

Course Contents:
Module D: pp. 157 – 168 – Unité 12

Unité 12: s'évader

1. présenter, caractériser, définir
2. parler de livres, de lectures
3. préparer et organiser un voyage
4. exprimer des sentiments et des opinions
5. téléphoner
6. faire une réservation

Contenu grammatical:
1. proposition relative avec pronom relatif "qui", "que", "où" - pour
caractériser
2. faire + verbe

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Campus: Tome 1

 GERMAN – VI

Course Code: BAE 645 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of
grammar, which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic opportunities
available in Germany
Introduction to Advanced Grammar and Business Language and Professional Jargon

Course Contents:
Module I: Adjective endings
Adjective endings in all the four cases discussed so far
Definite and indefinite articles
Cases without article

Module II: Comparative adverbs

Comparative adverbs as and like

Module III: Compound words

To learn the structure of compound words and the correct article which they take
Exploring the possibility of compound words in German

Module IV: Infinitive sentence

Special usage of ‘to’ sentences called zu+ infinitive sentences

Module V: Texts
A Dialogue: ‘Ein schwieriger Gast’
A text: ‘Abgeschlossene Vergangenheit’

Module VI: Comprehension texts

Reading and comprehending various texts to consolidate the usage of the constructions learnt so far in
this semester.

Module VII: Picture Description

Firstly recognize the persons or things in the picture and identify the situation depicted in the picture;
Secondly answer questions of general meaning in context to the picture and also talk about the personal
experiences which come to your mind upon seeing the picture.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch

• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1, 2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH – VI

Course Code: BAE 646 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire working knowledge of the language; to give them vocabulary, grammar, voice
modulations/intonations to handle everyday Spanish situations in Present as well as in Present Perfect
Tense with ease.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of the earlier modules

Module II
Present Perfect Tense

Module III
Commands of irregular verbs

Module IV
Expressions with Tener que and Hay que

Module V
En la embajada
Emergency situations like fire, illness, accident, theft

Examination Scheme:

Components CT1 CT2 C I V A

Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español, En Directo I A
• Español Sin Fronteras
 JAPANESE – VI

Course Code: BAE 647 Credit

Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse in the language with the help of verbs and the usage of different
sentence patterns, which help them to strengthen the language.
Students are taught and trained enough to get placed in Japanese companies.
Note: The teaching is done in roman as well as Japanese script. 10 more kanjis are introduced in this
semester.

Course Contents:
Module I: Polite form of verbs
Expressing feelings with the polite forms of verb.

Module II: Potential form

Ability of doing or not doing something

Module III: Conjunctions

Joining two sentences with the help of shi and mo

Module IV: Intransitive Verbs

Sentence patterns of indirect speech

Module V: Feelings and expressions

Regret, existence etc.

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the language with the use of different forms of verb.

Methods of Private study/ Self help

➢ Hand-outs, audio -aids, assignments and role-plays will support classroom teaching.
➢ Students are encouraged to watch Japanese movies at Japan Cultural and information center.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Shin Nihon-go no Kiso Lesson No. 26 to 30.

• All vocabulary and topics taught are from the above-mentioned book.
 CHINESE – VI

Course Code: BAE 648 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
Chinese emperor Qin Shi Huang – Ti who built the great wall of China also built a network of 270
palaces, linked by tunnels, and was so afraid of assassination that he slept in a different palace each night.
The course aims at familiarizing the student with the basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin, the
language of Mainland China. The course aims at training students in practical skills and nurturing them
to interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Drills
Dialogue practice
Observe picture and answer the question.
Pronunciation and intonation.
Character writing and stroke order.

Module II
Going out to see a science exhibition
Going to the theatre.
Train or Plane is behind schedule.
Indian Economy-Chinese Economy
Talking about different Seasons of the Year and Weather conditions. Learning to say phrases like-spring,
summer, fall, winter, fairly hot, very cold, very humid, very stuffy, neither hot nor cold, most
comfortable, pleasant …. etc.

Module III
Temperature – how to say – What is the temperature in May here?
− How is the weather in summer in your area?
− Around 30 degrees
− Heating, air-conditioning
− Is winter is Shanghai very cold?
Talking about birthdays and where you were born?
The verb “shuo” (speak) saying useful phrases like speak very well, do not speak very well, if speak slowly
then understand if speak fast then don’t understand, difficult to speak, difficult to write, speak too fast,
speak too slow, listen and can understand, listen and cannot understand … etc.
Tell the following in Chinese – My name is …. I was born in … (year). My birthday is ……… Today is …
(date and day of the week). I go to work (school) everyday. I usually leave home at . (O’clock). In the
evening, I usually ………. (do what)? At week end, I ………. On Sundays I usually …………… It is
today….. It will soon be my younger sisters birthday. She was born in ….. (year). She lives in ……….
(where). She is working (or studying)…… where… She lives in …….. (where.)

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Elementary Chinese Reader Part-2,3; Lesson 47-54

 Bachelor of Commerce (Honours)

Programme Code: BCH

Duration – 3 Years Full Time

Programme Structure
and
Curriculum & Scheme of Examination

2022-25
AMITY UNIVERSITY MADHYA PRADESH
GWALIOR
 PREAMBLE

Amity University aims to achieve academic excellence by providing multi-

faceted education to students and encourage them to reach the pinnacle of
success. The University has designed a system that would provide rigorous
academic programme with necessary skills to enable them to excel in their
careers.

This booklet contains the Programme Structure, the Detailed Curriculum and
the Scheme of Examination. The Programme Structure includes the courses
(Core and Elective), arranged semester wise. The importance of each course is
defined in terms of credits attached to it. The credit units attached to each
course has been further defined in terms of contact hours i.e. Lecture Hours
(L), Tutorial Hours (T), Practical Hours (P). Towards earning credits in terms of
contact hours, 1 Lecture and 1 Tutorial per week are rated as 1 credit each and
2 Practical hours per week are rated as 1 credit. Thus, for example, an L-T-P
structure of 3-0-0 will have 3 credits, 3-1-0 will have 4 credits, and 3-1-2 will
have 5 credits.

The Curriculum and Scheme of Examination of each course includes the

course objectives, course contents, scheme of examination and the list of text
and references. The scheme of examination defines the various components
of evaluation and the weightage attached to each component. The different
codes used for the components of evaluation and the weightage attached to
them are:

Components Codes
Weightage (%)
Case Discussion/ Presentation/ Analysis C 05 - 10
Home Assignment H 05 - 10
Project P 05 - 10
Seminar S 05 - 10
Viva V 05 - 10
Quiz Q 05 - 10
Class Test CT 10 - 15
Attendance A 05
End Semester Examination EE 70

It is hoped that it will help the students study in a planned and a structured
manner and promote effective learning. Wishing you an intellectually
stimulating stay at Amity University.

July, 2022
 BCOM (H) 2019-22
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE

FIRST SEMESTER
Course Course Title Lecture (L) Tutorial Practical Total Page
Code Hours Per (T) Hours (P) Hours Credits No.
Week Per Per
Week Week
BCH101 Business Organization & 3 1 - 4
Management
BCH102 Basic Concepts of Financial 3 1 - 4
Accounting
BCH103 Microeconomic Theory & 2 1 - 3
Applications – I
BBM101 Elementary Business 2 1 - 3
Mathematics
BCL125 Business & Economic Laws - I 2 1 - 3
EVS142 Environmental Studies – I 2 - - 2
Select any one of the following: 2 1 - 3
BCH107 • Indian History
BCH108 • Mathematics
BCH109 • Democracy &Governance
in India
BCU Communication Skills –I 1 - - 1
141
BSU Behavioural Science- I 1 - - 1
143 Foreign Language - I 2 - - 2
FLU 144 French
BCH145 German
BCH146 Spanish
BCH147 Japanese
BCH148 Chinese
TOTAL 26

SECOND SEMESTER
BCH201 Financial Accounting – II 3 1 - 4
BCH202 Microeconomic Theory & 2 1 - 3
Applications – II
BCM201 Advanced Business 2 1 - 3
Mathematics
CSE Computer Applications in 3 - 2 4
201 Business Management
BCL225 Business & Economic Laws - II 2 1 - 3
EVS 242 Environmental Studies - II 2 - - 2
BCH2 Psychology & Ethics 2 1 - 3
07
BCU Communication Skills –II 1 - - 1
241
BSU Behavioural Science- II 1 - - 1
243 Foreign Language - II 2 - - 2
FLU 244 French
BCH245 German
BCH246 Spanish
BCH247 Japanese
BCH248 Chinese
TOTAL 26

TERM PAPER

THIRD SEMESTER
BCH301 Corporate Accounting – I 3 1 - 4
BCH302 Cost Accounting – I 2 1 - 3
BCH303 Microeconomic Theory & 2 1 - 3
 Applications – III
BBM301 Business Statistics 2 1 - 3
BCL325 Corporate Laws – I 2 1 3
BCL326 Income Tax Law & Practice – I 3 1 - 4
BCH307 E-Commerce 2 - 1 3
BCU341 Communication Skills –III 1 - - 1
BSU Behavioural Science- III 1 - - 1
343
Foreign Language – III 2 - - 2
FLU 344 French
BCH345 German
BCH346 Spanish
BCH347 Japanese
BCH348 Chinese
BCH330 Term Paper (Evaluation) - - - 3
TOTAL 30

FOURTH SEMESTER
BCH401 Corporate Accounting – II 3 1 - 4
BCH402 Cost Accounting – II 2 1 - 3
BCH403 Microeconomic Theory & 2 1 - 3
Applications – IV
BCM401 Statistical Methods in Research 2 1 - 3
BCL425 Corporate Laws – II 2 1 3
BCL426 Income Tax Law & Practice – II 3 1 - 4
BCH407 Auditing 2 1 - 3
BCU441 Communication Skills –IV 1 - - 1
BSU Behavioural Science- IV 1 - - 1
443
Foreign Language – IV 2 - - 2
FLU444 French
BCH445 German
BCH446 Spanish
BCH447 Japanese
BCH448 Chinese
TOTAL 27

SUMMER INTERNSHIP – 8 – 10 WEEKS

FIFTH SEMESTER
BCH501 Management Accounting – I 2 1 - 3
BCH502 Macro Economics 3 1 - 4
BBM501 Operations Research 3 1 - 4
BCU541 Communication Skills –V 1 - - 1

BSU543 Behavioural Science- V 1 - - 1

Foreign Language - V 2 - - 2
FLU544 French
BCH545 German
BCH546 Spanish
BCH547 Japanese
BCH548 Chinese
BCH550 Summer Internship (Evaluation) - - - 6
Any four courses from the following four groups(not more than two courses from a group)
GROUP 1
BCH504 Financial Management – I 2 - - 2
BCH505 Fundamentals of Investment – I 2 - - 2
BCH506 Financial Markets, Institutions & 2 - - 2
Financial Services – I
BCH507 Insurance & Risk Management - I 2 - - 2
GROUP 2
BCH508 Principles of Marketing – I 2 - - 2
BCH509 International Business – I 2 - - 2
BCH510 Advertising & Personal Selling - I 2 - - 2
BCH511 Service Marketing – I 2 - - 2
GROUP 3
BCH512 Human Resource Management - I 2 - - 2
BCH513 Compensation Management - I 2 - - 2
BCL524 Industrial Relations &Labour 2 - - 2
Laws - I
BCH515 Human Resource Accounting - I 2 - - 2
GROUP 4
BCH516 Corporate Tax Planning – I 2 - - 2
BCH517 Computerized Accounting 2 - - 2
System - I
BCH518 Business Data Processing - I 2 - - 2
BCH519 Comparative Accounting 2 - - 2
Systems - I
TOTAL 29

SIXTH SEMESTER
BCH601 Management Accounting - II 2 1 - 3
BCH602 Indian Economy – Performance & 3 1 - 4
Policies
BBM601 Analytical Skill Building 3 1 - 4
BCU641 Communication Skills –VI 1 - - 1
BSU Behavioural Science- VI 1 - - 1
643 Foreign Language - VI 2 - - 2
FLU644 French
BCH645 German
BCH646 Spanish
BCH647 Japanese
BCH648 Chinese
BCH655 Dissertation - - - 9
Any four courses from the following four groups(not more than two courses from a group)
GROUP 1
BCH604 Financial Management – II 2 - - 2
BCH605 Fundamentals of Investment - II 2 - - 2
BCH606 Financial Markets, Institutions & 2 - - 2
Financial Services – II
BCH607 Insurance & Risk Management - II 2 - - 2
GROUP 2
BCH608 Principles of Marketing – II 2 - - 2
BCH609 International Business – II 2 - - 2
BCH610 Advertising & Personal Selling - II 2 - - 2
BCH611 Service Marketing – II 2 - - 2
GROUP 3
BCH612 Human Resource Management - 2 - - 2
II
BCH613 Compensation Management - II 2 - - 2
BCL624 Industrial Relations & Labour 2 - - 2
Laws - II
BCH615 Human Resource Accounting - II 2 - - 2
GROUP 4
BCH616 Corporate Tax Planning - II 2 - - 2
BCH617 Computerized Accounting 2 - - 2
System - II
BCH618 Business Data Processing - II 2 - - 2
BCH619 Comparative Accounting 2 - - 2
Systems - II
TOTAL 32
 Curriculum & Scheme of Examination

BUSINESS ORGANIZATION AND MANAGEMENT

Course Code: BCH 101 Credit

Units: 04

Course Objective:
This course aims to provide students with an understanding of the principles and practices of
organization and management. This course enables students to understand the fundamental
management theories and their evolution, identify the elements of the organizational
environments, manage resources and develop the ability to make sound decision within an
organization.

Course Contents:

Module I
Introduction to business, Business firms - Forms of organization - sole proprietors, Partnership, Joint-
Hindu family, Joint stock Company, Co-operative organizations - Public Enterprises, BPO, E-
commerce and M-commerce. Entrepreneurship – Concept & Nature

Module II: Management

Introduction - Meaning, nature and characteristics of Management - Scope and functional areas of
management - Social responsibility of management and Ethics.
Organizational Structure & Functions (Production, Marketing, Human resource development
and finance functions)

Module III: Planning

Nature importance and purpose of planning - Planning process, Objectives - Types of plans (Meaning
only) - Decision-making – importance & steps.

Module IV: Organizing & Staffing

Nature and purpose of organization, Principles of organization - Types of organization -
Departmentation, Committees - Centralization Vs decentralization of authority and responsibility -
Span of Control - MBO and MBE( Meaning only) - Nature and importance of staffing - Process of
selection & recruitment(in brief) – retaining (training and compensation).

Module V: Directing
Meaning and nature of directing - Leadership styles - Motivation theories (Maslow’s, Herzberg,
mcgregors X & Y theory), Ouchi’s Theory- Communication meaning and importance, barriers to
communication, types of communication - Coordination meaning and importance.
Case Discussion (GE)

Module VI: Controlling

Meaning and steps in controlling - Essentials of a sound control system - Methods of establishing
control(in brief) – Balance score card, Economic value added, Market value added.

Module VII: Management in perspective

Change Management, Knowledge Management, Learning organization, Managing Diversity,
Corporate Governance.

Assignment: Each student takes a self-assessment on team roles on assigned topics. The
Group members need to set rules of their respective group in order to ensure that each group
will effectively tackle the assigned role. These rules should outline the expectations and
processes of all group functions. It will be used to remove non- performing members in the
case of non-compliance.

Each student must complete an evaluation of every team members (including self) using the
following spreadsheet

Team Answers Reliability in Contributions Knowledge

 Member’s in Timely making of of
Name Manner deadlines ideas to the Respect for assignment
( 0 to 2 pts) ( 0 to 2 pts) group other requirements
( 0 to 2 pts) opinions and his/her
( 0 to 2 pts) role
in group ( 0
to 2 pts)

Examination Scheme:

Components Mid A Project/Assignment/Quiz/Presentation EE

term
Weightage 15 5 10 70
(%)

Text & References:

• Koontz & O’Donnell, Management.
• Drucker, Peter: Management Tasks, Responsibilities and Practices
• Basu, “Business Organisation and management”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, New Delhi
• M.C. Shukla: Business Organisation & Management, S. Chand
• Rustum & Davan, Principles and practice of Management.
• Jagadish Prakash: Business Organisation & Management
• Newman, H. William Summer, Etc.: The process of Management
 BASIC CONCEPTS OF FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

Course Code: BCH 102 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To develop conceptual understanding of the fundamentals of financial accounting system which processes
transactions and other events through a book-keeping mechanism to prepare financial statements, and also to
impart skills in accounting for recording various kinds of business transactions.

Course Contents:
Module I : Introduction
Financial Accounting Concepts, importance and scope, Financial Accounting Standards: Transition from IAS to IFRS,
Branches of Accounting, Accounting Equation, Single entry vs Double entry system of accounting. Journal, Ledger, Books
of prime entry, Subsidiary books, Trial Balance, Errors and their rectification, Cash Book & Bank Book.

Module II: Final Accounts

Concept of capital, Revenue and deferred revenue expenditure, Opening entries, Closing entries, Adjustment
entries, Final accounts, Balance Sheet, Trading and Profit & Loss Account, Financial Adjustments

Module III: Depreciation & Inventory Valuation

Depreciation accounting and its methods, Inventory valuation and its methods.

Module IV: Bank Reconciliation Statement & Bills of Exchange

Bank reconciliation statement, Accounting for bills of exchange - bills receivable and payable, acceptance,
endorsement, discounting, dishonour and renewal of bills, accommodation bills.

Module V: Branch Accounting

Inland Branches: Dependent branches only and ascertainment of profit by debtors method and stock and
debtors method.
Assignment for the students: Students will Prepare Vouchers, Recording Transactions, Preparing Reports,
Cash Book, Bank Book, Ledger Accounts, Trail Balance, Profit And Loss Account And Balance Sheet with held of
any popular Accounting Software

Examination Scheme:
 Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Dr. S.N. Maheswari, Financial Accounting

• BS Raman, Financial Accounting
• Grewal and Gupta, Advanced Accounting
• Radhaswamy and R.L. Gupta, Advanced Accounting
• S.Kr. Paul, Advanced Accounting
• P.C. Tulasian, Pearson Editions, Introduction to Accounting
• Jain & Narang, Financial Accounting
• Sehgal, A and Sehgal,D “Advanced Accounting”, Part – 1, Taxmann Applied services, New Delhi

MICROECONOMIC THEORY AND APPLICATIONS - I

Course Code: BCH 103

Credit Units: 03
Course Objective:
The objective of this paper is to make the student to understand how the business organizations work
by applying economic principles in their business management. The course will attempt to relate
theory to practice and try to instill in students the ability to apply basic microeconomic concepts to the
understanding of everyday phenomena .
Course Contents:
Module I: Consumer Behaviour
Consumer sovereignty-limitations. Approaches to the study of consumer behaviour-cordinal
approach-the law of equi-marginal utility, ordinal approach – indifference curve analysis and its
properties. Consumer equilibrium, Price effect, income effect and substitution effects. Engel curve.
Consumer surplus – meaning-analysis limitations.

Module II: Microeconomics and Demand Analysis

Nature and scope of economics; Difference between micro and macroeconomics, Nature of economic
problem. Basic postulates, Role of price mechanism. Theory of Demand and Analysis: Demand-
demand determinants – law of demand-characteristics exceptions -Elasticity of demand – price
elasticity – types – determining factors- change in demand and elasticity of demand-business
applications of price elasticity- concepts of income and cross elasticity of demand. Measurement of
price elasticity of demand by total outlay method.
Module III: Theory of Production and Cost
Concept of Production Function- Law of variable proportions and stages of production. Isoquants,
marginal rate of technical substitution, Return to scale.
Revenue curves- Average revenue and marginal revenue curve, and elasticity of demand.
Cost curve in short and long run, average and marginal cost curve and its relationship.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70
Text & References:

• I.C. Dhingra, Principles of Microeconomics- Sultan Chand & Sons

• H.L. Ahuja- Microeconomics
• Baumol, W.J. Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
• Bach, G.L, Economics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
• Gould, J.P. and Edward P.L, Microeconomic Theory, Richard, Irwin. Homewood.
• Koutsoyiannis, A, Modern Microeconomics, Macmillan.
• Lipsey, R.G. and K.A. Chrystal, Principles of Economics, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
 ELEMENTARY BUSINESS MATHEMATICS
Course Code: BBM 101 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course is designed to orient the students towards the basic concepts of mathematics and
its applications in the business world.

Course Contents:

Module I: Set Theory & Functions

Theory of Sets: Meaning; Elements; Types of sets, Subsets; Super sets & Power sets;
Operation on sets, Venn diagrams, Cardinal no of a set and Applications of set theory;
Concept of inclusion-exclusion principle with simple example, Finite, Countable or Infinite
sets; Cartesian product of sets. Real number systems, Constant and variable, functions, types
of functions, Some useful functions in Business and Economics limits and continuity of a
function of one variable.

Module II: Techniques of counting and Number System

Basic counting principle; Factorial notation; Binomial coefficient; Permutations and
Combination; Permutation with restriction; Circular permutation and Combination with
restriction. Series and sequence-A.P. and G.P.

Module III: Simple, Compound Interest and Annuities

Simple Interest, Compound interest (Nominal and effective rate of interest), Concept of present
value and amount of sum, Concept of discount, Types of annuities, present value and amount
of an annuity, including the case of continuous compounding.

Module IV: Matrices & Determinants

Matrices; concepts and types; properties; Addition; Multiplication; Transpose and inverse of
matrix; Algebra of matrices; Adjoint of a matrix; Determinants; Properties of determinants;
Solution of simultaneous Linear Equations; Business applications of matrices; Solution using
inverse of the coefficient matrix; Numerical Problems.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70
Text & References:
Text:
• Singh J K & Singh Y P (2010), Business Mathematics, Second Edition, Brijwasi Book
Distributors and Publishers
References:
• Gupta S P, Statistical Methods, S. Chand & Co.
• Raghavachari, M, Mathematics for Management, Tata Mc. GrawHill
• Piskunov N, Differential & Integral Calculus, Moscow MIR Publishers
• Sancheti & Kapoor, Business Mathematics, Sultan Chand & Sons
• J. K. Sharma Business mathematics- Theory and Applications, Ane Books India.
 BUSINESS AND ECONOMIC LAWS - I
Course Code: BCL 125 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to impart basic knowledge that a common person comes across in this
various business dealings and, make him aware of the relevant case laws

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Meaning and Scope of business law – Sources of Indian Business Law.

Module II: Indian Contract Act

Definition – types of contract – essentials – offer, acceptance, consideration, capacity of parties – free
consent (meaning only) – legality of object and consideration – various modes of discharge of a
contract – remedies for breach of contract Contract of indemnity and guarantee, bailment and pledge,
law of agency.

Module III: Indian Sale of Goods Act

Formation of a contract, Condition and warranties, Transfer of ownership, Performance of the
contract, Rights of unpaid seller.

Module IV: Negotiable Instruments Act

Definition of a negotiable instrument; instruments negotiable by law and by custom; types of
negotiable instruments; parties to a negotiable instrument - duties, rights, liabilities and discharge;
material alteration; crossing of cheques; payment and collection of cheques and demand drafts;
presumption of law as to negotiable instruments.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Tulsian - Business Law, Tata Mcgraw Hill, New Delhi.

• Aswathappa. K & Ramachandra – Business Law, HPH, Mumbai.
• Kapoor N.D. - Business Law, Sultan Chand & Co.
• Bare Acts.
• Nabhi - Business Law, Indian Law House, Mumbai.
• Garg, Sareen, Sharma & Chawla - Business Law.
• M.C. Kuchhal, Business Law.
 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-I
Course Code: EVS 142 Credit
Units: 02

Course Contents:

Module I: The multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies

Definition, scope and importance
Need for public awareness

Module II: Natural Resources

Renewable and non-renewable resources:
Natural resources and associated problems
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies.
Timber extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people.
Water resources: Use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, floods,
drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems.
Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting
and using mineral resources, case studies.
Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and
overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water
logging, salinity, case studies.
Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non-renewable
energy sources, use of alternate energy sources, case studies.
Land resources: Land as a resource, land degradation, man induced
landslides, soil erosion and desertification.
Role of an individual in conservation of natural resources.
Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles.

Module III: Ecosystems

Concept of an ecosystem, Structure and function of an ecosystem, Producers,
consumers and decomposers, Energy flow in the ecosystem, Ecological
succession
Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids
Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the
following ecosystem:
e. Forest ecosystem
f. Grassland ecosystem
g. Desert ecosystem
h. Aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, ocean estuaries)

Module IV: Biodiversity and its conservation

Introduction – Definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity
Biogeographical classification of India
Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical
aesthetic and option values Biodiversity at global, national and local levels
India as a mega-diversity nation, Hot-spots of biodiversity
Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man wildlife
conflicts, Endangered and endemic species of India
Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ conservation of biodiversity

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Agarwal, K.C. 2001 Environmental Biology, Nidi Publ. Ltd. Bikaner.

• Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad 380 013,
India, Email:[email protected] (R)
• Brunner R.C., 1989, Hazardous Waste Incineration, McGraw Hill Inc. 480p Clark R.S., Marine
Pollution, Clanderson Press Oxford (TB)
• Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, E & Hepworth, M.T. 2001, Environmental
Encyclopedia, Jaico Publ. House, Mumabai, 1196p
• De A.K., Environmental Chemistry, Wiley Eastern Ltd. Down to Earth, Centre for Science and
Environment (R)
• Gleick, H.P. 1993. Water in Crisis, Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev., Environment & Security.
Stockholm Env. Institute Oxford Univ. Press. 473p
• Hawkins R.E., Encyclopedia of Indian Natural History, Bombay Natural History Society, Bombay
(R) Heywood, V.H & Waston, R.T. 1995. Global Biodiversity Assessment. Cambridge Univ.
Press 1140p.
• Jadhav, H & Bhosale, V.M. 1995. Environmental Protection and Laws. Himalaya Pub. House,
Delhi 284 p. Mckinney, M.L. & School, R.M. 1996. Environmental Science Systems & Solutions,
Web enhanced edition. 639p.
• Mhaskar A.K., Matter Hazardous, Techno-Science Publication (TB) Miller T.G. Jr. Environmental
Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co. (TB)
• Odum, E.P. 1971. Fundamentals of Ecology. W.B. Saunders Co. USA, 574p
• Rao M N. & Datta, A.K. 1987. Waste Water treatment. Oxford & IBH Publ. Co. Pvt. Ltd. 345p.
Sharma B.K., 2001. Environmental Chemistry. Geol Publ. House, Meerut
• Survey of the Environment, The Hindu (M)
• Townsend C., Harper J, and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science
• Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules Guidelines, Compliances and Standards,
Vol I and II, Enviro Media (R)

• Trivedi R. K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to air pollution, Techno-Science Publication (TB)
Wanger K.D., 1998 Environnemental Management. W.B. Saunders Co. Philadelphia, USA 499p
 INDIAN HISTORY
Course Code: BCH 107 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
This module briefly surveys the history of India. After a short sketch of pre-modern history of India, it
will examine the arrival of the Europeans in India. The transformation of Indian polity, economy and
society during the colonial period, the rise of nationalism and the consequent freedom struggle will be
studied.

Course Contents:
Module I
Physical features - Pre - historic Age - Indus Valley Civilization - Vedic Age - Jainism - Buddhism.

Module II
Alexander's Invasion - It's effects - Mauryan Empire Administration - Asoka's Service to Buddhism Kushans -
Kanishka - The Guptas - Golden Age - Harshavardhana and Buddhism.

Module III
Sangam Age - Social, economic, religious and cultural conditions - The Pallavas - Their contribution to Art and
Architecture - The Imperial Cholas - Their administration - Growth of religion and culture.

Module IV
Muslim invasions - Sultans of Delhi Qutb-Ud-din-Aibek to Balban - Alauddin Khilji - Administration -
Mohamad bin - Tugluk - Feroz Tioglak - Social and Religious condition under the Sultans.

Module V
Bahmini Kindgoms - Vijayanagar Kingdom - Krishna Devaraya - Their contributions to Art and Architecture,
religion and literature - Bakthi cult.

Module VI
The Mughals - Babur - Humayun - Shershah - Akbar to Aurangazeb - Mughal Administration - Art and
Architecture under the Mughals. Shivaji - His administration - The Sikhs.

Module VII
Coming of the Europeans - Anglo - French rivalry Robert Clive to Dalhousie.

Module VIII
Sepoy Mutiny of 1957 - Socio - religious Reform Movements in the 19th and 20th Centuries - with special
reference of Tamil Nadu - Freedom movement in India - Moderates - Extremists and Gandhian Era - Role of
Tamil Nadu in the Freedom struggle.

Module IX
Constitutional Development - Regulating Act 1773 - Pitt's India Act 1784 - Acts of 1858. 1909, 1919, 1935 and
1947 - Salient features of Indian Constitution.

Module X
Impact of British rule on India - Services of Nehru and Patel - Five year Plans - India's role in world affairs -
Growth of Education from the 19th century to the present day - films and press in the post independence period
- Human Rights in India.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Bipinchandra, India’s struggle of Independence (1857-1947)

• Mahajan, V.D., India since 1526.
• Majumdar, R.C. (Edi), Struggle for Freedom (Bhartiya Vidhya Bhavan, Mumbai)
• Majumdar, R.C. (Edi). British Paramouncy and Indian Renaissance, Part-I and Part-II. (Bhartiya Vidhya
Bhavan, Mumbai)
• Majumdar, Raichaudhari and Dutt., An Advanced History of India, Part-II
• Rao, M.S.A., Social Movements in India Vol-I and Vol-II.
• Robert, P.E., History of India (Hindi Edition also available)
• Sarkar, Smodule, Modern India (1885-1947)
• Sharma, M.L., History of India
• Razvi, S.A.A., The Wonder that was India, vol-2.
• Satish Chandra, Medieval India from sultanate to the Mughals.
• Stein, Burton, Peasant, State and Society in Medieval South India.
• Shrivastav, A.L. Delhi Sultanate.
• Ishvari Prasad, Medieval India
• Sharma, S.R., The Crescent in India
• Tripathi, R.P., Rise and fall of the Mughal Empire
• Mahajan V.D., India Sine 1526
• Sardesa, G.S., TheNew History of Marathas vol-I & II.
• Robert, P.E., History of British India (Relevant Chapters)
• Majumdar, R.C., The Delhi Sultanate (Bhartiya Vidhya Bhavan)
• Majumdar, R.C., The Mughal Empire
• Majumdar, R.C., The Maratha Supremacy.
 MATHEMATICS
Course Code: BCH 108 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective of this course is to impart basic and fundamental mathematical knowledge to
students who are from non-mathematic background.

Course Contents:
Module I: Number system
Irrational number; Decimal representation of irrational number; Surds; Type of surds;
Comparison of surds; Rationalisation of surds; Real numbers; Field properties of real
numbers; order properties of real numbers; Inequalities; Real numbers are dense; Absolute
value of real numbers; Fundamental properties; Archemedian property.

Module II: Polynomials

Degree of a polynomial; Special names of Polynomials; Factors of a Polynomial; Factors of ax2
+ bx + c; H.C F. and L.C.M. of polynomials; H.C.F. of monomials; H.C.F. of polynomials by
factorisation; L.C.M. of monomials; L.C.M. of polynomials which can be factorised.

Module III: Rational Expression

Rational expressions in lowest term; Addition of rational expressions; Subtraction of Rational
algebraic expressions; Multiplication of rational algebraic expressions; Division of rational
algebraic expressions; Properties of rational algebraic expressions.

Module IV: Ratio and Proportion

Extremes and Means; Continued proportion; Rules of proportion.

Module V: Equation
Linear Equation in one variable; Application of Linear Equations; Linear Equation in two
variable; Algebraic Method; Graphs of Linear Equation in one and two variables.

Module VI: Logarithms

Laws of Logarithms; Approximation; Significant figures. The Common Logarithm;
Determination of Mantissa; Logarithms Applications; Depreciation of values.

Module VII: Trigonometry

Angles; Positive and Negative Angles; Different measures of an Angle; Sexa desimal System
(Scale of Sixty); Centesimal System (Scale of Hundred); Relation (pi); Circular System;
Relation among the threebetween two systems; number system; Relation between the Arc,
Angle and radius; Trigonometric ratio; Some useful identities. Trigonometric ratios of some
standard angles. Trigonometric ratios of 30o; Trigonometric ratio of 45o; Concept of Infinity (α).

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Kapoor V.K.: Business mathematics, Sultan Chand & Sons, Delhi.

• Kumbhojkar G.V.: Business Mathematics
• Shantinarayan: Text Book of Matrics.
• Bhagwat K Pawate: Elements of Calculus.
• Soni R.S.: Business Mathematics, Pitamber Publishing House
 DEMOCRACY AND GOVERNANCE IN INDIA
Course Code: BCH 109 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective of this course is to impart basic and fundamental knowledge of Indian
Democracy and Governance systems to students in order to educate them about the political
and regulatory environment of business.

Course Contents:
Module I: Structure and Process of Governance
Features of Indian Constitution, Parliament, Party Politics and Electoral behavior, Federalism,
The Supreme Court and Judicial Activism, Preamble of the Constitution, Fundamental Rights,
Directive Principles of State Policy, Fundamental Rights: Problem of Under Privileged Section,
Panchayat Raj & Municipal Governance – 73rd and 74th amendment of the constitution.

Module II: Ideas, Interests and Institutions in Public Policy

a. Studying Ideas and Institutions of Policy Making – The Role of Experts in Policy Making,
Ministry of Finance, Planning Commission, Finance Commission, Annual Budget Regime,
Reserve Bank of India, Commission for Agricultural Costs and Prices etc.
b. Regulatory Institutions
c. Lobbying Institutions: Chambers of Commerce and Industries, Trade Unions, Farmers
Associations, Public, Private Partnership, BOT

Module III: Contemporary Political Economy of Development in India

Policy Debates over Models of Development in India, Recent trends of Liberalisation of Indian
Economy in different sectors, including e-governance, Development of SCs, STs, OBCs and
minorities, Reservation Policy, Constitutional safeguards/welfare measures, Women’s
Empowerment

Module IV: Dynamics of Civil Society

New Social Movements and Various interests, Role of NGO’s, Understanding the political
significance of Media and Popular Culture, Department of Personal & Grievance, Grievance
Redressal Mechanism, Central Vigilance Commission (CVC), Lokayukt Ombudsman, Modern
Thinkers (Swami Vivekanad, Tagore, Mahatma Gandhi, Dr. Zakir Hussain, PT. Jawahar Lal
Nehru, Amritya Sen, Dr. Ambedkar

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Atul Kohli (ed.), The Success of India’s Democracy, Cambridge University Press.
• Corbridge, Stuart and John Harris, Reinventing India: Liberalisation, Hindu Nationalism
and Popular Democracy OUP.
• Dreze, J. and Sen, A, India: Economic Development and Social Opportunity, Clarendon
paperbacks.
• Jagdish Bhagwati, India in Transition: Freeing the Economy.
• Patel, I.G., Glimpses of Indian Economic Policy: An Insider View, OUP.
 Annexure’ CD-01’

UG- 01 L T P/ SW/F TOTAL

Course Title: Communication Skills-I S W CREDIT
Credit Units: 1 UNITS
Course Code: BCU141 1 0 0 0 1

Course Objective The course is intended to familiarize students with the basics
of English language and help them to learn to identify language structures for
correct English usage.
Prerequisites: NIL
Course Contents / Syllabus:
1. Module I Essentials of English Grammar 30% Weightage
• Common Errors
• Parts of Speech
• Collocations, Relative Pronoun
• Subject-Verb Agreement
• Articles
• Punctuation
• Sentence Structure- ‘Wh’ Questions
2. Module II Written English Communication 30% Weightage

• Paragraph Writing
• Essay Writing
3. Module III Spoken English Communication 30% Weightage

• Introduction to Phonetics
• Syllable-Consonant and Vowel Sounds
• Stress and Intonation
4. Module IV : Prose 10% Weightage
“Friends, Romans, Countrymen, lend me your ears” Speech by Marc
Antony in Julius Caesar

❖ Comprehension Questions will be set in the End-Semester

Exam

Student Learning Outcomes:

The students should be able to :
5. • Identify Common Errors and Rectify Them
• Develop and Expand Writing Skills Through Controlled and
Guided Activities
• To Develop Coherence, Cohesion and Competence in Oral
Discourse through Intelligible Pronunciation.
6. Pedagogy for Course Delivery:
• Workshop
• Group Discussions
• Presentations
• Lectures
• Extempore
Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
Theory L/T Lab/Practical/Studio End Term
(%) (%) Examination

100% NA 70%
Theory Assessment (L&T):
Components End Term
(Drop down) CIE Mid Attendance Examination
Sem

Weightage 10% 15% 5% 70%

(%)

Text: Rosenblum, M. How to Build Better Vocabulary, London: Bloomsbury Publication

 Verma, Shalini. Word Power made Handy, S. Chand Publications
High School English Grammar & Composition by Wren & Martin
References: K.K.Sinha , Business Communication, Galgotia Publishing Company.

Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals

 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE- I

Course Code: BSU 143 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
This course aims at imparting an understanding of:
• Self and the process of self exploration
• Learning strategies for development of a healthy self esteem
• Importance of attitudes and its effect on personality
• Building emotional competence

Course Contents:

Module I: Self: Core Competency (2 Hours)

• Understanding of Self
• Components of Self – Self identity
• Self concept
• Self confidence
• Self image

Module II: Techniques of Self Awareness (2 Hours)

• Exploration through Johari Window
• Mapping the key characteristics of self
• Framing a charter for self
• Stages – self awareness, self acceptance and self realization

Module III: Self Esteem & Effectiveness (2 Hours)

• Meaning & Importance
• Components of self esteem
• High and low self esteem
• Measuring your self esteem

Module IV: Building Positive Attitude (2 Hours)

• Meaning and Nature of Attitude
• Components and Types of Attitudes
• Relevance and Importance of Attitudes

Module V: Building Emotional Competence (2 Hours)

• Emotional Intelligence – Meaning, Components, Importance and Relevance
• Positive and Negative Emotions
• Healthy and Unhealthy expression of Emotions

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal (2Hours)

• Viva based on personal journal
• Assessment of Behavioral change as a result of training
• Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Suggested Readings:

• Dressler, David and Cans, Donald: The Study of Human Interaction

• Lindzey, G. and Borgatta, E: Sociometric Measurement in the Handbook of Social Psychology,
Addison – Welsley, US.
• J William Pfeiffer (ed.) Theories and Models in Applied Behavioural Science, Vol 2, Group
(1996); Pfeiffer & Company
 FRENCH

Course Code: FLU 144 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To familiarize the students with the French language
• with the phonetic system
• with the syntax
• with the manners
• with the cultural aspects

Course Contents:
Module A: pp. 01 to 37: Unités 1, 2, Unité 3 Objectif 1, 2
Only grammar of Unité 3: objectif 3, 4 and 5

Contenu lexical : Unité 1: Découvrir la langue française : (oral et écrit)

1. se présenter, présenter quelqu’un, faire la connaissance des
autres, formules de politesse, rencontres
2. dire/interroger si on comprend
3. Nommer les choses
Unité 2: Faire connaissance
5. donner/demander des informations sur une personne, premiers
contacts, exprimer ses goûts et ses préférences
6. Parler de soi: parler du travail, de ses activités, de son pays, de sa
ville.

Unité 3 : Organiser son temps

1. dire la date et l’heure

Contenu grammatical : 1. organisation générale de la grammaire

2. article indéfini, défini, contracté
3. nom, adjectif, masculin, féminin, singulier et pluriel
4. négation avec « de », "moi aussi", "moi non plus"
5. interrogation : Inversion, est-ce que, qui, que, quoi, qu’est-ce
que, où, quand, comment, quel(s), quelle(s)
Interro-négatif : réponses : oui, si, non
6. pronom tonique/disjoint- pour insister après une préposition
7. futur proche

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Campus: Tome 1

 GERMAN - I

Course Code: BCH 145 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of
grammar, which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic
opportunities available in Germany

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Self introduction: heissen, kommen, wohnwn, lernen, arbeiten, trinken, etc.
All personal pronouns in relation to the verbs taught so far.
Greetings: Guten Morgen!, Guten Tag!, Guten Abend!, Gute Nacht!, Danke sehr!, Danke!, Vielen
Dank!, (es tut mir Leid!),
Hallo, wie geht’s?: Danke gut!, sehr gut!, prima!, ausgezeichnet!,
Es geht!, nicht so gut!, so la la!, miserabel!

Module II: Interviewspiel

To assimilate the vocabulary learnt so far and to apply the words and phrases in short dialogues
in an interview – game for self introduction.

Module III: Phonetics

Sound system of the language with special stress on Dipthongs

Module IV: Countries, nationalities and their languages

To make the students acquainted with the most widely used country names, their nationalitie and
the language spoken in that country.

Module V: Articles
The definite and indefinite articles in masculine, feminine and neuter gender. All Vegetables,
Fruits, Animals, Furniture, Eatables, modes of Transport

Module VI: Professions

To acquaint the students with professions in both the genders with the help of the verb “sein”.

Module VII: Pronouns

Simple possessive pronouns, the use of my, your, etc.
The family members, family Tree with the help of the verb “to have”

Module VIII: Colours

All the color and color related vocabulary – colored, colorful, colorless, pale, light, dark, etc.

Module IX: Numbers and calculations – verb “kosten”

The counting, plural structures and simple calculation like addition, subtraction, multiplication
and division to test the knowledge of numbers.
“Wie viel kostet das?”

Module X: Revision list of Question pronouns

W – Questions like who, what, where, when, which, how, how many, how much, etc.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice
Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch

• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1,2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH – I

Course Code: BCH 146 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire the relevance of the Spanish language in today’s global context, how
to greet each other. How to present / introduce each other using basic verbs and vocabulary

Course Contents:
Module I
A brief history of Spain, Latin America, the language, the culture…and the relevance of Spanish
language in today’s global context.
Introduction to alphabets

Module II
Introduction to ‘Saludos’ (How to greet each other. How to present / introduce each other).
Goodbyes (despedidas)
The verb llamarse and practice of it.

Module III
Concept of Gender and Number
Months of the years, days of the week, seasons. Introduction to numbers 1-100, Colors, Revision
of numbers and introduction to ordinal numbers.

Module IV
Introduction to SER and ESTAR (both of which mean To Be).Revision of ‘Saludos’ and ‘Llamarse’.
Some adjectives, nationalities, professions, physical/geographical location, the fact that spanish
adjectives have to agree with gender and number of their nouns. Exercises highlighting usage of
Ser and Estar.

Module V
Time, demonstrative pronoun (Este/esta, Aquel/aquella etc)

Module VI
Introduction to some key AR /ER/IR ending regular verbs.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español, En Directo I A
• Español Sin Fronteras
 JAPANESE - I

Course Code: BSB 147 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to learn the basic rules of grammar and Japanese language to be used in daily life that
will later help them to strengthen their language.

Course Contents:
Module I: Salutations
Self introduction, Asking and answering to small general questions

Module II: Cardinal Numbers

Numerals, Expression of time and period, Days, months

Module III: Tenses

Present Tense, Future tense

Module IV: Prepositions

Particles, possession, Forming questions

Module V: Demonstratives
Interrogatives, pronoun and adjectives

Module VI: Description

Common phrases, Adjectives to describe a person

Module VII: Schedule

Time Table, everyday routine etc.

Module VIII: Outings

Going to see a movie, party, friend’s house etc.

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the basic language describing above mentioned topics

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments and role-plays will support classroom
teaching

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – I

Course Code: BCH 148 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
There are many dialects spoken in China, but the language which will help you through
wherever you go is Mandarin, or Putonghua, as it is called in Chinese. The most widely spoken
forms of Chinese are Mandarin, Cantonese, Gan, Hakka, Min, Wu and Xiang. The course aims
at familiarizing the student with the basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin, the
language of Mainland China. The course aims at training students in practical skills and
nurturing them to interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Show pictures, dialogue and retell.
Getting to know each other.
Practicing chart with Initials and Finals. (CHART – The Chinese Phonetic Alphabet Called
“Hanyu Pinyin” in Mandarin Chinese.)
Practicing of Tones as it is a tonal language.
Changes in 3rd tone and Neutral Tone.

Module II
Greetings
Let me Introduce
The modal particle “ne”.
Use of Please ‘qing” – sit, have tea ………….. etc.
A brief self introduction – Ni hao ma? Zaijian!
Use of “bu” negative.

Module III
Attributives showing possession
How is your Health? Thank you
Where are you from?
A few Professions like – Engineer, Businessman, Doctor, Teacher, Worker.
Are you busy with your work?
May I know your name?

Module IV
Use of “How many” – People in your family?
Use of “zhe” and “na”.
Use of interrogative particle “shenme”, “shui”, “ma” and “nar”.
How to make interrogative sentences ending with “ma”.
Structural particle “de”.
Use of “Nin” when and where to use and with whom. Use of guixing.
Use of verb “zuo” and how to make sentences with it.

Module V
Family structure and Relations.
Use of “you” – “mei you”.
Measure words
Days and Weekdays.
Numbers.
Maps, different languages and Countries.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• “Elementary Chinese Reader Part I” Lesson 1-10
 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING - II
Course Code: BCH 201 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To develop conceptual understanding of the fundamentals of financial accounting system which
processes transactions and other events through a book-keeping mechanism to prepare
financial statements, and also to impart skills in accounting for recording various kinds of
business transactions.

Course Contents:

Module I
Consignment and Joint Venture Accounts:
(i) Consignments: Features, Accounting treatment in the books of the consignor and
consignee.
(ii) Joint Ventures: Accounting procedures: Joint Bank Account, Records Maintained by
Co- venturer of (a) all transactions (b) only his own transactions. (Memorandum joint
venture account).

Module II
Partnership
Admission of a partner: partenership deed, goodwill valuation and treatment. Sacrificing
ratio.
Retirement and death of a partner: gaining ratio, goodwill treatment
Dissolution of partnership: revaluation of assets and liabilities. Legal Position,
Accounting for simple dissolution,
Applications of rule in case of Garner Vs. Murray in case of insolvency of partner(s)
(excluding piecemeal distribution and sale of a firm to a company).

Module III
Computerized accounting using any popular accounting software, creating a company,
configure & features setting, creating accounting ledgers & groups, creating stock items
& groups, vouchers entry (with maintenance of voucher), generating reports- cash book,
ledger accounts, trail balance, profit & loss account, and balance sheet

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Dr. S.N. Maheswari, Financial Accounting

• BS Raman, Financial Accounting
• Grewal and Gupta, Advanced Accounting
• Radhaswamy and R.L. Gupta, Advanced Accounting
• S.Kr. Paul, Advanced Accounting
• P.C. Tulasian, Pearson Editions, Introduction to Accounting
• Jain & Narang, Financial Accounting
• Sehgal, A and Sehgal,D “Advanced Accounting”, Part – 1, Taxmann Applied services, New Delhi
 MICROECONOMIC THEORY AND APPLICATIONS - II

Course Code: BCH 202

Credit Units: 03
Course Objective:
The objective of this paper is to make the student to understand how the business organizations work by
applying economic principles in their business management. The course will attempt to relate theory to
practice and try to instill in students the ability to apply basic microeconomic concepts to the
understanding of everyday phenomena .
Course Contents:
Module I: Market Structures
Market Structures and business decisions; Objectives of Business firm. A) Perfect Competition: Profit
Maximization and equilibrium of firm and industry; Short - run and long - run supply curves; Price and
output determination. Practical Applications. B) Monopoly: Determination of price under monopoly;
Equilibrium of a firm; Comparison between perfect competition and monopoly; Multi Plant monopoly, Price
Discrimination; Practical applications. C) Monopolistic Competition: Meaning and characteristics; Price
and output Determination under monopolistic competition; Excess capacity under monopolistic
competition. D) Oligopoly: Characteristic, indeterminate pricing and output; Classical models of Oligopoly;
price leadership; Collusive oligopoly; kinked demand curve.

Module II: Factor Pricing - I

Marginal productivity theory and demand for factors; Nature of supply of factor inputs; Determination of
wage rates under perfect Competition and monopoly; Exploitation of labor, Rent - concept; Ricardian and
Modern theories of rent; Quasi-rent, Functional Distribution of Income.

Module III: Factor Pricing - II

Interests - concept and theories of interest - Loanable Fund Theory, Liquidity Preference Theory, Profit -
natural, concepts, and theories of Profit - Innovation Theory, Dynamic Theory, Risk Theory and
Uncertainty Bearing Theory,

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• I.C. Dhingra, Principles of Microeconomics- Sultan Chand & Sons
• H.L. Ahuja- Microeconomics
• Baumol, W.J. Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
• Bach, G.L, Economics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
• Gould, J.P. and Edward P.L, Microeconomic Theory, Richard, Irwin. Homewood.
• Koutsoyiannis, A, Modern Microeconomics, Macmillan.
• Lipsey, R.G. and K.A. Chrystal, Principles of Economics, Oxford University Press, Oxford.

ADVANCED BUSINESS MATHEMATICS

Course Code: BCM 201

Credit Units: 03
Course Objective:
To familiarize the students with basic mathematical tools and the application of the same to business and
economic situations.
Course Contents:
Module I: Linear Programming
Linear Programming problem (L.P.P.): Formulation of L.P.P.; Graphical Method of solution; problems
relating to two variables including the case of mixed constraints; cases having no solution, multiple
solutions, unbounded Solution.
Module II: Differentiation
Definition; Derivative using first Principle; Method of Differentiation of sum, difference, product and
Quotient of two functions; Derivative if composite, inverse, exponential, Logarithmic, parametric and
Implicit functions; second order derivative. Maxima Minima.

Module III: Applications of derivatives in Business

Case of one variable involving Second Order derivative; Average Cost, Average revenue functions,
marginal cost, marginal revenue, Elasticity of demand.

Module IV: Integration and its Business Applications

Integration as anti-derivative process; Standard forms; Method of Integration by substitution
Determination of Cost, revenue and demand function; Consumer’s surplus and Producer’s surplus.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA//C/V EE
Weightage (%) 15 5 70

Text & References:

• Kumbhojkar G.V.: Business Mathematics

• Shantinarayan: Text Book of Matrics.
• Bhagwat K Pawate: Elements of Calculus.
• Soni R.S.: Business Mathematics, Pitamber Publishing
House
• Kapoor V.K.: Business Mathematics, Sultan Chand &
Sons, Delhi.
• J.K. Sharma; Business Mathematics, Theory and
Applications, Ane Books India.
 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
Course Code: CSE 201 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To provide computer skills and knowledge for commerce students, and to make them complacent with the
use of new tools of IT.
Course Contents:
Module I:
Computer applications – data processing, information processing, commercial, office automation, industry
and engineering, healthcare, education, graphics and multimedia, Von-Neumann architecture, Computer
system organization, Computer memory- primary memory and secondary memory. Secondary storage
devices – magnetic and optical media, Operating system and function, Evolution of operating system,
Operating System structure, Operating System Services.

Module II:
Data Representation: Number systems, Positional and Non-Positional Number system, Character
representation codes, Binary, octal, hexadecimal and their interconversions. Binary arithmetic,Algorithm
and flowcharts, Process Modeling – DFD, Logic Modeling – Structured English & Decision Tables.

Module III:
System & its parts, Types of Systems, Characteristics of a System, System Analyst and its responsibilities,
Types of system Analysis, Database Design, Database Management System – an introduction, Overview of
Data Models (Relational Database Model, E-R data model, Network Data model, Hierarchical Data model)
Keys, Schema & Subschema, Structure, Facilities & Users, Constraints, Anomalies, Functional Dependency,
Normalization (1NF and 2NF), Database Administrator and its functions.

Module IV:
SDLC & System Development Models (Waterfall model, Prototype model, Evolutionary model & Spiral Model),
System Planning & Selection (Identifying, Selecting, Initiating & Planning System Development Project),
Comparison between System Development models.

Module V:
Management Information System (MIS) - Concept, need and characteristics of MIS - data, information and
data life cycle, System Security: Data Security, Backup & Recovery during System & Database
failure, Ethical Issues in System Development, Threat and Risk Analysis, Audit, System Audit.
Module VI:
Introduction to computer networks, types of Network, Topology, reference models, Theoretical basis for data
communication, transmission media, error detection and correction, Basic concepts of hubs, switches, gateways,
and routers.

Examination Scheme:
Component CT HA/C/V A EE
s
Weightage 15 10 5 70
(%)

Text & References:

• Craig Stinson “Running Microsoft Windows-98” – Microsoft press.
• Joshua C. Nossiter. “ Using Excel – 5 for Windows”
• “Working with Word” – Aptech Computer Education
• “Power Point Presentation” – Aptech Computer Education.
• Malhotra, Computer Applications in Business
• Rajaraman V, Analysis and Design of Information System, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi
• Murdick, RG and Ross, JE Information Systems for Modern Management
• Kanter, J, Management Oriented MIS, Prentice Hall of India
• Bhattacharya SK, Management Planning and Information Systems
 BUSINESS AND ECONOMIC LAWS - II
Course Code: BCL 225 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to impart basic knowledge that a common person comes across in this
various business dealings and, make him aware of the relevant case laws

Course Contents:
Module I: Indian Partnership Act
Definition and nature of partnership - Rights and duties of partner - Types of partners - Incoming and
outgoing and minor as a partner - Dissolution of partnership - Registration of firm, Limited Liability
Partnership Act’2008- Meaning & definitions, Meaning of designated partners, Registration of LLP, Types
of partners, Dissolution.

Module II: Consumer Protection Act. [COPRA] 1986

Back ground – definitions of 1) Consumer 2) Consumer Dispute 3) Complaint 4) Deficiency 5) Service
Consumer Protection Council – Consumer Redressal Agencies – District Forum, State Commission and
National Commission.

Module III: Foreign Exchange Management Act 1999

Objectives, Scope and salient features – offences under the Act.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Tulsian - Business Law, Tata mcgraw Hill, New Delhi.

• Aswathappa. K & Ramachandra – Business Law, HPH, Mumbai.
• Kapoor N.D. - Business Law, Sultan Chand & Co.
• Bare Acts.
• Nabhi - Business Law, Indian Law House, Mumbai.
• Garg, Sareen, Sharma & Chawla - Business Law.
• M.C. Kuchhal, Business Law.
 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES-II

Course Code: EVS 242 Credit Units: 02

Course Contents:

Module I: Environmental Pollution

Definition, causes, effects and control measures of:
a. Air pollution
h. Water pollution
i. Soil pollution
j. Marine pollution
k. Noise pollution
l. Thermal pollution
m. Nuclear pollution
Solid waste management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and
industrial wastes. Role of an individual in prevention of pollution. Pollution case
studies. Disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides.

Module II: Social Issues and the Environment

From unsustainable to sustainable development, Urban problems and related to
energy, Water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management
Resettlement and rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns. Case
studies.
Environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions
Climate Change, Global Warming, Acid Rain, Ozone Layer depletion, Nuclear
Accidents and Holocaust Case studies.
Fireworks/Crackers – Introduction, ill effects on environment and humans.
Wasteland reclamation, Consumerism and waste products, Environmental
Protection Act
Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, Water (Prevention and control of
Pollution) Act, Wildlife Protection Act, Forest Conservation Act
Issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation Public awareness

Module III: Human Population and the Environment

Population growth, variation among nations
Population explosion – Family Welfare Programmes
Environment and human health
Human Rights
Value Education
HIV / AIDS
Women and Child Welfare
Role of Information Technology in Environment and Human Health
 Case Studies

Module IV: Field Work

Visit to a local area to document environmental assets-river / forest/ grassland/
hill/ mountain. Visit to a local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial /
Agricultural. Study of common plants, insects, birds. Study of simple
ecosystems-pond, river, hill slopes, etc (Field work equal to 5 lecture hours)

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Agarwal, K.C. 2001 Environmental Biology, Nidi Publ. Ltd. Bikaner.

• Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad 380 013, India,
Email:[email protected] (R)
• Brunner R.C., 1989, Hazardous Waste Incineration, McGraw Hill Inc. 480p Clark R.S., Marine
Pollution, Clanderson Press Oxford (TB)
• Cunningham, W.P. Cooper, T.H. Gorhani, E & Hepworth, M.T. 2001, Environmental Encyclopedia,
Jaico Publ. House, Mumabai, 1196p
• De A.K., Environmental Chemistry, Wiley Eastern Ltd. Down to Earth, Centre for Science and
Environment (R)
• Gleick, H.P. 1993. Water in Crisis, Pacific Institute for Studies in Dev., Environment & Security.
Stockholm Env. Institute Oxford Univ. Press. 473p
• Hawkins R.E., Encyclopedia of Indian Natural History, Bombay Natural History Society, Bombay (R)
Heywood, V.H & Waston, R.T. 1995. Global Biodiversity Assessment. Cambridge Univ. Press 1140p.
• Jadhav, H & Bhosale, V.M. 1995. Environmental Protection and Laws. Himalaya Pub. House, Delhi
284 p. Mckinney, M.L. & School, R.M. 1996. Environmental Science Systems & Solutions, Web
enhanced edition. 639p.
• Mhaskar A.K., Matter Hazardous, Techno-Science Publication (TB) Miller T.G. Jr. Environmental
Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co. (TB)
• Odum, E.P. 1971. Fundamentals of Ecology. W.B. Saunders Co. USA, 574p
• Rao M N. & Datta, A.K. 1987. Waste Water treatment. Oxford & IBH Publ. Co. Pvt. Ltd. 345p.
Sharma B.K., 2001. Environmental Chemistry. Geol Publ. House, Meerut
• Survey of the Environment, The Hindu (M)
• Townsend C., Harper J, and Michael Begon, Essentials of Ecology, Blackwell Science
• Trivedi R.K., Handbook of Environmental Laws, Rules Guidelines, Compliances and Standards, Vol I
and II, Enviro Media (R)

• Trivedi R. K. and P.K. Goel, Introduction to air pollution, Techno-Science Publication (TB) Wanger
K.D., 1998 Environnemental Management. W.B. Saunders Co. Philadelphia, USA 499p
 PSYCHOLOGY AND ETHICS
Course Code: BCH 207 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
To enable students to understand the nature and characteristics of psychology.
To enable the student identify the variables involved in human process so as to infer their role in
running business organization
To understand the needs of humans as an individual and a member of an organization.
To sensitize them to proper ideals and norms within which they should perform their roles.
To empower them to cultivate professional norms and ethics.

Course Contents:
Module I: Concept of Psychology
Meaning and definition of Psychology, Branches of Psychology with special references to
Industrial Psychology, Psychological Principles of Learning.

Module II: Motivation

Concept of Motivation- Types of Motivation: (i) Intrinsic & (ii) Extrinsic.Techniques of Motivation.

Module III: Personality

Meaning and Definition, Determinants of Personality, Types of Personality

Module IV: Group Dynamics

Meaning and types of Group, Characteristics of Human Groups, Sociometry and Grouping

Module V: Ethics
Ethics in business; Corporate Code of Ethics a) Environment b) Accountability c) Responsibility.
Corporate Social Responsibility-Arguments for and against.
Strategic Planning & Corporate Social Responsibility.
Cases of corruption, Corporate Scandals, Whistle Blowing, Insider Trading, Discrimination,
Advertising, Consumer Rights etc.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Peters, R.S: Authority, Responsibility and Education, London, Allen and Unwin.
• UNESCO: Economics & Social aspects of Educational Planning, Paris.
• Aggarwal, J.C.: Essentials of Educational Psychology, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi.
• Mathur S.S.: Educational Psychology, Agra, Vinod Pustak Mandir.
• Hillgard Eranest R, Atkinson Richard C & Atinksion Rita L: Introduction to Psychology, Oxford
& IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
• Best Internet Source for Ethics, http:/ /www.josephsoninstitute.org/jilinks.htm
• Desjarding, Joseph, An Introduction to Business Ethics, McGraw-Hill.
 Annexure’ CD-01’

UG: Semester II
Course Title: Communication Skills-II
Course Code: BCU 241 L T P/ SW/F TOTAL
Credit Units: 1 S W CREDIT
UNITS
1 0 0 0 1
Course Objectives:

To understand the different aspects of communication using the four

macro skills – LSRW (Listening, Speaking, Reading, Writing)
Prerequisites: NIL
Course Contents / Syllabus:
1. Module I Communication 35%
Weightage
• Process and Importance
• Models of Communication (Linear & Shannon Weaver)
• Role and Purpose
• Types & Channels
• Communication Networks
• Principles & Barriers
2. Module II Verbal Communication 25%
Weightage
Oral Communication: Forms, Advantages & Disadvantages
Written Communication: Forms, Advantages & Disadvantages
Introduction of Communication Skills (Listening, Speaking,
Reading, Writing)
3. Module III Non-Verbal Communication 30%
Weightage
• Principles & Significance of Nonverbal Communication
• KOPPACT (Kinesics, Oculesics, Proxemics, Para-
Language, Artifacts, Chronemics, Tactilics)
• Visible Code
4. Module IV : Prose 10%
Weightage

TEXT: APJ Abdul Kalam and Arun Tiwari. Wings of Fire: An Autobiography,
Universities Press, 2011

Comprehension Questions will be set in the End-Semester Exam

5. Student Learning Outcomes:

The students should be able to :

• Apply Verbal and Non-Verbal Communication Techniques in the Professional
Environment
6. Pedagogy for Course Delivery:

• Extempore
• Presentations
• Lectures

7. Assessment/ Examination Scheme:

Theory L/T (%) Lab/Practical/Studio (%) End Term

Examination
100% NA 50%
Theory Assessment (L&T):
Components End Term
(Drop down) CIE Mid Sem Attendance Examination

Weightage 10% 15% 5% 70%

(%)

Text: Rosenblum, M. How to Build Better Vocabulary, London: Bloomsbury Publication.

Verma, Shalini. Word Power made Handy, S. Chand Publications.
High School English Grammar & Composition by Wren & Martin
Reference: K.K.Sinha , Business Communication, Galgotia Publishing Company.
Alan Pease : Body Language

Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals

 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - II

Course Code: BSU 243 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
This course aims at enabling students towards:
• Understand the importance of individual differences
• Better understanding of self in relation to society and nation
• Facilitation for a meaningful existence and adjustment in society
• Inculcating patriotism and national pride

Course Contents:

Module I: Individual differences & Personality (2 Hours)

• Personality: Definition& Relevance
• Importance of nature & nurture in Personality Development
• Importance and Recognition of Individual differences in Personality
• Accepting and Managing Individual differences
• Intuition, Judgment, Perception & Sensation (MBTI)
• BIG5 Factors

Module II: Managing Diversity (2 Hours)

• Defining Diversity
• Affirmation Action and Managing Diversity
• Increasing Diversity in Work Force
• Barriers and Challenges in Managing Diversity

Module III: Socialization (2 Hours)

• Nature of Socialization
• Social Interaction
• Interaction of Socialization Process
• Contributions to Society and Nation

Module IV: Patriotism and National Pride (2 Hours)

• Sense of pride and patriotism
• Importance of discipline and hard work
• Integrity and accountability

Module V: Human Rights, Values and Ethics (2 Hours)

• Meaning and Importance of human rights
• Human rights awareness
• Values and Ethics- Learning based on project work on Scriptures like- Ramayana, Mahabharata,
Gita etc.

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal (2 Hours)

▪ Viva - Voce based on personal journal
▪ Assessment of Behavioral change as a result of training
▪ Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70
SAP: Social Awareness Programme, A: Attendance, JFS: Journal for Success
 FRENCH

Course Code: FLU 244 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to overcome the fear of speaking a foreign language and take position as a
foreigner speaking French.
To make them learn the basic rules of French Grammar.

Course Contents:
Module A : pp.38 – 47 : Unité 3 : Objectif 3, 4, 5. 6

Module B: pp. 47 to 75 Unité 4, 5

Contenu lexical: Unité 3: Organiser son temps

4. donner/demander des informations sur un emploi du temps, un horaire
SNCF – Imaginer un dialogue
5. rédiger un message/ une lettre pour …
i) prendre un rendez-vous/ accepter et confirmer/ annuler
ii) inviter/accepter/refuser
6. Faire un programme d’activités
imaginer une conversation téléphonique/un dialogue
Propositions- interroger, répondre
Unité 4: Découvrir son environnement
5. situer un lieu
6. s’orienter, s’informer sur un itinéraire.
7. Chercher, décrire un logement
8. connaître les rythmes de la vie
Unité 5: s’informer
5. demander/donner des informations sur un emploi du temps passé.
6. donner une explication, exprimer le doute ou la certitude.
7. découvrir les relations entre les mots
8. savoir s’informer

Contenu grammatical: 1. Adjectifs démonstratifs

2. Adjectifs possessifs/exprimer la possession à l’aide de :
i. « de » ii. A+nom/pronom disjoint
3. Conjugaison pronominale – négative, interrogative -
construction à l'infinitif
4. Impératif/exprimer l’obligation/l’interdiction à l’aide de « il
faut…. »/ «il ne faut pas… »
5. passé composé
6. Questions directes/indirectes

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Campus: Tome 1
 GERMAN – II

Course Code: BCH 245 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of
grammar, which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic
opportunities available in Germany
Introduction to Grammar to consolidate the language base learnt in Semester I

Course Contents:
Module I: Everything about Time and Time periods
Time and times of the day.
Weekdays, months, seasons.
Adverbs of time and time related prepositions

Module II: Irregular verbs

Introduction to irregular verbs like to be, and others, to learn the conjugations of the same,
(fahren, essen, lessen, schlafen, sprechen und ähnliche).

Module III: Separable verbs

To comprehend the change in meaning that the verbs undergo when used as such
Treatment of such verbs with separable prefixes

Module IV: Reading and comprehension

Reading and deciphering railway schedules/school time table
Usage of separable verbs in the above context

Module V: Accusative case

Accusative case with the relevant articles
Introduction to 2 different kinds of sentences – Nominative and Accusative

Module VI: Accusative personal pronouns

Nominative and accusative in comparison
Emphasizing on the universal applicability of the pronouns to both persons and objects

Module VII: Accusative prepositions

Accusative propositions with their use
Both theoretical and figurative use

Module VIII: Dialogues

Dialogue reading: ‘In the market place’
‘At the Hotel’

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch
• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1,2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH – II

Course Code: BCH 246 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire more vocabulary, grammar, Verbal Phrases to understand simple
texts and start describing any person or object in Simple Present Tense.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of earlier modules.

Module II
Some more AR/ER/IR verbs. Introduction to root changing and irregular AR/ER/IR ending verbs

Module III
More verbal phrases (eg, Dios Mio, Que lastima etc), adverbs (bueno/malo, muy, mucho, bastante,
poco).
Simple texts based on grammar and vocabulary done in earlier modules.

Module IV
Possessive pronouns

Module V
Writing/speaking essays like my friend, my house, my school/institution, myself….descriptions of
people, objects etc, computer/internet related vocabulary

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español, En Directo I A
• Español Sin Fronteras
 JAPANESE - II

Course Code: BCH 247 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse in the language with the help of basic particles and be able to define the
situations and people using different adjectives.

Course Contents:
Module I: Verbs
Transitive verbs, intransitive verbs

Module II: More prepositions

More particles, articles and likes and dislikes.

Module III: Terms used for instructions

No parking, no smoking etc.

Module IV: Adverbs

Different adverbial expression.

Module V: Invitations and celebrations

Giving and receiving presents,
Inviting somebody for lunch, dinner, movie and how to accept and refuse in different ways

Module VI: Comprehension’s

Short essay on Family, Friend etc.

Module VII: Conversations

Situational conversations like asking the way, At a post office, family

Module VIII: Illness

Going to the doctor, hospital etc.

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the language describing above-mentioned topics.

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments.
➢ Use of library, visiting and watching movies in Japan and culture center every Friday at 6pm.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5
C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – II

Course Code: BCH 248 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
Chinese is a tonal language where each syllable in isolation has its definite tone (flat, falling,
rising and rising/falling), and same syllables with different tones mean different things. When
you say, “ma” with a third tone, it mean horse and “ma” with the first tone is Mother. The
course aims at familiarizing the student with the basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin,
the language of Mainland China. The course aims at training students in practical skills and
nurturing them to interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Drills
Practice reading aloud
Observe Picture and answer the question.
Tone practice.
Practice using the language both by speaking and by taking notes.
Introduction of basic sentence patterns.
Measure words.
Glad to meet you.
Module II
Where do you live?
Learning different colors.
Tones of “bu”
Buying things and how muchit costs?
Dialogue on change of Money.
More sentence patterns on Days and Weekdays.
How to tell time. Saying the units of time in Chinese. Learning to say useful phrases like –
8:00, 11:25, 10:30 P.M. everyday, afternoon, evening, night, morning 3:58, one hour, to begin,
to end ….. etc.
Morning, Afternoon, Evening, Night.
Module III
Use of words of location like-li, wais hang, xia
Furniture – table, chair, bed, bookshelf,.. etc.
Description of room, house or hostel room.. eg what is placed where and how many things are
there in it?
Review Lessons – Preview Lessons.
Expression ‘yao”, “xiang” and “yaoshi” (if).
Days of week, months in a year etc.
I am learning Chinese. Is Chinese difficult?
Module IV
Counting from 1-1000
Use of “chang-chang”.
Making an Inquiry – What time is it now? Where is the Post Office?
Days of the week. Months in a year.
Use of Preposition – “zai”, “gen”.
Use of interrogative pronoun – “duoshao” and “ji”.
“Whose”??? Sweater etc is it?
Different Games and going out for exercise in the morning.
Module V
The verb “qu”
Going to the library issuing a book from the library
Going to the cinema hall, buying tickets
Going to the post office, buying stamps
Going to the market to buy things.. etc
Going to the buy clothes …. Etc.
Hobby. I also like swimming.
Comprehension and answer questions based on it.
Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5
C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice
Text & References:
• “Elementary Chinese Reader Part I” Lesson 11-20
 CORPORATE ACCOUNTING - I

Course Code: BCH 301 Credit

Units: 04
Course Objective:
This course enables the students to develop awareness about Corporate Accounting in conformity
with the Provision of Companies’ Act and latest amendments thereto with adoption of Accounting
Standards that are likely to be introduced from time to time.

Course Contents:
Module I
Statutory records to be maintained by a company, Accounting standards - relevance and significance;
national and international accounting standards.

Module II
Accounting for share capital transactions - issue of shares at par, at premium and at discount;
forfeiture and re-issue of shares; buy-back of shares; redemption of preference shares - statutory
requirements, disclosure in balance sheet; rights issue.

Module III
Issue of debentures - accounting treatment and procedures; redemption of debentures; conversion of
debentures into shares.

Module IV
Underwriting of shares -Meaning – Terms used in underwriting – underwriter – marked application –
unmarked application – partial underwriting, profits prior to incorporation; treatment of preliminary
expenses.– calculation of underwriting commission – Preparation of statement showing allocation of
gross liability and net liability. SEBI guidelines for Underwriting.

Module V
Accounting treatment for amalgamation, absorption and reconstruction of companies; internal and
external reconstruction.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• S.N. Maheswari, Financial Accounting

• Narayanaswamy, Financial Accounting
• SP Iyengar, Advanced Accountancy
• RL Gupta, Advanced Accountancy
• Jain and Narang, Corporate Accounting
• Tulsian, Advanced Accounting
 COST ACCOUNTING - I

Course Code: BCH 302 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
To get an expert knowledge in the area of cost management and cost control to enable
effective management decisions.

Course Contents:
Module I: Cost Accounting
Introduction – Meaning of Cost, costing and Cost Accounting – Comparison between Financial
Accounts and Cost Accounts – Application of Cost Accounting – Designing and installing a
Cost Accounting system – Cost concepts and Classification of Costs – Cost Module – Cost
Center – Elements of Cost – Preparation of cost sheet – Tenders and Quotations – Problems.

Module II: Material Costing

Classification of materials – Material Control – Purchasing procedure – store keeping –
techniques of Inventory control – Setting of stock levels – EOQ- ABC Analysis– Methods of
pricing materials issues – LIFO – FIFO – Weighted Average Method – Simple Average Method –
Problems.

Module III: Labour Costing

Control of labour cost – Labour Turn Turnover – Causes and effects of labour turnover –
Meaning of Time and Motion Study, Merit Rating, Job Analysis, Time keeping and Time
booking – Idle time, causes and treatment – Overtime – Methods of Wage Payment, Time rate
and Piece Rate – Incentive Schemes – Halsey Premium Plan – Rowan Bonus Plan – Taylor’s
and Merrick’s differential piece rate systems – Problems.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• N.K. Prasad: Cost Accounting

• Nigam & Sharma: Cost Accounting
• Khanna Pandey & Ahuja: Practical Costing
• M.L. Agarwal: Cost Accounting
• Jain & Narang: Cost Accounting
• S.P. Iyengar: Cost Accounting
• S.N. Maheshwari: Cost Accounting
• Horngren: Cost Accounting: A Managerial Emphasis
• M. N. Arora: Cost Accounting
• Dutta: Cost Accounting
 MICROECONOMIC THEORY AND APPLICATIONS – III

Course Code: BCH 303 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to acquaint the student with various market structures within which a
firm operates. The Course also deals with long –term decision-making and market efficiency.

Course Contents:
Module I: Monopoly Market Structure
Kinds of monopoly, Monopolist’s decision and equilibrium. Shifts in demand curve and the absence of
the supply curve. Measurement of monopoly power and the rule of thumb for pricing. Horizontal and
vertical integration of firms. Comparison of pure competition and monopoly. The social costs of
monopoly power. Price discrimination, Peak-load pricing.

Module II: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly

Monopolistic competition price and output decision-equilibrium. Monopolistic Competition
and economic efficiency, Oligopoly and Interdependence – Cournot’s duopoly model, Kinked
demand model. Prisoner’s dilemma, collusive oligopoly – price-leadership model – dominant
firm, cartels, sales maximization, Pricing Public Utilities.

Module III: Perfect Competition

Assumptions, Price and Output decision. Equilibrium of the firm and the industry in the short
run and long runs, including industry’s long run supply, Producer Surplus. Demand-supply
analysis. Stability Analysis- Walrasian and Marshallian.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Baunol, William J., “Economic Theory and Operations Analysis”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi.
• H.L. Ahuja, Microeconomics
• Browning E.K., & J.M. Browning, “Microeconomic Theory and Applications”, Kalyani
Publishers, New Delhi.
• Gould, J.,P., & E.P Lazer, “Microeconomics Theory”, All India Traveller Bookseller, New
Delhi
• Lipsey, R.G., and K.A Chrystal, “Principles of Economics”, Oxford University Press.
• Maddala G.S., and E.Miller, “Microeconomics: Theory and Applications” McGraw-Hall
International.
• Salvatore, D., “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Microeconomics Theory”,
McGraw-Hill, International Edition.
 BUSINESS STATISTICS

Course Code: BBM 301 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
To provide basic understanding of quantitative tools and their elementary application to
business problems.

Course Contents:

Module I: Basics of Statistics & Measures of Central Tendency

Definitions, Functions of Statistics, Statistics and Computers, Limitation of Statistics, Graphic
Representation of Data, Measure of central tendency- Mean, Median and Mode for Grouped
and ungrouped data. Combined- Mean.

Module II: Measures of Dispersion

Measures of dispersion; Range, Mean Deviation, Standard deviation, coefficient of variation,
Quartile. Deviation, skew ness and kurtosis, Difference between these measures and their
interpretation

Module III: Correlation and Regression

Correlation: simple, coefficient of correlation-Karl Pearson and Rank correlation partial and
Multiple correlation Analysis, Regression analysis Estimation of regression line in a bivariate
distribution - Least squares method, interpretation of regression coefficients.

Examination Scheme:
Components Mid term HA//C/V EE
Weightage (%) 15 5 70

Text & References:

• Allen, R.G.D, Mathematical Analysis for Economics, Macmillan Press, London.
• Black, J. and J.F. Bradley, Essential Mathematics for Economics, John Wiley and Sons.
• Chiang, A.C, Fundamental Method of Mathematical Economics, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
• Croxton, F.E., D.J. Cowden and S. Klein, Applied General Statistics, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.
• Gupta, S.C. and V.K. Kapoor, Fundamentals of Applied Statistics, S.Chand and Sons, New
Delhi.
• Speigal, M.R, Theory and Problems of Statistics, McGraw-Hill Book, London.
 CORPORATE LAWS - I
Course Code: BCL 325 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
To develop an understanding of the regulation of registered companies and to provide
thorough understanding of the various provisions of the Indian Company Law

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Administration of Company Law [including National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT), Appellate
Tribunal (NCLAT), Brief history of company law, Definition and characteristics & Types of
companies, Lifting of Corporate Veil, Exemption and privileges to private companies.

Module II: Promotion and Incorporation

Promotion & incorporation of companies, duties and liabilities of promoters,
on-line registration of a company
Module III: MoA, AoA and Prospectus
Memorandum of Association and its alteration, articles of association and its
alteration, Prospectus, Shelf prospectus, Red herring prospectus, Borrowing
Power, Mortgages & charges
Module IV: Directors of Company
Directors- Classification of directors, additional, alternate and adhoc director; women
directors, independent director, small shareholders’ director; director identity number (DIN);
appointment, powers & legal position, removal, duties and rights

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• M.C. Shukla & Gulshan: Principles of Company Law.

• N.D. Kapoor: Company Law and Secretarial Practice.
• M.C. Bhandari: Guide to Company Law Procedures.
• Tuteja: Company Administration and Meetings.
• S.C. Kuchehal: Company Law and Secretarial Practice.
• Dr. P.N. Reddy and H.R. Appanaiah: Essentials of Company Law and Secretarial Practice,
Himalaya Publishers.

INCOME TAX LAW AND PRACTICE - I

Course Code: BCL 326 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To prepare the students with the concepts and theory of income tax accounting and to give a
practical exposure to them

Course Contents:
Module I
Brief History of Income Tax, Legal Frame work, Cannons of Taxation – Finance Bill – Scheme of
Income Tax. Definition: Assessee, Person, assessment year, previous year, income, Gross Total
Income, Total Income, Agricultural Income (including integration of Agricultural Income with Non-
Agriculture Income).
Revenue and Capital (a) Receipts (b) Expenditure (c) Loss.

Module II
Residential Status and Incidence of Tax.
Exempted Incomes U/S 10 (Restricted to Individual Assessees) : fully exempted and partly exempted
incomes - including problems on House Rent Allowance, Leave Encashment, Commutation of
Pension, Death-cum-Retirement benefits, Gratuity, compensation received on termination of the
service.

Module III
Income from Salary – Features of Salary Income – Basic Salary – Allowance, Perquisites section
89(1) – Tax Rebate U/S 89(1) & Deductions under 80(c) – Problems.

Module IV
Income From House Property - Basis of Charge – Deemed Owners – Exempted Incomes from House
Property –Composite Rent - Annual Value – Determination of Annual Value – Treatment of Unrealized
Rent – Loss due to Vacancy – Deductions from Annual Value – Problems on Income from House
Property.

SKILL DEVELOPMENT
1. Form No.26 AS, 49A (PAN) and 49B.
2. Filling of Income Tax Returns.
3. List of enclosures to be made along with IT returns (with reference to salary & H.P).
4. Preparation of Form 16.
 5. Computation of Income Tax and the Slab Rates.
6. Computation of Gratuity

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Dr. Vinod K. Singhania: Direct Taxes – Law and Practice, Taxmann publication.
• B.B. Lal: Direct Taxes, Konark Publisher (P) ltd.
• Bhagwathi Prasad: Direct Taxes – Law and Practice, Wishwa Prakashana.
• Dr. Mehrotra and Dr. Goyal: Direct Taxes – Law and Practice, Sahitya Bhavan Publication.
• Dinakar Pagare: Law and Practice of Income Tax, Sultan Chand and sons.
• Gaur & Narang: Income Tax.

E - COMMERCE
Course Code: BCH 307 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The subject will provide students with the knowledge to cover wide-ranging aspects of conducting business on
the Internet.

Course Contents:

Module I: E-Commerce Concept

Meaning, definition, concept, features, function of E-Commerce, E-Commerce practices v/s traditional
practices, scope and basic models of E-Commerce, limitations of E-Commerce, precaution for secure
E-Commerce, proxy services. Concept of EDI, difference between paper based Business and EDI
Based business, Advantages of EDI, Application areas for EDI, Action plan for Implementing EDI,
Factors influencing the choice of EDI, Software Concept of Electronic Signature, Access Control.
Management issues relating to e-commerce. Meaning of B2C, B2B, C2C, P2P, Ethical Issues in E
commerce

Module II: Types of E-Commerce Applications of B2C

Consumers’ shopping procedure on the internet; Online travel tourism services; Benefits and Impact
of e-commerce on travel industry; Online stock trading and its benefits; Online banking and its
benefits; Online financial services and their future; Instant Paid payment system- Debit card, direct
debit. Prepaid payment system- Electronic cash, digicash, Netcash, cybercash, smart cards
E-Auction Applications in B2C- E-Banking, E-Trading. - Introduction and overview of these concepts.
Application of B2B- E-distributor, B2B service provider, benefits of B2B on Procurement,
Just in time delivery. Consumer to consumer and peer to peer business model Introduction and basic
concepts.

Module III: E-Marketing Applications in B2B

Traditional Marketing V/S E-Marketing, Impact of Ecommerce on markets Architectural models of
b2b;Characteristics of the supplier-oriented marketplace, Buyer-oriented marketplace, and
Intermediary-oriented marketplace; Benefits of b2b on procurement reengineering; Marketing issue in
E-Marketing, Promoting your E-Business.Direct marketing, one to one marketing.

Module IV: E-Finance Applications in Governance,

E-government;E-governance – applications of the internet;Concept of government-to-business,
business-to-government and citizen-to-government; E-governance models;
Areas of E-Financing, E-Banking, traditional v/s E-Banking, operations in E-Banking. E-Trading- Stock
marketing, trading v/s E-Trading, Importance of E-Trading, Advantages of E-trading, operational
aspects of E-Trading.

Module V: E-Payment Emerging Business Models

Retail model; Media model; advisory model, Made-to-order manufacturing model; Do-it-yourself
model; Information service model; Emerging hybrid models; Emerging models in India.
Transactions through Internet, Requirements of E-Payment system, Post paid payment system-
Credit card solutions, cyber cash Internet cheques. Instant Paid payment system- Debit card, direct
debit. Prepaid payment system- Electronic cash, digicash, Netcash, cybercash, smart cards.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Computer Today, S. Bansundara

• E-Commerce: The Cutting Edge of Business, Kamblesh Bajaj and Debjani Nag, McGraw
Hill
• E-Commerce, S. Jaiswal
 Annexure’ CD-01’

UG: Semester III L T P/ SW/F TOTAL

Course Title: Effective Written Communication / S W CREDIT
Communication Skills-III UNITS
Credit Units: 1 1 0 0 0 1
Course Code: BCU 341
Course Objective:
To emphasize the essential aspects of effective written communication necessary for
professional success.
Prerequisites: NIL

Course Contents / Syllabus:

1. Module I Principles of Effective Writing 35%
Weightage
• Spellings-100 Most Misspelled Words in English
• Web Based Writing
• Note Taking: Process & Techniques
2. Module II Formal Letter Writing 35%
Weightage
• Block Format
• Types of Letters
• E-mail
• Netiquette
3. Module III Business Memos 20%
• Format & Characteristics Weightage
4. Module IV Short Stories 10%
Weightage
• Stench of Kerosene-Amrita Pritam
• A Flowering Tree-A.K. Ramanujan
• The Gift of the Magi- O. Henry
• A Fly in Buttermilk-James Baldwin

Student Learning Outcomes:

5. The students should be able to write correctly and properly
with special reference to Letter writing.
6. Pedagogy for Course Delivery:
• Workshop
• Group Discussions
• Presentations
• Lectures
 Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
Theory L/T (%) Lab/Practical/Studio (%) End Term
Examination
100% NA 70%
7.

Theory Assessment (L&T):

Components End Term
(Drop down) ClE Mid Sem Attendance Examination

Weightage 10% 15% 5% 70%

(%)

Text: Rai, Urmila & S.M. Rai. Business Communication, Mumbai: Himalaya Publishing House,
2002.
K.K.Sinha, Business Communication, Galgotia Publishing Company.
Reference: Sanjay Kumar & Pushp Lata, Communication Skills, Oxford University Press.

Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals

 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - III

Course Code: BSU 343 Credit Units:

01
Course Objective:
To enable the students:
• Understand the process of problem solving and creative thinking.
• Facilitation and enhancement of skills required for decision-making.
Course Contents:

Module I: Thinking as a tool for Problem Solving (2 Hours)

• What is thinking: The Mind/Brain/Behavior
• Critical Thinking and Learning:
- Making Predictions and Reasoning
- Memory and Critical Thinking
- Emotions and Critical Thinking
• Thinking skills
Module II: Hindrances to Problem Solving Process (2 Hours)
• Perception
• Expression
• Emotion
• Intellect
• Work environment
Module III: Problem Solving (2 Hours)
• Recognizing and Defining a problem
• Analyzing the problem (potential causes)
• Developing possible alternatives
• Evaluating Solutions
• Resolution of problem
• Implementation
• Barriers to problem solving:
- Perception
- Expression
- Emotion
- Intellect
- Work environment
Module IV: Plan of Action (2 Hour)
• Construction of POA
• Monitoring
• Reviewing and analyzing the outcome
Module V: Creative Thinking (2 Hours)
• Definition and meaning of creativity
• The nature of creative thinking
- Convergent and Divergent thinking
- Idea generation and evaluation (Brain Storming)
- Image generation and evaluation
- Debating
• The six-phase model of Creative Thinking: ICEDIP model
Suggested Readings:

• Michael Steven: How to be a better problem solver, Kogan Page, New Delhi, 1999
• Geoff Petty: How to be better at creativity; Kogan Page, New Delhi, 1999
• Richard Y. Chang and P. Keith, Kelly: Wheeler Publishing, New Delhi, 1998.
• Phil Lowe Koge Page: Creativity and Problem Solving, New Delhi, 1996
• J William Pfeiffer (ed.) Theories and Models in Applied Behavioural Science, Vol 3,
Management (1996); Pfeiffer & Company
• Bensley, Alan D.: Critical Thinking in Psychology – A Unified Skills Approach, (1998),
Brooks/Cole Publishing Company.
 FRENCH
Course Code: FLU 344 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To provide the students with the know-how
• To master the current social communication skills in oral and in written.
• To enrich the formulations, the linguistic tools and vary the sentence construction without
repetition.

Course Contents:
Module B: pp. 76 – 88 Unité 6

Module C: pp. 89 to103 Unité 7

Contenu lexical: Unité 6: se faire plaisir

3. acheter : exprimer ses choix, décrire un objet (forme, dimension,
poids et matières) payer
4. parler de la nourriture, deux façons d’exprimer la quantité,
commander un repas au restaurant
3. parler des différentes occasions de faire la fête

Unité 7: Cultiver ses relations

3. maîtriser les actes de la communication sociale courante
(Salutations, présentations, invitations, remerciements)
4. annoncer un événement, exprimer un souhait, remercier,
s’excuser par écrit.
3. caractériser une personne (aspect physique et caractère)
Contenu grammatical:
1. accord des adjectifs qualificatifs
2. articles partitifs
3. Négations avec de, ne…rien/personne/plus
4. Questions avec combien, quel…
5. expressions de la quantité
6. ne…plus/toujours - encore
7. pronoms compléments directs et indirects
8. accord du participe passé (auxiliaire « avoir ») avec
l’objet direct
9. Impératif avec un pronom complément direct ou indirect
10. construction avec « que » - Je crois que/ Je pense que/ Je
sais que

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Campus: Tome 1

 GERMAN - III

Course Code: BCH 345 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of
grammar, which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic
opportunities available in Germany

Course Contents:
Module I: Modal verbs
Modal verbs with conjugations and usage
Imparting the finer nuances of the language

Module II: Information about Germany (ongoing)

Information about Germany in the form of presentations or “Referat”– neighbors, states and
capitals, important cities and towns and characteristic features of the same, and also a few other
topics related to Germany.

Module III: Dative case

Dative case, comparison with accusative case
Dative case with the relevant articles
Introduction to 3 different kinds of sentences – nominative, accusative and dative

Module IV: Dative personal pronouns

Nominative, accusative and dative pronouns in comparison

Module V: Dative prepositions

Dative preposition with their usage both theoretical and figurative use

Module VI: Dialogues

In the Restaurant,

At the Tourist Information Office,

A telephone conversation

Module VII: Directions

Names of the directions
Asking and telling the directions with the help of a roadmap

Module VIII: Conjunctions

To assimilate the knowledge of the conjunctions learnt indirectly so far

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5
C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch

• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1,2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH – III

Course Code: BCH 346 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire knowledge of the Set/definite expressions (idiomatic expressions) in
Spanish language and to handle some Spanish situations with ease.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of earlier semester modules
Set expressions (idiomatic expressions) with the verb Tener, Poner, Ir….
Weather

Module II
Introduction to Gustar…and all its forms. Revision of Gustar and usage of it

Module III
Translation of Spanish-English; English-Spanish. Practice sentences.
How to ask for directions (using estar)
Introduction to IR + A + INFINITIVE FORM OF A VERB

Module IV
Simple conversation with help of texts and vocabulary
En el restaurante
En el instituto
En el aeropuerto

Module V
Reflexives

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español, En Directo I A
• Español Sin Fronteras -Nivel Elemental
 JAPANESE - III

Course Code: BCH 347 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse in the language with the help of basic verbs and to express themselves
effectively and narrate their everyday short encounters. Students are also given projects on Japan and
Japanese culture to widen their horizon further.
Note: The Japanese script is introduced in this semester.

Course Contents:
Module I: Verbs
Different forms of verbs: present continuos verbs etc

Module II
More Adverbs and adverbial expressions

Module III: Counters

Learning to count different shaped objects,

Module IV: Tenses

Past tense, Past continuous tense.

Module V: Comparison
Comparative and Superlative degree

Module VI: Wishes and desires

Expressing desire to buy, hold, possess. Usage in negative sentences as well.
Comparative degree, Superlative degree.

Module VII: Appointment

Over phone, formal and informal etc.

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the language and can describe themselves and situations effectively
➢ They also gain great knowledge in terms of Japanese lifestyle and culture, which help them at
the time of placements.

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments.
➢ Use of library, visiting and watching movies in Japan and culture center every Friday at 6pm.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – III

Course Code: BCH 348 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
Foreign words are usually imported by translating the concept into Chinese, the emphasis is
on the meaning rather than the sound. But the system runs into a problem because the
underlying name of personal name is often obscure so they are almost always transcribed
according to their pronciation alone. The course aims at familiarizing the student with the
basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin, the language of Mainland China. The course
aims at training students in practical skills and nurturing them to interact with a Chinese
person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Drills
Dialogue practice
Observe picture and answer the question.
Introduction of written characters.
Practice reading aloud
Practice using the language both by speaking and by taking notes.
Character writing and stroke order
Module II
Measure words
Position words e.g. inside, outside, middle, in front, behind, top, bottom, side, left, right,
straight.
Directional words – beibian, xibian, nanbian, dongbian, zhongjian.
Our school and its different building locations.
What game do you like?
Difference between “hii” and “neng”, “keyi”.
Module III
Changing affirmative sentences to negative ones and vice versa
Human body parts.
Not feeling well words e.g. ; fever, cold, stomach ache, head ache.
Use of the modal particle “le”
Making a telephone call
Use of “jiu” and “cal” (Grammar portion)
Automobiles e.g. Bus, train, boat, car, bike etc.
Traveling, by train, by airplane, by bus, on the bike, by boat.. etc.
Module IV
The ordinal number “di”
“Mei” the demonstrative pronoun e.g. mei tian, mei nian etc.
use of to enter to exit
Structural particle “de” (Compliment of degree).
Going to the Park.
Description about class schedule during a week in school.
Grammar use of “li” and “cong”.
Comprehension reading followed by questions.
Module V
Persuasion-Please don’t smoke.
Please speak slowly
Praise – This pictorial is very beautiful
Opposites e.g. Clean-Dirty, Little-More, Old-New, Young-Old, Easy-Difficult, Boy-Girl, Black-
White, Big-Small, Slow-Fast … etc.
Talking about studies and classmates
Use of “it doesn’t matter”
Enquiring about a student, description about study method.
Grammar: Negation of a sentence with a verbal predicate.
Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice
Text & References:
• “Elementary Chinese Reader Part I, Part-2” Lesson 21-30
TERM PAPER

Course Code: BCH 330 Credit

Units: 03

METHODOLOGY
A term (or research) paper is primarily a record of intelligent reading in several sources on a
particular subject.
The students will choose the topic at the beginning of the session in consultation with the
faculty assigned. The progress of the paper will be monitored regularly by the faculty. At the
end of the semester the detailed paper on the topic will be submitted to the faculty assigned.
The evaluation will be done by Board of examiners comprising of the faculties.

GUIDELINES FOR TERM PAPER

The procedure for writing a term paper may consists of the following steps:
6. Choosing a subject
7. Finding sources of materials
8. Collecting the notes
9. Outlining the paper
10. Writing the first draft
11. Editing & preparing the final paper

1. Choosing a Subject
The subject chosen should not be too general.

2. Finding Sources of materials

a) The material sources should be not more than 10 years old unless the nature of the paper is
such that it involves examining older writings from a historical point of view.
b) Begin by making a list of subject-headings under which you might expect the subject to be
listed.
c) The sources could be books and magazines articles, news stories, periodicals, scientific
journals etc.

3. Collecting the notes

Skim through sources, locating the useful material, then make good notes of it, including quotes
and information for footnotes.
a) Get facts, not just opinions. Compare the facts with author's conclusion.
b) In research studies, notice the methods and procedures, results & conclusions.
c) Check cross references.

4. Outlining the paper

a) Review notes to find main sub-divisions of the subject.
b) Sort the collected material again under each main division to find sub-sections for outline
so that it begins to look more coherent and takes on a definite structure. If it does not, try going
back and sorting again for main divisions, to see if another general pattern is possible.

5. Writing the first draft

Write the paper around the outline, being sure that you indicate in the first part of the paper what
its purpose is. You may follow the following:
a) statement of purpose
b) main body of the paper
c) statement of summary and conclusion
Avoid short, bumpy sentences and long straggling sentences with more than one main ideas.
6. Editing & Preparing the final Paper
g) Before writing a term paper, you should ensure you have a question which you attempt to
answer in your paper. This question should be kept in mind throughout the paper. Include only
information/ details/ analyses of relevance to the question at hand. Sometimes, the relevance
of a particular section may be clear to you but not to your readers. To avoid this, ensure you
briefly explain the relevance of every section.
h) Read the paper to ensure that the language is not awkward, and that it "flows" properly.
i) Check for proper spelling, phrasing and sentence construction.
j) Check for proper form on footnotes, quotes, and punctuation.
k) Check to see that quotations serve one of the following purposes:
(iv) Show evidence of what an author has said.
(v) Avoid misrepresentation through restatement.
(vi) Save unnecessary writing when ideas have been well expressed by the original author.
l) Check for proper form on tables and graphs. Be certain that any table or graph is self-
explanatory.

Term papers should be composed of the following sections:

8) Title page
9) Table of contents
10) Introduction
11) Review
12) Discussion & Conclusion
13) References
14) Appendix
Generally, the introduction, discussion, conclusion and bibliography part should account for a
third of the paper and the review part should be two thirds of the paper.

Discussion
The discussion section either follows the results or may alternatively be integrated in the results
section. The section should consist of a discussion of the results of the study focusing on the
question posed in the research paper.

Conclusion
The conclusion is often thought of as the easiest part of the paper but should by no means be
disregarded. There are a number of key components which should not be omitted. These include:
e) summary of question posed
f) summary of findings
g) summary of main limitations of the study at hand
h) details of possibilities for related future research

References
From the very beginning of a research project, you should be careful to note all details of articles
gathered.
The bibliography should contain ALL references included in the paper. References not included in
the text in any form should NOT be included in the bibliography.
The key to a good bibliography is consistency. Choose a particular convention and stick to this.

Bibliographical conventions
Monographs
Crystal, D. (2001), Language and the internet. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Edited volumes
Gass, S./Neu, J. (eds.) (1996), Speech acts across cultures. Challenges to communication in a
second language. Berlin/ NY: Mouton de Gruyter.
[(eds.) is used when there is more than one editor; and (ed.) where there is only one editor. In
German the abbreviation used is (Hrsg.) for Herausgeber].

Edited articles
Schmidt, R./Shimura, A./Wang, Z./Jeong, H. (1996), Suggestions to buy: Television commercials
from the U.S., Japan, China, and Korea. In: Gass, S./Neu, J. (eds.) (1996), Speech acts across
cultures. Challenges to communication in a second language. Berlin/ NY: Mouton de Gruyter:
285-316.

Journal articles
McQuarrie, E.F./Mick, D.G. (1992), On resonance: A critical pluralistic inquiry into advertising
rhetoric. Journal of consumer research 19, 180-197.

Electronic book
Chandler, D. (1994), Semiotics for beginners [HTML document]. Retrieved [5.10.'01] from the
World Wide Web, http://www.aber.ac.uk/media/Documents/S4B/.

Electronic journal articles

Watts, S. (2000) Teaching talk: Should students learn 'real German'? [HTML document]. German
as a Foreign Language Journal [online] 1. Retrieved [12.09.'00] from the World Wide Web,
http://www.gfl-journal.com/.

Other websites
Verterhus, S.A. (n.y.), Anglicisms in German car advertising. The problem of gender assignment
[HTML document]. Retrieved [13.10.'01] from the World Wide Web,
http://olaf.hiof.no/~sverrev/eng.html.

Unpublished papers
Takahashi, S./DuFon, M.A. (1989), Cross-linguistic influence in indirectness: The case of English
directives performed by native Japanese speakers. Unpublished paper, Department of English as
a Second Language, University of Hawai'i at Manoa, Honolulu.

Unpublished theses/ dissertations

Möhl, S. (1996), Alltagssituationen im interkulturellen Vergleich: Realisierung von Kritik und
Ablehnung im Deutschen und Englischen. Unpublished MA thesis, University of Hamburg.
Walsh, R. (1995), Language development and the year abroad: A study of oral grammatical
accuracy amongst adult learners of German as a foreign language. Unpublished PhD
dissertation, University College Dublin.

Appendix
The appendix should be used for data collected (e.g. questionnaires, transcripts, ...) and for
tables and graphs not included in the main text due to their subsidiary nature or to space
constraints in the main text.

Assessment Scheme:
Continuous Evaluation: 40%
(Based on abstract writing, interim draft, general approach,
research orientation, readings undertaken etc.)

Final Evaluation: 60%

(Based on the organization of the paper, objectives/
problem profile/ issue outlining, comprehensiveness of the
research, flow of the idea/ ideas, relevance of material used/
presented, outcomes vs. objectives, presentation/ viva etc.)

CORPORATE ACCOUNTING - II
Course Code: BCH 401 Credit
Units: 04
Course Objective:
This course enables the students to develop awareness about Corporate Accounting in conformity
with the Provision of Companies’ Act and latest amendments thereto with adoption of Accounting
Standards that are likely to be introduced from time to time.

Course Contents:
Module I
Preparation and presentation of final accounts of joint stock companies as per company law
requirements; provisions and reserves; determination of managerial remuneration; appropriation out
of profits; transfer of profits to reserves; payment of dividend, transfer of unpaid dividend to Investor
Education and Protection Fund; bonus shares and payment of interest out of capital.

Module II
Holding and subsidiary companies - accounting treatment and disclosures; consolidation of accounts.

Module III
Valuation of goodwill and shares
Good will - Meaning – Definition – Elements of goodwill – Types of Goodwill – Purchased Goodwill –
Nonpurchased or inherent Goodwill – Valuation of Non-purchased Goodwill – Average Profit Method
– Super Profit Method – Capitalization of Average Profit Method – Capitalization of Super Profit
Method – annuity method Shares - Meaning – need for valuation – factors affecting valuation –
methods of valuation – Asset Backing or Intrinsic Value Method –Yield Valuation Method – Dividend
Yield –Fair Value method – value of right shares – valuation of preference shares.

Module IV
Final accounts of banking companies, insurance companies and electricity companies.

Module V: Liquidation
Voluntary Liquidation – Preparation of Liquidator’s Statement of affairs – order of payment - Calculation of
commission on Assets Realized – payment to unsecured creditors – payment to Unsecured creditors other than
preferential creditors – calculation of pro rata- treatment of uncalled Capital – liability of contributors.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• S.N. Maheswari, Financial Accounting

• Narayanaswamy, Financial Accounting
• SP Iyengar, Advanced Accountancy
• RL Gupta, Advanced Accountancy
• Jain and Narang, Corporate Accounting
• Tulsian, Advanced Accounting
 COST ACCOUNTING – II

Course Code: BCH 402 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
To get an expert knowledge in the area of cost management and cost control to enable
effective management decisions.
Course Contents:

Module I: Overhead Costing

Definition – Classification of overheads – Procedure for accounting and control of overheads –
Allocation of overheads – Apportionment of Service department costs to production
departments – Repeated Distribution method – Simultaneous equation method – absorption of
OH’s – Methods of Absorption – Percentage of direct material cost – Direct Labour Cost –
Prime Cost, Direct Labour hour rate and Machine Hour Rate – Problems.

Module II: Costing Methods

Costing Methods Introduction - Job Costing – Batch Costing – Contract Costing- Process
Costing – principles – distinction between Process and Job – Preparation of process accounts
– treatment of normal loss – abnormal loss – abnormal gain – Joint and By-products. Service
costing.

Module III: Marginal costing and Break-Even Analysis

Concept of Marginal Costs and Marginal Costing: Assumptions of Marginal Costing; Marginal
Costing vs Absorption Costing; Advantages and Limitations of Marginal Costing; Break Even
Analysis: Break-Even Point, Margin of safety, Angle of Incidence.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• N.K. Prasad: Cost Accounting

• Nigam & Sharma: Cost Accounting
• Khanna Pandey & Ahuja: Practical Costing
• M.L. Agarwal: Cost Accounting
• Jain & Narang: Cost Accounting
• S.P. Iyengar: Cost Accounting
• S.N. Maheshwari: Cost Accounting
• Horngren: Cost Accounting: A Managerial Emphasis
• M. N. Arora: Cost Accounting
• Dutta: Cost Accounting
 MICROECONOMIC THEORY AND APPLICATIONS – IV

Course Code: BCH 4 03 Credit Units:

03

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to acquaint the student with various market structures within which a firm
operates. The Course also deals with long –term decision-making and market efficiency.

Course Contents:
Module I: Market for factor Inputs
Determination of factor rewards in perfect inputs markets in the short & long runs under
conditions of perfect and imperfect commodity markets. Determination of factor rewards under
conditions of monopoly, monopolistic and monopolistic exploitation. Role of trade unions. Rental
element in factor remuneration. Government intervention in factor market. Direct or through
regulatory agency.

Module II: Inter-temporal Analysis and Choice under Uncertainty

Intertemporal choice – stocks versus flows, present discounted values, capital investment
decisions, investment decisions by consumers, determination of interest rates. Risk, preferences
towards risk, reducing risk.

Module- III General Equilibrium and Welfare Economics

Partial and general equilibrium -2x2x2 model of general equilibrium- New Welfare Economics-
Compensation criteria of Hicks, Kaldor. -Arrow‘s impossibility theorem -Sen‘s theory of welfare
-Rawls‘ welfare concept -Easterlin Paradox

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Baunol, William J., “Economic Theory and Operations Analysis”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi.
• H.L. Ahuja, Microeconomics
• Browning E.K., & J.M. Browning, “Microeconomic Theory and Applications”, Kalyani
Publishers, New Delhi.
• Gould, J.,P., & E.P Lazer, “Microeconomics Theory”, All India Traveller Bookseller, New Delhi
• Lipsey, R.G., and K.A Chrystal, “Principles of Economics”, Oxford University Press.
• Maddala G.S., and E.Miller, “Microeconomics: Theory and Applications” McGraw-Hall
International.
• Salvatore, D., “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Microeconomics Theory”,
McGraw-Hill, International Edition.
 STATISTICAL METHODS IN RESEARCH

Course Code: BCM 401 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
To provide basic understanding of quantitative tools and their elementary application to business
problems.

Course Contents:

Module I: Time Series and index Numbers

Time series analysis-concept and components Determination of regular, trend and seasonal
indices; index number’s - concept, price relative, quantity relative, value relative; Lapeer’s
Paasche’s and Fisher, Family budget method; problems in the construction and limitations of
index numbers Tests for ideal index number.

Module II: Probability Theory

Independent, Dependent, Mutually Exclusive, Favourable, Exhaustive & Complementary events,
Addition theorem, Conditional Probability, multiplication Theorem, Bayes’ Theorem.

Module III: Decision Tree

Decision Theory: Decision making, under certainty, uncertainty & risk, Bayesian Analysis,
Decision tree.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT A/C/Q Attd. EE
Weightage (%) 10 15 5 70
CT: Class Test, A/C/Q: Assignment/Class Test/Quiz, Attd.: Attendance, EE: End
Semester Exam.

Text & References:

• Fundamentals of Business Statistics by J.K. Sharma

• Business Statistics by S.P. Gupta & M.P. Gupta
• Theory and Problems of Statistics by M.R. Spiegel
• Fundamentals of Applied Statistics by S.C. Gupta and V.K. Kapoor
• Introduction to Probability by J.L. Snell
 CORPORATE LAWS – II

Course Code: BCL 425 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
To develop an understanding of the regulation of registered companies and to provide thorough
understanding of the various provisions of the Indian Company Law

Module I: Company Meetings

Company Meetings-kinds, Conduction of a valid meeting, quorum, voting, resolutions & minutes,
postal ballot, meeting through video conferencing and e-voting.

Module II: Dividends

Dividends - Dividend to Equity & Preference shareholders, Rules regarding dividends, Declaration
of Dividend out of Reserves, Rules regarding unpaid or unclaimed dividend

Module III: Auditing

Audit of Limited Companies-Company Auditor-appointment, powers, duties & liabilities, auditor’s
report.

Module IV: Winding up of Company & Corporate Governance

Types of winding up, Grounds for winding up by court, Appointment, Duties & Powers of official
Liquidator , Manner of voluntary winding up, Consequences & types of voluntary winding up, role
and importance of corporate governance.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• M.C. Shukla & Gulshan: Principles of Company Law.

• N.D. Kapoor: Company Law and Secretarial Practice.
• M.C. Bhandari: Guide to Company Law Procedures.
• Tuteja: Company Administration and Meetings.
• S.C. Kuchehal: Company Law and Secretarial Practice.
• Dr. P.N. Reddy and H.R. Appanaiah: Essentials of Company Law and Secretarial Practice,
Himalaya Publishers.
 INCOME TAX LAW AND PRACTICE – II

Course Code: BCL 426 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To prepare the students with the concepts and theory of income tax accounting and to give a
practical exposure to them

Course Contents:
Module I: Profits & Gains of Business & Profession
Profits & Gains of Business & Profession – Introduction, Basic Principles, Basic Principles, Computation
of Taxable profits of Business & Profession (except assessment of companies), deductions, problems.

Module II: Income from Capital Gains

Income from Capital Gains- Introduction, Meaning & types of capital assets, Computation of Capital
Gains, Exemptions, Problems.

Module III: Income from other sources

Income from other sources including receipt without consideration, winnings from lotteries, cross word
puzzles ,horse races and card games etc, computation of interest on securities and dividend and
permissible deductions from income from other sources .
Permissible deductions from gross total income,(Under section 80C to 80U)

Module IV Set-Off & Carry Forward of Losses and Assessment of Individuals

Set off carry forward losses, assessment of individuals- Advance payment of tax. Income tax authorities.
Appeal, revision and penalties

Module V: Introduction to Goods and Services Tax (GST)

Meaning, scope and significance of GST; principles of subsumation and taxes
subsumed; classification of goods and services and GST rates. Basic
terminologies- CGST/SGST, IGST. Input Tax Credit, Transitional Provisions,
Electronic Commerce, HSN Code

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Dr. Vinod K. Singhania: Direct Taxes – Law and Practice, Taxmann publication.
• B.B. Lal: Direct Taxes, Konark Publisher (P) ltd.
• Bhagwathi Prasad: Direct Taxes – Law and Practice, Wishwa Prakashana.
• Dr. Mehrotra and Dr. Goyal: Direct Taxes – Law and Practice, Sahitya Bhavan Publication.
• Dinakar Pagare: Law and Practice of Income Tax, Sultan Chand and sons.
• Gaur & Narang: Income Tax.
• Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta, Direct Tax Law – Theory & Practice, Bharat Law House, New
Delhi
• Abhishek Rastogi: Professionals guide to GST Ideation to reality (2017)
• Rakesh Garg & Sandeep Garg, HSN code wise GST Tariff, Bloomsbury India Professional (July
2017)

AUDITING

Course Code: BCH 407 Credit Units:

03

Course Objective:
To provide knowledge of auditing principles, procedures and techniques in accordance with the
professional standards and requirements.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to Auditing
Introduction to auditing Introduction – meaning - definition – difference between accountancy and auditing – types
of audit –statutory audit, Internal audit, Cost audit, Tax audit and Management audit, advantages of auditing –
preparation before commencement of new audit
Special areas in Audit/ other thrust areas in audit- Social audit, Environment audit. Efficiency audit

Module II: Internal Check and Control

Internal check Meaning and objects of internal check – internal control-meaning definition-fundamental
Principles-internal check as regards wages, cash sales, cash purchases - Internal control in Computerized
Environment, ICQ- Concept and Preparation, Internal check in a departmental stores-internal audit – meaning-
importance – advantage and disadvantages.

Module III: Verification and Valuation

Verification and valuation of assets and liabilities: Meaning and objectives – position of an auditor as
regards to the valuation of assets – verification and valuation of different items – assets –fixed assets -
goodwill – stock in trade – investments – liabilities – capital – debentures – bills payable sundry creditors
– contingent liabilities –

Module IV: Audit Report

Audit of different organizations drafting of audit program or trading and non-trading organization in a tabular
form. Preparation of clean and qualified audit report with special reference to manufacturing and other Companies
Audit Report 1975.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• TR Sharma, Auditing.
• BN Tandon, Practical Auditing.
• MS Ramaswamy, Principles and Practice of Auditing.
• Dinakar Pagare, Practice of Auditing.
• Kamal Gupta, Practical Auditing.
• P N Reddy & Appannaiah, Auditing.
• Shekar, Auditing.
• Pradeep Kumar, Auditing.

Annexure’ CD-01’
UG: Semester IV
Course Title:Communication Skills-IV L T P/ SW/F TOTAL
Credit Units: 1 S W CREDIT
Course Code: BCU 441 UNITS
1 0 0 0 1
Course Objective:

This course is designed to develop the skills of the students in preparing job
search artifacts and negotiating their use in GDs and interviews.
Prerequisites: NIL
Course Contents / Syllabus:
1. Module I Employment-Related Correspondence 35% Weightage
• Resume Writing
• Covering Letters
• Follow Up Letters
2. Module II Dynamics of Group Discussion 35% Weightage
• Significance of GD
• Methodology & Guidelines
3. Module III Interviews 20% Weightage
• Types & Styles of Interviews
• Fundamentals of facing Interviews
• Interview-Frequently Asked Questions
4. Module IV Short Stories 10% Weightage
• Proof of the Pudding - O. Henry
• “The Lottery” 1948 – Shirley Jackson
• The Eyes Have it- Ruskin Bond
• Kallu- Ismat Chughtai
All the four stories will be discussed in one class.
One Long Question will be set in the Exam from the Text.
Student Learning Outcomes:
5. • Develop a resume for oneself

• Ability to handle the interview process confidently

• Learn the subtle nuances of an effective group discussion
6. Pedagogy for Course Delivery:
 • Workshop
• Group Discussions
• Presentations
• Lectures
7. Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
Theory L/T Lab/Practical/Studio (%) End Term
(%) Examination
100% NA 70%

Theory Assessment (L&T):

Components CIE Attendance End Term
(Drop down) Examination

Weightage 25% 5% 70%

(%)

Text: Sharma, R.C. & Krishna Mohan. Business Correspondence and Report Writing: A Practical
approach to Business & Technical Communication, New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill & Co. Ltd., 2002.
Rai, Urmila & S.M. Rai. Business Communication, Mumbai: Himalaya Publishing House,
2002.
Rizvi, M.Ashraf. Effective Technical Communication, New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
Reference: Brusaw, Charles T., Gerald J. Alred & Walter E. Oliu. The Business Writer’s Companion,
Bedford: St. Martin’s Press, 2010.
Lewis, Norman. How to Read Better and Faster. New Delhi: Binny Publishing House.
Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals
 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - IV

Course Code: BSU 443

Credit Units: 01
Course Objective:
To inculcate an elementary level of understanding of group/team functions
To develop team-spirit and to know the importance of working in teams

Course Contents:

Module I: Group formation

Definition and Characteristics
Importance of groups
Classification of groups
Stages of group formation
Benefits of group formation
Module II: Group Functions
External Conditions affecting group functioning: Authority, Structure, Org. Resources,
Organizational policies etc.
Internal conditions affecting group functioning: Roles, Norms, Conformity, Status, Cohesiveness,
Size, Inter group conflict.
Group Cohesiveness and Group Conflict
Adjustment in Groups
Module III: Teams
Meaning and nature of teams
External and Internal factors effecting team
Building Effective Teams
Consensus Building
Collaboration
Module IV: Leadership
Meaning, Nature and Functions
Self leadership
Leadership styles in organization
Leadership in Teams
Module V: Power to empower: Individual and Teams
Meaning and Nature
Types of power
Relevance in organization and Society
Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal
Viva based on personal journal
Assessment of Behavioural change as a result of training
Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer
Examination Scheme:
Components SAP A JFS End Term
 Written Exam
Weightage (%) 15 05 20 60
SAP: Social Awareness Programme, A: Attendance, JFS: Journal for Success

Text & References:

• Organizational Behaviour, Davis, K.
• Hoover, Judhith D. Effective Small Group and Team Communication, 2002,Harcourt College
Publishers
• Dick, Mc Cann & Margerison, Charles: Team Management, 1992 Edition, viva books
• LaFasto and Larson: When Teams Work Best, 2001, Response Books (Sage), New Delhi
• Smither Robert D.; The Psychology of Work and Human Performance, 1994, Harper Collins
College Publishers
 FRENCH

Course Code: FLU 444 Credit Units:

02

Course Objective:
To enable students:
• To develop strategies of comprehension of texts of different origin
• To present facts, projects, plans with precision

Course Contents:
Module C: pp. 104 – 139 : Unités 8,9

Contenu lexical : Unité 8: Découvrir le passé

4. parler du passé, des habitudes et des changements.
5. parler de la famille, raconter une suite
d’événements/préciser leur date et leur durée.
6. connaître quelques moments de l’histoire

Unité 9: Entreprendre
7. faire un projet de la réalisation: (exprimer un besoin,
préciser les étapes d’une réalisation)
4. parler d’une entreprise
5. parler du futur

Contenu grammatical: 1. Imparfait

8. Pronom « en »
9. Futur
10. Discours rapporté au présent
11. Passé récent
12. Présent progressif

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Campus: Tome 1

 GERMAN - IV

Course Code: BCH 445 Credit Units:

02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of
grammar, which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic
opportunities available in Germany.
Introduction to Advanced Grammar Language and Professional Jargon

Course Contents:
Module I: Present perfect tense
Present perfect tense, usage and applicability
Usage of this tense to indicate near past
Universal applicability of this tense in German

Module II: Letter writing

To acquaint the students with the form of writing informal letters.

Module III: Interchanging prepositions

Usage of prepositions with both accusative and dative cases
Usage of verbs fixed with prepositions
Emphasizing on the action and position factor

Module IV: Past tense

Introduction to simple past tense
Learning the verb forms in past tense
Making a list of all verbs in the past tense and the participle forms

Module V: Reading a Fairy Tale

Comprehension and narration
Rotkäppchen
Froschprinzessin
Die Fremdsprache

Module VI: Genitive case

Genitive case – Explain the concept of possession in genitive
Mentioning the structure of weak nouns

Module VII: Genitive prepositions

Discuss the genitive propositions and their usage: (während, wegen, statt, trotz)

Module VIII: Picture Description

Firstly recognize the persons or things in the picture and identify the situation depicted in the
picture;
Secondly answer questions of general meaning in context to the picture and also talk about the
personal experiences which come to your mind upon seeing the picture.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice
Text & References:
• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch
• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1,2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH - IV

Course Code: BCH 446 Credit Units:

02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire working knowledge of the language; to give them vocabulary,
grammar, voice modulations/intonations to handle everyday Spanish situations with ease.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of earlier semester modules
Introduction to Present Continuous Tense (Gerunds)

Module II
Translation with Present Continuous Tense
Introduction to Gustar, Parecer, Apetecer, doler

Module III
Imperatives (positive and negative commands of regular verbs)

Module IV
Commercial/business vocabulary

Module V
Simple conversation with help of texts and vocabulary
En la recepcion del hotel
En el restaurante
En la agencia de viajes
En la tienda/supermercado

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español Sin Fronteras (Nivel – Elemental)

 JAPANESE - IV

Course Code: BCH 447 Credit

Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to comfortably interact using basic Japanese.
Note: Teaching is done in roman as well as Japanese script, students will be taught katankana (another form
of script) in this semester i.e. to be able to write all the foreign words in Japanese.

Course Contents:
Module I
Comparison using adjectives, Making requests

Module II
Seeking permission

Module III
Practice of conversations on:
Visiting people, Party, Meetings, After work, At a ticket vending machine etc

Module IV
Essays, writing formal letters

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the language describing above-mentioned topics.

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments, role-plays.
➢ Students are also encouraged to attend Japanese film festival and other such fairs and workshops
organized in the capital from time to time.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – IV

Course Code: BCH 448 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
How many characters are there? The early Qing dynasty dictionary included nearly 50,000
characters the vast majority of which were rare accumulated characters over the centuries. An
educate person in China can probably recognize around 6000 characters. The course aims at
familiarizing the student with the basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin, the language of
Mainland China. The course aims at training students in practical skills and nurturing them to
interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Dialogue Practice
Observe picture and answer the question
Pronunciation and intonation
Character writing and stroke order.
Electronic items

Module II
Traveling – The Scenery is very beautiful
Weather and climate
Grammar question with – “bu shi …. Ma?”
The construction “yao … le” (Used to indicate that an action is going to take place)
Time words “yiqian”, “yiwai” (Before and after).
The adverb “geng”.

Module III
Going to a friend house for a visit meeting his family and talking about their customs.
Fallen sick and going to the Doctor, the doctor examines, takes temperature and writes
prescription.
Aspect particle “guo” shows that an action has happened some time in the past.
Progressive aspect of an actin “zhengzai” Also the use if “zhe” with it.
To welcome someone and to see off someone …. I cant go the airport to see you off… etc.

Module IV
Shipment. Is this the place to checking luggage?
Basic dialogue on – Where do u work?
Basic dialogue on – This is my address
Basic dialogue on – I understand Chinese
Basic dialogue on – What job do u do?
Basic dialogue on – What time is it now?

Module V
Basic dialogue on – What day (date) is it today?
Basic dialogue on – What is the weather like here.
Basic dialogue on – Do u like Chinese food?
Basic dialogue on – I am planning to go to China.
Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• “Elementary Chinese Reader, Part-2” Lesson 31-38

MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING – I

Course Code: BCH 501 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
To provide the students knowledge about the use of costing data for planning, control and
decision making.

Course Contents:

Management Accounting
Module I:

Nature & Scope: Meaning and Definition - Objectives of Management Accounting -

Management Accounting and Financial Accounting - Management Accounting and Cost Accounting -
Utility of Management Accounting - Limitations of Management Accounting - Position of Management
Accountant in the Organisation.

Module II: Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements -

I
Concept of Financial Statements and their Nature - Limitations of Financial Statements - Analysis and
Interpretation - Tools - Comparative Financial Statements - Common size Statements - Trend
Percentages

Module III: Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements -

II
Ratio Analysis - Nature and Interpretation - Utility and Limitations of Ratios - Short-term Financial Ratios -
Long-term Financial Ratios - Profitability Ratios - Proprietary and Yield Ratios - Turnover Ratios -
DUPONT Control Chart

Module IV: Funds Flow Analysis

Concept of Funds - Sources and Uses of Funds - Concept of Flow - Funds Flow Statement -
Managerial Uses of Funds Flow Analysis - Construction of Funds Flow Statements
Practical:
Use of various software packages to obtain different Management Accounting outputs like: (i)
Fund Flow Statement, (ii) Ratio Analysis

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Dr. S.N. Maheswari , Management Accounting
• Sexana, Management Accounting
• Made Gowda, Management Accounting
• Dr. S.N. Goyal and Manmohan, Management Accounting
• B.S. Raman, Management Accounting
• R.S.N. Pillai and Bagavathi, Management Accounting
• Sharma and Gupta, Management Accounting
• J. Batty, Management Accounting
• Foster, Financial Statement Analysis, Pearson.
• PN Reddy & Appanaiah, Essentials of Management Accounting.

MACRO ECONOMICS
Course Code: BCH 502 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
To provide the basic knowledge of macro economic concepts.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction to Macroeconomics

The roots of macroeconomics, macroeconomic concerns, the role of government in the
macro economy, the components of the macro economy, the methodology of
macroeconomics

Module II: Introduction to National Income Accounting

Concepts of GDP and national income, approaches to calculating GDP, GDP and
personal income, Nominal and real GDP, Limitations of the GDP concept, GDP and the
black economy.

Module III: Schools of Macroeconomic Thoughts

Classical, Neo Classical and Keynesian Models.; Say’s Law of Markets and Classical
Theory of Employment

Module IV: Keynesian Model

Aggregate expenditure and equilibrium output; Consumption function; theory of
investment-marginal efficiency of capital; saving and investment; The Investment
Multiplier and its application to LDC’s

Module V: Money in the Modern Economy

Theories of Demand for Money: Quantity Theory and Keynes approach. Baumol and
Tobin Contributions and Friedman’s restatement of quantity theory Characteristics of a
monetary economy; the supply of money and overall liquidity position; credit creation

Module VI: Inflation

The causes of inflation, level of prices and the value of money, The Fisher effect, the cost
of inflation.

Examination Scheme:
 Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• D.N. Devedi, Macroeconomics

• I.C. Dhingra, Macroeconomics, Sultan Chand & Sons.
• E. Shapiro, Macro Economic Analysis, Harcourt Barce, New York.
• G. Ackley, Macro Economic Theory, Mc. Graw Hill, New York.
• R.L. Miller and R.W. Pullinelli, Modern Money and Banking, Mc. Graw Hill.
• A.K. Basu, Fundamentals of Banking: Theory and Practice.
• Reserve Bank of India, Functions and working of R.B.I.

OPERRATIONS RESEARCH

Course Code: BBM 501 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:
The objective of this paper is to make students familiar with basic concept and tools in
Operations Research. These techniques assist in solving complex problems and help in decision
making.
Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Introduction to Operations Research, Definition, scope
and limitations of Operations Research
Module II: Linear Programming
Linear Programming – Basic Concepts, Model
formulation; Solution methods – Graphical Solution
method, Simplex method (problems involving only upto 3
constraints and of inequality <), Application of LPP in
business decision making.
Module III: Transportation Problem
Transportation problem- Initial Basic feasible solution
(North West corner rule, Vogel’s approximation method),
Test for optimality (The Modified Distribution (MODI)
method)
Module IV: Assignment Problem
Assignment Problem – Introduction, Approach of the
Assignment model, Solution Methods (Hungarian
method)
 Module V: Game Theory
Game Theory- Concept and definition; Solution methods
of Pure Strategy games (with saddle point), Significance
of Game Theory.
Module VI: Queuing & Simulation
Introduction, Elementary queuing system, Introduction to
Single – channel queuing model (with Poisson arrivals
and Exponential service times), (no numerical);
Introduction to Simulation, applications, advantages and
drawbacks of simulation, Introduction to Monte – Carlo
Simulation, Role of computers in Simulation
Examination Scheme:
Components A CT C/HS/Q EE
Weightage (%) 5 15 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Kapoor V K, Operations Research (Techniques for Management), Seventh edition, Sultan Chand & Sons.

References:
• Sharma J K, Operations Research (Theory & Practices), Second edition, Macmillan India Ltd.
• Hamdy A Taha, Operations Research, Seventh edition, Prentice Hall India
• Kothari C R, An introduction to Operations Research, Third edition, Vikas Publishing House
 Annexure’ CD-01’
UG : Semester V
Course Title : Communication Skills-V
Credit Units: 1 L T P/ SW/F TOTAL
Course Code: BCU 541 S W CREDIT
Course Objective: UNITS
1 0 0 0 1
• To enable the students to adopt strategies for effective reading and
writing skills.
• The course would enhance student’s vocabulary, language and
fluency. It would also teach the students to deliver professional
presentations.
Prerequisites: NIL
Course Contents / Syllabus:
1. Module I Vocabulary 35%
Weightage
• Define Vocabulary
• Significance of Vocabulary
• One Word Substitution, Synonyms & Antonyms and
Idioms &
Phrases
• Define and Differentiate Homonyms, Homophones and
 Homographs
• Vocabulary Drills
• Foreign Words
2. Module II Comprehension Skills 25%
Weightage
• Reading Comprehension-SQ3R Reading
Techniques
• Summarising and Paraphrasing
• Précis Writing
• Listening Comprehension
3. Module III Presentation Skills 30%
• Discussing the Significance of Audio-visual Aids, Weightage
Audience and Feedback in Presentation Skills
• Analyzing the Significance of Non-Verbal
Communication
4. Module IV Prose 10%
• How Far is the River-Ruskin Bond Weightage
• My Wood-E.M.Forster
• I have a Dream-Martin Luther King
• Spoken English and Broken English-G.B. Shaw
5. Student Learning Outcomes:
• Communicate fluently and sustain comprehension of an extended
discourse.
• Demonstrate ability to interpret texts and observe the rules of good
writing.
• Prepare and present effective presentations aided by ICT tools.
Pedagogy for Course Delivery: Workshop
6.
• Group Discussions
• Presentations
• Lectures
7. Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
Theory L/T Lab/Practical/Studio (%) End Term
(%) Examination
100% NA 70%

Theory Assessment (L&T):

Components End Term
(Drop down) CIE Attendance Examination

Weightage
(%) 25% 5% 70%

Text: Jaffe, C.I. Public Speaking: Concepts and Skills for a Diverse Society, 4th ed. Belmont, CA:
Wadsworth, 2004.
Effective English for Engineering Students, B Cauveri, Macmillan India
Creative English for Communication, Krishnaswamy N, Macmillan
Reference: A Textbook of English Phonetics, Balasubramanian T, Macmillan

Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals

 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - V
Course Code: BSU 543 Credit Units:
01
Course Objective:
This course aims at enabling students towards:
Understand the importance of individual differences
Better understanding of self in relation to society and nation
Facilitation for a meaningful existence and adjustment in society
To inculcate patriotism and National pride.
To enhance personal and professional excellence
Course Contents:
Module I: Individual differences & Personality
Personality: Definition& Relevance
Importance of nature & nurture in Personality Development
Importance and Recognition of Individual differences in Personality
Accepting and Managing Individual differences (Adjustment Mechanisms)
Intuition, Judgment, Perception & Sensation (MBTI)
BIG5 Factors
Module II: Socialization
Nature of Socialization
Social Interaction
Interaction of Socialization Process
Contributions to Society & Nation
Module III: Patriotism and National Pride
Sense of Pride and Patriotism
Importance of Discipline and hard work
Integrity and accountability

Module IV: Human Rights, Values and Ethics

Meaning of Human Rights
Human Rights Awareness
Importance of human rights
Values and Ethics- Learning based on project work on Scriptures like Ramayana,
Mahabharata, Gita etc

Module V: Personal and Professional Excellence

Personal excellence:
Identifying Long-term choices and goals
Uncovering talent, strength and style
Alan P. Rossiter’s eight aspects of Professional Excellence
Resilience during challenge and loss
Continued Reflection (Placements, Events, Seminars, Conferences, Projects,
Extracurricular Activities, etc.)
Text & References:
• Bates, A. P. and Julian, J.: Sociology - Understanding Social Behaviour
• Dressler, David and Cans, Donald: The Study of Human Interaction
• Lapiere, Richard. T – Social Change
• Rose, G.: Oxford Textbook of Public Health, Vol.4, 1985.
• Robbins O.B.Stephen;. Organizational Behaviour
 FRENCH

Course Code: FLU 544 Credit Units:

02

Course Objective:
To furnish some basic knowledge of French culture and civilization for understanding an authentic
document and information relating to political and administrative life

Course Contents:
Module D: pp. 131 – 156 Unités 10,11

Contenu lexical : Unité 10: Prendre des décisions

1. Faire des comparaisons
2. décrire un lieu, le temps, les gens, l'ambiance
3. rédiger une carte postale

Unité 11: faire face aux problèmes

5. Exposer un problème.
6. parler de la santé, de la maladie
7. interdire/demander/donner une autorisation
8. connaître la vie politique française

Contenu grammatical:
5. comparatif - comparer des qualités/ quantités/actions
6. supposition : Si + présent, futur
7. adverbe - caractériser une action
8. pronom "Y"

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Campus: Tome 1

 GERMAN - V

Course Code: BCH 545 Credit Units:

02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of
grammar, which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic
opportunities available in Germany
Introduction to Advanced Grammar and Business Language and Professional Jargon

Course Contents:
Module I: Genitive case
Genitive case – Explain the concept of possession in genitive
Mentioning the structure of weak nouns

Module II: Genitive prepositions

Discuss the genitive propositions and their usage: (während, wegen, statt, trotz)

Module III: Reflexive verbs

Verbs with accusative case
Verbs with dative case
Difference in usage in the two cases

Module IV: Verbs with fixed prepositions

Verbs with accusative case
Verbs with dative case
Difference in the usage of the two cases

Module V: Texts
A poem ‘Maxi’
A text Rocko

Module VI: Picture Description

Firstly recognize the persons or things in the picture and identify the situation depicted in the
picture;
Secondly answer questions of general meaning in context to the picture and also talk about the
personal experiences which come to your mind upon seeing the picture.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch

• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1,2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH - V

Course Code: BCH 546 Credit Units:

02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire working knowledge of the language; to give them vocabulary,
grammar, voice modulations/intonations to handle everyday Spanish situations with ease.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of earlier semester modules

Module II
Future Tense

Module III
Presentations in English on
Spanish speaking countries’
Culture
Sports
Food
People
Politics
Society
Geography

Module IV
Situations:
En el hospital
En la comisaria
En la estacion de autobus/tren
En el banco/cambio

Module V
General revision of Spanish language learnt so far.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español Sin Fronteras, Greenfield

 JAPANESE - V

Course Code: BCH 547 Credit

Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write language comfortably and be able to converse using
different patterns and forms taught through out. Students are taught and trained enough to get placed
themselves in Japanese companies.
Note: Teaching is done in roman as well as Japanese script.

Course Contents:
Module I
Dictionary form of the verbs, Joining of verbs
Negative form of verbs
Potential form

Module II
Joining of many actions together
Usage of dictionary form of the verbs in sentences
Introducing colloquial language.

Module III
Direct form of the speech, quotations,
Expressing thoughts
Actions and reasoning

Module IV
Conclusion
Receiving and giving things, favour etc.
Different forms like ‘tara’ form.

Module V
Revision of the whole syllabus

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak and use different patterns, ways to describe a particular situation and
can converse comfortably in mentioned situations through out.
➢ Students can appear in the interviews for placements in Japanese companies.

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Teaching will be supported by handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments and role
plays.
➢ Use of library, visiting and watching movies in Japan and culture center every Friday at 6pm.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – V

Course Code: BCH 548 Credit

Units: 02

Course Objective:
What English words come from Chinese? Some of the more common English words with
Chinese roots areginseng, silk, dim sum, fengshui, typhoon, yin and yang, T’al chi, kung-fu.
The course aims at familiarizing the student with the basic aspects of speaking ability of
Mandarin, the language of Mainland China. The course aims at training students in practical
skills and nurturing them to interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Drills
Dialogue practice
Observe picture and answer the question.
Pronunciation and intonation.
Character writing and stroke order

Module II
Intonation
Chinese foods and tastes – tofu, chowmian, noodle, Beijing duck, rice, sweet, sour….etc.
Learning to say phrases like – Chinese food, Western food, delicious, hot and spicy, sour,
salty, tasteless, tender, nutritious, god for health, fish, shrimps, vegetables, cholesterol is not
high, pizza, milk, vitamins, to be able to cook, to be used to, cook well, once a week, once a
month, once a year, twice a week……
Repetition of the grammar and verbs taught in the previous module and making dialogues
usingit.
Compliment of degree “de”.

Module III
Grammar the complex sentence “suiran … danshi….”
Comparison – It is colder today than it was yesterday…..etc.
The Expression “chule….yiwai”. (Besides)
Names of different animals.
Talking about Great Wall of China
Short stories

Module IV
Use of “huozhe” and “haishi”
Is he/she married?
Going for a film with a friend.
Having a meal at the restaurant and ordering a meal.

Module V
Shopping – Talking abut a thing you have bought, how much money you spent on it? How
many kinds were there? What did you think of others?
Talking about a day in your life using compliment of degree “de”. When you get up? When do
you go for class? Do you sleep early or late? How is Chinese? Do you enjoy your life in the
hostel?
Making up a dialogue by asking question on the year, month, day and the days of the week
and answer them.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• “Elementary Chinese Reader ” Part-II Lesson 39-46
 SUMMER INTERNSHIP

Course Code: BCH 550 Credit

Units: 06

GUIDELINES FOR INTERNSHIP FILE

There are certain phases of every Intern’s professional development that cannot be effectively
taught in the academic environment. These facets can only be learned through direct, on-the-
job experience working with successful professionals and experts in the field. The internship
program can best be described as an attempt to institutionalise efforts to bridge the gap
between the professional world and the academic institutions. Entire effort in internship is in
terms of extending the program of education and evaluation beyond the classroom of a
university or institution. The educational process in the internship course seeks out and
focuses attention on many latent attributes, which do not surface in the normal class room
situations. These attributes are intellectual ability, professional judgment and decision making
ability, inter-disciplinary approach, skills for data handling, ability in written and oral
presentation, sense of responsibility etc.

In order to achieve these objectives, each student will maintain a file (Internship File). The
Internship File aims to encourage students to keep a personal record of their learning and
achievement throughout the Programme. It can be used as the basis for lifelong learning and
for job applications. Items can be drawn from activities completed in the course modules and
from the workplace to demonstrate learning and personal development.

The File will assess the student’s analytical skills and ability to present supportive evidence,
whilst demonstrating understanding of their organization, its needs and their own personal
contribution to the organization.

The layout guidelines for the Internship File:

• A4 size Paper
• font: Arial (10 points) or Times New Roman (12 points)
• line spacing: 1.5
• top and bottom margins: 1 inch/ 2.5 cm; left and right margins: 1.25 inches/ 3 cm

The File will include five sections in the order described below. The content and
comprehensiveness of the main body and appendices of the report should include the
following:

1. The Title Page--Title - An Internship Experience Report For (Your Name), name of internship
organization, name of the Supervisor/Guide and his/her designation, date started and
completed, and number of credits for which the report is submitted.
2. Table of Content--an outline of the contents by topics and subtopics with the page number
and location of each section.
3. Introduction--short, but should include how and why you obtained the internship experience
position and the relationship it has to your professional and career goals.
4. Main Body--should include but not be limited to daily tasks performed. Major projects
contributed to, dates, hours on task, observations and feelings, meetings attended and their
purposes, listing of tools and materials and their suppliers, and photographs if possible of
projects, buildings and co-workers.
5. Appendices--include pamphlets, forms, charts, brochures, technical and descriptive
literature, graphs and other information related to your Internship experience.

The Main Body will have three sections and will include the following items which will be
evaluated for the final assessment:-

4. An analysis of the company/organization in which the student is working

5. A personal review of the student’s management skills and how they have been
developed through the programme.
6. The research report that the student has prepared on the project assigned to him by the
organization. (Incase a student is not assigned a specific research project in the
organization, he has to select any one aspect of the organization and prepare a
research report on it).
ASSESSMENT OF THE INTERNSHIP FILE
The student will be provided with the Student Assessment Record (SAR) to be placed in front
of the Internship File. Each item in the SAR is ticked off when it is completed successfully. The
faculty will also assess each item as it is completed. The SAR will be signed by the student
and by the faculty to indicate that the File is the student’s own work. It will also ensure
regularity and meeting the dealines.
STUDENT ASSESSMENT RECORD (SAR)

Management File Item Criteria for successful completion of the item

1. Analysis of organization • Clear presentation of ideas and analysis
(1500- 2000 words) • Provides an organizational diagram, following
organization presentation conventions
• Analysis covers the organization’s:
➢ Business strategy and mission
➢ Structure
➢ Resources and assets
➢ Current financial performance
➢ Leadership/decision-making style
➢ Staffing and skill base
➢ Products/services and customers
2. Personal review of • Clear presentation of ideas and analysis
Management • Demonstrate awareness of own management skills
skills development • Presents critical analysis of own management
(1000-1500 words) effectiveness, supported with examples
• Provides evidence of development of specific
management skills e.g. strategic, financial, leadership
• Explains how new skills and learning have benefited the
organization and self
3. Design of Research Project • Clear presentation of ideas and analysis
(1500- 2000 words) • Justifies the choice of subject for the research project and
why this might be beneficial to the organization
• Selects and justifies appropriate research methods for the
project
• Demonstrate understanding of the key stages in
undertaking a research project
• Indicates which analytical/statistical tools would be most
appropriate and why
• The design plan takes account of the resourcing
implications of carrying out the research e.g. staffing and
other costs

Examination Scheme:
Report by Student (Internship File)
c. Organization & Presentation/Language and clarity /substance
of Contents covered and Comprehensiveness
20%
d. Research Report 30%

Industry Feedback (continuous)

20%

Presentation & Viva (At the end)

30%

Total 100%
 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT – I
Course Code: BCH 504 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To give insight into financial decision making, valuation concept, cost of capital and capital budgeting.

Course Contents:
Module I Concept of Financial Management
Financial Management- finance function – aims of finance function – financial management – goals Of
financial management – financial decisions – financial planning – objectives and principles of Sound
financial planning – long term and short term financial plan – factors affecting financial plan.

Module II Time Value of Money

Valuation Concepts: Time Value of Money – discounting and compounding techniques

Module III Cost of Capital

Cost of capital, Equity Shares, concept of WACC, Debentures, Preference Shares and retained
earnings.

Module IV Capital Budgeting and Techniques

Investment Decisions – capital budgeting – significance – techniques of evaluation of
investment Proposals- Payback Period., Discounted Payback Period, Net Present Value.,
Internal Rate of Return, Profitability Index, Illustrations on Project feasibility

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• S N Maheshwari, Financial Management.

• Khan and Jain, Financial Management.
• Dorai Raj. S.N, Financial Management.
• Sharma and Sashi Gupta, Financial Management.
• I M Pandey, Financial Management.
• James C Vanhorne, Financial Management.
• Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management.
• PN Reddy & Appanaiah, Financial Management.
 FUNDAMENTALS OF INVESTMENTS - I
Course Code: BCH 505 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To introduce students to different investment alternatives – its valuation analysis and investor
protection.

Course Contents:
Module I: The Investment Environment
The investment decision process, Types of Investments – Commodities, Real Estate and
Financial Assets, the Indian securities market, the market participants and trading of
securities, security market indices, sources of financial information, concept of risk and
return, Impact of Taxes and inflation on return.

Module II : Financial Information

Sources of Financial Information, Efficient Market Theory

Module III: Risk and Return

Total risk and its factors

Module : IV Bonds
Valuation of Fixed Income Securities- Types of Bonds, Bond Rating and Bond Price, Bond Valuation.

Module : V
Fundamental Analysis: Economic Analysis, Industry Analysis, Company Analysis, Technical Analysis

A Project on Investment (considering either Commodities, Equity, Fixed income Security, Real Estate)

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Bhalla, V.K., “Investment Management”, S. Chand & Co.

• Prasanna, Chandra, “Investment analysis and portfolio management”, Tata McGraw Hill
 FINANCIAL MARKETS, INSTITUTIONS AND FINANCIAL
SERVICES- I

Course Code: BCH 506 Credit

Units: 02

Course Objective:
To introduce students to different financial institutions, Markets and the services which are
available in India.

Course Contents:
Module I: Money Market
Call money market, Treasury bills market, Commercial bills market, Commercial papers and
certificates of deposits, Discount and Finance House of India, Government Securities Market,
Recent developments.

Module II: Capital Market

Impact of monetary policy, Industrial securities market, Primary market and Secondary market.
Nature and role of financial system: Financial system and markets, Efficiency and stability,
Technology, Government intervention in the financial system.

Module III: Mutual funds

Meaning, types, functions, advantages; Private and public sector mutual funds; Performance
and growth of mutual funds in India; SEBI guidelines.

Module IV: Factoring

The concept, significance, types; Factoring mechanism; Factoring vs. leasing; Factoring in
India and abroad; Forfeitures; Kalyanasundaram Committee recommendations. Credit card:
The concept, types, advantages and disadvantages. Credit Rating: Mechanism, Role of CRISIL
and ICRA.

Module V: Non-Banking Finance Companies

Evolution and present status. Insurance Companies: Economics of insurance, The insurance
industry and its regulation; LIC, GIC. Development finance institutions: Concept, role of DFIs,
Sources of funds, DFIs in
India, Khan Committee Report and Universal banking; Recent trends.

Module VI: Life and Non-life Insurance Organizations in India : Coverage: Insurance Regulatory
and Development Authority (IRDA) – Duties, Powers, and Functions; Life Insurance
Corporation of India (LIC) – Overview, Objectives, and Role; General Insurance Corporation of
India (GIC) – Overview, Objectives, and Functions.

Recent Trends in Financial System- financial innovations and regulatory trends, current domestic
and international issues in the financial system, such as the famous financial crisis.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Gordon and Natarajan, Financial Markets and Services, Himalaya Publishing House.
• Khan, M.Y, Financial Services, Tata McGraw Hill.
• Jeff Madura, Financial Markets and Institutions, South-Western College Publishing.
• B.C Vasant Desai, The Indian Financial System, Himalaya Publishing House.
• Bhole L.M, Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill.
 INSURANCE AND RISK MANAGEMENT - I

Course Code: BCH 507

Credit Units: 02
Course Objective:
This course enables the students to know the fundamentals of Insurance.

Course Contents:
Module I
Introduction to insurance - purpose & need of insurance - Types of Insurance - Insurance as a social
security tool - Insurance & Economic development, Fundamentals / Principles of Insurance - Primary
& Secondary Principles

Module II
Risk Management and its managerial aspects- risk management-concept, evolution, purpose, scope,
importance and its future.

Module III
Life Assurance - Meaning & significance, procedure of taking Life Insurance Policy - Policy conditions-
Types of Policies - (Whole Life Policy - Endowment Policy, Group Insurance) - Settlement of claims.

Module IV
Life Insurance Agent - Appointment of Agent - Licence Procedure - Functions of Agent. - Agent’s
compensation - code of conduct.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Mishara M. N: Insurance Principles & practice - S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
• M. Arif Khan: Theory & Practice of Insurance, Education Book House Aligarth.
• Kothari & Bahi: Principles & practice of Insurance, Shahitya Bhavan.
• Life Insurance Act of 1956
• Insurance Regulator Development Act. 1999.
• Gupta O. S: Life Insurance, Frank Brothers, New Delhi.
• Vinayakam N. Radhaswamy & Vasudevan S. V: Insurance - Principles & Practice. S. Chand
New Delhi
• Mishra M. N: Life Insurance Corporation of India Vols. - I, II & III, Raj Book, Jaipur.
 PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING - I

Course Code: BCH 508 Credit

Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the concept of marketing and its applications, also to expose the
Students to the latest trends in marketing.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Nature and scope of marketing- Importance of marketing as a business function - and in the economy
- Marketing concepts - Traditional and Modern, Selling V/S marketing - Marketing Environment.
Target Marketing and Brand Positioning.

Module II
Markets and Segmentation. Meaning of Market - Various types of markets and their characteristics.
Concept of market segmentation and its Importance - bases for market segmentation.
Case 1 - Indian Refrigerator Market

Module III
Product - concept of product - consumer and Industrial goods - product planning and development
packaging - role and functions - Brand name and Trademark - after sale service - product life cycle
concept.

Module IV
Price - Importance of price in the marketing mix, factor affecting price of a product / service. Major
Pricing Methods. Pricing Policies and strategies.

Module-V
Distribution channels - concept and role - types of distribution channels - Factors affecting choice of a
distribution channel.
Case 2 - Marketing and Distribution of Mushroom

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Philip Kotler: Marketing Management, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi.
• Dr. C. N. Sontakki: Marketing Management Kalyani Publications New Delhi.
• Marchannd & B. Vardharajan: An introduction to Marketing, Vikas Publishing House, Delhi.
• Mohammad Amanatuallh: Principles of Modern Marketing. Kalyani Publications New Delhi.
Link:
• https://fba.aiub.edu/Files/Uploads/MKT110009.pdf
 INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS - I
Course Code: BCH 509 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the concepts and various dimensions of international business.

Course Contents:
Module I: International Business
Definition evaluation, nature, international business approaches theories of International
business, problems of international business.

Module II: International Economic Environment

Business, Social, Cultural, technological, economic and political environment. International
trade policies and relations – tariffs, subsidies, import quota, voluntary export restraints,
administrative
policies, international Law and business firms.

Module III: Modes of Entering International Business

Modes of entry-exporting, licensing, Franchising, contracts, contracts of manufacturing,
management contracts, turnkey projects, mergers, acquisians. Joint ventures.

Module IV: World Trade Organization and Trade Blocks

Economic Integrations – free trade area, custom unions, common markers, economic unions,
GATT, GATS, liberalization of agriculture trade, EEC, ASEAN,SAARC,AAFTA.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Frame Works – International Business – II Edition by Roger Benneet – Financial Times

management – Pitman Publishing, London.
• International Business – Text and cases. By P. Subba Rao, Himalaya Publishing House.
 ADVERTISING AND PERSONAL SELLING - I
Course Code: BCH 510 Credit Units: 02
Course Objective:
To help students to understand the concept of advertising and personal selling used in marketing for
communicating with customers.

Course Contents:
Module I: Advertising management
Introduction & basic concepts. History of advertising; Advertising purpose and functions;
Economic, social & ethical aspects of advertising; Advertising & the marketing mix,
Advertising as a communication process; types of advertising; Major Institutions of
advertising management.

Module II
Advertising and campaign planning Marketing strategy & situation analysis; Advertising plan;
Advertising objectives; DAGMAR approach; advertising strategy; Advertising campaign-
planning process.

Module III: Creative strategy & advertising budget

Creative approaches; the art of copywriting; Advertising copy testing; creativity in
communication, motivational approaches & appeals, advertising budget process; methods of
determining advertising appropriations.

Module IV
Advertising media strategy. Role of media; types of media; their advantages and
disadvantages; media research & advertising decisions; media planning, selection &
scheduling strategies.

Module V
Advertising effectiveness & organising advertising Functions. Methods of measuring
advertising effectiveness; advertising research; structure & functions of an advertising
agency; selection & co-ordination of advertising agency; Advertising regulations; Internet
advertising.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• R. Still, W. Cundiff, A.P. Govoni, Sales Management Decisions Strategies and Cases, P.H.I, New
Delhi.
• M. Johnson, L. Kurtz, E. Scheuing, Sales Management Concepts, Practices & Cases, Mcgraw Hill
International, New York.
• W. Stern, EI-Ansary, T. Coughlan, Marketing Channels, 5th Edition, P.H.I, New Delhi.
• Guptha. S. L, Sales & Distribution Management, Excell Books, New Delhi.
 SERVICE MARKETING - I
Course Code: BCH 511 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
The course has been designed to familiarize students with characteristics of services, their
design and delivery and the complexities of handling intangibles.

Course Contents:
Module I: Services an Overview
Services: concept, characteristics. Goods v/s services.. Scope and Significance of services
marketing. Role of services sector in economy. Introduction to service marketing mix.
Services Marketing (PEST) environment. Growth of service sector. Services- Global and
Indian Scenario.

Module II: Consumer Behaviour in Services

Consumer decision making process. Consumer Expectations: Concept. Factors influencing
customer expectation of services. Service encounter and moments of truths. Service failure
and recovery. Service recovery strategies. Segmentation, Targeting, Positioning (STP) of
Services.

Module III: Service Quality & Productivity

Concept of service quality. GAP Model of service quality. Measuring and improving service
quality. Concept of productivity in service context. Approaches to improve productivity.

Module IV: Service design and development.

Challenges to services design, new service development and innovation, Developing the
service blueprint.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Team assignment: This assignment requires students to study the service quality of new service
provider, identify GAP (if any) and ways to overcome them. They need to construct the service
blueprint, accompanied by relevant photos/images, for a particular service provider.

Text & References:

Text:
• Valarie A Zeithaml and mary J Bitner, Services Marketing, Third Edition, Tata McGraw Hill
CompaniesChristopher lovelock , Service Marketing (people, technology and strategy),
2001, Fifth Edition, Pearson Education.
• Christopher lovelock , Service Marketing (people, technology and strategy), 2001, Fifth
Edition, Pearson Education.

References:
• Clow Kenneth E. and Kurtz David L. , Services marketing operations, management and
strategy, biztantra innovations in management, John Willey & Sons
• Rampal M.K., Gupta S.L., Service Marketing, 2006 Galgotia Publishing Company.
 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - I
Course Code: BCH 512 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the concept of human resource management to enable them to
better manage the most important asset of any organization which are people.

Course Contents:

Module I- HR Process
Human Resource Management – Meaning of HRM, Importance of HRM, Objectives and functions,
Process of HRM, systems and techniques, Role of human resource manager, duties and
Responsibilities of human resource manager.

Module II – HR Planning
Human Resource planning, Recruitment, Selection and Placement – Meaning and importance of
Human resource planning, benefits of human resource planning, Meaning of recruitment, selection,
Placement and training – Methods of Recruitment and selection – Uses of tests in selection, Problems
involved in placement. Induction Process & its benefits to organizations & employees.

Module III – Promotion , Transfer & Separation

Promotion and Transfers – Purpose of promotion, basis of promotion, meaning of transfer, reasons
for transfer, types of transfer, right sizing of work force. Need for right sizing. Separation (Layoff,
Discharge & VRS). Exit Interview.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Aswathappa. K, (2011), Human Resource Management - Text & Cases, (6th Edn.), McGraw
Hill, New Delhi
• Dessler G (2006). Human Resource Management, Pearson Education, India
• Mathis R L and Jackson J H (2006). Human Resource Management, (10 th Edn.) Cengage
Learning, Indian Print.
• Snell S and Bohlander G (2007). Human Resource Management, Cengage Learning
(Thomson Learning), Indian Edition
• Pattanayak B,(2014), Human Resource Management, 4th Edition , PHI
 COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT - I
Course Code: BCH 513 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the concept of compensation management and wage policies keeping
in view the labour legislations.

Course Contents:
Module I Introduction to Compensation Management
Introduction, Basic concept of compensation, classical theories on wages, establishing pay rates,
Importance of an ideal compensation plan, broad branding, Compensation plan and business
strategy, devising a compensation plan, challenges affecting Compensation.

Module II Foundations of Compensation

Job analysis, Pricing managerial and professional jobs, job evaluation, job structure. Concept of
Equity,

Module III Wage Policies

Wage Policy - Concept of wage, Wage policy in India, determinants of wage policy, Impact of income
tax on Wage and salary administration, Tools used for fixation of wages, Introduction to Executive and
International Compensation .
Module IV Pay Structure
Pay Packet - Constituents – Basic, D A, H R A, and other allowance, Perquisites. Compensation
Laws: Payment of Wages Act, Minimum Wages Act

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• A.M. Sharma, Understanding Wage System.
• N.D. Kapoor, Labour Legislation.
• C.B. Memoria, Personnel management.
• The Compensation Handbook by Lance Berger and Dorothy Berger McGrawHill Co.
 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND LABOUR LAWS - I
Course Code: BCL 524 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the importance and various aspects of industrial relations and
labour laws.

Course Contents:
Module I
Introduction to Industrial Relation Definition, Concepts, Nature of industrial relations,
Importance of industrial relations, Approaches to industrial relations, The Labour movement,
Characteristics of Indian Labour.

Module II
Indian Trade Union Movement Nature of Trade Unions, Trade Union movement in 3 stages
(First world war period – socialist Period - Communist Stage – Post Independence Stage),
Reasons for employees to join trade Unions, Problems of Trade Unions & Remedies, Trade
Union Act 1926, Trends in Trade Union Movement in India.

Module III
Collective Bargaining Meaning of collective bargaining, Concept of collective bargaining,
Prerequisites for collective bargaining, the collective bargaining process, Principles of
Collective Bargaining, Essential conditions for the success of collective bargaining, Collective
Bargaining in India.

Module IV
Grievance handling and Industrial Discipline to Maintain Effective Industrial Relations Meaning
& Concept of grievance – causes of grievance – effects of grievance - Grievance redressal
procedure, purview of Industrial Employment (standing orders) Act 1946, Discipline, Meaning
& Importance, Disciplinary Procedure and domestic enquiry.

Module V
Industrial Disputes Meaning of Industrial Conflicts, Causes of Industrial Conflicts, Types of
Industrial Conflicts - Strikes & Lockouts, Machinery for resolving Industrial Disputes under the
Industrial Disputes Act 1947, Arbitration, Adjudication, Prevention of Industrial Conflicts,
Approaches to Conflict, Settlement of Conflicts.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Davar, Personnel management and Industrial Relations.

• C.B. Memoria, Dynamics of industrial Relations in India.
• Johnson, Introduction to Industrial Relations.
• Sharma A.M, Industrial Relations.
• Biswanth Ghosh, Personnel management and Industrial Relations.
• Bhagdiwall- Flippo, Personnel management and Industrial Relations.
• Arora, Labour law.
• D. Sanjeeviah, Labour problems and Industrial Developments in India.
• Sharma A .M, Aspects of Labour welfare and social security
• Prasanna Chandra, Labour problem Social Security and Welfare.
• Punekar and Deodhan, Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism and industrial Relations.
 HUMAN RESOURCE ACCOUNTING - I
Course Code: BCH 515 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the concepts of Human resource accounting, its importance and
various methods of human resource accounting.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
The Development and State of the Art of Human Resource Accounting
Role of Human Resource Accounting
Uses for Managers and Human Resource Professionals
Uses in Corporate Financial Reporting

Module II
Accounting for Human Resource Costs
Measuring Human Resource Costs: Concepts and Methods
First-Generation Accounting Systems for Human Resource Costs
Second-Generation Accounting Systems for Human Resource Costs

Module III
Accounting for Human Resource Value
Determining Human Resource Value: Concepts and Theory
Monetary Measurement Methods
Nonmonetary Measurement Methods

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Human Resource Accounting, by Gupta, R.K.; Anmol Publications.
• Human Resource Accounting, by Saha, Malayendu; Discovery Publishing House.
• Human Resource Accounting, by Flamholtz, Eric; Kluwer Academic Publishers.
 CORPORATE TAX PLANNING - I
Course Code: BCH 516 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
The course is designed to provide knowledge of direct tax laws and their application in tax
planning of corporate entities and to develop skills of the applications of various provisions of
direct tax laws in India

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to Corporate Tax Planning
Meaning and objectives, scope of corporate tax planning, tax planning, tax avoidance and tax
evasion, types of companies, residential status of a company and tax incidence.

Module II: Taxation of companies

Computation of income under the heads of income applicable to corporate assesses, set off
and carry forward of losses, deductions available in respect of gross total income,
computation of taxable income, tax liability of a company.

Module III: Tax planning and Tax Management

Concept of Tax planning, Tax planning with reference to setting up a New Business; Location;
Nature of Business; Tax Holiday, etc. Tax Planning with regard to Specific Management
Decisions such as Mergers and Takeovers; Employees’ Remuneration; Decisions such as
Borrowing or Investment Decisions; Reorganization or Restructuring of Capital.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Lakhotia, R.N., and S.Lakhotia, Corporate Tax Planning Hand Book, Vision Books, New
Delhi.
• Vinod K. Singhania, Direct Taxes: Law and Practice, Taxmann publications, New Delhi.
• Mehrotra and Goyal, Income Tax Law and Practice, Sahitya Bhawan, Agra.
• Palkivala, N.A. and Palkivala B.A., Kanga and Palkivalaís Law & practice of Income Tax,
N.M. Tripathi.
• Datey V.S.:GST Ready Reckoner, Taxman Publication, New Delhi
• S S Gupta, GST – Law and Practice, Taxmann’s Publications, New Delhi
 COMPUTERIZED ACCOUNTING SYSTEM - I
Course Code: BCH 517 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the computerization of accounting system and the use of the software
Tally

Course Contents:
Module I: Accounting Concepts
Concepts of Accounting, Manual Vs Computerised Accounting, Golden Rule, Accounting
Equation etc.

Module II: Introduction to Tally

Introduction, Creation of Company, Introduction to Gateway of Tally, Menu, Company Info menu.

Module III: Accounts Configuration & Classification

Features & Configuration options for company maintaining accounts, Planning about organization
of Chart of Accounts, Group and Ledgers

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Implementing Tally 6.3 by A.K. Nadhani, K. K. Nadhani, BPB Pub.
• Accounting by Tally (Illustrated) by L.B.Singh & V.P.Singh, Asian Pub.
• Computerised financial accounting using tally- Rajan Chougule.
 BUSINESS DATA PROCESSING - I
Course Code: BCH 518 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the DBMS concepts with oracle as a tool.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to DBMS
Basics of Business Data Processing, Concept of Database, Table, (Relation), Attributes, Primary
Key, Foreign Key, Concept of RDBMS. Introduction to ORACLE Features, DSS, Data warehouse,
Data Mart, Web Server, Role & responsibilities of ORACLE DBA.

Module II: Introduction to SQL

Features of SQL, SQL statements ,i.e. DDL - CREATE, ALTER - ADD, MODIFY, DELETE clauses
, DML - INSERT, UPDATE, DELETE SELECT statement with WHERE, ORDER BY, GROUP BY,
HAVING Clauses, Set operations in SQL, Nested queries, GRANT and REVOKE

Module III: Functions

MAX, MIN SORT, COUNT, AVERAGE Numeric, String Functions, Conversion Functions like
TO_CHAR, TO_DATE, Date Functions.

Module IV: Introduction to PL / SQL

Difference between SQL AND PL/SQL, Block definition structure, Block Functions - %Type,
%RowType, IF…..ELSE …END IF Statement, FOR….LOOP.. END LOOP, WHILE…LOOP… END
LOOP,

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• An introduction to database:- Date C.J.

• Commercial Application Development Using Developer 2000 by Ivan Bayross.
• Structured Query Languages (SQL) By Osborne.
• SQL – Scott Urman
• Teach yourself ORACLE 8 – Ed.Whalen in 21 days.
 COMPARATIVE ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS - I
Course Code: BCH 519 Credit Units: 02
Course Objective:
To help students to understand the accounting systems and disclosure practices around the world. The
course should enable the student to make successful comparisons of international accounting systems.

Course Contents:

Module I
Context of international accounting. Introduction - The scale of differences - The importance of
comparative accounting -The nature and growth of MNEs

Module II
Causes of international differences - Introduction - External environment and culture - Legal systems
- Providers of finance- Taxation - The profession - Inflation -Theory - Accidents - Conclusion on the
causes of international differences

Module III
Major international differences in financial reporting - Introduction -Fairness -Taxation -
Conservatism and accruals - Provisions and reserves - Valuation bases - Consolidation -
Uniformity and accounting plans - Formats - Shareholder orientation of financial statements

Module IV
International classification of financial reporting - Introduction - The nature of classification -
Classifications by social scientists - Classifications in accounting - Extrinsic classifications - Intrinsic
classifications - Developments related to the Nobes - classification

Module V
Harmonization of financial reporting - Introduction - Reasons for, obstacles to and - measurement of
harmonisation - The International Accounting Standards -Committee - Other international bodies -
EU harmonization

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Comparative International Accounting, by Nobes, Christopher; Parker, R. H.; (Author) , Prentice

Hall .
 MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING – II

Course Code: BCH 601 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
To provide the students knowledge about the use of costing data for planning, control and
decision making.

Course Contents:

Module I: Cash Flow Analysis

Distinction of Cash from Funds - Utility of Cash Flow Statement - Construction of Cash Flow Statement

Module II: Budgets and Budgetary Control

Concept of Budgets and Budgetary Control - Nature and Objectives of Budgetary Control - Advantages
and Limitations of Budgetary Control - Establishing a system of Budgetary Control - Preparation of Sales
Budget, Selling and Distribution Cost Budget, Production Budget, Purchase Budget, Cash Budget etc. -
Flexible Budgets and Master Budgets.

Module III: Cost Volume Profit Analysis

Profit/volume ratio, Contribution/Sales ratio, key factor. Margin to Safety ratio, Break-even
analysis Angle of incidence, Determination of cost indifference point

Module IV: Responsibility Accounting

Concept of Responsibility Accounting - Cost Centers and Profit Centers - Contribution by Segments

Practical:
Use of various software packages to obtain different Management Accounting outputs like :(i)
Cash Flow Analysis, (ii) Preparation of different budgets, (iii) Break-even Analysis

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Dr. S.N. Maheswari , Management Accounting
• Sexana, Management Accounting
• Made Gowda, Management Accounting
• Dr. S.N. Goyal and Manmohan, Management Accounting
• B.S. Raman, Management Accounting
• R.S.N. Pillai and Bagavathi, Management Accounting
• Sharma and Gupta, Management Accounting
• J. Batty, Management Accounting
• Foster, Financial Statement Analysis, Pearson.
• PN Reddy & Appanaiah, Essentials of Management Accounting.

INDIAN ECONOMY – PERFORMANCE AND POLICIES

Course Code: BCH 602 Credit Units:

04

Course Objective:
To provide the basic knowledge of the Structure and the Current developments in the Indian
Economy.

Course Contents:
To provide the basic knowledge of macro economic concepts.

Module I: Underdeveloped country and Population Problems

Underdeveloped Economy: Meaning of Underdeveloped Economy - Basic characteristics of
Underdeveloped countries, India as on Underdeveloped country. Population problems: Its Causes
and effects on Economy - Trends of population Importance of population control.

Module II: Poverty and Unemployment

Poverty: Relative and Absolute poverty Indicators of poverty-its causes and measure of remove it.
Unemployment: Nature of Unemployment in India, its. Causes and effects, Unemployment policy.

Module III: Structure of the Indian Economy

Basic features; Natural resources - Land, Water and Forest resources; Broad demographic features -
population size and growth rates, sex composition, rural-Urban migration occupational distribution;
infrastructure development; Composition of National Income.

Module IV: Planning in India

Objectives; Strategy; Broad achievements and failures; current Five year plan objectives, allocation
and targets; New economic reforms - Liberalization, privatization and globalization; Rationale behind
economic reforms; progress of privatization and globalization.

Module V: Agriculture
Nature and importance; Trends in agricultural production and productivity; Factors determining
productivity; Land Reforms; New agricultural strategy and green revolution; Rural credit, Agricultural
marketing.

Module VI: Industry

Industrial development during the planning period; industrial policy of 1948, 1956, 1977, and 1991;
industrial licensing policy - MRTP Act, FERA and FEMA; Growth and problems of small scale
industries; Role of public sector enter prices in India’s industrialization.

Module VII: External sector

Role of foreign trade; Trends in exports and imports; composition and direction of India’s foreign
trade; Balance of payments crisis and the new economic reforms - Export promotion measures and
then new trade policies Foreign capital-FDI aid; Multinational corporations. (MNCS).

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Datt, R. and K.P.M. Sundharam, Indian Economy, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi.
• Dhingra, I.C, The Indian economy: Environment and Policy, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
• Dutt, R.C, The Economic History of India Under Early British Rule, Low Prince Publications, Delhi.
• Misra, S.K. and V.K. Puri, Indian Economy - Its Development Experience, Himalaya Publishing
House, Mumbai.

ANALYTICAL SKILL BUILDING

Course Code: BBM 601 Credit Units:

04

Course Objective:
To develop in students skills of analytical and logical reasoning which will be a
great asset for them in their future careers.

Course Contents:
Module I: Quantitative Reasoning
Number System & Number Theory, Percentage method, Profit & Loss, Speed,
Time & Distance

Module II: Quantitative Reasoning

Ratio, Proportion, Mixtures & Alligations, Set Theory, Co-ordinate Geometry (2-D
only), Mensuration

Module III: Data Interpretation

Bar Graph / Line Graph / Pie Chart / Table / Table Three Dimensional or Triangular
Bar Diagram / Misc. (Radar, Area, Network) / Caselets.

Module IV: Data Sufficiency & Logical reasoning

Mathematical / reasoning based. Data Decoding: Analytical: Assumption, Courses
of Action, Argument, Weak / Strong, Pictorial Analysis

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• The practice of Questions can be done from any reasoning book.

Annexure’ CD-01’

UG: Semester VI L T P/ SW/F TOTAL

Course Title: Communication Skills VI S W CREDIT
Credit Units: 1
UNITS
Course Code: BCU 641
1 0 0 0 1
Course Objective: The main emphasis of this course is to enable students
to learn the dynamics of social communication and to demonstrate the ability to learn the nuances of
informal communication.
Prerequisites: NIL

Course Contents / Syllabus:

1. Module I Social Communication Essentials 30% Weightage
 • Small talk
• Building rapport
• Expand social and Corporate Associations
• Informal Communication: Grapevine, Chat
2. Module II Workplace Interpersonal Skills 25% Weightage
• Understanding Social Communication in Workplace
environment.
• Employee feedback: Assess employee performance and
satisfaction.
• Simulation
➢ Humour in Communication-Use of ‘Puns’
➢ Entertainment and Communication (Infotainment)
• Infotainment and Social Media
• Entertainment in Journalism
➢ Social Networking
3. Module III Visual Code / Social Etiquette 35% Weightage
• Power Dressing
• Fine Dining
• Office Party Etiquette
• Business Travel Etiquette
➢ Work Place and Business Etiquette
• Proper Greetings
• Thank You Notes
• Telephonic Manners/ Voice Mail Etiquette
• Business Salutation Etiquette
• Guest Etiquette
• Cubicle Etiquette
• Business Card Etiquette
➢ Different Cultural Etiquette & Protocol
4. Module IV Prose 10% Weightage
• Secret of Socrates - Dale Carnegie
• My Financial Career-Stephen Leacock
• The Luncheon - W. Somerset Maugham
• The National Flag - Jawahar Lal Nehru
All the four stories will be discussed in one class
One Long Question will be set in the Exam from the Text
Student Learning Outcomes:
• To communicate contextually in specific personal and
5. professional situations with courtesy.
• To inject humour in their regular interactions.
• To strengthen their creative learning process through
individual expression and collaborative peer activities.
Pedagogy for Course Delivery:
• Workshop
6. • Group Discussions
• Presentations
• Lectures
Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
7. Theory L/T Lab/Practical/Studio End Term
(%) (%) Examination
 100% NA 70%
Theory Assessment (L&T):
Continuous Assessment/Internal End Term
Assessment Examination
Components
(Drop down) CIE Attn
Weightage 25% 5% 70%
(%)
Text: Krizan, Merrier, Logan & Williams. Effective Business Communication, New Delhi: Cengage,
2011
• Communication and Organizational Culture. Keyton. Joann. Sage Publications
• Social Communication (Frontiers of Social Psychology).Fiedler, Klaus. Psychology Press
Reference: Cypherpunks: Freedom and the Future of the Internet. Assange, Julian Assange. OR Books.
Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals
 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE - VI

Course Code: BSU 643 Credit Units:

01

Course Objective:
To develop an understanding the concept of stress its causes, symptoms and consequences.
To develop an understanding the consequences of the stress on one’s wellness, health, and work
performance.

Course Contents:
Module I: Stress
Meaning & Nature
Characteristics
Types of stress

Module II: Stages and Models of Stress

Stages of stress
The physiology of stress
Stimulus-oriented approach.
Response-oriented approach.
The transactional and interactional model.
Pressure – environment fit model of stress.

Module III: Causes and symptoms of stress

Personal
Organizational
Environmental

Module IV: Consequences of stress

Effect on behaviour and personality
Effect of stress on performance
Individual and Organizational consequences with special focus on health

Module V: Strategies for stress management

Importance of stress management
Healthy and Unhealthy strategies
Peer group and social support
Happiness and well-being

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal

Viva based on personal journal
Assessment of Behavioural change as a result of training
Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Examination Scheme:
Components SAP A JFS End Term
Written Exam
Weightage (%) 15 05 20 60
SAP: Social Awareness Programme, A: Attendance, JFS: Journal for Success

Text & References:

• Blonna, Richard; Coping with Stress in a Changing World: Second edition

• Pestonjee, D.M, Pareek, Udai, Agarwal Rita; Studies in Stress And its Management
• Pestonjee, D.M.; Stress and Coping: The Indian Experience
• Clegg, Brian; Instant Stress Management – Bring calm to your life now
 FRENCH

Course Code: FLU 644 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To strengthen the language of the students both in oral and written so that they can:
i) express their sentiments, emotions and opinions, reacting to information, situations;
ii) narrate incidents, events ;
iii) perform certain simple communicative tasks.

Course Contents:
Module D: pp. 157 – 168 – Unité 12

Unité 12: s'évader

7. présenter, caractériser, définir
8. parler de livres, de lectures
9. préparer et organiser un voyage
10. exprimer des sentiments et des opinions
11. téléphoner
12. faire une réservation

Contenu grammatical:
2. proposition relative avec pronom relatif "qui", "que", "où" - pour
caractériser
2. faire + verbe

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Campus: Tome 1

 GERMAN - VI

Course Code: BCH 645 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of
grammar, which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic
opportunities available in Germany
Introduction to Advanced Grammar and Business Language and Professional Jargon

Course Contents:
Module I: Adjective endings
Adjective endings in all the four cases discussed so far
Definite and indefinite articles
Cases without article

Module II: Comparative adverbs

Comparative adverbs as and like

Module III: Compound words

To learn the structure of compound words and the correct article which they take
Exploring the possibility of compound words in German

Module IV: Infinitive sentence

Special usage of ‘to’ sentences called zu+ infinitive sentences

Module V: Texts
A Dialogue: ‘Ein schwieriger Gast’
A text: ‘Abgeschlossene Vergangenheit’

Module VI: Comprehension texts

Reading and comprehending various texts to consolidate the usage of the constructions learnt so
far in this semester.

Module VII: Picture Description

Firstly recognize the persons or things in the picture and identify the situation depicted in the
picture;
Secondly answer questions of general meaning in context to the picture and also talk about the
personal experiences which come to your mind upon seeing the picture.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, ernziel Deutsch

• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1,2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH – VI

Course Code: BCH 646 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire working knowledge of the language; to give them vocabulary,
grammar, voice modulations/intonations to handle everyday Spanish situations in Present as well
as in Present Perfect Tense with ease.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of the earlier modules

Module II
Present Perfect Tense

Module III
Commands of irregular verbs

Module IV
Expressions with Tener que and Hay que

Module V
En la embajada
Emergency situations like fire, illness, accident, theft

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español, En Directo I A
• Español Sin Fronteras
 JAPANESE - VI

Course Code: BCH 647 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse in the language with the help of verbs and the usage of
different sentence patterns, which help them to strengthen the language.
Students are taught and trained enough to get placed in Japanese companies.
Note: The teaching is done in roman as well as Japanese script. 10 more kanjis are introduced in
this semester.

Course Contents:
Module I: Polite form of verbs
Expressing feelings with the polite forms of verb.

Module II: Potential form

Ability of doing or not doing something

Module III: Conjunctions

Joining two sentences with the help of shi and mo

Module IV: Intransitive Verbs

Sentence patterns of indirect speech

Module V: Feelings and expressions

Regret, existence etc.

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the language with the use of different forms of verb.

Methods of Private study/ Self help

➢ Hand-outs, audio -aids, assignments and role-plays will support classroom teaching.
➢ Students are encouraged to watch Japanese movies at Japan Cultural and information center.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Shin Nihon-go no Kiso Lesson No. 26 to 30.

• All vocabulary and topics taught are from the above-mentioned book.
 CHINESE – VI

Course Code: BCH 648 Credit Units:

02

Course Objective:
Chinese emperor Qin Shi Huang – Ti who built the great wall of China also built a network of
270 palaces, linked by tunnels, and was so afraid of assassination that he slept in a different
palace each night. The course aims at familiarizing the student with the basic aspects of
speaking ability of Mandarin, the language of Mainland China. The course aims at training
students in practical skills and nurturing them to interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Drills
Dialogue practice
Observe picture and answer the question.
Pronunciation and intonation.
Character writing and stroke order.

Module II
Going out to see a science exhibition
Going to the theatre.
Train or Plane is behind schedule.
Indian Economy-Chinese Economy
Talking about different Seasons of the Year and Weather conditions. Learning to say phrases
like-spring, summer, fall, winter, fairly hot, very cold, very humid, very stuffy, neither hot nor
cold, most comfortable, pleasant …. etc.

Module III
Temperature – how to say – What is the temperature in May here?
How is the weather in summer in your area?
Around 30 degrees
Heating, air-conditioning
Is winter is Shanghai very cold?
Talking about birthdays and where you were born?
The verb “shuo” (speak) saying useful phrases like speak very well, do not speak very well, if
speak slowly then understand if speak fast then don’t understand, difficult to speak, difficult to
write, speak too fast, speak too slow, listen and can understand, listen and cannot understand
… etc.
Tell the following in Chinese – My name is …. I was born in … (year). My birthday is ………
Today is … (date and day of the week). I go to work (school) everyday. I usually leave home at
. (O’clock). In the evening, I usually ………. (do what)? At week end, I ………. On Sundays I
usually …………… It is today….. It will soon be my younger sisters birthday. She was born in
….. (year). She lives in ………. (where). She is working (or studying)…… where… She lives in
…….. (where.)

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Elementary Chinese Reader Part-2,3; Lesson 47-54

 DISSERTATION
Course Code: BCH 655 Credit Units: 09

The Aims of the Dissertation

The aim of the dissertation is to provide you with an opportunity to further your intellectual
and personal development in your chosen field by undertaking a significant practical unit of
activity, having an educational value at a level commensurate with the award of your degree

The dissertation can be defined as a scholarly inquiry into a problem or issues, involving a
systematic approach to gathering and analysis of information / data, leading to production of a
structured report.

The Dissertation Topic

It is usual to give you some discretion in the choice of topic for the dissertation and the
approach to be adopted. You will need to ensure that your dissertation is related to your field
of specialisation.

Deciding this is often the most difficult part of the dissertation process, and perhaps, you have
been thinking of a topic for some time.

It is important to distinguish here between ‘dissertation topic’ and ‘dissertation title’. The topic
is the specific area that you wish to investigate. The title may not be decided until the
dissertation has been written so as to reflect its content properly.

Few restrictions are placed on the choice of the topic. Normally we would expect it to be:
• relevant to business, defined broadly;
• related to one or more of the subjects or areas of study within the core program and
specialisation stream;
• clearly focused so as to facilitate an in-depth approach, subject to the availability of
adequate sources of information and to your own knowledge;
• of value and interest to you and your personal and professional development.

Planning your dissertation

This will entail following:
• Selecting a topic for investigation.
• Establishing the precise focus of your study by deciding on the aims and objectives of the
dissertation, or formulating questions to be investigated. Consider very carefully what is
worth investigating and its feasibility.
• Drawing up initial dissertation outlines considering the aims and objectives of the
dissertation. Workout various stages of dissertation
• Devising a timetable to ensure that all stages of dissertation are completed in time. The
timetable should include writing of the dissertation and regular meetings with your
dissertation guide.

The dissertation plan or outline

It is recommended that you should have a dissertation plan to guide you right from the outset.
Essentially, the dissertation plan is an outline of what you intend to do, chapter wise and
therefore should reflect the aims and objectives of your dissertation.

There are several reasons for having a dissertation plan

• It provides a focus to your thoughts.
• It provides your faculty-guide with an opportunity, at an early stage of your work, to make
constructive comments and help guide the direction of your research.
• The writing of a plan is the first formal stage of the writing process, and therefore helps
build up your confidence.
• In many ways, the plan encourages you to come to terms with the reading, thinking and
writing in a systematic and integrated way, with plenty of time left for changes.
• Finally, the dissertation plan generally provides a revision point in the development of your
dissertation report in order to allow appropriate changes in the scope and even direction of
your work as it progresses.

Keeping records
This includes the following:
• Making a note of everything you read; including those discarded.
• Ensuring that when recording sources, author’s name and initials, date of publication, title,
place of publication and publisher are included. (You may consider starting a card index or
database from the outset). Making an accurate note of all quotations at the time you read
them.
• Make clear what is a direct a direct quotation and what is your paraphrase.

Dissertation format
All students must follow the following rules in submitting their dissertation.
• Front page should provide title, author, Name of degree/diploma and the date of
submission.
• Second page should be the table of contents giving page references for each chapter and
section.
• The next page should be the table of appendices, graphs and tables giving titles and page
references.
• Next to follow should be a synopsis or abstract of the dissertation (approximately 500
words) titled: Executive Summary
• Next is the ‘acknowledgements’.
• Chapter I should be a general introduction, giving the background to the dissertation, the
objectives of the dissertation, the rationale for the dissertation, the plan, methodological
issues and problems. The limitations of the dissertation should also be hinted in this
chapter.
• Other chapters will constitute the body of the dissertation. The number of chapters and
their sequence will usually vary depending on, among others, on a critical review of the
previous relevant work relating to your major findings, a discussion of their implications,
and conclusions, possibly with a suggestion of the direction of future research on the area.
• After this concluding chapter, you should give a list of all the references you have used.
These should be cross - references with your text. For articles from journals, the following
details are required e.g.

Draper P and Pandyal K. 1991, The Investment Trust Discount Revisited, Journal of
Business Finance and Accounting, Vol18, No6, Nov, pp 791-832.

For books, the following details are required:

Levi, M. 1996, International Financial Management, Prentice Hall, New York, 3rd Ed, 1996

• Finally, you should give any appendices. These should only include relevant statistical data
or material that cannot be fitted into the above categories.

Guidelines for the assessment of the dissertation

While evaluating the dissertation, faculty guide will consider the following aspects:

11. Has the student made a clear statement of the objective or objective(s).
12. If there is more than one objective, do these constitute parts of a whole?
13. Has the student developed an appropriate analytical framework for addressing the problem
at hand.
14. Is this based on up-to-date developments in the topic area?
15. Has the student collected information / data suitable to the frameworks?
16. Are the techniques employed by the student to analyse the data / information appropriate
and relevant?
17. Has the student succeeded in drawing conclusion form the analysis?
18. Do the conclusions relate well to the objectives of the project?
19. Has the student been regular in his work?
20. Layout of the written report.

Examination Scheme:
Dissertation: 75
Viva Voce: 25

Total: 100
 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT – II
Course Code: BCH 604 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To give insight into financial decision making and composition of different securities in the total Capital
structure.

Course Contents:

Module I: Dividend Decision

Dividend Decisions – dividend policy – determinants of dividend policy – types of dividend policy –
forms of dividend.

Module II: Working capital Management

Working Capital Management – meaning – importance of adequate working capital- excess or
Inadequate working capital – determinants of working capital requirement – cash management,
Receivable management and inventory management – sources of working capital.

Module III: Financing Decision

Financing Decisions – capital structure – factors influencing capital structure – EBIT – EBT- EPS –
Analysis - leverage – problems.

Spreadsheet can be used to show the basic calculation in finance and can be for giving
students subject related assignments for their internal assessment purpose

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• S N Maheshwari, Financial Management.

• Khan and Jain, Financial Management.
• Dorai Raj. S.N, Financial Management.
• Sharma and Sashi Gupta, Financial Management.
• I M Pandey, Financial Management.
• James C Vanhorne, Financial Management.
• Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management.
• PN Reddy & Appanaiah, Financial Management.
 FUNDAMENTALS OF INVESTMENTS – II
Course Code: BCH 605 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To introduce students to different investment alternatives – its valuation analysis and investor
protection.

Module I: Portfolio risk and return

Portfolio and diversification, portfolio Risk and Return (up to portfolio of 3 securities)

Module II: Portfolio Analysis and selection

Capital Asset Pricing Model; Security Market Line; Arbitrage Pricing Theory, Diversification,
Markowitz risk return optimization, Single Index model, Sharpe Index Model, Portfolio Beta and
efficient frontier

Module III: Financial derivatives

Introduction to Financial derivatives, Financial derivatives Markets in India.

Module IV : Mutual funds

Introduction to mutual funds, commodities and real estate

Module V : Financial services

Investor Protection – SEBI & role of stock exchange in investor protection, investor grievances
and their redressal system, insider trading, investors’ awareness and activism.

A Project on Investment. (Considering either Derivatives/ Mutual Fund)

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Bhalla, V.K., “Investment Management”, S. Chand & Co.

• Prasanna, Chandra, “Investment analysis and portfolio management”, Tata McGraw Hill.
 FINANCIAL MARKETS, INSTITUTIONS AND FINANCIAL
SERVICES II

Course Code: BCH 606 Credit

Units: 02

Course Objective:
To introduce students to different financial institutions, Markets and the services which are
available in India.

Course Contents:
Module I Introduction
Introduction to financial services; Merchant banking: Meaning, scope, functions, management of new issues,
Indian experience, SEBI guidelines, Future of merchant banking in India.
Understanding of the global nature of financial markets, the importance of country participants, and the role of
international organizations operating in the financial markets.

Module II: Money, Prices, Exchange Rate and Interest Rates

Monetary expansion, Interest rates and exchange rates, Monetary expansion and prices, Real and nominal
values, Inflation and interest rates, Inflation and exchange rates. The Indian financial system: Introduction, The
pre 1951 period, the post 1951 period, Emerging horizon.

Module III: Commercial Banks

Evolution of modern commercial banks, Evolution of bank assets, liabilities and activities; Banking structure,
Matching revenues and costs, capital adequacy; Accounting policies and related matters, Direct investments,
and credit programmes. Central banking and monetary policy: Central banking functions; Money creation,
process and control; monetary policy.

Module IV: Leasing financing

The concept, merits and demerits; Types; The Indian leasing scenario; Lease evaluation; Lease accounting.

Module V: Hire purchase

Meaning; James Raj Committee recommendation; RBI guidelines; Hire purchase and transport industry; Lease
vs. Hire purchase; Problems and prospects of hire purchase in India.

Module VI : Housing Finance & Venture Capital Finance

Concept of Housing Finance and National Housing Bank (briefly), Concept of Venture Capital Finance,
Features, and Types of Venture Capital Finance, Concept of private Equity.

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Gordon and Natarajan, Financial Markets and Services, Himalaya Publishing House.
• Khan, M.Y, Financial Services, Tata McGraw Hill.
• Jeff Madura, Financial Markets and Institutions, South-Western College Publishing.
• B.C Vasant Desai, The Indian Financial System, Himalaya Publishing House.
• Bhole L.M, Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill.
 INSURANCE AND RISK MANAGEMENT - II

Course Code: BCH 607

Credit Units: 02
Course Objective:
This course enables the students to know the fundamentals of Insurance.

Course Contents:
Module I
Fire Insurance - Nature, meaning - Procedure of taking fire insurance policy - Policy conditions - Kinds
of policies - Settlement of claims.

Module II
Marine Insurance - Nature, Meaning - procedure of taking marine insurance Policy- clauses of marine
policy - Types of policies.

Module III
Accidental Insurance (only nature & cover given each) 1) Motar Insurance 2) personal
Accidental & Sickness Insurance 3) Burglary Insurance 4) Liability Insurance 5) Fidelity
Guarantee Insurance 6) Cattle Insurance 7) Crop Insurance.

Module IV
Life Insurance Corporation of India Role and performance - Marketing & promotion strategy of
Insurance Services- Govt. Policy on Insurance service sector - Privatisation of Insurance
sector- Insurance Regulatory Development Act. 1999.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Mishara M. N: Insurance Principles & practice - S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
• M. Arif Khan: Theory & Practice of Insurance, Education Book House Aligarth.
• Kothari & Bahi: Principles & practice of Insurance, Shahitya Bhavan.
• Life Insurance Act of 1956
• Insurance Regulator Development Act. 1999.
• Gupta O. S: Life Insurance, Frank Brothers, New Delhi.
• Vinayakam N. Radhaswamy & Vasudevan S. V: Insurance - Principles & Practice. S. Chand
New Delhi
• Mishra M. N: Life Insurance Corporation of India Vols. - I, II & III, Raj Book, Jaipur.
 PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING - II

Course Code: BCH 608 Credit

Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the concept of marketing and its applications, also to expose the
Students to the latest trends in marketing .

Course Contents:
Module I
Promotion : Nature and importance of promotion;Method of promotion - optimum promotion mix.

Module II: Consumer behaviour

Nature, scope & significance of consumer behavour - factors affecting consumer behaviour.

Module III: Advertising and publicity

Meaning - Importance of advertising - advertising medias - ethics of good advertising.
Case -II: Window-Shopping Takes on a Whole New Meaning

Module IV: Marketing research

Meaning - steps involved in marketing research - areas of marketing research. Marketing
Information System (MIS): Need, Importance – Element of good MIS - components of MIS.

Module VI:
Salesmanship & Selling process : Salesman - qualities of successful salesman - functions of a
salesman selling process.
Case 1: Group Assignment (UBER)

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Philip Kotler: Marketing Management, Prentice Hall of

India Ltd, New Delhi.
• Dr. C. N. Sontakki: Marketing Management Kalyani
Publications New Delhi.
• Marchannd & B. Vardharajan: An introduction to
Marketing, Vikas Publishing House, Delhi.
• Mohammad Amanatuallh: Principles of Modern
Marketing. Kalyani Publications New Delhi.
Link:
• http://www.getmemedia.com/ideas/case-study-window-shopping-takes-on-a-whole-
new-meaning-online/say-media.html
• https://uber-static.s3.amazonaws.com/web-fresh/legal/Uber_Chicago_CaseStudy.pdf
 INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS -II
Course Code: BCH 609 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the concepts and various dimensions of international business.

Course Contents:
Module I: International Marketing
Introduction – international marketing environment, market entry strategies, international
marketing channels, export policies – export import procedure

Module II: International Finance

Introduction – Foreign Exchange, theories of determination of foreign exchange rates,
settlement of international transaction, exchange control, convertibility of Rupees and its
implications letlter of credit, Euro
currency market.

Module III: Direct Foreign Investment

Reason of Direct foreign investment, foreign investment, instruments, G.D.R. A.D.R. strategies
of Direct Foreign Investment Institutions and their roll in Capital Market. International liquidity
and S.D.R., I.M.F., World Bank.

Module IV: Multinational Corporations

Definition, Distinction among I.C. M.N.C., G.C. etc.,-
Factor contributing to growth of multinationals – criticism on multinationals – World trade
organizations and multinational corporations.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Frame Works – International Business – II Edition by Roger Benneet – Financial Times

management – Pitman Publishing, London.
• International Business – Text and cases. By P. Subba Rao, Himalaya Publishing House.
 ADVERTISING AND PERSONAL SELLING - II
Course Code: BCH 610 Credit Units: 02
Course Objective:
To help students to understand the concept of advertising and personal selling used in marketing for
communicating with customers.

Course Contents:
Module I: Personal Selling
Introduction & basic concepts. The nature of personal selling; Personal Selling in marketing
mix; The dimensions of sales management; Sales Management environment; Sales
forecasting & Sales management planning.

Module II
Organizing & executing the sales effort. The nature of sales management positions; the sales
organization; sales department relations; distributive network relations; the selling process;
sales personality.

Module III: Sales force management

Recruitment & selection of sales personnel; Training, motivating, compensating & controlling
sales personnel; controlling the sales effort - sales budget, sales quotas, sales territories,
sales control & cost analysis.

Module IV
Overview of distribution management. Basic concepts of distribution systems; Different
modes of transport in India; Functional areas of logistics management; Distribution costs;
Supply chain management.

Module V
Managing marketing intermediaries. Role & functions of marketing intermediaries; selection of
marketing channels; motivation of marketing intermediaries; distribution analysis, Channel
management & control.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• R. Still, W. Cundiff, A.P. Govoni, Sales Management Decisions Strategies and Cases, P.H.I, New
Delhi.
• M. Johnson, L. Kurtz, E. Scheuing, Sales Management Concepts, Practices & Cases, Mcgraw Hill
International, New York.
• W. Stern, EI-Ansary, T. Coughlan, Marketing Channels, 5th Edition, P.H.I, New Delhi.
• Guptha. S. L, Sales & Distribution Management, Excell Books, New Delhi.
 SERVICE MARKETING-II

Course Code: BCH 611 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
The course has been designed to familiarize students with characteristics of services, their
design and delivery and the complexities of handling intangibles.

Course Contents:

Module I: Service Marketing Strategies

Managing service demand and capacity: Understanding capacity constraints, Understanding
demand patterns. Strategies for matching demand and supply. Pricing Strategies: Approaches
to pricing services. Pricing strategies linking to value definitions. Service marketing
communication mix.

Module II: Customer Focus

Tourism & Travel: Hotel, Airline and Travel services, Transportation and logistics: Freight,
Courier, Logistics, Financial Services: Insurance, Banking, housing and Financial
Intermediaries, Media Services: Media, Newspaper, Broadcasting, Health Care: Hospitals,
Medical transcription, Professional Services: Market research, Consultancy, Retail services

Case study – Hong kong Disney land (Available in Text Book on Ziethmal & Bitner’ )

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Valarie A Zeithaml and mary J Bitner, Services Marketing, Third Edition, Tata McGraw Hill
CompaniesChristopher lovelock , Service Marketing (people, technology and strategy),
2001, Fifth Edition, Pearson Education.
• Christopher lovelock , Service Marketing (people, technology and strategy), 2001, Fifth
Edition, Pearson Education.

References:
• Clow Kenneth E. and Kurtz David L. , Services marketing operations, management and
strategy, biztantra innovations in management, John Willey & Sons
• Rampal M.K., Gupta S.L., Service Marketing, 2006 Galgotia Publishing Company.
 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - II
Course Code: BCH 612 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the concept of human resource management to enable them to
better manage the most important asset of any organisation which are people.

Course Contents:
Module I Performance Managment
Performance Appraisal– Meaning of performance appraisal, objectives of Performance appraisal,
methods of performance appraisal and limitations.

Module II Training and Development

Training and Induction – Meaning of Training and Induction, objective and purpose of induction, Need
for training, benefits of training, identification of training needs, methods of training. HRD – Meaning of
HRD, Role of training in HRD.

Module III Healthy Work Environment

Work Environment –Industrial accidents, Employee safety, Morale, Grievance and Grievances
handling, Motivation Perspectives, Empowering Employees.

Module IV Emerging Issues in HRM

HRD – Meaning of HRD, Role of training in HRD, Impact of globalisation on human resource
management, problems in relation to transnational and multi nationals.
Impact of Technological Development on HRM Practices, Dealing with Workforce Diversity, Work /
Life Balance.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• C.B. Mamoria, Personnel Management.

• Edwin Flippo, Personnel Management.
• Aswathappa. K, Human Resource Management
• Subba Rao, Human Resources Management.
• Michael Porter, HRM and Human Relations.
• Biswanath Chosh, Human Resource Development and Management.
 COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT - II
Course Code: BCH 613 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the concept of compensation management and wage policies keeping
in view the labour legislations.

Course Contents:
Module I – Incentivizing the Workforce
Pay-for-performance & Financial incentives. Meaning and definitions, Background and trends, pre-
requisites of effective incentive system, Scope of incentive schemes, types of incentives – group
incentive plan, for indirect workers, for Operations employees for managers and professionals, for
sales persons, Total compensation Program.

Module II – Benefits & Services

Benefits & services why benefits and services? Types of employee benefits and services – insurance,
retirement, Employee services benefit and others, Principles of Fringes, Significant benefits and
service Programs, Flexible benefit programs, administration of benefits and services, The future of
fringe Benefits, guidelines to make benefit program more effective, Benefits and employee leasing.

Module IV – Recent trends in compensation management

Recent trends in compensation management -Recent trends in compensation management and the
use of information technology. Current Issues and Challenges in Compensation Management, Ethics
in Compensation Management. Effective Compensation for the success of an organization & Effect of
balanced Compensation on the success of an Organization. Consequences of pay dissatisfaction.
(
Module III – Legal Framework of Compensation
Labour legislations: Over view and aspects covered by Payment of wages Act, Payment of Bonus Act,
Equal Remuneration Act, ESI Act, maternity benefit Act, Payment of Gratuity Act, Factories Act,
Minimum Wage Act, Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, Industrial Disputes Act, PF Act.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• A.M. Sharma, Understanding Wage System.
• N.D. Kapoor, Labour Legislation.
• C.B. Memoria, Personnel management.
 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND LABOUR LAWS - II
Course Code: BCL 624 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the importance and various aspects of industrial relations and
labour laws.

Course Contents:
Module I
Collaboration and Workers Participation in Management Bases of collaboration, Interventions
for collaboration. Meaning of workers participation in management, concepts and objectives of
workers participation in management, growth and development of workers participation in
management, types of workers participation in management

Module II
Quality Circle- Quality circles, history of QC, Organization structure of QC, Benefits of QC,
Problems of QC.

Module III
Labour welfare and social security - Introduction - The Labour Movement, Merits & Demerits
of Welfare Measures, Concepts of Labour Welfare & Social Security, Types of Welfare
Activities, Statutory and non-statutory, Growth of Labour Welfare & Social Security in India.

Module IV
Occupational Hazards, Industrial Health & Safety - Types of accidents, Causes accidents,
Prevention of accidents Safety - Need for safety, measures to ensure safety in organisations.
The supervisors role in safety Health-Physical health & Mental health, Problems and remedies,
noise control, job stress, communicable diseases, Alcoholism and drug abuse, Violence in the
work place, Use of computers to monitor health and safety.

Module V
Retirement benefits - Provident Fund- purpose of provident fund, employer obligation to
employee towards provident fund, Public Provident fund, Gratuity, statutory provisions
regarding gratuity, Pension.

Module VI
Quality of Work life- Introduction, Meaning, Specific issues in QWL, QWL and productivity,
Barriers in QWL, Strategies for improvement of QWL

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Davar, Personnel management and Industrial Relations.
• C.B. Memoria, Dynamics of industrial Relations in India.
• Johnson, Introduction to Industrial Relations.
• Sharma A.M, Industrial Relations.
• Biswanth Ghosh, Personnel management and Industrial Relations.
• Bhagdiwall- Flippo, Personnel management and Industrial Relations.
• Arora, Labour law.
• D. Sanjeeviah, Labour problems and Industrial Developments in India.
• Sharma A .M, Aspects of Labour welfare and social security
• Prasanna Chandra, Labour problem Social Security and Welfare.
• Punekar and Deodhan, Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism and industrial Relations.
 HUMAN RESOURCE ACCOUNTING - II
Course Code: BCH 615 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to unde
rstand the concepts of Human resource accounting, its importance and various methods of human
resource accounting.

Course Contents:
Module I
First-Generation Accounting Systems for Human Resource Value
Second and Third-Generation Accounting Systems for Human Resource Value
Applications and Implementations
Designing and Implementing Human Resource Accounting Systems

Module II
Applications for Improving Management, Training, and Personnel Decisions
Developing an Integrated Systems
Recent Advancement and Future Directions in Human Resource Accounting

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Human Resource Accounting, by Gupta, R.K.; Anmol Publications.

• Human Resource Accounting, by Saha, Malayendu; Discovery Publishing House.
• Human Resource Accounting, by Flamholtz, Eric; Kluwer Academic Publishers.
 CORPORATE TAX PLANNING - II
Course Code: BCH 616 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the concept of Corporate Tax planning and give them a practical
exposure to the method of computing corporate tax.

Course Objective:
The course is designed to enable students to understand the basic concepts of GST Law introduced
in India and to develop skills of computing GST and in filing all the returns involved under the GST.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to Goods and Services Tax (GST)
Meaning, scope and significance of GST; principles of subsumation and taxes
subsumed; classification of goods and services and GST rates. GST model in
India – CGST, SGST and IGST; GST Administration in India – GST Council -
functions and challenges; GST Network – objectives structure, administration
and functions; operational aspects of GST–process of registration for
manufacturer, service provider and dealer, etc; amendment and cancellation of
registration; tax invoice, credit and debit notes; accounts and records; filing of
returns – forms, time schedule; assessment, payment of tax.

Module II: Levy and Collection of Tax – CGST Act, 2017 – levy and collection of
central and state GST, Composition levy, taxable person, power to grant
exemption from tax; Time and Value of Supply – time of supply of goods and
services, change in rate of tax in respect of supply of goods or services; value
of taxable supply; Illustrative problems.

Module III: Input Tax Credit & Related Terms

Meaning, eligibility and conditions for taking Input Tax Credit – CGST, SGST
and IGST; recovery of Input Tax Credit and interest thereon, taking input tax
credit in respect of inputs sent for job work, reverse charge, manner of
distribution of credit by input; service distributor; Transitional Provisions,
Electronic Commerce, HSN Code, Illustrative problems

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Bimal Jain & Isha Bansal, GST Law & Analysis, Young Global Publications, New Delhi
• Girish Ahuja and Ravi Gupta, Direct Tax Law – Theory & Practice, Bharat Law House, New
Delhi
• Abhishek Rastogi: Professionals guide to GST Ideation to reality (2017)
• Rakesh Garg & Sandeep Garg, HSN code wise GST Tariff, Bloomsbury India Professional
(July 2017)
• Datey V.S.:GST Ready Reckoner, Taxman Publication, New Delhi
 COMPUTERIZED ACCOUNTING SYSTEM - II
Course Code: BCH 617 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the computerization of accounting system and the use of the software
Tally

Course Contents:
Module I: Account Masters and Vouchers
Working with Account Masters, viz, Group, Ledger, Cost Centre and Category, Currency, Entry
of Accounts Vouchers with Examples of
Billwise, Interest Computation, Printing of Vouchers, Creation and Alteration of Vouchers
types and Vouchers Classes.

Module II: Final Accounts

Viewing Balance Sheet, P& L Account, Trial Balance

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Implementing Tally 6.3 by A.K. Nadhani, K. K. Nadhani, BPB Pub.
• Accounting by Tally (Illustrated) by L.B.Singh & V.P.Singh, Asian Pub.
• Computerised financial accounting using tally- Rajan Chougule.
 BUSINESS DATA PROCESSING - II
Course Code: BCH 618 Credit Units: 02

Course Objective:
To help students to understand the DBMS concepts with oracle as a tool.

Course Contents:
Module I: Concept of Cursors
Types- Implicit, Explicit Open, Close cursor

Module II: Introduction to triggers

Block Level, Field level triggers, Simple example to be solved with Form

Module III: Working with forms

Basic Concept, Application Development in Form, Creating a Form, Running a Form, Form
Triggers, maintaining Standards in Forms, Master Detail Forms, Libraries and Alerts.

Module IV: Working with menus

Using Default Menu, Using custom menu. Attaching a Menu Module to a Form, Opening a
Form through a menu
Module V: Working with reports
Features, Defining data Module for a Report, Specify Runtime Parameter form for report,
specify runtime parameter form for a report.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• An introduction to database:- Date C.J.

• Commercial Application Development Using Developer 2000 by Ivan Bayross.
• Structured Query Languages (SQL) By Osborne.
• SQL – Scott Urman
• Teach yourself ORACLE 8 – Ed.Whalen in 21 days.
 COMPARATIVE ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS - II
Course Code: BCH 619 Credit Units: 02
Course Objective:
To help students to understand the accounting systems and disclosure practices around the world.
The course should enable the student to make successful comparisons of international accounting
systems.

Course Contents:

Module I
Country studies - Financial reporting in the Moduleed Kingdom - Financial reporting in the
Moduleed States - Financial reporting in the Netherlands - Financial reporting in France -
Financial reporting in Germany- Financial reporting in Japan - Financial reporting in nine other
important countries - Australia, Canada and Singapore - Scandinavia -South Korea, Italy and
Spain – Financial reporting in Central and Eastern Europe and China

Module II
Issues in international accounting - Consolidation - Introduction - Rate of adoption - The
concept of a group - Harmonization - Definitions of group companies - Publication requirements
and practices - Techniques of consolidation - Foreign currency translation - Translation of the
profit and loss account

Module III
Segment reporting - What is segment reporting? - The need for segment information - Disclosure
regulations - Problems of segment identification - Recent developments - Evidence on the
benefits of segment reporting

Module IV
Inflation accounting - Introduction - Terminology

Module V
Analysis and management issues - International financial analysis - Understanding differences in
accounting method - Disclosure practices in international financial reporting - International
auditing - Introduction - The international audit process

Examination Scheme:

Components CT HA/C/V A EE
Weightage (%) 15 10 5 70

Text & References:

• Comparative International Accounting, by Nobes, Christopher; Parker, R. H.; (Author) ,

Prentice Hall .
 Master of Business Administration

Programme Code: MBA

Duration – 2 Years Full Time

Programme Structure,
Curriculum & Scheme of Examination

2017

AMITY UNIVERSITY
MADHYA PRADESH
 PREAMBLE

Amity University aims to achieve academic excellence by providing multi-

faceted education to students and encourage them to reach the pinnacle of
success. The University has designed a system that would provide rigorous
academic programme with necessary skills to enable them to excel in their
careers.

This booklet contains the Programme Structure, the Detailed Curriculum and
the Scheme of Examination. The Programme Structure includes the courses
(Core and Elective), arranged semester wise. The importance of each course is
defined in terms of credits attached to it. The credit units attached to each
course has been further defined in terms of contact hours i.e. Lecture Hours
(L), Tutorial Hours (T), Practical Hours (P). Towards earning credits in terms of
contact hours, 1 Lecture and 1 Tutorial per week are rated as 1 credit each and
2 Practical hours per week are rated as 1 credit. Thus, for example, an L-T-P
structure of 3-0-0 will have 3 credits, 3-1-0 will have 4 credits, and 3-1-2 will
have 5 credits.

The Curriculum and Scheme of Examination of each course includes the

course objectives, course contents, scheme of examination and the list of text
and references. The scheme of examination defines the various components
of evaluation and the weightage attached to each component. The different
codes used for the components of evaluation and the weightage attached to
them are:

Components Codes
Weightage (%)
Case Discussion/ Presentation/ Analysis C 05 - 10
Home Assignment H 05 - 10
Project P 05 - 10
Seminar S 05 - 10
Viva V 05 - 10
Quiz Q 05 - 10
Class Test CT 10 - 15
Attendance A 05
End Semester Examination EE 70

It is hoped that it will help the students study in a planned and a structured
manner and promote effective learning. Wishing you an intellectually
stimulating stay at Amity University.

July, 2015
 PROGRAMME STRUCTURE

FIRST SEMESTER
Course Course Title Lecture Tutorial (T) Practical Total Page
Code (L) Hours Hours Per /Field Credit No.
Per Week Week work (P) s
Hours Per
Week
MBA101 Management Process & 3 - 2 4
Organizational Behavior
MBA102 Accounting for Management 3 - 2 4
MBA103 Economic Analysis 3 - 2 4
MBA104 Marketing Management 2 - 2 3
MBA105 Information Technology for 3 - - 3
Managers
MBA106 Quantitative Techniques in 3 - 2 4
Management
MBA107 Legal Aspects of Business 3 - - 3
MBA142 Business Communication 1 - - 1
for Managers
MBA143 Self-development and 1 - - 1
Interpersonal skills
Foreign Language – I 2 - - 2
MBA144 French
MBA145 German
MBA146 Spanish
MBA147 Japanese
MBA148 Chinese
TOTAL 29

SECOND SEMESTER
MBA201 Human Resource Management 3 - 2 4
MBA202 Financial Management 3 - 2 4
MBA203 International Business & 2 - 2 3
Practices
MBA204 Business Research Methods 3 - 2 4
MBA205 Operations Management 3 - 2 4
MBA206 Management Science 2 - 1 3
MBA207 Knowledge Management 3 - - 3
MBA208 Managerial Competency & 1 - - -
Career Development (Non-
Credit course)
MBA242 Business Correspondence 1 - - 1
MBA243 Conflict Resolution & 1 - - 1
Management
Foreign Language – II 2 - - 2
MBA244 French
MBA245 German
MBA246 Spanish
MBA247 Japanese
MBA248 Chinese
TOTAL 29

SUMMER INTERNSHIP (8 -10 WEEKS)

 THIRD SEMESTER
MBA301 Strategic Management 3 - - 3
MBA302 Managing Excellence (Non Credit 1 - - -
Course)
MBA342 Business Communication for 1 - - 1
Managerial Competence
MBA343 Professional Competencies & Career 1 - - 1
Development
Foreign Language – III 2 - - 2
MBA344 French
MBA345 German
MBA346 Spanish
MBA347 Japanese
MBA348 Chinese
MBA350 Summer Internship (Evaluation) - - - 9
ELECTIVE (Any six courses out of any two programmes in a combination of 4+2 or 3+3)
ENTREPRENEURSHIP & LEADERSHIP
MBA303 Entrepreneurship Process & 2 - 2 3
Behaviour
MBA304 Innovation in Business & 2 - 2 3
Enterprise
MBA305 Evaluating Business 2 - 2 3
Opportunities
MBA306 Emerging Business Sectors & 2 - 2 3
Technologies
FINANCE & ACCOUNTING
MBA307 Cost and Management 2 - 2 3
Accounting
MBA308 Project Planning, Appraisal & 2 - 2 3
Control
MBA309 International Financial 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA310 Management of Financial 2 - 2 3
Services
MBA311 Security Analysis & Portfolio 2 - 2 3
Management
HUMAN RESOURCE
MBA312 Industrial Relations & Labour 2 - 2 3
Laws
MBA313 Organizational Change & 2 - 2 3
Development
MBA314 Performance & Competency 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA315 Training & Development 2 - 2 3
MBA316 Strategic Human Resource 2 - 2 3
Management
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
MBA317 International Trade Finance 2 - 2 3
MBA318 International Commodity 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA319 International Economics & Policy 2 - 2 3
MBA365 International Trade Procedures & 2 - 2 3
Documentation
MBA366 Foreign Exchange Management 2 - 2 3
INSURANCE MANAGEMENT
MBA367 Application of General Insurance 2 - 2 3
MBA368 Life Insurance – Underwriting & 2 - 2 3
Claims
MBA369 Regulatory Framework of 2 - 2 3
Insurance
MBA370 Risk Management & Insurance 2 - 2 3
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
MBA371 Business Process System 2 - 2 3
MBA372 Management of Software 2 - 2 3
Projects
MBA373 Decision Support & Business 2 - 2 3
Intellegence Systems
MBA374 Service Oriented Architecture & 2 - 2 3
IT Service Management
MBA375 Web-enabled Business 2 - 2 3
Processes
MARKETING & SALES
MBA376 Consumer Behaviour 2 - 2 3
MBA377 Distribution &Logistics 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA378 Sales Management 2 - 2 3
MBA379 Product & Brand Management 2 - 2 3
MBA380 Rural Marketing 2 - 2 3
OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
MBA381 Management of Technology & 2 - 2 3
Innovation
MBA382 Supply Chain Management 2 - 2 3
MBA383 Project Management 2 - 2 3
MBA384 Manufacturing Competitiveness 2 - 2 3
MBA385 Total Quality & Competitive 2 - 2 3
Advantage
RETAIL MANAGEMENT
MBA386 Fundamentals of Retailing 2 - 2 3
MBA387 Merchandising Management 2 - 2 3
MBA388 Retail Supply Chain & Logistics 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA389 Franchising in Retailing 2 - 2 3
MBA390 Retailing of Insurance Products 2 - 2 3
& Financial Services
TOTAL 34

FOURTH SEMESTER
MBA401 Management in Action – Social, 3 1 - 4
Economic & Ethical Issues
MBA442 Business Etiquette and Protocol 1 - - 1
MBA443 Leadership & Managing Skills 1 - - 1
Foreign Language – IV 2 - - 2
MBA444 French
MBA445 German
MBA446 Spanish
MBA447 Japanese
MBA448 Chinese
MBA455 Dissertation (Commencing Sem – - - - 9
III)
ELECTIVE (Any six courses out of any two streams (same as in Sem III) in a combination of 4+2 or
3+3)
ELECTIVE (Any six courses out of any two streams (same as in Sem III) in a combination of 4+2 or
3+3)
ENTREPRENEURSHIP & LEADERSHIP
MBA402 Managing Corporate 2 - 2 3
Entrepreneurship
MBA403 Family Business Management 2 - 2 3
MBA404 Small Business Management & 2 - 2 3
Strategies
MBA405 Financing New Ventures & 2 - 2 3
Businesses
FINANCE & ACCOUNTING
MBA406 Corporate Tax Planning 2 - 2 3
MBA407 Financial Engineering 2 - 2 3
MBA408 Management of Financial 2 - 2 3
Institutions
MBA409 Strategic Financial Management 2 - 2 3
MBA410 Commercial Banking 2 - 2 3
HUMAN RESOURCE
MBA411 Compensation & Reward 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA412 Measurement in Human 2 - 2 3
Resource
MBA413 Global Human Resource 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA414 Organizational Design & 2 - 2 3
Structural Processes
MBA415 Managerial Counselling 2 - 2 3
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
MBA416 Foreign Trade Policy 2 - 2 3
MBA417 International Supply Chain 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA418 International Cross Culture & 2 - 2 3
Diversity Management
MBA419 Global Outsourcing: Issues & 2 - 2 3
Perspective
MBA465 Global Business Operations 2 - 2 3
INSURANCE MANAGEMENT
MBA466 Commercial Insurance 2 - 2 3
Underwriting & Operations
MBA467 Insurance Accounts & Fund 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA468 Insurance Marketing & Client 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA469 Product Development & Pricing 2 - 2 3
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
MBA470 System Analysis & Design 2 - 2 3
MBA471 Enterprise Management 2 - 2 3
MBA472 Information Security & Risk 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA473 Marketing of IT Solutions 2 - 2 3
MBA474 Software Quality Assurance 2 - 2 3
MARKETING & SALES
MBA475 Advertising & Sales Promotion 2 - 2 3
MBA476 Customer Relationship 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA477 Industrial Marketing 2 - 2 3
MBA478 International Marketing 2 - 2 3
MBA479 Marketing of Services 2 - 2 3
OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
MBA480 Service Operations Management 2 - 2 3
MBA481 Operations Strategy 2 - 2 3
MBA482 Lean Six Sigma 2 - 2 3
MBA483 Facility Planning & Total 2 - 2 3
Productive Maintenance
MBA484 Process Analysis & Theory of 2 - 2 3
Constraints
RETAIL MANAGEMENT
MBA485 Mall Dynamics & Real Estate 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA486 Visual Merchandising & Space 2 - 2 3
Planning
MBA487 Retail Sales & Category 2 - 2 3
Management
MBA488 Retail Branding & CRM 2 - 2 3
MBA489 E-Retailing 2 - 2 3
TOTAL 35
Notes:
1. For non-credit courses, evaluation will be done but no credit units will be assigned. They
will be reflected in the grade sheet with result as “satisfactory” or “Unsatisfactory”.
2. In semester III & IV, a student can opt for one course of BSI/ EMC 2 either as an alternative
to one of the elective courses or as an additional course. In case these are taken as an
alternative to an elective course, each of these courses will have 4 credit units and if taken
as an additional course, then each will be treated as non-credit course.
 Curriculum & Scheme of Examination

MANAGEMENT PROCESS AND ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR

Course Code: MBA 101 Credit Units:

04

Course Objective:
To help the students gain understanding of the functions and responsibilities
of the manager and to provide the student understand Human Behaviour in
organizations so as to improve his managerial effectiveness.

Course Contents:

Module I: Management vs. Manager

Evolution of management thought, Functions of management, Roles and Skills
of a manager, Emerging challenges of management.

Module II: Organization

Nature and structure of organization, Types of organizations, Line and staff
relationships, Formal and informal organizations.

Module III: Introduction to Organization

Overview of organization behaviour and its importance, Organization models.

Module IV: Individual Behaviour

Individual behaviour, Perception and learning, Personality, Values & attitudes,
Motivation: Concept theory and application

Module V: Group Behaviour

Group dynamics, Communication, Leadership, Power and politics, Conflicts
and negotiation.

Module VI: Organizational Culture and Change Management

Organisational culture, Organisational change and development, Work stress
and its management.

Examination Scheme:

Component CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

s
Weightage 5 5 5 5 10 70
(%)

Text &References:
• Luthans, F. (2005), Organizational Behaviour, McGraw – Hill International
Edition.
• Robbins, S.P. (2005), Organizational Behaviour, Eleventh Edition, Prentice
Hall of India.
• Greenberg, J. & Baron, R.A. (2005), Behaviour in Organizations, Pearson
Education.
• Newstrom John W. and Davis Keith, (1993), Organizational Behaviour:
Human Behaviour at Work, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi
• P. Subba Rao (2010), Management and Organisation and Behaviour,
Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi
• Pierce Gardner with Dunham (2011)Managing Organizational Behaviour.
Cengage Learning India.

ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 102 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:

Participants in this course will develop the essential ability of all managers, to use complex
accounting information as a platform for decision-making. As the course unfolds, participants
will build an increasingly sophisticated level of understanding of the language of accounting
and its key concepts. In addition the course develops skills in interpreting earnings
statements, balance sheets, and cash flow reports. This ability to analyze financial statements
will enable participants to deal more effectively with strategic options for their businesses or
business units.

Course Contents:

Module I: Accounting Basics

Introduction, Foundations, Accounting policies, Accounting and management control,
Branches of accounting, Recording of transactions and classification, Trial Balance & Errors,
Cash book

Module II: Final Accounts

Preparation, Adjustments, Analysis, Depreciation Accounting, Reserves & Provisions. Form
and contents of financial statements with reference to Indian Companies Act.

Module III: Financial Statement Analysis

Relation and Comparison of Accounting data and using financial statement information, Ratio
Analysis, Cash flow analysis. Determination of Existing and future capital requirement.

Module IV: Cost Accounting

Elements of cost, Cost Classification and Allocation, Cost Sheet

Module V: Management Accounting

Emergence of Management Accounting, Marginal Costing and Cost Volume Profit Analysis,
Budgeting & Variance Analysis.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Bhattacharya, S.K. and Dearden, J ( 2006),Accounting for Management,

Vikas Publishing House
• Narayanaswamy R (2005),Finanacial Accounting – A Managerial
Perspective, Prentice Hall of India.
• Maheshwari S N and S K Maheshwari (2006), Accounting for Management,
Vikas Pub. House.
• Tulsian, P.C (2006),Financial Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill.
• Banerjee, A (2005), Financial Accounting, Excel Books.
• Ghosh,T.P (2005), Fundamentals of Management Accounting, Excel Books
 ECONOMIC ANALYSIS

Course Code: MBA 103 Credit Units: 04

Course Objective:

To familiarize the students with theoretical concepts of modern Economic Analysis so that
they can use these as inputs in managerial decision making process. Emphasis would be laid
on the understanding of key economic variables both at micro and macro level which
influence the business operations and strategies of the firm and the business environment
under which they operate.

Course Contents:

Module I: Theory of Demand and Supply

Nature and scope of economic analysis: its relevance for managerial decision making,
Demand analysis: nature of demand for a product- individual demand and market demand,
demand by market segmentation. Demand function and determinants of demand. Supply
function: determinants of supply of a product, law of supply. Elasticity of supply.
Concept of elasticity of demand- income, cross, price and advertizing elasticity. Theorems on
the price elasticity of demand. Applications of the concept of price elasticity of demand in
business decisions. Demand forecasting-need for forecasting and techniques of forecasting.
Cost concepts: costs relevant for management decision making. Economies of scale:
internal and external. Cost function: cost and output relationship.

Module II: Theory of Production and Cost

Production analysis: Production function-neo-classical, Cobb- Douglas, Leontief. Least cost
combination of inputs for a firm. Concept of an isoquant-smooth curvature and right angle.
Returns to scale and returns to a factor. Expansion path of a firm. Cost Analysis: Cost
relevant for management decision making. Economies of scale: Cost Function: Cost and
output relationship. An Analysis of the Objectives of a Business Firm: Profit Maximization
Model, Baumoul’s Sales Maximization Model, Marris’s Model of ‘Managerial Enterprise’
Williamson’s Model Of ‘Managerial Discretion.

Module III: Market Structure: Price and Output Decisions

Pricing and Output decisions – Perfectly Competitive and Monopoly Market Pricing and Output
Decisions- Under Monopolistically Competitive Market- Product Differentiation; Price
Discriminating Monopolist; Models of Oligopolistic Market: Price Rigidity – The Kinky Demand
Curve Model Interdependence - The Cournot Model, Price Leadership Models, Cartels and
Collusion.

Module IV: Macro Economics Analysis

Economic Policy and Analysis: Macro Economic Variables and Functional Relationships.
Business Environment: Factors Influencing the Business Environment. National Income
Analysis. Models of Circular Flow of Money-Incorporating Savings Investment, Foreign Trade
and Government Sector. Consumption Function, Saving Function and investment Function.
Concepts of Investment Multiplier. Factors Influencing Consumption Function. Demand and
Supply of Money: Transaction, Precautionary and Speculative Demand for Money; Liquidity
preference function; Components of Money Supply. Business Cycles: An Analysis of
Fluctuation in the level of Economic Activity. Phases of Business Cycles.

Inflation and Deflation: Demand – Pull and Cost – Push Inflation. Impact of Inflation . Analysis
of Policies to control inflation. Deflation. Monetary Policy: Objectives of Monetary Policy.
Function of Central Bank. Credit Policy and its implications on the Corporate Sector. Fiscal
Policy: meaning, objectives and impact on economy. Money Market, Capital Market and
Foreign Exchange Market.

Examination Scheme:
 Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Gupta, G.S. (2006), Managerial Economics, Tata McGraw Hill

• Peterson, H.C and Lewis, W.C. (2005), Managerial Economics, Prentice Hall of India
• R Ferguson, R., Ferguson, G.J and Rothschild, R. (1993) Business Economics, Macmillan
India.
• Chandra, P.(2006), Project: Preparation, Appraisal, Implementation and Review, Tata
McGraw Hill.

MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 104 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:

The objective of this course is to provide the students exposure to modern marketing
concepts, tools, and techniques, and help them develop abilities and skills required for the
performance of marketing functions.

Course Contents:

Module I: Understanding Marketing in New Perspective

Fundamentals of Marketing, Customer Value and Satisfaction, Customer Delight,
Conceptualizing Tasks and Philosophies of Marketing Management, Value Chain, Scanning the
Marketing Environment, Marketing Mix Elements, Difference between marketing and Selling,
Relationship marketing, Social marketing, Strategic Planning in marketing, formulating the
marketing plan.
•
Module II: Analyzing Consumers & Selecting Markets
The factors influencing consumer behavior. The stages in the buying process, the buying
decision making process, factors effecting the buying decision., Market Segmentations, Levels
of Market Segmentations, Patterns, Procedures, Requirement for Effective Segmentation,
Evaluating the Market Segments, Selecting the Market Segments, Tool for Competitive
Differentiation, Developing a Positioning Strategy.

Module III: Managing Product & Pricing Strategies

Classification of products, New Product development, stages of product development,
Adoption process, Product mix decisions and line management, Length, width and depth of a
line, line analysis, and brand management, product life cycle, stages in lifecycle and factors
affecting each stage, Managing product life cycles. Setting the price, adapting the price,
initiating and responding the price changes,
•
Module VI: Designing: Managing the Integrated Communication
• Channel functions and flows. Channel design decisions. Channel management decisions.
Channel dynamics; vertical horizontal and multi channel marketing systems. Market
Logistics decisions. Effective Communication, Integrated Marketing Communication,
Marketing Communication Process, Promotion mix, Advertising, Personal Selling, Sales
Promotion and Publicity and Public Relations, Direct Marketing,
Module V: Emerging Trends in Marketing
An Introduction to Internet Marketing, Multi Level Marketing, E-Marketing, Green Marketing,
Event Marketing, Types of Events, Sponsorship, Cause Related Marketing, Marketing for Non
Profit Organizations Marketing Strategies for Leaders, Challenges, Followers and Nichers

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Kotler, Keller, Koshy, Jha, (2008), Marketing Management– A South Asian Perspective,
Pearson India Pvt.
• Kurtz, (2008) Principles of Marketing, Cengage Learning, India,
• S. Neelamegham, (2009), Marketing In India,Vikas publishing house,
• Biplo Bose, (2008), Marketing Management, Himalaya Publishing House.
• Paul Baines, Chris Fill, Kelly Page, (2009), Marketing, Oxford University Press
• Winner (2009), Marketing Management, Pearson India Pvt.
• William L. Pride and O.C. Ferrell, (1993) Marketing Concepts and Strategies, Boston,
Houghton Mifflin.
• Czinkota and Kotabe, ( 2007) Marketing Management, Cengage Learning, India
• Evans, (2008), Marketing Management, Cengage Learning,India
• Rajan Saxena, (2010) , Marketing Management,Tata McGraw Hill
 INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY FOR MANAGERS
Course Code: MBA 105 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
This course will expose students to developments in computer technology and understand the
working of a computer system. It will introduce end-user computing and build skills in using IT
and understanding various technologies like internet, telecom, DBMS concepts, e-commerce
etc. The course will expose the students to the latest trends in computer.

Course Contents:

Module I: Modern Computer Systems

Evolution of Computer Systems, Input, output and storage technologies, Computer Assisted
Control and Automation, (e.g. Delhi Metro , Digitally Controlled Car engines etc.), Computer
Controlled Biometric/RFID based Access Control , Contemporary hardware and software
platforms(Open Source, Web Software etc.), Storage of Data Resources

Module II: Data Resource Management

Introduction to DBMS, Benefits of DBMS over traditional file system, Types of DBMS,
Application of DBMS using MS-ACCESS / ORACLE as a tool for understanding of DBMS
concepts. SQL Query handling, Forms, Concept of Data Warehouses and Data Marts,
Introduction to Data Centers. Storage Technologies and Architecture (DAT, NAS, SAN etc. ).
Live examples of storage strategies of companies like Google, Amazon Wal-Mart dealing with
storage crisis

Module III: Telecommunications and Computer Networks

Networked Enterprise :- Components, Types of networks, Advantages of Network
Environment, Business Uses of Internet, Intranet and Extranet, Web 2.0/3.0,
Distributed/Cloud/Grid Computing, GSM & CDMA, GPRS ,3G & 4G technologies, VOIP and
IPTV.

Module IV: Electronic Commerce Systems

Introduction to e-Commerce and M-Commerce, Advantages and Disadvantages of each.
Concept of B2B, B2C, C2C , with examples. Concept of Internet Banking and Online Shopping,
Electronic Payment Systems. Project Discussion:- Development of e-commerce store (Web
Site Development, Internet Publicity, Payment Gateway, Packaging & Delivery , After Sales
Support) .

Module V: e-governance
Concept of e-governance, World Perspective, Indian Perspective, Technologies for e-
governance, e-governance as an effective tool to manage the country’s citizens and resources,
Advantages and Disadvantage of E-governance, E-governance perspective in India.
Discussion on MCA21 Project, Bhoomi etc. .

Module VI: Security Management

The Information Security, System Vulnerability and Abuse, Security Threats (Malicious
Software, Hacking etc.) and counter measure. Definition of Cyber Crime and Types. Antivirus,
Firewalls, Anti-Spyware, Security Audit, Discussion on Overview of IT-ACT 2000.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Norton P (2010), Introduction to Computers, Tata McGraw-Hill

• Potter T (2010), Introduction to Computers, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt Ltd
• Morley D & Parker CS (2009), Understanding Computers – Today and Tomorrow, Thompson
Press
• Jawadekar, WS (2009); Management Information System; Tata Mc Graw Hill
• Mclead R & Schell G (2009), Management Information Systems; Pearson Prentice Hall
• O’Brein, JA (2009); Introduction to Information Systems; Tata Mc Graw Hill

QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES IN MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 106 Credit Units:
04

Course Objective:
The aim of this course is to develop the understanding of various statistical tools used for
decisions making and how each applies to and can be used in the business environment using
contemporary software.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Application of Statistics in Business; Classification of Data; Interpretation of computer output of
diagrammatic and graphical presentation of data, measures of central tendency, measures of
dispersion and skewness.

Module II: Probability and Probability Distributions

Concepts of Probability, Probability Rules, Probability of an event under condition of Statistical
Independence and Statistical dependence, Baye’s Theorem; Probability Distributions: Mean or
Expected value of random variable, Variance and Standard Deviation of random variables; Binomial
Probability Distribution, Poisson Probability Distribution and Normal Probability Distribution.

Module III: Sampling and Sampling Distribution

Sampling: Basic Concept, Types of Sampling Errors and Precautions, Parameter and Statistic,
Sampling Distribution of the mean, Sampling distribution of proportion, Estimation – point estimation,
Interval Estimation of the mean - σ known & σ unknown cases, interval estimation of the proportion,
determining of sample size for estimating population mean µ, determination of sample size for
estimating proportion p.

Module IV: Tests of Hypothesis

Null and Alternative hypothesis, One-Tailed and Two-Tailed tests of hypothesis, Type I and Type II
error, population mean : σ known, population mean : σ unknown, population proportion, rejection rule
using p – Value approach, rejection rule using critical value approach. Hypothesis Testing to compare
two populations: Test for two population means (Independent Samples), Tests for two population
means (Dependent Samples), Tests for two population proportions (Independent Samples), Tests for
two population variances (Dependent Samples), F-test, Interpretation of computer output of ANOVA,
Chi – Square Test

Module V: Forecasting Techniques

Correlation - Karl Person, Spearman’s Rank methods, Regression Analysis – Estimated regression
equation, least squares method, coefficient of determination, interpretation of computer output for
Regression, Time Series Analysis- Variation in Time Series, Numerical application of trend analysis.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Anderson D.R; Sweeny D.J, Williams T.A (2002), Statistics for Business and Economics,
Cengage learning.
• Kazinier L.J., & Pohl N.F. (2004), Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, New York:
McGraw Hill.
• Levin Richard I. & Rubin David S.(1998), Statistics for Management, Pearson Education
India
• Stephen .K.C. (2002), Applied Business Statistics: Text, Problems and Cases. New York:
Harper and Row.
• Sharma, J.K. (2007), Business Statistics, Pearson Education India.

LEGAL ASPECTS OF BUSINESS

Course Code: MBA 107 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
To give insight to various Legal Aspects of Business so that the students are able to interpret the provisions of
some of the important laws and apply the same in commercial and industrial enterprises.

Course Contents:
Module I: Indian Contract Act, 1872
Nature and kinds of Contracts, Concepts related to offer, Acceptance and Consideration, Principles
Governing Capacity of Parties and Free Consent, Legality of Objects, Performance and Discharge of
Contract, Breach of Contract and its Remedies,Special contracts of Bailment and Pledge, Indemnity
and Guaratnee, Contract of Agency.

Module II: Sale of Goods Act, 1930

Sale and Agreement to Sell, Hire Purchase – Pledge – Mortgage – Hypothecation Lease.Goods – Different types
of Goods, Passing of Property in Goods, Conditions and Warranties, Doctrine of Caveat emptor, Rights of an
unpaid Seller.

Module III: Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881

Meaning of Negotiability and Negotiable Instruments – Cheques Bill of Exchange and Promissory Note –
Crossing of Cheques – Endorsement – Dishonour of Cheques.

Module VI: Company Law

Companies Act, 1956-Meaning and types of companies, Formation of a company, Memorandum and Articles of
Association, Share Capital and Shareholders, Prospectus and Issue of Shares, Buy Back of Shares, Debentures,
Company Meetings and Proceedings, Powers, Duties, Liabilities of Directors and Winding up of Company.

Module V: Indian Partnership Act, 1932

Meaning and definitions, Registration of partnerships, Types of partners, Dissolution, Limited Liability
Partnership Act, 1932 – Meaning & definitions, Meaning of designated partner, Registration of LLP, Types of
partners, Dissolution

Module VI: Intellectual Property Laws (IPR)

Overview of Law & Procedure relating to Patents, Trade marks & Copyrights, Infringement

Examination Scheme:
 Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Gulshan SS (2003), Elements of Mercantile Law, Excel Books, N. Delhi.

• Kuchhal MS (2010), Business Law, Vikas Publication
• Tulsian PC, (2002), Relevance of Business Law, Tata McGraw Hills.
• Singh Avtar, (2006), Elements of Mercantile Law, S.Chand & Sons.

Course Title: BC I - Business Communication for Managers Annexure’

CD-01’

Credit Units: 1 L T P/ SW/F TOTAL

Course Code: 142 S W CREDIT
Course Objective: UNITS
1 0 0 0 1

This course is designed to hone the communication skills of the budding

managers and enable them to be an integral part of the corporate
communication network.
Prerequisites: NIL
Course Contents / Syllabus:
1 Module I The Nature and Process of Communication 40%
Weightage
• Defining Communication
o Classification of Communication
o Creation of Relevant Content and Context in
Communication
• The Purpose of Communication
o Communication to Inform
o Communication to Persuade
• The Process of Communication
o The Linear Concept of communication
o Aristotle’s Model
o The Shannon-Weaver Model
• Principles of Communication
o 7 C’s of Communication
2 Module II Communication Networks in the Organization 30%
Weightage
• Types of Communication
o Formal Communication
 o Informal Communication
• Barriers to Communication
o Linguistic Barrier
o Cultural Barrier
o Socio-Psychological Barrier
o Physiological Barrier
o Incorrect Assumptions
o Information Overload
o Semantic Barriers
3 Module III Cross- Functional Communication 30%
Weightage
Organizational Communication
• The Importance of Communication in Management
• Important Functions of Management
• How Communication is Used by Managers
4 Student Learning Outcomes:
• Students will understand the process and nature of communication.
• They will understand the barriers to effective communication and
learn to remove them.
• Students will become masters of Formal and Informal Communication
5 Pedagogy for Course Delivery
• Workshop
• Presentation
• Group Discussion
• Lectures
6 Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
Theory L/T Lab/Practical/Studio End Term
(%) (%) Examination
100% NA 60% Total
100%
Theory Assessment (L&T):
Continuous Assessment/Internal
Assessment End Term
Components CT GD GP Attendance Examination
(Drop down)
Weightage 10% 10% 15% 5% 60% Total
(%) 100%

Text: A. Ashley, The Oxford Handbook of Commercial Correspondence,

Oxford, 2003.
Guffey, Ellen Mary, Business Communication, Thomson (South Western)
Meenakshi Raman &Prakash Singh, Business Communication, Oxford,
2006.
Reference: M. John Penrose, Business Communication for Managers: An
Advanced Approach, Thomson, 2003
Ronald B. R. Adler, Understanding Human Communication, Oxford,
2005.
Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals
 SELF-DEVELOPMENT AND INTERPERSONAL SKILLS

Course Code: MBA 143 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
This course aims at imparting an understanding of:
• Self and the process of self exploration
• Learning strategies for development of a healthy self esteem
• Importance of attitudes and their effect on work behavior
• Effective management of emotions and building interpersonal competence.
Course Contents:

Module I: Understanding Self (2 Hours)

• Formation of self concept
• Dimension of Self
• Components of self
• Self Competency

Module II: Self-Esteem: Sense of Worth (2 Hours)

• Meaning and Nature of Self Esteem
• Characteristics of High and Low Self Esteem
• Importance & need of Self Esteem
• Self Esteem at work
• Steps to enhance Self Esteem

Module III: Emotional Intelligence: Brain Power (2 Hours)

• Introduction to EI
• Difference between IQ, EQ and SQ
• Relevance of EI at workplace
• Self assessment, analysis and action plan

Module IV: Managing Emotions and Building Interpersonal Competence (2 Hours)

• Need and importance of Emotions
• Healthy and Unhealthy expression of emotions
• Anger: Conceptualization and Cycle
• Developing emotional and interpersonal competence
• Self assessment, analysis and action plan
Module V: Leading Through Positive Attitude (2 Hours)
• Understanding Attitudes
• Formation of Attitudes
• Types of Attitudes
• Effects of Attitude on
- Behavior
- Perception
- Motivation
- Stress
- Adjustment
- Time Management
- Effective Performance
- Building Positive Attitude

Examination Scheme:
Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for
Test (CT) Success
(JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25
Text & References:

• Towers, Marc: Self Esteem, 1st Edition 1997, American Media

• Pedler Mike, Burgoyne John, Boydell Tom, A Manager’s Guide to Self-Development: Second edition,
McGraw-Hill Book company.
• Covey, R. Stephen: Seven habits of Highly Effective People, 1992 Edition, Simon & Schuster Ltd.,

• Khera Shiv: You Can Win, 1st Edition, 1999, Macmillan

• Gegax Tom, Winning in the Game of Life: 1 st Edition, Harmony Books
• Chatterjee Debashish, Leading Consciously: 1998 1 st Edition, Viva Books Pvt.Ltd.,
• Dr. Dinkmeyer Don, Dr. Losoncy Lewis, The Skills of Encouragement: St. Lucie Press.
• Singh, Dalip, 2002, Emotional Intelligence at work; First Edition, Sage Publications.
• Goleman, Daniel: Emotional Intelligence, 1995 Edition, Bantam Books
• Goleman, Daniel: Working with E.I., 1998 Edition, Bantam Books.
 FRENCH - I

Course Code: MBA 144 Credit

Units: 02

Course Objective:
To familiarize the students with the French language
• with the phonetic system
• with the accents
• with the manners
• with the cultural aspects
To enable the students
• to establish first contacts
• to identify things and talk about things

Course Contents:
Unité 1, 2: pp. 01 to 37

Contenu lexical: Unité 1: Premiers contacts

1. Nommer des objets, s’adresser poliment à quelqu’un
2. se présenter, présenter quelqu’un
3. entrer en contact : dire tu ou vous, épeler
4. dire où on travaille, ce qu’on fait
5. communiquer ses coordonnées
Unité 2: Objets
1. identifier des objets, expliquer leur usage
2. Dire ce qu’on possède, faire un achat, discuter le prix.
3. Monter et situer des objets
4. Décrire des objets
5. comparer des objets, expliquer ses préférences

Contenu grammatical: 1. articles indéfinis, masculin et féminin des noms, pluriel des
noms
2. Je, il, elle sujets, verbes parler, habiter, s’appeler, être, avoir,
masculin et
féminin des adjectifs de nationalité
3. tu, vous sujets, verbes parler, aller, être, c’est moi/c’est toi
4. verbes faire, connaître, vendre, c’est/il est + profession, qui est-
ce ? qu’est-
ce que ... ?
5. article défini, complément du nom avec de, quel interrogatif
6. adjectifs possessifs (1), pour + infinitif
7. verbe avoir, ne...pas/pas de, question avec est-ce que ?,
question négative,
réponse Si
8. Prépositions de lieu, il y a/qu’est-ce qu’il y a
9. accord et place des adjectifs qualificatifs, il manque...
10. comparatifs et superlatifs, pronoms toniques, pronom on

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Français.Com (Débutant)

 GERMAN - I
Course Code: MBA 145 Credit
Units: 02
Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of grammar,
which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic
opportunities available in Germany

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Self introduction: heissen, kommen, wohnwn, lernen, arbeiten, trinken, etc.
All personal pronouns in relation to the verbs taught so far.
Greetings: Guten Morgen!, Guten Tag!, Guten Abend!, Gute Nacht!, Danke sehr!, Danke!,
Vielen Dank!, (es tut mir Leid!),
Hallo, wie geht’s?: Danke gut!, sehr gut!, prima!, ausgezeichnet!,
Es geht!, nicht so gut!, so la la!, miserabel!

Module II: Interviewspiel

To assimilate the vocabulary learnt so far and to apply the words and phrases in short
dialogues in an interview – game for self introduction.

Module III: Phonetics

Sound system of the language with special stress on Dipthongs

Module IV: Countries, nationalities and their languages

To make the students acquainted with the most widely used country names, their nationalitie
and the language spoken in that country.

Module V: Articles
The definite and indefinite articles in masculine, feminine and neuter gender. All Vegetables,
Fruits, Animals, Furniture, Eatables, modes of Transport

Module VI: Professions

To acquaint the students with professions in both the genders with the help of the verb “sein”.

Module VII: Pronouns

Simple possessive pronouns, the use of my, your, etc.
The family members, family Tree with the help of the verb “to have”

Module VIII: Colours

All the color and color related vocabulary – colored, colorful, colorless, pale, light, dark, etc.

Module IX: Numbers and calculations – verb “kosten”

The counting, plural structures and simple calculation like addition, subtraction, multiplication
and division to test the knowledge of numbers.
“Wie viel kostet das?”

Module X: Revision list of Question pronouns

W – Questions like who, what, where, when, which, how, how many, how much, etc.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch

• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant - 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1,2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH – I
Course Code: MBA 146 Credit
Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire the relevance of the Spanish language in today’s global context,
how to greet each other. How to present / introduce each other using basic verbs and
vocabulary.

Course Contents:
Module I
A brief history of Spain, Latin America, the language, the culture…and the relevance of
Spanish language in today’s global context.
Introduction to alphabets.

Module II
Introduction to ‘Saludos’ (How to greet each other. How to present/ introduce each other).
Goodbyes (despedidas)
The verb llamarse and practice of it.

Module III
Concept of Gender and Number
Months of the years, days of the week, seasons. Introduction to numbers 1-100, Colors,
Revision of numbers and introduction to ordinal numbers.

Module IV
Introduction to SER and ESTAR (both of which mean To Be).Revision of ‘Saludos’ and
‘Llamarse’. Some adjectives, nationalities, professions, physical/geographical location, the
fact that spanish adjectives have to agree with gender and number of their nouns. Exercises
highlighting usage of Ser and Estar.

Module V
Time, demonstrative pronoun (Este/esta, Aquel/aquella etc)

Module VI
Introduction to some key AR /ER/IR ending regular verbs.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español, En Directo I A
• Español Sin Fronteras
 JAPANESE - I
Course Code: MBA 147 Credit
Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to learn the basic rules of grammar and Japanese language to be used in daily life that
will later help them to strengthen their language.

Course Contents:
Module I: Salutations
Self introduction, Asking and answering to small general questions

Module II: Cardinal Numbers

Numerals, Expression of time and period, Days, months

Module III: Tenses

Present Tense, Future tense

Module IV: Prepositions

Particles, possession, Forming questions

Module V: Demonstratives
Interrogatives, pronoun and adjectives

Module VI: Description

Common phrases, Adjectives to describe a person

Module VII: Schedule

Time Table, everyday routine etc.

Module VIII: Outings

Going to see a movie, party, friend’s house etc.

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the basic language describing above mentioned topics

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments and role-plays will support classroom
teaching

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – I
Course Code: MBA 148 Credit
Units: 02

Course Objective:
There are many dialects spoken in China, but the language which will help you through
wherever you go is Mandarin, or Putonghua, as it is called in Chinese. The most widely spoken
forms of Chinese are Mandarin, Cantonese, Gan, Hakka, Min, Wu and Xiang. The course aims
at familiarizing the student with the basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin, the
language of Mainland China. The course aims at training students in practical skills and
nurturing them to interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Show pictures, dialogue and retell.
Getting to know each other.
Practicing chart with Initials and Finals. (CHART – The Chinese Phonetic Alphabet Called
“Hanyu Pinyin” in Mandarin Chinese.)
Practicing of Tones as it is a tonal language.
Changes in 3rd tone and Neutral Tone.

Module II
Greetings
Let me Introduce
The modal particle “ne”.
Use of Please ‘qing” – sit, have tea ………….. etc.
A brief self introduction – Ni hao ma? Zaijian!
Use of “bu” negative.

Module III
Attributives showing possession
How is your Health? Thank you
Where are you from?
A few Professions like – Engineer, Businessman, Doctor, Teacher, Worker.
Are you busy with your work?
May I know your name?

Module IV
Use of “How many” – People in your family?
Use of “zhe” and “na”.
Use of interrogative particle “shenme”, “shui”, “ma” and “nar”.
How to make interrogative sentences ending with “ma”.
Structural particle “de”.
Use of “Nin” when and where to use and with whom. Use of guixing.
Use of verb “zuo” and how to make sentences with it.

Module V
Family structure and Relations.
Use of “you” – “mei you”.
Measure words
Days and Weekdays.
Numbers.
Maps, different languages and Countries.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• “Elementary Chinese Reader Part I” Lesson 1-10

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 201 Credit Units:

04

Course Objective:
The objective of this course is to help the students develop an understanding of the
dimensions of the management of human resources, with particular reference to HRM policies
and practices in India.

Course Contents:
Module I: Human Resource Management in Perspective
Nature and scope of HRM, HRM functions, HRM models, understanding concepts of Personnel
Management, Human Resource Development and Strategic Human Resource Management, HR
Environment, Changing Role of HR.

Module II: Meeting Human Resource Requirements

Job Analysis, Job Description, Strategic Human Resource Planning, Recruitment, Selection
Process, Methods – Interview, Tests, Placement and Induction

Module III: Training & Developing of Employees

Training and Development, Understanding of Performance Management Systems, Competency
Mapping, Potential Appraisal, Career Development

Module IV: Managing Compensation

Job evaluation, Methods of Job Evaluation, Strategic Compensation, Equity Theory,
Components of Pay Structure, Designing and Administration of Wage and Salary Structure,
Wage Regulations in India

Module V: Employee Relations

Overview of Industrial Relations, Industrial disputes, Collective Bargaining, Workers
Participation and Management, Grievance handling

Module VI: Emerging Trends in HRM

Overview of Human Resource Information System (HRIS), Introduction to HR Audit, IHRM
Practices, Cross-Cultural and Diversity Management, Work-life integration, Human Resource
Outsourcing

Examination Scheme:
Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Aswathappa. K, (2011), Human Resource Management - Text & Cases, (6th Edn.), McGraw
Hill, New Delhi
• Dessler G (2005). Human Resource Management, Pearson Education, India
• Mathis R L and Jackson J H (2006). Human Resource Management, (10 th Edn.) Cengage
Learning, Indian Print.
• Snell S and Bohlander G (2007). Human Resource Management, Cengage Learning
(Thomson Learning), Indian Edition
 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 202 Credit Units:

04
Course Objective:
The objective of this course is to develop an understanding of short-term and long-term
financial decisions of a firm and various financial tools used in taking these decisions. It is
also aimed to develop the understanding of the financial environment in which a company
operates and how it copes with it.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
A Framework for Financial Decision-Making- Financial Environment, Changing Role of Finance
Managers, Objectives of the firm.

Module II: Valuation Concepts

Time Value of Money, Risk and Return, Financial and Operating Leverage.

Module III: Financing Decisions

Sources of Finance: Short term, Long term, Capital Structure and Cost of Capital, Marginal
Cost of Capital.

Module IV: Capital Budgeting

Estimation of Cash Flows, Criteria for Capital Budgeting Decisions, Issues Involved in Capital
Budgeting, Risk analysis in Capital Budgeting – An Introduction.

Module V: Working Capital Management

Factors Influencing Working Capital Policy, Operating Cycle Analysis, Management of
Inventory, Management of Receivables, Management of Cash and Marketable Securities,
Financing of Working Capital.

Module VI: Dividend Policy Decisions

An introduction: Different Schools of Thought on Dividend Policy.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Chandra, P. (2006), Financial Management: Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw Hill.
• Damodaran, A.(2004), Corporate Finance: Theory and Practice, Wiley & Sons.
• Van Horne, J.C. (2006), Financial Management and Policy, Prentice Hall of India.
• Brearly, R. A. and Myers, S. C. (2006), Principles of Corporate Finance, Tata McGraw Hill
• Pike, R and Neale, B. (1998), Corporate Finance and Investment: Decisions and Strategies,
Prentice Hall of India
• Rustagi, R.P. (1999), Financial Management: Theory, Concepts and Problems, Galgotia
Publishing Company.
• Pandey, I.M. (1999), Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House
 INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS AND PRACTICES

Course Code: MBA 203 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
This course provides a comprehensive overview of the role that international business plays
in the global economy. This knowledge shall help to understand the complexities, risks and
opportunities of international business and provide a global perspective on international trade,
including foreign investments, impact of financial markets, international marketing, and the
operation of MNC’s. Learn business practices organizations adopt to tap global opportunities.
Create awareness on career opportunities that exist in international business.

Course Contents:
Module I: Globalisation & Multinational Corporations
Globalisation - Meaning and implications ; Globalisation of markets and production ; Drivers of
Globalisation ;
Modes of entry into international business; The globalisation debate - arguments for and
against ; Differences between domestic and international business ; Multinational
Corporations- Definition, Types, Organisation, Design & Structures, Head quarters and
Subsidiary relations.

Module II: Introduction to International Trade

Theories- Theory of Mercantilism, Absolute advantage, Comparative advantage, Hecksher-
Ohlin theory, The new product life cycle theory, The new trade theory, Porter’s diamond model
; Instruments of International trade policy – tariffs, subsidies, local content requirements,
administrative policies, anti dumping policies, political and economic arguments for
intervention ; GATT, WTO, IPR, TRIPS, TRIMS, GATS, Ministerial Conferences, Uruguay round
of negotiations; Introduction to International Supply chain management & Logistics;
Introduction to current EXIM policy.

Module III: International Business Environment

Implication of environment differences: a) Economic factors – the determinants of economic
development ; b) Political and Legal factors c) Cultural factors -Culture, Values, Norms,
Social, Religious, Ethical, Language, Education; Regional Integrations, Trading Blocks -
European Union, ASEAN, APEC, NAFTA, SAARC, ANDEAN PACT and MERCOSUR ; Global
sourcing and its impact on Indian Industry - India’s competitive advantage & potential threats
in industries like IT, Textiles, Gems & Jewellery, Engineering etc.

Module IV: Introduction to International Financial Systems

International Financial Markets – Equity, Debt, Foreign Exchange & Commodities; Role &
funding facilities of World Bank & International Monetary System; International Financial Risks
of Trade Payments, FDI’s, FII’s, Expatriation, Repatriation, Currency fluctuations etc.;
Introduction to Foreign Exchange Market – functions, nature, trading, rate determination,
currency convertibility; Introduction to Export and Import Finance – Methods of payment in
International Trade.

Module V: Introduction to International Business Practices

Country Risk Analysis – How to assess Political, Social & Economic risks;
International Marketing – Potential, Barriers, Entry strategies, Market
selection, localization, organizational structures in order to compete
effectively globally; Decision-making and controlling practices; Developing
individual/team/organizational skills, knowledge & capabilities in
intercultural communication, international marketing, cross-cultural
operations, international negotiations & settlement of international business
disputes; Indian companies becoming Multinationals – Potential, Need and
Problems; International Regulatory & Dispute Settlement Mechanisms;
Practices in Social Responsibility and Ethics in International operations .

Examination Scheme:
 Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Daniels, J.D.,Radebaugh L.H.,Sullivan D.P. & Prashant Salwan (2011), International Business:
Environments and Operations, Pearson Hall, Delhi
• Sundaram and Black, (2009), International Business Environment, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
• Bhalla and Raju, (2010), International Business Environment, Sage Publication
• Apte, P. G. (1998), International Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill
• Francis Cherulinam, (2008), International Business, Himalaya Publishing House
• Charles Hill,(2007), International Business, McGraw Hill
BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS

Course Code: MBA 204 Credit

Units: 04

Course Objective:
The course aims to provide a thorough understanding of the essential characteristics
and the basic tenets of research methodology and report preparation. The course will
focus on quantitative and descriptive research methods and techniques that are
essential for the validity and reliability of the research process. The course will
identify and review the components essential for preparation of research proposals,
research reports, business proposals and feasibility studies in order to develop report
writing and formal presentation skills of the research projects undertaken.

Learning Outcomes:
On completion of this module students will have:
• Considered the nature of research methods and research methodologies
• Evaluated and justified the research methodologies to be employed
• Identified the components and problems/constraints underlying a research
project and report proposal
• Developed the ability to analyze, interpret and conclude research findings and
provide relevant recommendations
• Carried out a formal presentation on how to write a project report.

Course Contents:

Module I: Research Methodology and Research Methods

Objective, significance and types of research, Research Methods vis-à-vis
Methodology, Research Process and criterion for good research, Ethics in Business
Research

Module II: Research Problem and Research Design

Identifying and Defining the Research Problem, Developing the Hypotheses, Meaning
of Research Design, Steps to Design the Research

Module III: Sampling Design and Scaling Techniques

Census and sample survey, Criteria for selecting a sampling procedure, Criteria for
selecting a sampling procedure, Measurement and Scaling techniques, Classification
and importance of scaling techniques

Module IV: Data Collection and Field Force

Field work procedure. Common sources of Error in the Field Work. Minimizing
Fieldwork Errors, Tabulation of the Collected Data.
Module V: Statistical Inference- Test of Significance
Procedure for Testing a Hypothesis, Parametric Test: Z-test, F-test, T-test, Non-
Parametric:
Chi-Square Test

Module VI: Design and Analysis of Experiments

Basic Principles of ANOVA, ANOVA Technique, Interpreting ANOVA (One Way and
Two
Way ANOVA) and its application in various fields of management, Completely
Randomized Design, Randomised Block Design.
Multivariate Techniques-Factor Analysis, Conjoint Analysis, Cluster Analysis.
Discrimental Analysis, Multidimensional Scaling.

Module VII: Report Writing

Pre-Writing Considerations, Format of the Marketing Research Report, Common
Problems Encountered when Preparing the Marketing Research Report. Presenting
the Research Report.
Learning Methods:
Occasional, non-graded homework sets will be handed out in class. It is also
expected that students will work the problems as the part of assignments.

The class will be doing Cases throughout the semester. Students will prepare three
written cases in small groups of 4-6 students. There will be presentations also in
which the student have to collect, collate and analyze the data.
Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Cooper, Donald R and Schindler, Ramela (2000) Business Research
Methods, Tata Mc Graw Hill
References:
• Kothari C R, (1990) Research Methodology: Methods & Techniques, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt.Ltd., 1978.
• Levin & Rubin (2004), Statistics for Management, 8th Ed, Prentice Hall of India
• Srivastava, Shenoy and Sharma (2002)., Quantitative Techniques for Business
Decisions, 4th Ed , Allied Publishers
• Dr .S. Shajahan ( 2004) , Research Methods for Management 2nd Edition, Jaico
Publishers
• Ranjit Kumar, (2005), Research Methodology, Pearson Education
 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 205 Credit
Units: 04

Course Objective:
The aim of this course is to develop understanding of the strategic and functional issues in the
operational environment of any organization, of the various decisions involving the
operational activities, and of the methods which enable taking the best possible alternative
decision.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Introduction of Operations Function and Operations Management; Input/output transformation; Operations as
Competitive Advantage

Module II: Strategic Decisions

Planning and Designing the Products/Services; Process Design and Planning; Designing the Facility Location
and Layout; Selection and Management of Product Technology; Long-term and Short-term Capacity Planning,
Project Management (PERT/CPM)-Critical Path, Activity time estimation, Crashing of project duration

Module III: Operating Decisions

Operations Scheduling and Sequencing, Aggregate Planning and Master Production Scheduling,
Probabilistic Inventory Control Models, Materials Requirement Planning.

Module IV: Controlling and Improvement Decision

Productivity, Efficiency and Effectiveness; Measuring and Improving the Operations Processes; Green
operations management

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Chase, Jacob, Aquilano, Agarwal (2008),Operations Management for Competitive

Advantage, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Evans & Collier (2007), Operations Management: An Integrated Goods and Service
Approach, Cengage
• Heizer, Render, Jagadeesh (2009), Operations Management, Pearson Education, India
• Klassen & Manor (2007), Cases in Operations Management, Sage Publishers
• Krajewski, Ritzman, Malhotra (2007), Operations Management: Processes and Value
Chains, Prentice-Hall
• Mahadevan (2007), Operations Management: Theory and Practice, Pearson Education,
India
• Russell and Taylor (2009), Operations Management along the Supply Chain, Wiley
• Shroeder (2009), Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, Tata
McGraw-Hill
 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE
Course Code: MBA 206 Credit Units:
03

Course Objective:
The course is designed to introduce the fundamental tools of management science and their
application to real life business problems.

Course Contents:
Module I: Linear Programming
Management Science – Basic concepts and its role in managerial decision making, Linear
Programming Problems – Modeling and Solution Methods, Duality and its Managerial Interpretation;
Transportation and Assignment Models including Travelling Salesman Problem.

Module II: Sensitivity Analysis of LP Model

Introduction, Change in Objective Function Coefficients, Change in Right Hand Side Values, Change
in Availability of resources and Addition of a new variable.

Module III: Game Theory and Decision Theory

Two-Person Zero Sum Games, Pure Strategies: Games with Saddle Point, Mixed Strategies: Games
without Saddle Point, Principle of Dominance, Solution Methods for Games without saddle point –
Algebraic Method, Arithmetic Method, Graphical Method. Decision Making under Uncertainty and risk,
EMV, EOL, EVPI, Decision Tree Analysis

Module IV: Queuing Theory

The structure of queuing system, performance measures of a queuing system, classification of
queuing models, {(M/M/1): (∞/FCFS)}, {(M/M/1): (N/FCFS)}, numerical applications of queuing
models.

Module V: Markov Chains

Characteristics of a Markov Chain, State and transition probabilities, Steady state (equilibrium
conditions), absorbing states and other applications of Markov Analysis.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Anderson David R, Sweeny Dennis J, Williams Thomas A (2007), An Introduction to

Management Science Quantitative Approaches to Decision Making, Cengage Learning.
• Render Berry, Stair Ralph M., Hanna Michel E.(2008),Quantitative Analysis for
Management, Pearson Education
• Sharma J.K. (2010), Operations Research: Theory & Application, Mac Millan India Ltd.
• Taha H.A (1998), Operations Research: An Introduction, Prentice Hall of India.
• Vohra N.D.(1998), Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw Hill
 KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 207 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
Information Systems (IS) enables new approaches to improve efficiency and efficacy of
business models. This course will equip the students with understanding of role, advantages
and components of an Information System. The objective of the course is to help students
integrate their learning from functional areas, decision making process in an organization and
role of Information Systems to have a vintage point in this competitive world.

Course Contents:
Module I: Information Systems in Business and Decision Support Process in Business
Business Process, and role of Information Systems in Business Processes, Types of
Management Support Systems, (Transaction Processing System, Management Information
System, Decision Support Systems, Executive Support Systems and Strategic Information
Systems, Components of Information Systems, Centralized and Decentralized Information
Systems
Role of Information in Decision Making Process, Steps in Decision Making, Levels of Decision
Making, Types of Decision (Structured, Semi structured & Non Structured Decisions).

Module II: Knowledge Management Concepts

Introduction to life in organizations, Concept and Characteristics of Knowledge Based
Organizations. Managing Knowledge for organizational effectiveness- Process and Methods;
Concept of Intellectual Capital and Learning Orientation in the Organizaitons; Knowledge and
Role related issues

Module III: Knowledge Management and Expert Systems

Introduction to KM, Technology behind KM, Implementation of KM in an organizations, Various
parameters of implementation, Expert Systems, DVS, OLAP – Online Analytical Processing,
Data Mining and warehousing .

Module IV: Functional Business Systems

Information and Communication Technology in Knowledge Based Organizations: HRIS –
Human Resource Information Systems for a Knoweldge Based Organizations/ Interactive and
Targeted Marketing, Sales Force Automation/ Computer Integrated Manufacturing /Online
Accounting Systems, Financial Management Systems

Module V: Cases in Knowledge Based Organizations

Comprehensive Case Study in a Knoweldge Based Organizations-Collection and Compilation
of the material by the participants under the guidance of the Resource Person.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Jawadekar, WS (2009); Management Information System; Tata Mc Graw Hill Publication

• Mclead R & Schell G (2009), Management Information Systems; Pearson Prentice Hall
• O’Brein, JA (2009); Introduction to Information Systems; Tata Mc Graw Hill Publication
• Lauden KC & Lauden JP (2010), Management Information Systems – Managing the Digital
Firm, Pearson Prentice Hall
• Oz E (2009), Management Information Systems, Cengage Learning
• Turban E, EAronson J et al. (2006), Decision Support and Business Intelligence Systems,
Prentice Hall of India
• Fernandz !B & Sabherwal R (2010); Knowledge Management – systems and Processes; PHI
Learning.

MANAGERIAL COMPETENCY AND CAREER DEVELOPMENT

Course Code: MBA 208 Non Credit Course

Course Objective:
In this course, students will actively learn and practice job-related skills vital to becoming a
successful manager in contemporary organizations. Class sessions will consist of diverse
exercises, self-assessments, role plays, etc., which help students’ evaluate and develop their
skills. It will help the students to perform well at an acceptable entry level in each skill area;
and better interact with other students, faculty, alumni and industry professionals.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to Managerial Competencies
Business Service Performance Management and Future Managers, managerial
Competencies. Values for managerial effectiveness and competencies in career development.
Individual career goals and action plan.

Module II: Identification of Career Opportunities in Various Industries

Industry scenario and identifying career opportunities. Key position competencies at entry
level in different industries and growth prospects. Career Recruitment / selection processes
in various industries and companies.

Module III: Career Development Process

Diagnostic instruments. Steps in career Development, Career Counseling. Seeking, giving and
receiving face-to-face feedback. Strategies for improving managerial competencies.
Opportunities and tactics for developing managerial competencies.

Module IV: Developing Skills for Career Prospects

How to succeed in interviews, Mock interviews and GDs. Special focus areas. Career Clusters,
Role of Mentor in career development. Importance of Entrepreneurial and leaderrship skills in
career development.

Module V: Enhancing Learning Through Experience Sharing

Experience sharing of successful industry professionals, entrepreneurs, alumni and career
specialists.

Examination Scheme:

1. Individual Growth and Team Performance 15 Marks

2. Individual Diagnostic File (Pre & Post Semester) 25

Marks

3. Group Discussion 30 Marks

4. Personal Interview Skills 30

Marks

Text & References:

• Kolb, Osland, & Rubin,(1995), Organizational Behavior, Prentice Hall

• Harnold R.Wallace,(2004) ,Personal development for life and work, Thompson Learning
• Greenhaus ,(2004), Career Management , Thompson Learning
 Annexure’ CD-01’

Course Title: BC II- Business Correspondence

L T P/ SW/F TOTAL
S W CREDIT
UNITS
Credit Units: 1 0
1 0 0 1
Course Code: 242
Course Objective: To develop the writing skills of the students so that they are
capable of communicating efficiently.
Prerequisites:
NIL
Course Contents / Syllabus:
1 Module I Inter and Intra office Communication 50%
Weightage
• Business Letters
• Memo
• Agenda
• Minutes
2 Module II Report Writing 20%
Weightage
• Purpose and Objectives
• Types and Functions
• Layout & Structure
3 Module III Job Related Communication 30%
Weightage
• Covering Letters
• Resume writing
• Profile Writing
4 Student Learning Outcomes:
Students would be equipped with powerful resume and will be able
to write effective business report and business letters.
5 Pedagogy for Course Delivery:
• Workshop
• Presentation
• Group Discussion
• Lectures
6 Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
Theory L/T Lab/Practical/Studio End Term
(%) (%) Examination
100% NA 60%
Theory Assessment (L&T):
Continuous Assessment/Internal End Term
Assessment Examination
Components CT GD GP
(Drop down) Attendance
Weightage 10% 10% 15% 5%
(%) 60%

Text:
A. Ashley, The Oxford Handbook of Commercial Correspondence,
Oxford, 2003.
 Jules Harcourt, Business Communication, Thomson, 1990.
Meenakshi Raman &Prakash Singh, Business Communication, Oxford,
2006.
Reference:
Guffey, Ellen Mary, Business Communication, Thomson (South Western)
Krizan, Merrier, and Logan, Business Communication, Thomson (India Edition)

Additional Reading:
Newspapers and Journals
 CONFLICT RESOLUTION & MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 243 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
This course aims at imparting an understanding of:

• To develop an understanding the concept of stress its causes, symptoms and

consequences.
• To develop an understanding the consequences of the stress on one’s wellness, health,
and work performance.
• Enhancing personal effectiveness and performance through effective interpersonal
communication
• Enhancing their conflict management and negotiation skills

Course Contents:

Module I: Conflict Management

• Meaning and nature of conflicts
• Types of Conflict
• Styles and Techniques of conflict management
• Conflict management and interpersonal communication

Module II: Behavioural & Interpersonal Communication

• Importance of Interpersonal Communication

• Rapport Building – NLP, Communication mode
• Steps to improve interpersonal communication
• Meaning and Nature of Behavioural Communication
• Relevance of Behavioural Communication

Module III: Relationship Management for Personal and professional Development

• Importance of relationships
• Maintaining healthy relationships
• Communication Styles
• Types of Interpersonal Relationships
Module IV: Stress Management

• Understanding of Stress & GAS Model

• Symptoms of Stress
• Individual and Organizational consequences with special focus on health
• Healthy and Unhealthy strategies for stress management
• Social support for stress management and well being
• Stress free, Successful and Happy Life
Module V: Conflict Resolution & Management

• Conflict Resolution Strategies

• Ways of Managing Conflict (Healthy & Unhealthy)
• Impact of Conflict Resolution & Management

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal

▪ Viva - Voce based on personal journal
▪ Assessment of Behavioral change as a result of training
▪ Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Examination Scheme:
Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for
Test (CT) Success
(JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25
Suggested Readings:

• Vangelist L. Anita, Mark N. Knapp, Inter Personal Communication and Human Relationships:
Third Edition, Allyn and Bacon
• Julia T. Wood. Interpersonal Communication everyday encounter
• Simons, Christine, Naylor, Belinda: Effective Communication for Managers, 1997 1 st Edition Cassel
• Goddard, Ken: Informative Writing, 1995 1 st Edition, Cassell
• Harvard Business School, Effective Communication: United States of America
• Foster John, Effective Writing Skills: Volume-7, First Edition 2000, Institute of Public Relations
(IPR)
• Beebe, Beebe and Redmond; Interpersonal Communication, 1996; Allyn and Bacon Publishers
 FRENCH - II

Course Code: MBA 244 Credit

Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the student
• to talk about his time schedule
• to talk about travel

Course Contents:
Unité 3, 4: pp. 42 to 72:

Contenu lexical: Unité 3: Emploi du temps

1. demander et donner l’heure, des horaires
2. raconter sa journée
3. parler de ses habitudes au travail, de ses loisirs
4. dire la date, parler du temps qu’il fait
5. fixer rendez-vous (au téléphone par e-mail), réserver une table au
restaurant
Unité 4: Voyage
1. réserver une chambre d’hôtel, demander la note
2. expliquer un itinéraire
3. parler de ses déplacements, situer sur une carte
4. exprimer un conseil, une interdiction, une obligation
5. acheter un billet de train, consulter un tableau d’horaires

Contenu grammatical: 1. question avec à quelle heure ? adjectifs démonstratifs

2. verbes pronominaux au présent, les prépositions à et de : aller à
venir de
3. adverbes de fréquence, pourquoi... ? Parce que ... ?
4. expression indiquant la date, verbes impersonnels
5. verbe pouvoir + infinitif, le lundi, lundi prochain
6. adjectifs possessifs (2), adjectif tout
7. impératif présent (1), nombres ordinaux
8. questions avec est-ce que ? à et en + moyen de transport,
en/au+pays
9. verbes devoir+infinitif, il faut+ infinitif, il est interdit de
10. verbes: aller, venir, partir, questions avec d’où, où,par où, à quel,
de quel

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Français.Com (Débutant)

 GERMAN – II
Course Code: MBA 245 Credit
Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of grammar,
which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic
opportunities available in Germany
Introduction to Grammar to consolidate the language base learnt in Semester - I

Course Contents:
Module I: Everything about Time and Time periods
Time and times of the day.
Weekdays, months, seasons.
Adverbs of time and time related prepositions

Module II: Irregular verbs

Introduction to irregular verbs like to be, and others, to learn the conjugations of the same,
(fahren, essen, lessen, schlafen, sprechen und ähnliche).

Module III: Separable verbs

To comprehend the change in meaning that the verbs undergo when used as such
Treatment of such verbs with separable prefixes

Module IV: Reading and comprehension

Reading and deciphering railway schedules/school time table
Usage of separable verbs in the above context

Module V: Accusative case

Accusative case with the relevant articles
Introduction to 2 different kinds of sentences – Nominative and Accusative

Module VI: Accusative personal pronouns

Nominative and accusative in comparison
Emphasizing on the universal applicability of the pronouns to both persons and objects

Module VII: Accusative prepositions

Accusative propositions with their use
Both theoretical and figurative use

Module VIII: Dialogues

Dialogue reading: ‘In the market place’
‘At the Hotel’

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch

• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1,2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH – II
Course Code: MBA 246 Credit
Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire more vocabulary, grammar, Verbal Phrases to understand simple
texts and start describing any person or object in Simple Present Tense.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of earlier modules.

Module II
Some more AR/ER/IR verbs. Introduction to root changing and irregular AR/ER/IR ending
verbs

Module III
More verbal phrases (eg, Dios Mio, Que lastima etc), adverbs (bueno/malo, muy, mucho,
bastante, poco).
Simple texts based on grammar and vocabulary done in earlier modules.

Module IV
Possessive pronouns

Module V
Writing/speaking essays like my friend, my house, my school/institution,
myself….descriptions of people, objects etc, computer/internet related vocabulary

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español, En Directo I A
• Español Sin Fronteras
 JAPANESE - II
Course Code: MBA 247 Credit
Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse in the language with the help of basic particles and be able to define the
situations and people using different adjectives.

Course Contents:
Module I: Verbs
Transitive verbs, intransitive verbs

Module II: More prepositions

More particles, articles and likes and dislikes.

Module III: Terms used for instructions

No parking, no smoking etc.

Module IV: Adverbs

Different adverbial expression.

Module V: Invitations and celebrations

Giving and receiving presents
Inviting somebody for lunch, dinner, movie and how to accept and refuse in different ways

Module VI: Comprehension’s

Short essay on Family, Friend etc.

Module VII: Conversations

Situational conversations like asking the way, At a post office, family

Module VIII: Illness

Going to the doctor, hospital etc.

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the language describing above-mentioned topics.

Methods of Private study/ Self help

➢ Handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments.
➢ Use of library, visiting and watching movies in Japan and culture center every Friday at 6pm.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – II
Course Code: MBA 248 Credit
Units: 02

Course Objective:
Chinese is a tonal language where each syllable in isolation has its definite tone (flat, falling,
rising and rising/falling), and same syllables with different tones mean different things. When
you say, “ma” with a third tone, it mean horse and “ma” with the first tone is Mother. The
course aims at familiarizing the student with the basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin,
the language of Mainland China. The course aims at training students in practical skills and
nurturing them to interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Drills
Practice reading aloud
Observe Picture and answer the question.
Tone practice.
Practice using the language both by speaking and by taking notes.
Introduction of basic sentence patterns.
Measure words.
Glad to meet you.

Module II
Where do you live?
Learning different colors.
Tones of “bu”
Buying things and how muchit costs?
Dialogue on change of Money.
More sentence patterns on Days and Weekdays.
How to tell time. Saying the units of time in Chinese. Learning to say useful phrases like –
8:00, 11:25, 10:30 P.M. everyday, afternoon, evening, night, morning 3:58, one hour, to begin,
to end ….. etc.
Morning, Afternoon, Evening, Night.

Module III
Use of words of location like-li, wais hang, xia
Furniture – table, chair, bed, bookshelf,.. etc.
Description of room, house or hostel room.. eg what is placed where and how many things are
there in it?
Review Lessons – Preview Lessons.
Expression ‘yao”, “xiang” and “yaoshi” (if).
Days of week, months in a year etc.
I am learning Chinese. Is Chinese difficult?

Module IV
Counting from 1-1000
Use of “chang-chang”.
Making an Inquiry – What time is it now? Where is the Post Office?
Days of the week. Months in a year.
Use of Preposition – “zai”, “gen”.
Use of interrogative pronoun – “duoshao” and “ji”.
“Whose”??? Sweater etc is it?
Different Games and going out for exercise in the morning.

Module V
The verb “qu”
Going to the library issuing a book from the library
Going to the cinema hall, buying tickets
Going to the post office, buying stamps
Going to the market to buy things.. etc
Going to the buy clothes …. Etc.
Hobby. I also like swimming.
Comprehension and answer questions based on it.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• “Elementary Chinese Reader Part I” Lesson 11-20

 STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 301 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course is designed to help students to understand the concept of strategy and strategic
management process. Acquaint students with basic concepts and principles of strategic
management, develop and prepare organizational strategies that will be effective for the
current dynamic environment and likewise to impart the strategic management conceptual
framework which will increase students’ skills and knowledge in identifying and describing
organizations’ strategic posture and direction.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction and Purpose of Strategy Formulation

Evolution and Introduction of strategic management. Concept and Classification of Corporate
and Business Strategy with Hierarchy definition; Purpose of Strategy Formulation: Concept of
Vision, Mission and Business Definition. Importance of Stakeholders in Business.

Module II: Strategic Analysis

PESTLE Analysis, Environmental Threat and Opportunity Profile (ETOP), Strategic Advantage
Profile (SAP), Porter’s Value Chain Analysis, Resource Based View of the Firm-VRIO
Framework; Market Analysis-David Aaker Model,Competitor Analysis, Industry Analysis using
Porter’s five forces Model; Scenario analysis and SWOT Analysis. Strategic implications of
company decisions and Strategic response to changes in business environment.

Module III: Strategic Choice – Traditional Approach

Portfolio Analysis using BCG, GE Nine Cell Matrix, Hofer’s Model, Making Strategic Choices
using Strickland’s Grand Strategy Selection Matrix; Ansoff’s Product Market Grid; Choosing
Generic Strategies using Porter’s Model of competitive advantage.

Module IV: Industry Structures and Competitive Strategies

Industry Structures and Lifecycle stages, Marketing Warfare and Dominance Strategies:
Advantages and Disadvantages of Defensive and Offensive strategies; Innovation as Blue
Ocean Strategy.

Module V: Strategy Implementation and Evaluation

Issues in implementation: Resource Allocation, Organization Structure, Social responsibilities
– Ethics. Measuring performance and establishing strategic controls.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Wheelen and Hunger,(2008), Essentials of Strategic Management, Prentice Hall India.

• Ramaswamy and Namakumari,(1999), Strategic Planning: Formulation of Corporate
Strategy Text and Cases, Macmillan India Ltd.,
• Jausch & Glueck,(1988), Business Policy and Strategic Management, (5th Ed.), McGraw Hill.
• Thomson & Strickland,(2008), Business Policy and Strategic Management, (12 th Ed.),
McGraw Hill.
• Pearce John ‘A & Robinson R.B,(1997), Strategic Management: Strategy Formulation and
Implementation, (3rd Ed.), AI.T.B.S. Publishers & Distributors
• Regular reading of all latest Business journals: HBR, Business World, Business India,
Business Today
 MANAGING EXCELLENCE

Course Code: MBA 302 Non

Credit Course

Course Objective:
To help the students of Business Management believe in excellence and create an environment that cultivates
the same. It aims at focusing on the basics and establishes a flexible strategic direction with a team-based
organizational concept as they work to advance their team and their department.
This course is designed to provide hands on experience for professional success. This common sense approach
combining self-examination surveys, class exercises, practical exposure and team work is applicable. The main
area to provide the practical exposure include small activities to a mega event such as guest lectures, industry
visits, placements, seminars, conferences, management competitions, corporate meet, alumni meet, publications
etc. The course will be delivered as under:
Class room 20%
Practical 80%

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction to Excellence

Self-evaluation, Definition of Excellence, Cultivating the Attitude &Developing the Habit for
achieving excellence

Module II: Excellence for Everyone & Excellence for Everything

Recognizing the Qualities, Excellence for Everything: External vs. Internal, Obstacles to Excellence, Excellence
Ethics, Professional Characteristics

Module III: Achieving Excellence

Instilling Excellence, Managing Excellence, Rewarding Excellence

Module IV: Excellence Indicators

Types of Indicators, Building Models, Distinguishing Characteristics

Module V: Applying Excellence

Application of Excellence, Practical Steps, Self-evaluation of achievements

Examination Scheme:

1. Indivdual Diagnostic File (carry forward of MCCD) 15 Marks

2. Presentations 25
Marks

3. Group Discussion 30 Marks

4. Personal Interview Skills 30 Marks

Text & References:

• English ,Gary, (2005) ‘Phoenix without the ashes: achieving organization .Excellence
through common
• sense Management’, CRC Press
 Annexure’ CD-01’

Course Title: BC III- Business Communication for

Managerial Competence L T P/ SW/F TOTAL
Credit Units: 1 S W CREDIT
Course Code: 342 UNITS
Course Objectives: 1 0 0 0 1
To enhance the communicative competence of the learners equipping them
with efficient interpersonal communication and leadership abilities.
Prerequisites:
NIL
Course Contents / Syllabus:
1 Module I Public Speaking 40%
Weightage
• PUBLIC SPEAKING:
o Introduction to Public Speaking
o Types of Public Speaking
o Verbal components in Public speaking: Content, Tone,
Expressions, Vocabulary, Smile, Pitch and modulation
o Non verbal components: Body language( Effective Eye
gestures, Arm gestures, Use of Lecture/Podium)
o Audience Analysis
• PRESENTATIONS:
o Planning Preparation Practice Performance
o Effective Use of Audio-Visual Aid
o Effective Content- Information Packaging
o Question and Answer Sessions- How to Respond to
Difficult Questions, Critical Analysis
2 Module II Group Discussion and Interviews 40%
Weightage
• GROUP DISCUSSION:
o Meaning of a Group Discussion
o Dynamics of GD
o Types of Group Discussion: Topic Based and Case Based
o Mock GD Sessions
• INTERVIEWS:
o Types of Interviews
o Styles of Interviews
o Interview Questions: HR and Technical/ Tackling
Difficult Answers/Poise
o Conducting a Mock Interview: Entering Behaviour, Smile
and Cordiality of Speech
3 Module III Meetings 20%
Weightage
• Planning and Organizing a Meeting
• Agenda for the Meeting
• Minutes of the Meetings
4 Student Learning Outcomes:
• The students will learn to give effective presentations
and gain confidence in facing job interviews.
• Public speaking will be done with ease.
5 Pedagogy for Course Delivery
• Workshop
• Presentation
• Group Discussion
• Lectures
Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
 Theory L/T Lab/Practical/Studio End Term
(%) (%) Examination
100% NA 60%
Theory Assessment (L&T):
Continuous Assessment/Internal End Term
Assessment Examination
Components CT GD GP Attendance
(Drop down)
Weightage 10% 10% 15% 5%
(%) 60%

Text: Guffey, Ellen Mary, Business Communication, Thomson (South Western)

Jules Harcourt, Business Communication, Thomson, 1990.
Meenakshi Raman &Prakash Singh, Business Communication, Oxford 2006.
References: M. John Penrose, Business Communication for Managers: An
Advanced Approach, Thomson, 2003.
Additional Reading: Newspapers and Journals
 PROFESSIONAL COMPETENCIES & CAREER DEVELOPMENT

Course Code: MBA 343 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
This course will help the students to:
• Importance of Personal and Professional excellence
• Inculcating the components of excellence
• Explore interest, attitude and Explore career opportunities
• Set career goals
Course Contents:

Module I: Professional Competence (2 Hours)

• Understanding Professional Competence
• Component of Competence:
- Knowledge
- Skills
- Attitude
- Self awareness
- Self Promotion & Presentation,
- Self confidence
- Skills
- Performance
• Political awareness, Coping with uncertainty
• Developing positive attributes at work place (personal and professional)
• Time management
• Handling criticism and interruptions
• Managing difficult people

Module II: Managing Personal Effectiveness (2 Hours)

• Dimensions of personal effectiveness (self disclosure, openness to feedback and perceptiveness)
• Integration of personal and organizational vision for effectiveness
• A healthy balance of work and play
Module III: Components of Excellence (2 Hours)
• Positive Imagination & Focused
• SMART Goal
• Controlling Distraction
• Commitment
• Constructive Evaluation
• Creativity & Success
Module IV: Career Development (2 Hours)

• Understanding Development Process

• Knowing and assessing one’s Interest
• Knowing and assessing one’s Aptitude
• Selecting from available resources
• Career planning and development
Module V: Personal & Professional Success (2 Hours)
• Career Selection & Motivation
• Action planning, Networking, Negotiation
• Accept Change & Challenge for Successful Career

Examination Scheme:

Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for

Test (CT) Success
(JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25
Suggested Readings:

• J William Pfeiffer (ed.) Theories and Models in Applied Behavioural Science, Vol 2, Group
(1996); Pfeiffer & Company
• Smither Robert D.; The Psychology of Work and Human Performance, 1994, Harper Collins College
Publishers
• Raman, A.T. (2003) Knowledge Management: A Resource Book. Excel Books, Delhi.
• Kamalavijayan, D. (2005). Information and Knowledge Management, Macmillan India Ltd. Delhi
 FRENCH - III

Course Code: MBA 344 Credit

Units: 02

Course Objective:
To furnish linguistic tools
• to talk about work and problems related to work
• to perform simple communicative tasks (explaining a set back, asking for a postponement
of appointment, give instructions, place orders, reserve)
• to master the current social communication skills
• oral (dialogue, telephone conversation)
• Written (e-mails, reply to messages)

Course Contents:
Unité 5, 6: pp. 74 to 104

Contenu lexical: Unité 5: Travail

1. manger au restaurant, comprendre un menu, commander
2. engager une conversation téléphonique
3. parler de sa formation, de son expérience, de ses compétences
4. Raconter des événements passes
5. consulter sa boite e-mails, répondre aux messages
Unité 6: Problèmes
1. identifier un problème, demander des précisions
2. expliquer un contretemps, déplacer un rendez-vous
3. demander de l’aide (par téléphone, par e-mail)
4. donner des instructions
5. expliquer un problème, suggérer une solution

Contenu grammatical:
1. futur proche, articles partitifs, un peu de, beaucoup de, une
bouteille de, un
morceau de…
2. pronoms COD, venir de + infinitif, verbes appeler (au présent)
3. passé composé avec avoir, affirmatif et interrogatif, savoir et
connaître
4. passé composé avec être, accord du participe passé, négation
5. pronoms COI, être en train de
6. ne…rien, ne…personne, ne…plus, ne…pas encore, qu’est-ce que/
qu’est-ce qui/qui est-ce que/qui est-ce qui
7. passé composé des verbes pronominaux
8. si/quand+présent, ne…plus, ne …pas encore
9. impératif présent (2) place du pronom et verbes pronominaux
10. trop/pas assez, verbe devoir au conditionnel présent

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre: Français.Com (Débutant)

 GERMAN - III
Course Code: MBA 345 Credit
Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of grammar,
which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic
opportunities available in Germany

Course Contents:
Module I: Modal verbs
Modal verbs with conjugations and usage
Imparting the finer nuances of the language

Module II: Information about Germany (ongoing)

Information about Germany in the form of presentations or “Referat”– neighbors, states and
capitals, important cities and towns and characteristic features of the same, and also a few
other topics related to Germany.

Module III: Dative case

Dative case, comparison with accusative case
Dative case with the relevant articles
Introduction to 3 different kinds of sentences – nominative, accusative and dative

Module IV: Dative personal pronouns

Nominative, accusative and dative pronouns in comparison

Module V: Dative prepositions

Dative preposition with their usage both theoretical and figurative use

Module VI: Dialogues

In the Restaurant,

At the Tourist Information Office,

A telephone conversation

Module VII: Directions

Names of the directions
Asking and telling the directions with the help of a roadmap

Module VIII: Conjunctions

To assimilate the knowledge of the conjunctions learnt indirectly so far

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice
Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch

• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1,2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH – III
Course Code: MBA 346 Credit
Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable students acquire knowledge of the Set/definite expressions (idiomatic expressions)
in Spanish language and to handle some Spanish situations with ease.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of earlier semester modules
Set expressions (idiomatic expressions) with the verb Tener, Poner, Ir….
Weather

Module II
Introduction to Gustar…and all its forms. Revision of Gustar and usage of it

Module III
Translation of Spanish-English; English-Spanish. Practice sentences.
How to ask for directions (using estar)
Introduction to IR + A + INFINITIVE FORM OF A VERB

Module IV
Simple conversation with help of texts and vocabulary
En el restaurante
En el instituto
En el aeropuerto

Module V
Reflexives

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español, En Directo I A
• Español Sin Fronteras -Nivel Elemental
 JAPANESE - III
Course Code: MBA 347 Credit
Units: 02

Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse in the language with the help of basic verbs and to express themselves
effectively and narrate their everyday short encounters. Students are also given projects on Japan and Japanese
culture to widen their horizon further.
Note: The Japanese script is introduced in this semester.

Course Contents:
Module I: Verbs
Different forms of verbs: present continuos verbs etc

Module II
More Adverbs and adverbial expressions

Module III: Counters

Learning to count different shaped objects,

Module IV: Tenses

Past tense, Past continuous tense.

Module V: Comparison
Comparative and Superlative degree

Module VI: Wishes and desires

Expressing desire to buy, hold, possess. Usage in negative sentences as well.
Comparative degree, Superlative degree.

Module VII: Appointment

Over phone, formal and informal etc.

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the language and can describe themselves and situations effectively
➢ They also gain great knowledge in terms of Japanese lifestyle and culture, which help
them at the time of placements.

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments.
➢ Use of library, visiting and watching movies in Japan and culture center every Friday at 6pm.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – III
Course Code: MBA 348 Credit
Units: 02

Course Objective:
Foreign words are usually imported by translating the concept into Chinese, the emphasis is
on the meaning rather than the sound. But the system runs into a problem because the
underlying name of personal name is often obscure so they are almost always transcribed
according to their pronciation alone. The course aims at familiarizing the student with the
basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin, the language of Mainland China. The course
aims at training students in practical skills and nurturing them to interact with a Chinese
person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Drills
Dialogue practice
Observe picture and answer the question.
Introduction of written characters.
Practice reading aloud
Practice using the language both by speaking and by taking notes.
Character writing and stroke order

Module II
Measure words
Position words e.g. inside, outside, middle, in front, behind, top, bottom, side, left, right,
straight.
Directional words – beibian, xibian, nanbian, dongbian, zhongjian.
Our school and its different building locations.
What game do you like?
Difference between “hii” and “neng”, “keyi”.

Module III
Changing affirmative sentences to negative ones and vice versa
Human body parts.
Not feeling well words e.g. ; fever, cold, stomach ache, head ache.
Use of the modal particle “le”
Making a telephone call
Use of “jiu” and “cal” (Grammar portion)
Automobiles e.g. Bus, train, boat, car, bike etc.
Traveling, by train, by airplane, by bus, on the bike, by boat.. etc.

Module IV
The ordinal number “di”
“Mei” the demonstrative pronoun e.g. mei tian, mei nian etc.
use of to enter to exit
Structural particle “de” (Compliment of degree).
Going to the Park.
Description about class schedule during a week in school.
Grammar use of “li” and “cong”.
Comprehension reading followed by questions.

Module V
Persuasion-Please don’t smoke.
Please speak slowly
Praise – This pictorial is very beautiful
Opposites e.g. Clean-Dirty, Little-More, Old-New, Young-Old, Easy-Difficult, Boy-Girl, Black-
White, Big-Small, Slow-Fast … etc.
Talking about studies and classmates
Use of “it doesn’t matter”
Enquiring about a student, description about study method.
Grammar: Negation of a sentence with a verbal predicate.
Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• “Elementary Chinese Reader Part I, Part-2” Lesson 21-30

 SUMMER INTERNSHIP
Course Code: MBA 350 Credit
Units: 09
There are certain phases of every Intern’s professional development that cannot be effectively
taught in the academic environment. These facets can only be learned through direct, on-the-
job experience working with successful professionals and experts in the field. The internship
programme can best be described as an attempt to institutionalize efforts to bridge the gap
between the professional world and the academic institutions. Entire effort in internship is in
terms of extending the program of education and evaluation beyond the classroom of a
university or institution. The educational process in the internship course seeks out and
focuses attention on many latent attributes, which do not surface in the normal class room
situations. These attributes are intellectual ability, professional judgment and decision making
ability, inter-disciplinary approach, skills for data handling, ability in written and oral
presentation, sense of responsibility etc.

In order to achieve these objectives, each student will maintain and submit a file (Internship
File) and a report (Internship Report)

INTERNSHIP FILE

The Internship File aims to encourage students to keep a personal record of their learning and
achievements throughout the Programme. It can be used as the basis for lifelong learning and
for job applications. Items can be drawn from activities completed in the course modules and
from the workplace to demonstrate learning and personal development.

The File will assess the student’s analytical skills and ability to present supportive evidence,
whilst demonstrating understanding of their organization, its needs and his/her own personal
contribution to the organization.

The File is essentially a comprehensive documentation of how one proceeds while working on
the assignment and should be regularly checked by the faculty guide/ supervisor, issues
discussed with the students, doubts if any clarified and signed as having done so. This will
form the basis of continuous evaluation of the project.

The File will include five sections in the order described below.

1. The Title Page – An Internship Experience Report For (Your Name), name of internship
organization, name of the Supervisor/Guide and his/her designation, date started and
completed, and number of credits for which the report is submitted.
2. Table of Content – An outline of the contents of the file by topics and subtopics with the
page number and location of each section.
3. Introduction – Short, but should include how and why you obtained the internship
experience position and the relationship it has to your academic/professional and career
goals.
4. Main Body – Should include a brief summary/ executive summary of the Internship Project
Report that the student has worked on, an analysis of the company/organization in which
the student is working, a personal review of the student’s management skills and how they
have been developed through the programme, the daily tasks performed, major projects
contributed to, dates and hours spent on a task, observations and feelings, meetings
attended and their purposes, listing of tools and materials and their suppliers, and
photographs if possible of projects, buildings and co-workers.
5. Appendices – Include pamphlets, forms, charts, brochures, technical and descriptive
literature, graphs and other information related to your Internship experience.

INTERNSHIP REPORT

The Internship Report is the research report that the student has to prepare on the project
assigned by the organization. (Incase a student is not assigned a specific research project in
the organization, he has to select any one aspect of the organization and prepare a research
report on it). The lay out of the report should be as per the standard layout prescribed by the
organization wherein the student undertakes the Internship. In case, there is no layout
prescribed by the organization the following components should be included in the report:

➢ Title or Cover Page

 The title page should contain Project Title; Student’s Name; Programme; Year and
Semester and Name of the Faculty Guide.

➢ Acknowledgements
Acknowledgment to any advisory or financial assistance received in the course of work
may be given. It is incomplete without student’s signature.

➢ Abstract
A good "Abstract" should be straight to the point; not too descriptive but fully informative.
First paragraph should state what was accomplished with regard to the objectives. The
abstract does not have to be an entire summary of the project, but rather a concise
summary of the scope and results of the project. It should not exceed more than 1000
words.

➢ Table of Contents
Titles and subtitles are to correspond exactly with those in the text.

➢ Introduction
Here a brief introduction to the problem that is central to the project and an outline of the structure of the
rest of the report should be provided. The introduction should aim to catch the imagination of the reader, so
excessive details should be avoided.

➢ Materials and Methods

This section should aim at experimental designs, materials used (wherever applicable).
Methodology should be mentioned in details including modifications undertaken, if any. It
includes organization site(s), sample, instruments used with its validation, procedures
followed and precautions.

➢ Results and Discussion

Present results, discuss and compare these with those from other workers, etc. In writing this section,
emphasis should be laid on what has been performed and achieved in the course of the work, rather than
discuss in detail what is readily available in text books. Avoid abrupt changes in contents from section to
section and maintain a lucid flow throughout the thesis. An opening and closing paragraph in every chapter
could be included to aid in smooth flow.

Note that in writing the various secions, all figures and tables should as far as possible be next to the
associated text, in the same orientation as the main text, numbered, and given appropriate titles or captions.
All major equations should also be numbered and unless it is really necessary, do not write in “point” form.

While presenting the results, write at length about the the various statistical tools used in the data
interpretation. The result interpretation should be simple but full of data and statistical analysis. This data
interpretation should be in congruence with the written objectives and the inferences should be drawn on
data and not on impression. Avoid writing straight forward conclusion rather, it should lead to
generalization of data on the chosen sample.

Results and its discussion should be supporting/contradicting with the previous research work in the given
area. Usually one should not use more than two researches in either case of supporing or contradicting the
present case of research.

➢ Conclusion(s) & Recommendations

A conclusion should be the final section in which the outcome of the work is mentioned
briefly.
Check that your work answers the following questions:
• Did the research project meet its aims (check back to introduction for stated aims)?
• What are the main findings of the research?
• Are there any recommendations?
• Do you have any conclusion on the research process itself?

➢ Implications for Future Research

This should bring out further prospects for the study either thrown open by the present
work or with the purpose of making it more comprehensive.

➢ Appendices
The Appendices contain material which is of interest to the reader but not an integral part
of the thesis and any problem that have arisen that may be useful to document for future
reference.
➢ References
References should include papers, books etc. referred to in the body of the report. These should be written
in the alphabetical order of the author's surname. The titles of journals preferably should not be abbreviated;
if they are, abbreviations must comply with an internationally recognised system.

Examples
For research article
Voravuthikunchai SP, Lortheeranuwat A, Ninrprom T, Popaya W, Pongpaichit S, Supawita T.
(2002) Antibacterial activity of Thai medicinal plants against enterohaemorrhagic Escherichia
coli O157: H7. Clin Microbiol Infect, 8 (suppl 1): 116–117.
For book
Kowalski,M.(1976) Transduction of effectiveness in Rhizobium meliloti. SYMBIOTIC
NITROGEN FIXATION PLANTS (editor P.S. Nutman IBP), 7: 63-67

The Layout Guidelines for the Internship File & Internship Report

• A4 size Paper
• Font: Arial (10 points) or Times New Roman (12 points)
• Line spacing: 1.5
• Top and bottom margins: 1 inch/ 2.5 cm; left and right margins: 1.25 inches/ 3 cm

Examination Scheme:
Continuous Evaluation by faculty guide 15%
Continuous evaluation by CRC 15%
Feedback from industry guide 35%
Report, Presentation & Viva Voce 35%

TOTAL 100%
 ENTREPRENEURSHIP PROCESS AND BEHAVIOUR
Course Code: MBA 303 Credit Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course is designed to understand Organizational and Entrepreneurial behaviour - how it
differs from that of professional management, organizational and Entrepreneurial processes -
the activities involved in taking ideas to the commercial realization, group project to develop
an appreciation for the special challenges in entrepreneurial companies that are important for
today's innovative climate.

Course Contents:
Module I: Entrepreneurial Psyche
Psychology of Enterprise, The entrepreneurial urge, Concept of Entrepreneurship, Entrepreneur as an
Individual, Motivation, Attitudes, Attributes, Skillsets, Competencies, Types of Entrepreneurs, Enterprenurship
models

Module II: Entrepreneurship Development

Understanding the Entrepreneurial Perspective in Individuals, Developing Creativity and
Understanding Innovation, Ethical and Social Responsibility, Challenges for Entrepreneurs;
Developing Entrepreneurship in the Corporation; Assessment and Examination of
Entrepreneurial Opportunities, Structuring the New Business Venture,

Module III: Growth and Development of Entrepreneurial Ventures

Strategic Planning for Emerging Ventures, Managing Entrepreneurial Growth, Global
Opportunities for Entrepreneurs. Contemporary Challenges in Entrepreneurship and
Continuous Challenges for Entrepreneurs,

Module IV: The Entrepreneur as Individual

Learning, Perception, Personality, Conflict Management, Motivation and Job Performance, Group

Processes, Introduction to team, Leadership, Power and Politics. Organizational Structure,

Organizational Design & Organizational Culture.

Module V: Analysis of Entrepreneur and Entrepreneur Behaviour

Profiling the Entrepreneur/Entrepreneur - Traits, Skills and Activities Analysis; Innovation and
the Entrepreneur/ Intrapreneur. Risk and Rewards to the Entrepreneur; Entrepreneurial Stress
and Coping Mechanisms, Entrepreneurship Models - Aspiring Entrepreneurs, Opportunistic
Entrepreneurs, Collaborative Affiliation, Venture Incubator.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Histrich D. Robert and Peters P. Michal Shepherd A Dean (2007); Entrepreneurship,

McGraw Hill
• Timmons A. Jethrfy and Jr. Stephen Spinell (2009), New Ventures Creation;
Entrepreneurship for the 21st Century, McGraw Hill.
• Amabile, T. (1988),Model of Creativity and Innovation in Organizations, in Staw, B &
Cummings L., Research in Organizational Behaviour, Vol.10, Jai Preee, Greenwich.
• Luthans, F. (1998),Organizational Behaviour, McGraw Hill
• Gnyawali D & Fogel D, (1984),Environments for Entrepreneurship Development: Key
Dimensions and Research Implications, Entrepreneurship theory and Practice, Spring
 INNOVATION IN BUSINESS AND ENTERPRISE
Course Code: MBA 304 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective is to introduce, to the students, an important new expression of Innovation and to familiarize its
usefulness in management. To make them familiar with several proven principles, and processes. The aim is
also to make them familiar with Innovation management system’s suitability for generating superior degrees of
short and long term profitability, employment stability and stakeholder loyalty through innovation.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Introduction to Innovation, Importance of Innovation, types of Innovation, various lateral &
horizontal technique of innovation.

Module II: Idea Generations

Creativity &Innovation, Generation of ideas, Environment to create & capture sparks, pressing
business needs. Business drivers, Capturing & Processing of thoughts.

Module III: Idea Conversion

Conversion of ideas, Business Dimension of Innovation, Lasting & Differentiating Leadership,
Motivation & Success of Morale.

Module IV: Models of Innovation

Static and dynamic models of Innovation, Incremental versus Radical innovation, Abernatty-
Clark Model, Henderson Clark Model, Disruptive Technological Changes .

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Frederick Betz (2004), Managing Technological Innovation, Competitive Advantage from Change.
• Afuah Allan (2009), Innovation Management, Oxford University Press.
• Foster R. (1999), Innovation, The Attackers Advantages New York Submit Books.
• Damanpour, F (2000), Organizational Innovation Academy of Management Journal.
 EVALUATING BUSINESS OPPORTUNITIES
Course Code: MBA 305 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The Course is designed to understand the principles behind new venture planning how to
evaluate the various opportunities for business. The skills required to develop a credible
business plan. Business planning theory to real life situations. To develop a business plan for
the identified opportunity. How to present their business plan to venture capitalist Fl’s/Bank
Evaluation for Examination

Course Contents:
Module I: Initiating Entrepreneurial Ventures
Identifying the Business opportunities, Assessment and Examination of Entrepreneurial
Opportunities Structuring the New Business Venture Legal Issues Related to Emerging
Ventures.

Module II: Developing the Entrepreneurial Plan

Environmental Assessment: Preparations for a New Venture Marketing Research for New
Ventures Financial Preparation for Entrepreneurial Ventures Developing an Effective Business
Plan.

Module III: Evaluation of Business Plan

Sources of Capital Formation for Entrepreneurs Presenting the Business plan to Venture
Capitalist, Financial Institutions/ Banks, Assessment of Business plan by Venture capitalist
and other funding agencies.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Timmons, J. (1999), New Venture Creation (edn.), McGraw-Hill

• Blackwell, E. (1998), How to Prepare a Business Plan, Kogan Page
• Stutely, R. (2002), The Definitive Business Plan, FT Prentice Hall
• West, A (1998), A Business Plan , Financial Times Management Practical guides to new
venture planning
• Kuratko F. Donald and Hornsby S. Jeffery (2009), New Ventures Management, The
Enterprenurs is Road Map, Pearson Education.
 EMERGING BUSINESS SECTORS AND NEW TECHNOLOGIES
Course Code: MBA 306 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
This course provides a strategy framework for managing new, entrepreneurial high-technology
or emerging sector businesses. The emphasis throughout is on the development and
application of conceptual models, which clarify the interactions between competition, patterns
of technological and market change, and the structure and development of internal firm
capabilities as well as new business sectors emerges. The emphasis is on new enterprises in
new industries.
This is not a course in how to manage product or process development. The main focus is on
critical analysis the of a business strategy. The course should be of particular interest to those
interested in creating and managing a new enterprise with significant technical content, and to
those interested in venture capital, incubation and industry analysis in new sectors.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Emerging technologies & opportunities, Industry life cycles.

Module II: Creative Value through Emerging Technology

Emerging technologies and markets, Technology dynamics, and their assessment, markets
and organizational needs.

Module III: Emerging Business Sectors

Overview of emerging business sectors, challenges and opportunities in each sector. Impact
of industry on other sector.

Module IV: Delivering Value

Organsiational competencies, universities and commercialization, incumbents and
universities, incubents and venturing.

Module V: A detailed master case to be developed on an emerging business sector and

technologies, covering following
Overview of industry sector, SWOT analysis of industry sector, Major players in the Industry
sector, SME’s in the industry sector, employment opportunities & key persons in major
organization, emerging technologies in the sector & their viability/feasibility analysis,
companies adopting new & emerging technologies, challenges faced for implementing new
technologies, acceptance of new technology by venture capitalists/financial institutions
Once the master case is developed, specific functional cases will be developed as per the
need

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• No Text & Reference being prescribed. Entirely left on the discretion of Faculty.
 COST AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Course Code: MBA 307 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
To develop an understanding of basic elements of cost and its classification, allocation and
how the costing techniques are useful in the process of managerial decision-making. To
expose the students to the latest techniques to facilitate the process of decision making in
today’s dynamic business world.

Course Contents:

Module I: Cost Accounting – Introduction & Elements

Cost concepts and cost object, cost classification, cost organization and its relationship with other
departments. Elements of cost and cost determination: Cost accounting records — cost ledgers,
reconciliation of cost and financial accounts.

Module II: Process Costing

Process costing — treatment of normal and abnormal losses and gains, valuation of work-in-
progress using first-in – first-out and average methods (equivalent production), inter-process
transfer and pricing, concepts and accounting for joint products, by-products, waste, scrap,
spoilage and defectives, research and development expenses.

Module III: Cost Analysis for Planning, Control & Decision making
Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis, Using CVP analysis for decision making ( Short run and Long
Run), CVP analysis in Service and Non-Profit Organizations. Pricing decisions and Cost
Management.

Module IV: Specialized Costing

Service or operating costing — unit costing and multiple costing, application, identification of
cost unit and cost determination and control;
Uniform costing, Interfirm comparison, cost reduction, value analysis/engineering including
value management

Module V: Costing Methods and Accounting Systems

Costing and accounting systems - activity based costing, customer profitability analysis; direct
product profitability; just-in-time and back flush accounting;
Target costing; life cycle costing, parametric cost control.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Horgren, Datar, Foster, Rajan, Ittner, Cost Accounting- A Managerial Emphasis, Prentice Hall
• Jain, S.P. & Narang, K.L., Cost Accounting- Principles and Practice, Kalyani Publishers
• Lal, Jewarh (2011), Cost Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill
• Khan,M.Y. & Jain P.K. (2010), Cost Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill
 PROJECT PLANNING, APPRAISAL AND CONTROL

Course Code: MBA 308 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to make the students familiar with the planning, analysis, selection,
implementation and review the capital expenditure investments. The aim is to acquaint the student with the
application of mathematical and statistical tools for analyzing managerial problems in order to arrive at a
decision w.r.t. the capital expenditures.

Course Contents:
Module I: Planning of Projects
Capital Expenditures, Phases of Capital Budgeting, Levels of Decision Making, Facets of Project
Analysis, Portfolio Planning Tools, Strategic Position and Action Evaluation (SPACE), Generation of
Ideas, Monitoring the Environment, Corporate Appraisal, Project Rating Index, Demand Forecasting,
Market Planning

Module II: Technical Analysis

Material Inputs and Utilities, Manufacturing Process, Product Mix, Plant Capacity, Location and Site,
Machineries and Equipments, Structures and Civil Work, Project Charts and Layouts, Work Schedule

Module III: Financial Analysis

Cost of Project, Means of Finance, Estimates of Sales and Production, Cost of Production, Working
Capital Requirements and its Financing, Profitability Projections, Break Even Point, Projected Balance
Sheets, Muti Year Projections, Basic Principles for Measuring Project Cash Flows, Components of the
Cash Flow Stream, Biases in Cash Flow Estimation

Module IV: Project Risk

Types and Measures of Project Risk, Sensitivity Analysis, Scenario Analysis, Optimal Timing, Social
Cost Benefit Anaysis, Net Benefit in terms of Economic Prices, Measurement of the Impact on
Distribution, Savings Impact and its value, Income Distribution Impact, Little-Mirrlees Approach,
Shadow Prices

Module V: Project Management and Review

Forms of Project Organization, Project Planning, Project Control, Human Aspects of Project
Management, Pre-requisites for Successful Project Implementation, Performance Evaluation,
Abandonment Analysis, Administrative Aspects of Capital Budgeting

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Chandra P.(2002), Projects: Planning, Analysis, Financing, Implementation & Review, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing.
• Meredith J.R. & Mantel S.J., Jr.( 2000), Project Management: A Managerial Approach, Ed. John Wiley &
Sons.
• Machiraju H.R.(2001), Introduction to Project Finance: An Analytical Perspective, Vikas Publishing House
Pvt. Ltd.
• Patel B.M.(2000),Project Management: Strategic Financial Planning Examination & Control, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
• Finnerty J. D.(1996), Project Financing: Asset-Based Financial Engineering, Wiley
• Newbold C.R.,(1998), Project Management in the Fast Lane: Applying Theory & Constraints, St. Lucie
Press
• Anthony R.N. & Govindrajan V.(1998), Management Control Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Desai V.(1997), Project Management, Himalaya Publishing House
 INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 309 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
The possibility for companies to look beyond domestic markets while making the financial decisions
has given new dimensions to the way these decisions are taken. This has essentially led to changes
in financial environment by linking domestic markets to global markets causing unprecedented
increase in opportunities as well as risks. Management in such environment requires understanding of
innovative conceptual and physical tools for better financial decision-making. The course on
International Finance aims at equipping the financial manager with concepts, tools that enable
financial decisions making in a global market and help better achieve the objectives of the firm.

Course Contents:
Module I: International Financial Environment
Finance function in global business scenario, International Monetary System, International Financial
Markets and Instruments, Balance of Payments, Recent Developments.

Module II: Foreign Exchange Markets

Spot and Forward Foreign Exchange Markets, Speculation and Arbitrage in Foreign Exchange
Markets and Implications of Market Efficiency, Currency Swaps, Currency Futures and Options.

Module III: Foreign Exchange Rate Determination

Theories of Exchange Rate Determination, Fundamental International Parity Conditions – Purchasing
Power and Interest Rate Parity, Forecasting Exchange Rates - Technical Forecasting, Time Series
Modelling, Fundamental Forecasting.

Module IV: Foreign Exchange Rate Exposure and Risk Management

Transaction, Translation and Operating Exposure, Exposure from Equity and Borrowing in
International Financial Markets, Hedging tools for Management of Transaction Exposure and Interest
Rate Exposure, Degree of Hedge.

Module V: Issues in Foreign Investments Analysis

Examination of International Investment Proposals, Discounted Cash Flow Analysis, Tax Adjusted
Present Value Approach, Political Risk Analysis, External Investment Decision – Measuring Total
Returns on Foreign Investments, Optimal International Asset Allocation.

Module VI: Finance of Foreign Trade

Income terms, foreign letters of credit, export & import finance, rules governing letters of
credit, export import policy (Case Studies)

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Levi, M. D. (1996), International Finance, McGraw Hill International.

• Apte, P. G. (1995), International Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill
• Errunza, V.R., Singh, D. and Srinivasan, T.S. (1994), International Business
Finance,Global Business Press.
• Seth, A.K.(2000), International Financial Management, Galgotia Publishing Company.
• Hull, J. C. (1999), Introduction to Futures and Options Markets, Prentice Hall of India.
• Edwards, F. R. and Ma, C. W. (1992), Futures and Options, McGraw-Hill International.
• Kolb, R. W. (1997), Understanding Futures Markets, Prentice Hall of India.
• Rebonato, R. (1996), Interest Rate Option Models: Understanding, Analysing and Using
Models for Exotic
• Interest Rate Options, John Wiley and Sons.
• Kohn, M.(1998), Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
• Articles from selected journals and magazines.

MANAGEMENT OF FINANCIAL SERVICES

Course Code: MBA 310 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
At the end of this course the students will understand: Role of Financial Services in producing
and maximizing value. Understanding basic Financial Services and their need. Factors
determining dynamism in the Financial Services industry. Understanding the interface of
regulators and managers for quantifying and dealing with critical factors affecting the
Financial Services industry.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Financial services and Value production, Value added in Financial Services, ROI in Financial
Services, Elements in the Financial Services value chain, Role of Financial Services in Economic
Development

Module II: Merchant & Investment Banking

Meaning, Importance & Role in the Indian Financial System, Corporate Counselling, Project
Counselling and Appraisal, Loan Syndication and Accessing Debt and Capital Markets, Procedural
aspects of public issues, bought out deals, Book Building, Pre-Issue Decision; Post Issue
Management and related provisions of Companies Act and SEBI guidelines for Protection of Interests
of Investors, New Products in Capital Markets

Module III: Leasing Hire Purchase and Consumer Credit

Development of Leasing Hire Purchase and Consumer Credit, Types of Leasing, Pricing Methodology
and Financial Analysis, Taxation, Legal Framework for Leasing and Hire Purchase Companies,
Leasing Vs. Buying- NPV, Securitization, Banking Services related to leasing

Module IV: Venture Capital Financing

International Experiences in Venture Capital Financing, Venture Capital Financing in India, Pitfalls to
be Avoided, Private Equity and growth of Entrepreneurship

Module V: Mutual Funds

Mutual Funds types, Exchange Traded Funds, Fund of Funds, Organization and Management,
Regulations of Mutual Funds

Module VI: Other Financial services

Factoring Services - Features, Merits and Demerits, Cost Benefit Analysis, Forfeiting – Features,
Merits and Demerits, Credit Rating: Concept of Credit Rating, Types of Credit Rating, Advantages and
Disadvantages of Credit Rating, Credit Rating Agencies and Their Methodology and Process,
Individual Credit Rating, Sovereign Credit Rating Practices, Indian Experience up to now, Housing
Finance, Custodial Services.

Module VII: An introduction to marketing of Financial Services Features

Marketing Of Financial Services, Cross Selling of Banking Services, Up-Selling, Wealth Management

Examination Scheme:
 Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Khan M Y, (1999), Indian Financial System, Tata McGraw Hill

• Chandra, P.(1999), Financial Management: Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw Hill.
• Dietrich J Kimball,(1996), Financial Services & Financial Institutions, Value Creation in
theory and Practice, Prentice Hall
• Pandey, I.M. (1999), Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House
• Sriram, K. (1996), Handbook of Leasing, Hire Purchase and Factoring, ICFAI.
• Bhole L M, (2000), Financial Institutions and Markets: Structure, Growth & Innovations,
Tata McGraw Hill
• Regular reading of the Financial & Business Journals, Analyst, Economist is essential.

SECURITY ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 311 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
This course aims at providing a clear understanding of the changing domestic and global investment
scenario in general and Indian capital market in particular with reference to availability of various
financial products and operations of stock exchanges. Important theories, techniques, regulations and
certain advancements in theory of investment will be covered with an aim of helping the participants
make sound investment decisions both in the context of individual security and portfolio investment.

Course Contents:
Module I: Background of Capital market/Corporate Governance and Methods of Fund Raising
Importance of Strong Capital market in Economy, Investment opportunities available to Investors,
relation of demographic characteristics with investment pattern of individuals, Process of investment
in Financial assets, intermediaries and Role of SEBIOTCEI//ROC/Stock exchanges-Listing
agreement, clause 49, Importance of Corporate Governance and changes taking place/required in the
law.Salient features and operation of stock exchanges,Trading arrangements, Changing scenario of
Indian stock market.Relationship of Primary market with Secondary market, raising of Funds by
IPO/FPO/Right issue and intermediaries involved. Merchant banking and its functions, contemporary
issue in Capital market.

Module II: Debt

Malkiels's Law, Interrelationship of Bond Market and Stock market, International events and its impact
on security market Risk and return in the context of Portfolio, , Common stock valuation models, Term
structure of Interest Rates,Role of FII"S, DII/MF /QIB in Capital market.Participatory notes and its
Impact, index formation..

Module III
Fundamental analysis-Economic &industry analysis, concept of Business Cycles, Indicators of
economic prosperity, Industry analysis, Company analysis, Company valuation.DOW"s Theory,
Various Technical analysis tools like Moving averages, Volume Analysis, Indicators, RSI, Patten
analysis,Candle sicks,Market breadth analysis, Trend analysis,Elliot wave Rules Fibonacci numbers,
ROC/RSI, CAPM and Fama and French challenge, lagging indicators and leading indicators analysis,
reading and interpretations of technical patterns and charts,Other tools to Forecast the market and
take Entry and exit decisions.

Module VI
Arbitrage pricing theory, Generating the efficient frontier,Efficient market theory, Valuation by PE ratio
/Book value to price value analysis,Motivation for partitioning of risk, Markowitz Risk -return
optimisation,
Module V
Types of Mutual Funds--SIP/ELSS, Tax Implications. , Investment Banking, Role of Fund Manager,
Portfolio management services, Churning and revision of Portfolio, Portfolio re balancing and up
gradation, Sharpe"performance Index, Trennor"performance Index, Jensen's performance Index.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Chandra, P.(2002), Investment Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill

• Fischer, D.E. and Jordan, R.J. (1995), Security Analysis & Portfolio Management, Prentice Hall
of India
• Bhat, Sudhindra;(2009); Security Analysis & Portfolio Management; Excel Books
• Dash, A.P.;(2009); Security Analysis & Portfolio Management; I.K. International
• Bhatt, S.N.;(2011); Security Analysis & Portfolio Management; Biztantra
• Rangnatham M., Madhumalathi, R.,(2006); Security Analysis & Portfolio Management;
Pearson Education
• Khatri, Dhanesh; (2010); Security Analysis & Portfolio Management; MacMillan India Ltd.
 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND LABOUR LAWS

Course Code: MBA 312 redit

Units: 03
Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to acquaint students with the main provisions of labour standards,
concepts, institutions and approaches to industrial relations and collective bargaining. The course will
develop skills of dealing with unions, negotiating collective agreements and to identify approaches to
promotion of sound labour management relations.

Course Contents:

Module I: Industrial Relations and Collective Bargaining

Industrial Relations-conceptual and legal framework, Collective Bargaining-an overview,
Bargaining and Negotiating skills, Workers Participation in Management, ILO conventions,
Sound Labour Management Relations, Grievance Redressal Machinery, Industrial Relations
after globalization

Module II: Introduction to Labour Laws

Labour Law Origin - Purpose - Role of the State - Constitutional Provisions – Fundamental
Rights and Directive Principles of State Policy

Module III: Health and Safety, Conditions of Employment

Factories Act, 1948, Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946. Discipline and
Disciplinary Procedure

Module IV: Laws for handling Industrial Disputes and Contract Labour
Industrial Disputes Act 1947, Contract Labour (Regulation & Abolition) Act, 1970

Module V: Trade Unions

Trade Unions: Meaning, Functions, Problems, Trade Unions Act, 1926

Module VI: Wage Related Laws

Minimum Wages Act, 1948, Payment of Wages Act 1936, Equal Remuneration Act 1976,
Payment of Bonus Act 1965

Module VII: Employee Benefits and Social Security related laws

Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972: Provident Fund Act 1952, Workmen’s Compensation Act 1923,
E.S.I.C. Act, 1948, Maternity Benefit Act 1961, The Apprentices Act 1961.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Bagri, P.R. (2006), Law of Industrial Disputes,Kamal Law House.

• C.S. Venkata Ratnam (2006), Industrial Relations, Oxford Higher Education
• Kumar H.L. (2010) Labour Laws - Everybody Should Know, Universal Law Publishing
Company
• Malhotra, O.P (1985), Law of Industrial Disputes, N.M. Tripathi Pvt. Ltd.
• Malik, P.L (2008), Industrial Law-Eastern Book company.
• Mamoria CB (1998), Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Himalaya Publishing House.
 ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE AND DEVELOPMENT
Course Code: MBA 313 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The aim of this course is to familiarize students with the rapidly growing scope of OD and the
approaches which are becoming more and more diversified. A wide range of interventions are
discussed as there is a critical need for them in organizations facing volatile and competitive
global environment.

Course Contents:

Module I: Organizational Development: An Introduction

Nature, Assumptions, Characteristics & techniques. Historical framework of Organizational
Development. The Lab training stem, The survey research and feedback stem, The Action
Research stem, Steps involved in Organizational Development, Role of Managers, Factors
affecting Organizational Development.

Module II: Typology of Organizational Development Interventions

Interventions designed at Individuals, Dyads/Triads, Team and Groups, Inter-group Relations,
Total organization, Weisboard Model.

Module III: Action Research & Organizational Design

Introduction to Action Research, Action Research as a Process and as an Approach,
Determinants of Organizational Design, Components of Organization Design, Organization -
The Environment Interface, Organizational Decision Making

Module IV: Organizational Development Interventions

Team Interventions, Inter-group Interventions, Comprehensive Interventions, Structural
Interventions, Issues in Consultant - Client Relationship; Power, Politics and Organizational
Development

Module V: Change Management

Why Organization Change, Need for change, Factors causing change- Environmental,
Technological, Legal, Political, Social, &, Cultural factors of change, Models & techniques
involved in change management, Total Quality Management, Business Process Reengineering,
Guidelines for Facilitating change.

Module VI: Future of Organizational Development

Changing values, Cultural Models & theories of planed change, organizing for the Future,
Organizations as learning systems, and Implications for future managers

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Palmer I, Dunford R, Akin G, (2010), ‘Managing Organizational Change a multiple

perspectives approach, Tata McGraw Hill Publication, New Delhi.
• Thomas G. Cummings and Christopher G. Worley (2002). Organizational Development and
Change, Thompson learning- India, New Delhi.
• Wendell L. French and Cecil N. Bell Jr., (2008),“Organization Development and
Transformation” New Delhi, Prentice Hall.
 PERFORMANCE AND COMPETENCY MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 314 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
This course will help students to understand the significance of appraisal for an Organization
and Individual. It will develop an understanding of various appraisal methods and
measurements to manage the performances of employees. It would also provide an insight
into the fundamentals of competency management.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction to Performance Management

Conceptual Approach to Performance Management, Determinants of Job Performance: Person
and System Factor, Components of Effective Performance Management, Performance
Management Cycle

Module II: Process of Performance Appraisal

Need And Methods for Performance Appraisal, RSDQ Model, Performance Review -
Reengineering Performance Appraisal System, Performance Analysis, Performance Review
Discussion, Performance Monitoring and Feedback.
Module III: Competency Mapping
Concept and Definition of Role and Competency, Characteristics of Competency, Competency
Versus Competence, Performance Versus Competency, Types of Competencies, Context and
Relevance of Competencies in Modern Organizations.

Module IV: Competency Management Framework

Macro View of Competency Management Framework, Strategic Framework, Lancaster Model of
Managerial Competence, Competency Modeling Framework

Module V: Competency mapping as a performance management tool

Building Competency Models, The McBer Generic Managerial Competency Model,
Competency Causal Flow Model, Ftors Affecting The Human Performance System, Profiling
Competency Framework for a Particular Role, Competency Gap

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Armstrong, Michael and Berron, Angela (2008), Performance Management and

Development, Jaico Publications
• Cardy Robert L. (2008), Performance Management Concepts, Skills and Exercises, Prentice
Hall India
• Rao T V (2008), Performance Management and Appraisal Systems-HR Tools for Global
Competitiveness, Response Books
• Sahu R K (2007) Performance Management System, Excel Books
 TRAINING & DEVELOPMENT
Course Code: MBA 315 Credit Units: 03
Course Objective:
This course is designed to provide in depth understanding and enable the
students to manage training processes and system for developing human
resource of the organization.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction to Training and Development

Training – concept, and rationale; training process: role of stakeholders in
training programme; Organization and Management of training function;
Training needs assessment – organizational analysis, operational analysis,
person analysis; competency mapping; Learning theories, learning process.

Module II: Training Design

Designing the training programme: process of learning in training
programme – attributes and factors influencing; learning process; learning
styles; training climate and pedagogy; developing training modules; Training
aids

Module III: Training Methods and Techniques

Training methods and techniques – role playing, business games, in basket
exercises, laboratory training; incidents and cases; seminars, syndicates and
group discussion; lecture, programmed instructions; inspirational techniques –
brainstorming, mind mapping, creative problem solving; Management
Development

Module IV: Evaluation of training

Evaluation of training – need for evaluation, principles of evaluation, criteria
and approaches; return on investment in training, process of calculating ROI
in training;

Module V: Emerging Trends in Training and Development

Emerging trends in training and development; new perspectives on training –
cross cultural training, e-learning, knowledge management

Examination Scheme:
Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

Text:
• Noe, Raymond A, “Employee Training and Development” Tata McGraw Hill Education; 6th
edition 2013
References:
• Agochia, Devendra, Every Trainer’s Handbook, New Delhi; Sage Publications
• De Simone, R.L. and Harris, D.M., Human Resource Development, Thomson Learning
• Sahu, R.K., Training for Development , Excel Books, New Delhi
• Blanchard, P Nick, and James W. Thacker, Effective Training – Systems, Strategies, and
Practices, Pearson Education, New Delhi
• Goldstein, Training in Organization , Thomson Learning, Bombay
• McGrath, Training for Life and Leadership in Industry, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi
 STRATEGIC HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 316 Credit

Units: 03
Course Objective:
This subject provides an understanding of the strategic contribution of the Human Resource
Management (HRM) function. This course will place previous studies of human resource
management within a strategic dimension so as to illustrate the concept of competitive
advantage applied to human resources.

Course Contents:

Module I: The Concept of Strategy

Strategy Defined, Key Concepts of Strategy, Formulations of Strategy, Strategic Management,
The Process Of Strategic Management

Module II: The Concept of Strategic HRM

An Investment Perspective of HRM, Strategic HRM, Aims of SHRM, Strategic HR Vs Traditional
HR, Challenges in SHRM, Approaches and Models to SHRM and the Evolving Strategic Role of
HR, Barriers to Strategic HR.

Module III: Strategic HRM in Action

HR Strategy defined, Purpose, Types of HR Strategies, Content of HR Strategies, Formulating HR
Strategy, Criteria for an Effective HR Strategy, Integrating the Business and HR Strategies.

Module IV: Impact of HRM on Business Performance

Human Resource Evaluation- Definition and Overview, Rationale for HR Evaluation, Measures of
HRM Performance, Approaches to HR Evaluations

Module V: Future trends in Strategic HRM Approaches

Career Management, Mentoring Relationship, Work-life Integration

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70
Text & References:

• Agarawala Tanuja (2007) Strategic Human Resource Management Oxford University Press.
• Armstrong Michael (2007), Strategic Human Resource Management: Strategy and Action,
Kogan Page
• Mahey C and Salman G., (1996), Strategic Human Resource Management, Oxford Blackwell.
• Mello Jeffrey A., (2008), Strategic Human Resource Management, Thompson Press
Publishing.
• Srinivas R. Kandula, (2002), Strategic Human Resource Development, Prentice Hall of India.

INTERNATIONAL TRADE FINANCE

Course Code: MBA 317 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
Understand ways in which International Trade is undertaken, settled and financed; Appreciate
the need and role of various entities engaged in International Trade and Finance; Recognise
the terminology used in International Trade, Finance and commercial contracts; Know how
to avail finance from International Financial Markets & Institutions for trade and global
business; Understand international payment systems & Regulatory compliances; Study
Global Mergers & Acquisition trends.

Course Contents:

Module I: Globalization, Trade & Finance

Complexities of international trade, Meaning of Int’l Trade Finance, need of various entities
like exporters, importers, merchants, traders, overseas representatives, banks, borrowers,
lenders, Logistics, Forwarders etc. International Commercial Terms (INCOTERMS), Protection
against credit, political, economic and transit risks.

Module II: Global Financial Ecosystem

World’s major Financial Markets for Equity, Debt, Foreign Exchange & Commodities.
International lending institutions World Bank, IMF, ADB, EBRD, Export-Import Banks, foreign
Governments & agencies. Financing global trade, Buyers credit, Supplier credit, Role of
credit-rating agencies, ECGC & EXIM Banks.
Module III: International Trade Finance & Payment Systems
Modes of Payments in Trade, obtaining payments through Documents against Payment,
Documents against Acceptance, Bills of Exchange, Letters of Credit & Stand-by Letters of
Credit. Bill discounting with Banks, Factoring & Forfeiting agencies. Foreign currency
cheques, drafts, telegraphic transfers (TT’s) & SWIFT. Regulations to prevent fraud and money
laundering. Remittances permitted by RBI for individuals & corporates.

Module IV: International Banking

Role of International Banks, Correspondent Banking, Nostro/Vostro Accounts. Bid/Ask rate
determination for Bills, TT’s, Traveler’s Cheques. Risks of OTC products & ISDA regulations.
Availing pre-shipment & post-shipment finance, Fixed vs. Floating rate borrowing & External
Commercial Borrowing (ECB’s). Payment, settlement and clearing systems in foreign currency
including SWIFT, CHIPS, CHAPS & Electronic banking. RBI Regulatory compliances, late
payments & bad debts.

Module V: Global Mergers & Acquisition & (M&A)

FDI & FII statistics, FDI & reverse FDI within & outside India. Examination of international
investment proposals. Case studies on corporate India’s acquisitions & mergers abroad. Role
of International Banks, Investment Banks, Hedge Funds, Private Equity, Pension Funds etc.
ECB’s, ADR’s GDR’s, Bonds in global A&M’s.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Paul Cowdell and Derek Hyde (Feb 2003) International Trade Finance, Institute of Financial
Services
• Apte, P. G. (1998), International Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill
• Levi, M. D. (1996), International Finance, McGraw Hill International.
• UCPDC-600, International Chamber of Commerce, Paris
 INTERNATIONAL COMMODITY MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 318 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
Knowing which countries dominate world trade in commodities; Familiarization with international
commodity markets; Functions and mechanism of Indian and International Commodity Exchanges;
Learning to identify commodity risks and formulating suitable strategies to minimize it.

Course Contents:
Module I: International Commodity Trading
Changing Int’l Trade scenario & in 21st Century; Commodities – Definition, Features, History,
Participants, Structure; systems of commodity, Top Exporter & Importer countries of World’s most
traded commodities, India’s place in World Markets.

Module II: .World’s Commodity Exchanges

Major Commodity Exchanges in World - USA, Canada, Latin America, Europe, China, Asia, Africa &
Oceanic: History, Shareholding, Products & contract specifications.

Module III: Indian Commodity Exchanges

Turnover, Evolution, Forward Market Commission, Contracts Act: Regional & National Commodity
Exchanges, Structure, Shareholding, Turnover, Products Traded on National Exchanges MCX,
NCDEX, NMCE, ICEX.

Module IV: Commodity Derivatives

Derivatives - Definition, Types, OTC vs Exchange Traded, Participants, Evolution, Economic
Functions & benefits, Risks. Commodity Futures & Options - Characteristics, Terminologies, Margins,
Physical Delivery, Assignment, Warehousing, Quality specifications, Membership, Charges; Trading,
Clearing & Settlement; Strategies for Hedging, Speculation & Arbitrage. Types of Orders, Difference
between & Options & Futures, Right/Obligation of Buyer/Seller, Call/Put Options.

Module V: World’s Most Traded Commodities

Presentations on Cotton, Edible oils (Rapeseed, Soy, Palm Oil), Tea, Coffee, Sugar, Wheat, Crude
Oil, Steel, Rice, Pulses, Rubber, Gold, Silver, Copper etc - World Trade, India’s share, Production,
Global demand & supply, Consumption & price patterns, Quality, Trading, Contract specifications,
substitutes etc.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Niti Nandini Chatnani, Commodity Markets - Operations, Instruments and Application, Tata McGraw Hill
Education Private Limited, New Delhi
• NCDEX Institute of Commodity Markets & Research (NICR), Study Manual for Commodity Trading
 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND POLICY
Course Code: MBA 319 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
Learn the significance of International Trade & Globalization; Introduction to International Economic
Indicators & Terminologies; Exposure to World Economies, Transformations & Emerging markets;
Visualize & cope with Global Changes in Business scenario; Understanding the role of Govt.,
International Institutions & Trade Policies

Course Contents:
Module I: Globalization & Emerging Trends
Theory of Comparative Advantage, Product Cycle Theory, New Trade Theory, Competitive Advantage
of Nations, International Investment, FDI, FII, Major developments in World economy
Emerging Markets - China, Africa, Asia, East Europe, Latin American & Russia.

Module II: International Economic Indicators

Free Trade, BOP, GNP, GDP, Per-Capita Income, Purchasing Power, Economic/Political/Legal
Systems, Debt Problem, Macro Economic Issues. Barriers–Tariff & Non Tariff, Dumping, Antidumping,
Appeal and Appellate procedures, Role of State.

Module III: Global Trade & Policy

Economic, Commercial, Political, Financial, Marketing, Cultural, Legal & Policy issues & their
management,
Global Trade of major economies- U.S., EU, China, Japan, India, Latin America, Russi.Conflict
between Industrialized & Developing Countries, Export-Import Restrictions and Promotion,
Investment Policies, Relevance to India’s Economy.

Module IV: WTO & Global F. I’s

Evolution of GATT and WTO, Tariff Conversions, MFN, Membership, Structure, Uruguay & other
Rounds, Agreement on a) Agriculture b) Trade-in-Services c) TRIMS d) Intellectual Property Rights;
Dispute Settlement Mechanism Problems. Bretton Woods, World Bank, IBRD, IDA, IFC, MIGA,
ICSID, IMF, ADB, EXIM Bank, Forfeiting & Project Exports

Module V: Regional Economic Integration & Economic Transformation

Levels of Economic Integration & Trade Blocks- EU, EFTA, NAFTA, CARICOM, ACM, ECSCA,
ASEAN, SAARC, SAPTA, Cartels, OPEC. Transformation of Europe, Russia, East Europe, China,
Africa

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Schmiltoft, Sweet & Mexwell (2000), Export Trade

• Rao, M.B., and Manjula Guru, WTO and International Trade, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
• Charles W.H. Hall, International Business, Competing in the Global Market Place, Tata McGraw Hill
• UCPDC-600, International Chamber of Commerce, Paris
• Cateora & Hess, International Marketing, Richard D Irwin Inc.
• Eitleman & Stonehill, Multinational Business Finance, Wesley Pub. Co.
• IMF References, The World Economic Outlook
 INTERNATIONAL TRADE PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION

Course Code: MBA 365 Credit

Units: 03
Course Objective:
Learning the importance and procedural & documentation aspects of export-import of goods and
services ; impart knowledge of governments, departments, international institutions involved ; teach
an Export Manager to develop a systematic methodology to handle exports ; understand the
relevance and importance of various government policy measures for export as well as import.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Export documentation Framework – the need, entities & documents as per requirement of (a) the
contract (b) Govt. of India (c) Importing country d) for claiming export assistance.

Module II: Documents for processing export order and legal implications
Processing of Product enquiry/quotation, Purchase/Export Order, Letter of intent, Payment Terms,
International Transport Modes, INCOTERMS, advising & scrutiny of a Letter of Credit (L/C), seeking
L/C amendments, International Chamber of Commerce’s UCPDC articles.

Module III: Export/Import Documents

How to make Commercial, Financial, Transport, Title, Official, Insurance, Export assistance
Documents & Certificates for Exports. Ensuring error-free export documentation as per L/C. How to
open L/C, apply for license and make Customs/ Sales Tax documents for imports.

Module IV: Central Excise, Sales Tax & Customs Clearances

Clearance of Export & Import Cargo, Role of Clearing and Forwarding Agents, Shipment of
Export Cargo, Excise, Sales Tax & Customs Department regulation compliance.

Module V: EXIM Policy Framework

EPCG Scheme, Duty Exemption Pass Book Scheme, Export Oriented Units, Export houses, Trading
houses, Export Processing Zones, Special Economic Zone, Negotiation of Export Bills, Bank
realization, late payment follow-up. Bank, RBI, DGFT, Customs & FEMA regulatory compliances.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Nabhi (2011-12)1999, How to Export, Nabhi Publications

• RBI Mumbai, Export Procedures and Documentation
• Handbook of Exim Procedures and Documentation – Govt. of India Publication Division
• Handbook of DGFT Publications – Ministry of Commerce, Govt. of India.
 FOREIGN EXCHANGE (FX) MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 366 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
Understand the basics & trading mechanics of Indian & International FX Markets ; Read,
understand, covert, calculate rates and negotiate FX rates ; Understand linkages of money
markets, interest rates, economic & world events to FX rates ; Understand FX Hedging,
Speculation & Arbitrage trading strategies ; Use FX Derivatives
(Forwards/Futures/Options/Swaps) to hedge FX risk ; Know Regulatory compliances

Course Contents:
Module I: Foreign Exchange in Global Business
Importance of FX in International Business & Financial Markets ; Volume, Participants, Risk from
Currency Volatility and experiences of MNC’s in cross border transactions.

Module II: Foreign Exchange Markets & Regulatory Compliances

Spot and Forward Markets, Trading Terminologies & Mechanism, Currency Convertibility, Major/Minor
currencies. ISO Currency codes, linkages to other Global Markets & Events, Using benchmark rates
LIBOR/MIBOR. Reserve Bank of India’s remittance guidelines for individuals & Corporates.

Module III: Foreign Exchange Rate Determination

Exchange Rate Determination, Cross-currency calculations, Interest Rate & Purchasing Power Parity,
Negotiating FX rates for inflow/outflow for different international transactions, Exchange Arithmetic.

Module IV: Foreign Exchange Rate Exposure & Trading Strategies

Transaction, Translation and Operating Exposure. FX Trading Strategies for Hedging, Speculation &
Arbitrage.

Module V: Foreign Exchange Risk Management using Derivatives

Concept of Hedging, Hedging strategies of Corporates, FX Risk Management using Currency
Derivatives like Forwards, Futures, Options & Swaps.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Apte P.G. (1998), International Financial Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Publication

• Thummuluri Siddaiah (2010), International Financial Management, Pearson Education
• Levi, M.D. (1996), International Finance, McGraw Hill International
• Errunza, V.R., Singh, D. and Srinivasan, T.S. (1994), International Business Finance, Global Business Press
• Hull, J.C. (1999), Introduction to Futures and Options Markets, Prentice Hall of India
• Edwards, F.R and Ma C.W. (1992), Futures and Options, McGraw-Hill International.
• Kolb, R.W. (1997), Understanding Futures Markets, Prentice Hall of India
• Rebonato, R. (1996), Interest Rate Option Models: Understanding, Analysing and Using Models for Exotic
Interest Rate Options, John Wiley and Sons
• Kohn, M (1998) Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
 APPLICATION OF GENERAL INSURANCE
Course Code: MBA 367 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The subject is designed by keeping in view about the requirement of knowledge of History of the
Insurance in India, various aspects of the insurance, basic principles of Insurance along with their
implementation in to operation with the help of legal and financial principals. Basic and mandatory
activity of any Insurance Organization.

Course Contents:
Module I
The Conceptual Framework, The Insurance Device, The Professional Approach, The Classification of
Insurance Business, Financial Aspects of Insurance Business Other Special Need Plans Application
and Acceptance Investment and Accounting

Module II
The Basic Principles - Utmost Good Faith, Insurable Interest, Indemnity, Corollaries of Indemnity,
Proximate Cause. Legal Principles of the insurance – The Indian contract Act 1872, WC Act,
Arbitration Act, Motor Vehicle Act. Assignment, Nomination, Loans, Surrenders, Foreclosure, M.W.P.
Act. General Insurance (nationalization) Act 1972. IRDA Notification.

Module III
Policy Document-Need & Format, Insurance forms-proposals–cover note-policy-endorsement.
Premium Payment, Lapse and Renewal. Miscellaneous documents. Rating-Premium

Module IV
Underwriting practice in India and other countries – Co-insurance and Re-insurance practice. Claim
procedure – Surveyors regulation and requirements, Self survey and In-house survey. Survey
protocol and MOU.

Module V
Introduction to Information Technology to Insurance industry, The Evolution of Computers, Computer
Hardware – Software - Concepts. System Life cycle analysis and design. Functions of IT Personnel
and IT Department. Brief on Insurance applications.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Dowd, Kevin, Beyond value at Risk, Wiley, John & Sons,

• Vaughan, Emmett J and Vaughan, Fundamentals of Risk and Insurance, Therese M.
Wiley,John & Sons.
• Harvey W. Rubin ,Dictionary of Insurance Terms; Barron's Educational Series
• Vazir Ahmed Khan ,All About Insurance, The Insurance Times publication
 LIFE INSURANCE – UNDERWRITING AND CLAIMS
Course Code: MBA 368 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The course will provide an understanding of the basic concepts and principles of life insurance, its
functions and benefits. Besides product pricing method, the broad features of individual and group
products, social security schemes, reinsurance etc. will help students develop and understanding of
different facets of life insurance. The course also provides understanding of policies of health,
property and assets insurance.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Basic concepts of life insurance, its functions and need and its role in the economy of the country,
Principles of life Insurance, Pricing of life insurance products.

Module II: Individual Plans / Products

Salient features of plans of individual insurance – Term Assurance Plans. Whole Life Plans.
Endowment Plans, Combination of Whole Life and Endowment Plans. Children’s Plans, Annuity
Plans etc.

Module III: Personal Insurance

Principle of Health Insurance. Health Insurance Products, Group Insurance Products Pension
Policies, Personal Accident Policy, Motor Vehicle Policy.

Module IV: Social Security Schemes

Social Dimensions of insurance and the main features of Social Security Schemes launched by the
Government.

Module V: Other Types of Insurance

Salary Saving Schemes Keyman Insurance Partnership Insurance. Overseas mediclaim insurance.

Module VI: Reinsurance

Module VII: Personal Insurance

Health Insurance Pension Group Insurance Products.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Life Insurance Underwriting, IC-22, Insurance Institute of India.

• Manual for Agents, Life Insurance Corporation of India.
• Gene Stone, Insurance Company Operations, (LOMA)
• Barbara Foxenberger & Jane Lightcap Brown, Life and Health Insurance Underwriting,
LOMA
 REGULATORY FRAMEWORK OF INSURANCE
Course Code: MBA 369 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The course will provide an understanding of insurance regulations in pre and post nationalization
period with latest updating. Details of various Acts, their implications and limitations will also be
discussed with real life case.

Course Contents:
Module I
Ingredients of a contract and legal aspects of insurance with special reference to insurable interest,
contracts of indemnity, principle of utmost good faith indisputability of policies Proximate course etc...

Module II
Insurance Act 1938 (With Special Reference to Actuarial Valuation. Surplus Nomination, Assignment,
Investment of Funds etc.) and LIC Act 1956 – Genesis Expectations and Objectives, Postal Life
Insurance and Reinsurance.

Module III
General Insurance Business Nationalization Act 1972 and the Malhotra Committee Report 1994. Its
Embarrassing Recommendations Tariff Advisors Committee.

Module IV
IRDA Act 1999 Its Provisions in full

Module V
Registration of Insurance Companies Regulations, Agency Regulations Accounting and Investment
Regulations Rural Business Regulations Actuaries Regulations Code of Conduct for Advertisement
Regulations Surveyors Brokers IPA Regulations etc.

Module VI
Consumer Protection Act ISO and OMBI DSM

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Study Material on Relevant Acts and Commentaries given as handouts.

 RISK MANAGEMENT AND INSURANCE
Course Code: MBA 370 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
This course Aim is to introduce student to the concept and application of systematic risk identification
and measurement. Concept of Risk Control and Examination of various risk control option. Second
part of the course is to introduce students to the principles and practice of insurance, including an
examination of the main type of Insurance policies currently available to develop an understanding of
the use of insurance as an effective risk management tool.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Risk and uncertainty, subjective attitudes to risk Acceptable risks versus unacceptable risk
classification of risk. The cost of risks, Handling cost, Loss cost, Private and social Cost, Handling of
risks. Avoidance, Risk Retention, Reduction and Transfer.

Module II: Practice of Risk Management

Risk Management process and administration, Risk identification, Perception, Organization Chart, I/O
analysis, operative causes. Risk reduction and control, Loss reduction Measure, Education and
Training Contingency Planning. Risk avoidance. Statistical methods and probability concepts.

Module III: Process and Technique

Risk Analysis: Nature of risk and human behaviour, fundamental statistical analysis. Risk retention
and control- discuss hazards and risk, major area of control and measures. Risk Transfer, Corporate
risk management – function, importance. Characteristics and developing tools. Influence factors.

Module IV: Insurance Introduction

Concept of Insurance Classification of Insurance life and non life (General) basic principle of
insurance- utmost good faith – insurable interest, material
Facts, indemnity, proximate cause. Acceptance of Proposals, Physical and Moral Hazards.

Module V: Economics of Insurance

Economic principal of Insurance, sharing, subrogation, contribution, co-insurance. Reinsurance
concept and methods. Premium Rates calculations Bonus /malus in Premium investments, Funds
management.

Module VI: Documentation

Insurance forms - proposal form cover note certificate of insurance, policies, endorsement renewal
receipts, Special class of Insurance Oil and Energy, Satellite insurance, Contingency policy, Industrial
All Risk policy, Project insurance and Loss of Profit policy. Warranties – Conditions. Claim procedure
and survey.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Peter L, Against the Gods, Wiley John & Sons, Inc.

• Dowd, Kevin, Beyond Value at Risk, Wiley John & Sons, Inc.
 BUSINESS PROCESS SYSTEM
Course Code: MBA 371 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
This course will expose the students to describe process development by making a distinction
between the development processes, the management process and supporting process in line
with evolving standards. It also introduces object- oriented approach to provide a better
balance with conventionally structured systems approach. It then describes the use of models
to precisely define systems, processes, data and their co-relation.

Course Contents:
Module I: Business Process Optimization
Understanding Business Process and e Process, Business Process Optimization, Business
Modeling and Business Strategy for IT, Understanding Work Flow Automation and Value
Chain.

Module II: Implementation of Business Process Life Cycle

Various Parameters that effect business process and their significance

Module III: Introduction to Data Modeling Techniques

Methodology, tools and techniques. Systems Modeling, Logical and Physical Models, Data
Modeling, Entity relationship Diagram, Entity, Attributes, Domain, Key Relationships,
Cardinality notations, Degree Generalization, Strategic Data Model, Data modeling during
Systems Analysis.

Module IV: Introduction to Modern Structured Analysis

Methodology, tools and techniques, process and concepts - Decomposition, Decomposition
Diagram, Logical Process and conventions, Structured English, Decision Table, Event
Decompositions Diagram, DFD, information engineering, Prototyping

Module V: Introduction to Object Oriented Analysis & Modeling

Reading and interpreting an object model, describing object modeling in the context of
systems analysis with the help of class diagram state diagram and event diagram.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Awad (2009), Systems Analysis & Design Methods, Galgotia Publications

• Hoffer (2009), Systems Analysis & Design Methods, Tata Mc Graw Hill
• Whitten JL (2009), Systems Analysis & Design Methods, Tata McGraw Hill
 MANAGEMENT OF SOFTWARE PROJECTS

Course Code: MBA 372 Credit

Units: 03
Course Objective:
This course is to familiarizing students the concept of Software Project Management, which is
an umbrella activity within software engineering.. It begins before any technical activity is
initiated and continues throughout the definition, development and maintenance of computer
software.

Course Contents:
Module I: Software Project Management Concepts
Management Spectrum, People, product, process, project The W5HH Principle.

Module II: Software Process and Project Metrics

Measures, Metrics and Indicators, Metrics in the process and project domain, software Development, Metrics
for s/w quality, integrated Metrics within the s/w process, metrics for small organization, establishing a s/w
metrics program

Module III: Software Project Planning

Observation on estimating, s/w scope. Resources, s/w project estimation, decomposition techniques,
Empirical Estimation Models, Make/Bye Decision, Automated Estimation Tools.

Module IV: Risk Strategic

Risks, Risk Identification, Risk Projection, Risk Refinement, Risk Mitigation, Monitoring & Mgmt.,
Safety Risks and Hazards, RMMM Plan.

Module V: Project Scheduling and Tracking

Concepts of Lateness and basic principles Relationship between People and Effort, Defining a Task
Set for s/w project, selecting s/w engg. Tasks, Major Task, task n/w, Earned value analysis, error
tracking, project plan.

Module VI: Software Configuration management

Baselines, SCM Process, Identification of objects in s/w conf., version control, change control,
configuration audit, status reporting. hands-on on MS-Project.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Hughes B & Cotterell M (2010), Software Project Management, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Leffingwell D (2009), Managing Software Requirements: A Unified Approach (The Addison-
Wesley Object Technology Series)
• Henry J (2009), Software Project Management, Pearson Education

DECISION SUPPORT AND BUSINESS INTELLEGENCE SYSTEMS

Course Code: MBA 373 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
This course can help students to have a more comprehensive knowledge of the factors
affecting the business. The Business Intelligence focuses on learning how analytics and
technology can be used to enhance, decision-making, and performanceThis course is
designed to train students in skills, methodologies, and knowledge how to accomplish data
management tasks with the applications of BI tools and techniques

Course Contents:
Module I
Decision Support Systems and Business Intelligence, Computerized Decision making,
Concepts and principles of data ware housing, ETL (extraction transformation and loading)
Process, OLAP

Module II
Business Intelligence, Special Introductory Section: The Essentials of Business Intelligence,
Business Analytics and Data Visualization, Data mining and techniques; Text, and Web Mining,
Neural Networks for Data Mining

Module III
Business Performance Management, Collaborative Computing-Supported Technologies and
Group Support Systems, Knowledge Management, Intelligent Systems- Artificial Intelligence
and Expert Systems.

Module IV
Advanced Intelligent Systems, Intelligent Systems over the Internet, Implementing Decision
Support Systems- Systems Development and Acquisition, Integration, Impacts, and the Future
of Management Support Systems.

Module V
Data Mining and BI, Next generation BI, BI strategy, BI and Performance Management,
Implementation of BI Project-Reason for the failure and Success of BI tools in industry with
examples and case studies

Examination Scheme:
 Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Turban E, EAronson J et al. (2006), Decision Support and Business Intelligence Systems,
Prentice Hall of India
• Dunham MH (2009), Data Mining – Introductory and Advanced Topics, Pearson Education
• Howson C (2010),Successful Business Intelligence: Secrets to Making BI a Killer App ;Tata
Mac-Graw Hill

SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE AND IT SERVICE

MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 374 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
SOA is a core part of the service-oriented computing platform that brings with it new concepts,
technologies and challenges. First two modules of this paper will explore key parts of this
platform to provide well rounded coverage of the multi-faceted world of building service-
oriented automation solutions. Now days providers of IT services can no longer afford to
focus on technology and their internal organization, they now have to consider the quality of
the services they provide and focus on the relationship with customers, ITSM provides you
with customer's perspective of IT's contribution to the business. ITSM stands in deliberate
contrast to technology-centered approaches to IT management and business interaction, the
third and fourth modules of this paper will talk about the ITSM as concept and ITIL for the
implementation of the same.

Course Contents:
Module I: SOA Concepts
Common characteristics of contemporary SOA, Misperceptions about SOA, benefits of using
SOA, From XML to Web services to SOA, SOA Standards and specifications, SOA architecture

Module II: Advance SOA Concepts

Web Services and Primitive SOA, Web Services and Contemporary SOA, SOA and Service
Orientation, Service Layers

Module III: IT Service Management

Service Management as a Practice, The Service Lifecycle, ITSM Frameworks, ISO 20000, IT
Governance concept and models.
Module IV: ITIL Framework
Introduction ITIL, Versions of ITIL, Comparison between different versions, Overview of ITIL
V2 and ITIL V3, SERVICE SUPPORT- Configuration Management, Service Desk, Incident
Management, Problem Management, Change Management, Release Management; SERVICE
DELIVERY- Service Level Management, Capacity Management, IT Service Continuity
Management, Financial Management for IT Services, Availability Management, Criticisms of
ITIL

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Cerf V et al (2010) Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) Compas; Pearson Education

• SOA Concepts - Technology and Design, Pearson Education
 WEB-ENABLED BUSINESS PROCESSES
Course Code: MBA 375 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
Students will be taught how to web-enable a real time business process. Students will learn how web-
enabled business processes can increase profitability and performance and improve customer
relationships. Business on the web provide enterprise-wide process integration as well as connect
businesses with global business partners. These concepts will be put into practice through the
industry specific project.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction of Web Development
Web Server, Applications Server, Database Server, Static & Dynamic Web Sites, Server Site & Client
Site Technology, Various Search Engine Optimization tools and techniques, Web Hosting and
administration.

Module II: Building Dynamic web pages using Java Script & VB Script
Embedding JavaScript & VBScript in HTML, Operators & Expressions, Programming statements,
Functions, Handling Events, Working with Objects, Creating Frames & Windows, and Processing
Forms.

Module III: Database Connectivity using ASP

Web Development with Active Server Pages, Interaction with users, Building & Processing Web
Forms, Using Scriptlets, Getting Information about HTTP Request with the Request Object,
Processing Web Data with the Server, Session & Application Objects, Programming for database
connectivity Retaining Information between sessions using Cookies, working of Application Server
and Web Server.

Module IV: Introduction to E-Commerce

E-commerce and E-business, models of traditional & modern commerce, online vs traditional
commerce, categories and models of E-commerce, M-commerce, Electronic commerce applications,
barriers and threats to E-commerce, Future of E-commerce

Module V: E-Commerce Essentials

EDI, hardware, software, networks, web-servers types of EPS, EBPP, review of veri-sign and pay-pal

Module VI: E-Commerce Security

Online threats, measures to counter threats with techniques like encryption, digital signature,
cryptography, water marks etc.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Ferris D and Whipple L (2001),Building an Intelligent e-Business, Prentice Hall

 CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR
Course Code: MBA 376 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The course aims to explore the core concepts and theories of shopper behavior at individual, group
and organizational level so that students may use these as inputs in marketing decision making.

Course Contents:
Module I
Concept, Diversity of consumer behavior, Charactristics of Indian Consumers, Consumer
demographics, consumer life styles. Retailing implications of consumer demographics and lifestyle.
Environmental factors and individual factors affecting consumers.

Module II
Consumer as an Individual, Motivation, Needs, Goals, Personality, Self and Self Images, Perception,
Imagery, Learning, Cues, Response, Reinforcement, Behavioral Learning and Cognitive Learning
Theory.

Module III
Attitude, Attitude Formation and Change. Shopping attitudes and behavior, Consumer Buying
Decision Process, Types of consumer decision making, Impulse purchases and customer loyalty,
Cognitive dissonance, Consumer complaint behaviour

Module IV
Group Dynamics and Reference Groups, Opinion leadership process, Diffusions of innovations,
Adoption process, Family Decision Making, Social Class, Culture, Subculture

Module V
Consumerism: Definition of consumerism, buyers & seller’s rights, effects of consumerism

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Assel Henry (2006), Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Action, Thompson Press
• Seth & Mittal (2003), Consumer Behaviour : A Managerial Perspective, Thompson Press
• Schiffman and Kanuk (2009), Consumer Behaviour, Prentice Hall of India
 DISTRIBUTION AND LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 377 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The course is meant for managers under formation. Rapid innovations in technology, especially in the field of
distribution and logistics, have made corporate operations complex. Thus, this course develops the framework
for channel creation and formation. It reflects the importance of channel management issues and helps the
students in understanding the company’s route to markets and the downstream part of value chain.

Course Contents:
Module I
Distribution System- Role, Scope, Functions & Structure, Types of channels, Levels of
channels, Cost, Control and Customer service, Selection of Channels, partners, Motivation of
channels, Factors affecting channel design. Channel Design and Implementation –
segmenting, targeting, gap analysis, establishment of new channels or refining existing
channels.

Module II
Channel Flows – definition and concepts, Relevance of channel structure on Membership
Issues. Vertical Integration of Marketing Channels – costs, benefits, and need.

Module III
Retailing: Strategic Issues in Retailing. Merchandising Techniques: Franchising; nature and
scope, Wholesaling, Assorting, Distribution of supplementary services, and Intermediaries for
service delivery. New age technologies: SAP, ERP and Electronic channels.

Module IV
Channel Conflict – nature and degree, sources, consequences, conflict resolution strategies,
Channel Performance: Monitoring & evaluation, identifying power sources, and channel
coordination.

Module V
Logistics System – concept, objective and scope, the system elements, transportation,
warehousing, inventory management, packing and unitization, communication and control,
importance, Strategic Logistics Planning – logistics strategy, implementation and
management.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Bert Rosenbloom, (2008), Marketing Channels, South Western Cengage Learning

• DK Agrawal, (2008), Logistics and Supply Chain Management, Macmillan India
• Havaldar and Cavale, (2008), Sales and Distribution Management- Text and Cases. Tata McGraw Hill
• Stern & El-Ansary, (2009), Marketing Channels. Prentice Hall of India.
• V.V. Sople, (2010), Logistics Management. Pearson Publication.
 SALES MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 378 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
This course has been designed to help students learn sales management concepts and how to
apply them to solve business problems and to function as effective managers. It deals with all
important back end management of sales and front end personal selling issues with a view to
handle the situations professionally and improve the outcome with result orientation.

Course Contents:
Module I
Changing world of Sales Management and Professionalism in sales. Classification of Personal Selling
approaches. Sales jobs, Qualification and skill required for success. Organizational buyer behavior
and buying situations. Contrasting Transactional and Relationship Selling models, Sales Teams.
Sales management Competencies for effective and outstanding results. Developing Sales
Management Strategy / Objectives and Sales Force Roles.

Module II
Recruitment planning process: Job analysis, description, qualifications, buyer’s perspective
and methods of locating prospective candidates. Selection: Application forms, Types of
Interviews, Testing and Validating the hiring process.
Sales Training: Determining training needs, Training analysis, Methods of Evaluating sales
Training and building a sales training program. Instructional methods used in training.

Module III
Motivation and the reasons for motivating sales people. Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs related
to the sales force motivators and company’s actions to fill needs. Methods of giving status to
sales people to motivate them.
Sales force compensation. Components of compensation and their purpose. Comparison of
various compensation plans. Optimizing sales compensation: Customer – Product Matrix and
relating it to the appropriate compensation plans.

Module IV
Sales territory; Reasons for establishing or revising Sales Territories, Setting up and revising
Sales Territories: Market build-up and Work load method; optimizing sales territory.
Sales quotas; Objectives in using Quotas, Types of Sales Quotas and Quota setting
procedures. Reasons when not to use Quotas.

Module V
Personal Selling process: Prospecting: Developing a prospect base, Strategic prospecting,
Sources of prospects, common causes of customer attrition, Preparing a prospect list and
organizing information. Planning the initial sales call and approach: Pre call information on the
Buyer and Organisation, Call Objectives, Planning the approach. Sales Presentation techniques:
Types of presentation techniques, Presentation sequence, Adoptive Selling Model.
Demonstrations: Demonstration plans, actions, custom fitting demonstrations, use of sales tools.
Handling customer objections: types of objections, types of close, Trial Close. Closing the sales.

Examination Scheme:
 Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Still, Cundiff and Govoni. (2009), Sales Management, Decisions, Strategies and Cases,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
• Ingram, Laforge, Avila, Schwepker Jr., Williams.(2009), Analysis and Decision Making,
Segment Books
• Douglas J. Dalrymple, Cron and Decarlo.(2003), Sales Management, John Wiley & Sons
Inc.
• Charles M. Futrell (2010). Fundamentals of Selling. Tata McGraw Hill
• Gerald L Manning, Michael Ahearne and Barry L Reece (2011). Selling Today, Prentice Hall
Pub.

PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 379 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
In congruence with the aim of marketing to convert a commodity into an identifiable product and to a
subsequent brand, the course involves the objective of imparting comprehensive understanding of the
process of product strategy and the fundamentals of building, measuring, and managing a brand.

Course Contents:
Module I: Product Strategy Development
Elements of Product Strategy, Product Mix and Line decisions. Positioning Strategy, Product Strategy
over Life Cycle, New Product Development Process

Module II: Introduction to Brand Management

Concept of branding, the challenges faced by brand managers, the value of a brand to customers and
the organization, Branding Challenges & Opportunities, Strategic Brand Management Process

Module III: Elements to build Effective Brands

Criteria to choose brand elements, Creation of brand personality, brand personality scale, brand
image sources, Brand identity dimensions

Module IV: Brand Re-vitalization

Brand & Line Extensions, Marketing Mix for Brand Extensions, Co – Branding. Upward and
Downward stretching of brands.

Module V: Managing the Brand Systems

The brand equity concept, Brand Equity Models – Customer Based Brand Equity, Aaker Model, Brand
hierarchy Brand Awareness, Brand Loyalty, Brand Associations, Brand Recognition, Recall.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Keller K.L. (2008), Strategic Brand Management: Building, Measuring, and Managing
Brand Equity, Prentice Hall.
• Sengupta S. (2010), Brand Positioning, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Kapferer J. L. (1994), Strategic Brand Management, Free Press

RURAL MARKETING
Course Code: MBA 380 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The objective of this course is to evolve students understand the growing significance of rural
marketing. It highlights the emerging trends in rural marketing and points to a steep learning curve for
companies eyeing rural markets in India. The peculiarities of the rural customers in India are to be
studied and the students are prepared to face the future challenges of rural India.

Course Contents:

Module I
Rural Marketing an Overview, Principles of Marketing as Relevant to Rural Marketing, Evolution of
Rural Marketing, Rural Marketing Mix, Profiles of Urban & Rural customers and Differences in their
Characteristics, Rural Consumer Behavior. Agricultural Marketing: Marketing of Agricultural Produce,
Agricultural Inputs. Contract farming

Module II
Rural Environment, Rural Market Strategies with special reference to Segmentation, Targeting and
Positioning, Innovation for Rural Market, Products and Services in the Rural Markets, Channels of
Distribution and Trade Management, Rural Retailing.

Module III
Rural Communication: Advertising and Sales Promotion Strategies and New Product launch
Techniques for Rural Markets. Pricing in Rural Markets.

Module IV
Rural Market Research and Market Information System, Marketing Strategies, Policy, Sales
Management Practices, Training, Motivation .Sales Quota Strategies.

Module V
Social Marketing: Corporate Social Responsibility in Rural Markets. The Future of Rural
Marketing in India. Role of Govt. In Rural & Agricultural Marketing. Case Studies: ITC
eChaupal, HUL Project Shakti, Sagar, DCM Haryali
Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Kashyap Pradeep & Raut Siddhartha, (2009) The Rural Marketing Book, Biztantra.
• Dogra B. & Ghuman K. (2010), Rural Marketing Concepts and Practices, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication.
• Krishnamacharyulu C.S.G. & Ramakrishnan Lalitha (2011), Rural Marketing Text & Cases,
Pearson
Education
• Magazines- Business World, Business India
• The Rural Marketing Journal

MANAGEMENT OF TECHNOLOGY AND INNOVATION

Course Code: MBA 381 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The objective of this course is to introduce the concepts and importance of technology
management and innovation. The course seeks to emphasis further their strategic role and
aspects of implementation in organisations.

Course Contents:
Module I: Strategy and technology
Introduction; Overview of technology and innovation management; Business cycles and
technology waves; Continuous and breakthrough technologies; Technology as
entrepreneurial advantage; Technology leadership and followership; Strategic technology
attitudes and processes; Value dynamics in technology and innovation

Module II: Technology forecasting, acquisition and absorption

Technology S-curves; Forecasting market conditions; Rates and directions of technological
change; Technological discontinuities; Acquisition processes: technology sourcing and
transfer, collaboration, alliance; Innovation management at organisation and nation level;
Redesigning organisational structures and processes; Technology diffusion characteristics
and overcoming barriers

Module III: Introduction to Innovation

Creation & development of ideas; Environment to create & capture sparks – pressing business
needs; Innovation at workplace – business drivers; Five steps to ideation – capturing &
processing of thoughts; Conversion of ideas; Business dimensions of innovation: From
business of innovation to innovation of business; Innovative organisation: Lasting &
differentiating leadership, motivation & success morale

Module IV: Total innovation management

Business context of Innovation; Innovation Models: Innovation as a management process;
Innovation quality improvement; Managing innovation momentum and speed; Strategic
Innovation; Collaboration, Open innovation; Incremental and breakthrough innovation;
Innovation project management

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Afuah, (2008),Innovation Management, New Delhi: Oxford University Press

• Burgelman, Christensen, and Wheelwright,(2009), Strategic Management of Technology
and Innovation, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Ettlie,(2009), Managing Innovation: New Technology,New Products and New Services,
Elsevier India,
• Maithal and Seshadri,(2007), Innovation Management, New Delhi: Response Books
• Narayanan,(2009), Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage,
Pearson Education
• Rastogi,(2009), Management of Technology and Innovation, New Delhi: Response Books
• Schilling, (2007),Strategic Management of Technological Innovation, New Delhi: Tata
McGraw-Hill
• Tidd, Bessant, and Pavitt,(2006), Managing Innovation, New Delhi: Wiley India
• Trott, (2008),Innovation Management & New Product Development, New Delhi: Pearson
Education
• White and Burton,(2007), Management of Technology and Innovation, The, Cengage
Learning
• Cetindamar (2010),Technology Management, Palgrave Macmillan
• Khalil (2010), Management of Technology, Tata McGraw-Hill

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 382 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The aim of this course is to develop the understanding of the various components of the integrated
supply chain. The learning is focused on developing the supply chain to suit domestic as well as
global markets.
Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction of Logistics and SCM
Evolution of Logistics and Importance of Supply Chain Management in the Overall Organization
Functioning, Customer Focus in Supply Chain, Developing Supply Chain as a Competitive Focus by
Customer Satisfaction and Corporate Profitability, Supply Chain Logistics Operations

Module II: Strategic Issues in Supply Chain Management

Value chain and value delivery system, Concept of multi-modal transportation and infrastructure
needs; Transportation Choices and Third Party Logistics, Fourth Party Logistics Distribution Channel
Design, Strategic Alliances, Communication Flow of Supply Chain, Documentation needs and
liabilities; Inter-functional coordination, Inter-corporate cooperation, Outsourcing in Supply Chain;
Vendor Management & Development, Strategic Lead Time Management, Warehousing

Module III: Managing the Supply Chain Performance

SCM and Information Technology, IT Enabled Supply Chain Management, Inter-firm Integration:
Implementation Issues, Application of ERP, JIT, Optimization of Supply Chain, Retailing Management,
Waste Elimination and Lean Thinking in Supply Chain; Supply chain performance measurement
systems; Supply Chain Balanced Score Card.

Module IV: SCM in Indian and Global Perspective

Supply Chain Management in the Indian Environment, Motives and Development of Global Markets,
Supply Chain Reconsideration- to suit the Global Environment, Risk Involved in International Markets,
Benchmarking Global Supply Chains.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Agarwal (2010), Supply Chain Management, Macmillan India

• Bowersox, Closs and Cooper (2008), Supply Chain Logistics Management, Tata McGraw-
Hill
• Chopra, Meindl and Kalra (2008), Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning, and
Operation, Pearson Education
• Rangaraj, et al (2009), Supply Chain Management for Competitive Advantage, Tata
McGraw-Hill
• Ray (2010). Supply Chain Management for Retail, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Shah (2009), Supply Chain Management: Text and Cases, Pearson Education
• Sharma (2010), Supply Chain Management, Oxford University Press
• Simchi-Levi, et al (2008), Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Wisner, Leong and Tan (2005), Principles of Supply Chain Management, Cengage

PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 383 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
Project Management is a broad multi-level activity. The objectives of this course are to provide
a thorough understanding of its various essentials to the student. At the completion of the
course, the student should be able to apply criteria of selection for identification of a project
and carry out a rational appraisal. He should be able to do project planning and be familiar
with project control systems.

Course Contents:
Module I: Context of Project Management
Concept of Projects, Project Management, importance; Project Goals, Functions; Categories of
Projects, Phases of Projects, 7S’ of Projects; Life Cycles

Module II: Project Selection and Appraisal

Criteria for selection: Checklist Model, Scoring Model, Analytic Hierarchy Process, Profile
Model; identification of the project; Request for Proposal; Project appraisal: Technical,
Commercial, Economic, Financial and Management appraisal; Feasibility Study: Payback
Period, NPV, IRR, Options Model; Detailed Project Report

Module III: Project Planning and Organization

Project Planning: Planning steps, Master plan; Defining Project Scope, Developing Work
Breakdown Structure, Project Activity, Project Coordination, Scheduling Charts; Schedule,
Gantt Charts, Project Team, Role of the leader; Project Organization: Pure, Matrix, Mixed;
Project Portfolio Management

Module IV: Cost Estimation, Budgeting, Measurement of Risk

Cost Estimating Process, Budgets and Estimates; Cost-Time Overrun; Risk analysis, Project
Management Information System

Module V: Project Review and Control

Control Process, Cybernetic controls, Go-No-go Controls, Post controls; Project Quality
Control; Critical Chain Project Management; Project Closeout; Project Termination and
Abandonment Analysis; Project Audit

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Gray & Larson (2008), Project Management, Tata McGraw-Hill

• Harvard Business School Press (2007), The Essentials of Project Management (for HR
Professionals)
• Kerzner (2008), Project Management, John Wiley
• Kloppenborg (2009), Contemporary Project Management, Cengage.
• Maylor (2008), Project Management, Pearson India
• Meredith,Mantel, (2008), Project Management, Wiley India
• Nagarajan (2008), Project Management, New Age Publishers
• Nicholas and Steyn (2008), Project Management for Business, Engineering, & Technology,
Elsevier India
• Pinto (2009),Project Management: Achieving Competitive Advantage, Pearson India, Delhi
 MANUFACTURING COMPETITIVENESS
Course Code: MBA 384 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The objective is to familiarize the students with manufacturing competitiveness, practices and importance to
enhace it in international markets as well as the changes required in the operational technologies with rapidly
changing environments. The aim is to develop understanding about the practical aspects of selection of process
technology, management of technological resources.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to WCM
The evolution of WCM; First principles of WCM; Hall’s framework of Value added Engineering;
Schonbergers’ framework of WCM; Gunn’s model of WCM; Maskells’ model of WCM,
Information Management Tools: Kanban; Bar Code; Materials Processing Tools: Flexible
Manufacturing Systems; Lean Production, Poka Yoke; Rapid Prototyping; Customer Interface;
Supplier Interface; Quality in WCM – Deming’s Approach; Shingo’s Approach; Knowledge
Management

Module II: Benchmarking Competitiveness

Performance measurement framework for analyzing manufacturing effectiveness.
Measurement tools and techniques. Cost accounting based measurement and non-financial
performance. World class manufacturing and bench marking.

Module III: Attaining Competitiveness

Manufacturing strategy in the global context. Global management paradigm and the extended
enterprise. Internationalization strategies and core competence of co-operations. Alliance
advantage and technology transfer.

Module IV: Emerging Trends & Challenges

The emphasis on this module shall be to discuss cases from various aspects of
manufacturing compettiveness.The aim is to make students familarise with the
practical and empirical aspects of manufacturing competitiveness.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Brown, Steve, (1996), Strategic Manufacturing for Competitive Advantage,

London: Prentice Hall.
• Carreira (2007), Lean Manufacturing that Works, Prentice-Hall of India
• Gopalakrishnan (2010), Simplified Lean Manufacture, Prentice-Hall of
India
• Hill (2000), Manufacturing Strategy: Text and Cases, McGraw-Hill.
• Hill and Hill (2009), Manufacturing Operations Strategy: Text and Cases,
Palgrave Macmillan.
• Hobbs (2004), Lean Manufacturing Implementation, Cengage Learning
• Keegan & O’Kelly (2008), Applied Benchmarking for Competitiveness, New
Delhi: Jaico
• Mather (2001), Competitive Manufacturing, Butterworth-Heinemann.
• Mitenberg (2005), Manufacturing Strategy: How to Formulate and
Implement a Winning Plan, Productivity Press.
• Nichloas (2007), Competitive Manufacturing Management, Tata McGraw-
Hill

TOTAL QUALITY AND COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE

Course Code: MBA 385 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The course deals with the integrative role and philosophy of Total Quality, Business Policy and resulting
Competitive advantage between all areas of management in business; the prescriptive and descriptive ideas and
the principles of management and their relevance in business; the methods and techniques of strategic choice
and strategic implementation in operational areas. It also underscores measurement of performance in various
business and effect of strategies, and difference between traditional and contemporary business practices.

Course Contents:
Module I: Value Chain, Competitive Advantage and Total Quality Management
Competitive scope and value chain, Basic concepts of TQM, History of Quality Revolution,
Leadership policy, External leadership, Strategic Planning – Strategic development process,
Company Strategy, Customer & market Integration, Customer Satisfaction Enhancement

Module II: Strategic Process Management

Management of product process, service process & support process, Supplier & partnering
process, Managing Change, Human Resource Development & Management, Work Systems,
Training, education & development, Employee well-being & satisfaction

Module III: Measurement & Continuous Improvement

Measurement of Quality, Performance Measures, Cost of Quality, Basic tools of continuous improvement,

Statistical application, Advanced improvement tools, House of Quality, Quality Function Deployment;

ISO 9000-2000, Malcolm Baldridge Examination, Quality Audit, Re-engineering, Benchmarks &

Landmarks, Best practices

Module IV: Six-Sigma Methodology of Strategic Management

Concept & understanding, Continuous improvement, Tools and techniques, problem
resolution, Training, Deployment and management of Six-sigma Organization.

Module V: Strategic Implementation with special reference to Balanced Scorecard

Operationalizing Strategy, Institutionalizing Strategy, Strategic Control, Balanced Scorecard
concepts and applications.
Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Bhote (2008), The Ultimate Six Sigma, Prentice-Hall of India

• Evans (2005), Introduction to Six Sigma & Process Improvement, An, Cengage Learning
• Evans and Lindsay (2008), Quality Control & Management, Cengage Learning
• Fryman (2002), Quality Management: A Process Improvement Approach, Cengage
Learning
• Gryna, et al (2009), Juran’s Quality Planning & Analysis for Enterprise Quality, Tata
McGraw-Hill
• Ishikawa (1985). What is Total Quality Control? The Japanese Way, Prentice-Hall
• Oakland, J. S. (2006), TQM: Text with Cases, Elsevier India
• Omachonu & Ross (2008), Total Quality, CRC Press / Ane Books India
• Rao (1996), Total Quality Management, John Wiley
• Sharma (2009), Total Quality Management, Sultan Chand
• Stahl (2000), Total Quality Management, New Delhi: Infinity Books
• Summers (2009), Quality Management, Prentice-Hall of India

FUNDAMENTALS OF RETAILING

Course Code: MBA 386 Credit

Units: 03
Course Objective:
The primary objective of the course is to have students develop marketing competencies in
retailing and retail consulting. The course is designed to prepare students for positions in the
retail sector or positions in the retail divisions of consulting companies.

Course Contents:
Module I: Retailing
Concept, definition and functions. Evolution of retailing. Global retailing scenario, growth of retailing in
India. Organized retailing in India: key drivers for growth and future prospects. Retail formats and their
characteristics: Store formats-Supermarket, Department store, Hypermarket, The Mall, Discount
store, Category Killers, Kiosks, Convenience store, Specialty store. Non-store formats- E-retailing,
direct selling, Television Home shopping, Vending Machine retailing.

Module II: Sore location planning

Levels of locations decisions, city selection, location options-High-street location, free
standing location, Shopping center/mall location, site selection, factors affecting city, location
and site location decisions. Store design and Layout: Exterior design components and their
significance, Interior atmospherics, store layout and space planning, visual merchandising.

Module III: Merchandising Management

Deciding the merchandise mix-variety, assortment, branding, quality, price points, factors
affecting merchandise mix-budget constraint, space limitation, product turnover rates, stock
replenishment, economic order quantity, Vendor identification and selection criterion,
negotiating with vendors, category management and category captainship, international
sourcing.

Module IV: Retail pricing

Factors affecting pricing, developing a retail price strategy- retail objectives, deciding a pricing
policy, price adjustments. Retail communication: concept of retail image, classification of the
elements of retail communication mix, retail advertising- types, media decisions, retail sales
promotion tools, personal selling, publicity, word of mouth.

Module V: Retail Information system

Meaning, Data warehousing and mining, Electronic Data interchange (EDI), improved supply
chain management, quick Response Delivery system, Universal Product Code (UPC), Point-of-
sale Terminals, Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Self check-out systems. Contemporary
issues: FDI in retailing-pros and cons, Impact of organized retailing on small grocery stores.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Berman & Evans (2009), Retail Management: A strategic approach, Pearson Education
• Bajaj, Tuli & Srivastava (2010) , Retail Management, Oxford University Publications
• Gibson G Vedamani (2009), Retail Management: Functional principles & practices, Jaico
Publishing House
 MERCHANDISING MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 387 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The course highlight s the finer details of the retail operation called merchandising. Apart from
giving the theoretical overview of the concepts and important terms, procedures and
practices, the contents emphasize the planning and control aspect along with the extended
applications like retail branding decisions.

Course Contents:
Module I: Merchandise & merchandising
Concepts & philosophy, Components of merchandising Management, The Merchandising
Management process, devising merchandising plans. Forecasts, innovativeness, assortment,
brands, timing and allocation.

Module II
Implementing Merchandise plans. Selecting and interacting with merchandising sources.
Evaluating merchandise, negotiating the purchase. Concluding the purchases, receiving and
stocking the merchandise. Recording the merchandise. Re–evaluating the on a regular basis.

Module III
Logistics and order processing and fulfillment. Transportation and ware housing. Customer
transaction and Customer service.

Module IV
Inventory management. Retailer’s tasks. Inventory levels. Merchandise security. Reverse
logistics. Inventory Analysis. Inventory valuation- the cost method and the retail method.

Module V
Merchandise forecast and budgeting, Designing control units, Sales forecasting, Inventory
level planning. planning purchases, Planning profit margins.
Unit control systems- physical inventory systems, perpetual inventory systems. Unit control
systems in practice. Stock turnover and gross margin return on investment. When to reorder.
How much to reorder.

Module VI
Presenting the Product – Packaging, Space efficiency. Improved buying Performance –
Effective Buyer, Managing Risk

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Levy & Weitz, (2008) Retailing Management, Tata McGraw Hill, Sixth edition.
• Berman & Evans, (2009) Retail Management- A strategic Approach, Pearson Education
• Bajaj, Tuli & Srivastava , (2009) Retail Management, Oxford
• Magazine: Images Retail
• Magazine: Retail Biz
 RETAIL SUPPLY CHAIN AND LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 388 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The aim of this course is to develop the understanding of the various components of the integrated
supply chain. The learning is focused on developing the supply chain to suit domestic as well as
global markets.

Course Contents:
Module I
Marketing Channels – structure and functions
Channel Design and Implementation – segmenting, targeting, and establishment of new
channels or refining existing channels, identifying power sources, and channel coordination.
Channel Flows – definition and concepts.

Module II
Channel Power – nature, sources, balancing and exercising power, influence strategies.
Channel Conflict – nature and degree, sources, consequences, conflict resolution strategies.
Channel Performance and evaluation

Module III
Logistics System – concept, objective and scope, the system elements, transportation,
warehousing, inventory management, packing and unitization, containerization,
communication and control, importance.
Strategic Logistics Planning – logistics strategy, implementation and management, assorted
and space management, reverse logistics

Module IV: Supply Chain Management Process in Retail Business

Introduction to retail supply chain; Comparison with manufacturing supply chain; Supply Chain Issues
of Various Retail Formats; Pricing Dynamics and Dynamic Pricing in Supply Chain; Supplier
Relationship Management and Sourcing Decisions; Customer Relationship Management Process;
Communication and Inter-Functional Coordination; Use of IT in Supply Chain; Bullwhip Effect in
Supply Chain.

Module V: Supply Chain Performance Improvement

Waste Elimination and Lean Thinking in Supply Chains; Supply Chain Balanced Score Cards;
Managing Supply Chain Risks; Supply Chain Operations Reference (SCOR) Model.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Bowersox, Closs and Cooper (2008), Supply Chain Logistics Management, Tata McGraw-
Hill
• Chopra, Meindl and Kalra (2008), Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning, and
Operation, Pearson Education
• Rangaraj, Raghuram and Srinivasan (2009), Supply Chain Management for Competitive
Advantage: Concepts and Cases, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Ray (2010). Supply Chain Management for Retail, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Shah (2009), Supply Chain Management: Text and Cases, Pearson Education
• Simchi-Levi, et al (2008), Designing and Managing the Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies
and Case Studies, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Wisner, Leong and Tan (2005), Principles of Supply Chain Management, Cengage

FRANCHISING IN RETAILING

Course Code: MBA 389 Credit

Units: 03
Course Objective:
The course aims at imparting the basic knowledge on the concept and applications of
Franchising. The contents cover a diverge spectrum of fundamentals of Franchising, legal
aspects like patenting and copyrights, documentation, taxation. The course aims to prepare
the students for taking up job assignments with franchisors as well as franchisees. It also
aims at developing the consulting and entrepreneurial skills among students.

Course Contents:
Module I: Franchising as a concept
The present scenario, major franchisors. Defining franchising, basic types of franchising.
Modes of franchising. the structure of franchising arrangements, franchise contract, financial
arrangements, taxation

Module II
What franchisors need to know? Franchising advantages, disadvantages. Evaluating the
business for franchising. Franchisor feasibility study. Marketing franchise. Ascertaining the
demand for your product/ service

Module III
Documentation for franchising. Requirements for setting up franchising in India. Legal
requirements in India.

Module IV
What investors (franchisees) need to know? Factors for opting for franchise. franchise
suitability. Franchise constraint. Cost of being a franchisee. The ideal location. Selecting a
business entity. franchising a franchise.

Module V
Managing the franchise -the franchise business plan.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Levy & Weitz, (2008) Retailing Management, Tata McGraw Hill , Sixth edition.
• Berman & Evans ,(2009) Retail Management- A strategic Approach, Pearson Education
• Sidhpuria Manish, (2009) Retail Franchising, Tata McGraw

RETAILING OF INSURANCE PRODUCTS AND

FINANCIAL SERVICES
Course Code: MBA 390 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The course aims to help in understanding the concept and practices of insurance products
and financial services in India. It will acclimatize students to the marketing environment in the
financial sector. Financial services is a fast growing sector and thus, offers good career
opportunities.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction
Meaning and management of risk. Introduction and scope of insurance products. Types of
insurance products and services. The seven Ps of insurance. Role of IRDA.

Module II: Life insurance

Salient features of plans of individual insurance – Term Assurance Plans. Whole Life Plans.
Endowment Plans, Combination of Whole Life and Endowment Plans. Children’s Plans, Annuity
Plans etc. Group life insurance schemes. Channel sales in life insurance marketing: agency, DSA,
FOS and bancassurance and their marketing strategies.

Module III: Non-Life Insurance

Types of products in general insurance. Understanding retail GI products: motor, health, home, travel
and fire insurance and their schemes. Channel sales in general insurance marketing: agency, DSA,
FOS and bancassurance and their marketing strategies.

Module IV: Mutual Funds and Stock Market

Mutual Funds: meaning, history and advantages of investment. Current market scenario in
India. Types of Mutual Funds: by nature, by investment objective and other schemes like Tax
saving schemes, Index schemes and Sector specific schemes. Mutual Funds Vs. other
investment options. Fund Structure. Marketing strategies in MF industry. Introduction to Stock
Market & Commodity Market. Concept of DMAT account. Introduction to portfolio
management. Broking and other retail marketing channels.
Module V: Other financial products and services
Introduction to Financial Institutions – Banks and N.B.F.Cs and their marketing practices.
Overview of various asset and liability products offered by them. R.B.I. and its role. Plastic money, e-
money and role of technology in financial services marketing. Strategic role of CRM in financial
services.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Suresh P., Paul J (2010): Management of Banking and Financial Services. Second Edition.
Pearson
• Khan MY (2010): Financial Services. Fifth Edition. Tata Mcgraw Hill.
• Avadhani V.A (2009): Marketing of financial services. Third Edition. Himalya.

MANAGEMENT IN ACTION-SOCIAL, ECONOMIC AND ETHICAL ISSUES

Course Code: MBA 401 Credit
Units: 04

Course Objective:
The course aims at bringing the students closer to reality by developing their understanding of the
professional prerequisites to practice of management in terms of required skills and attitude to
respond proactively to rapid discontinuous change in business environment. Integrative in approach,
this course aims at developing not theoreticians but practitioners who are expected to sense the
ongoing conflict between environmental change and internal desire of management for stability.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Modern Management Practices and Issues Involved, Outsourcing Management Services and
Evolution of Management Consultancy, Skills-set required for Management Consultants. Consulting
and performance counseling.

Module II: The Process of Management Consulting

Consulting Proposals. Identification and Definition of Problem, Fact-Finding Leading to Solution
Development and Implementation, Developing Strategic and Tactical Plans and Subcontracting,
Pricing of Consultancy, Acquiring and Developing Talents for Consulting.

Module III: In-house Management versus Management Outsourced

Why a Sense of Skepticism and Unease Towards Management Consultants. Cost versus Value of
Advice, Separating Consulting Success from Consulting, Disaster. Some Revealing Situations.

Module IV: Cross Cultural Management Systems and Processes

Types of organizational culture, Strength of organizational culture, Function of organizational culture,
Importance of culture to the organization, Cultural Models, Cross- Cultural Perspectives, Geert
Hofstede and Cross- Cultural Issues

Module V: Economic and Social Issues in Management

Adaptation to Changing Environment in General and Economic Environment in Particular, Economic
Growth and Change Areas, Emerging Opportunities in Various Sectors including Social Sector,
Management Practice and Cultural Issues, The global Political Situation, The Global Competitive
Environment and the internal scene in India, War Game.

Module VI: Ethical Issues in Management

Relationship among Various Stakeholders, Reasons for Conflict of Interests Among Stakeholders,
Corporate Governance and Ethics. Why Unethical Decisions Leading to Conflicts are Taken, Power
and Politics, Initiatives on Corporate Governance by the Governments.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Lt. Gen. Ahluwalia J.S., Editor,(1997), Total Quality Management, Tata McGraw Hill India.
• Bareus S.W. &Wilkinson J.W.,(1994), Management Consulting Services, McGraw Hill.
• Cadbury, Sir Adrian,(1987),Ethical Managers Make Their Own Rules,Harvard Business Review,
65, (1987).
• Cogner, Jay A, David Finegold and Edward E Lawler III, (1998), ‘Appraising Boardroom
Performance. Harvard Business Review.
• Drucker, Peter F. Dutton (1992), Managing the Future: The 1990s and Beyond.
• Kumar Mangalam Birla Committee Report on Corporate Governance – Legislation alone is not
enough, Activating Adult Committees. Shareholder – Friendly Steps - The Hindu, (1999).
• Parekh, Deepak S, (1999), The Real Meaning of Corporate Governance. Indian Management.
• Paine, Lynn Sharp, (1994), Managing Organizational Integrity. Harvard Business Review.
• Salmon W.J. (1993), Crises Prevention’s; How to Gear up Your Board. Harvard Business
Review.
• Sodarn, Dr. Kailash, (1999), Transparency in Corporate Governance, Indian Management Vol.
38, No.10.
• Cadbury, Sir Adrian,(1990),The Company Chairman, Director Books, Simon Schuster
International Group
• Crosby, Philips. (1990), Let us talk Quality, Penguin Publications.
• Davenport S. Kimberly & Others. (1996) Focused Quality, John Wily Sons Inc.
• Eccles, R.G. and Crane, D.B. (1995), Doing Deals: Investment Banks at Work, McGraw Hill
International.
 Annexure’ CD-01’

L T P/ SW/F TOTAL
Course Title: BC IV- Business Etiquette and Protocol S W CREDIT
UNITS
Credit Units: 1 1 0 0 0 1
Course Code: 442
Course Objectives:

This course is designed to teach students to accept and respect the

cultural differences because of globalization and to understand the role
of non verbal cues in Business Communication. This course will make
the students sensitive to Business Etiquette and Protocol.
Prerequisites:
NIL
Course Contents / Syllabus:
1 Module I Non-Verbal Communication 20%
Weightage
KOPPACT
Verbal Communication:
• Oral and Written
• Formal and Informal
2 Module II Barriers to Effective Use of Language 20%
Weightage
• Clichés
• Redundancy
• Verbosity
• Pomposity
• Jargon
• Terminology
• Euphemism
• Colloquialism
• Slang
3 Module III Cross- Cultural Communication 40%
Weightage
• Features of Culture
• Principles of Culture
• Contextual Differences
• Social Differences
• Non Verbal Differences
• Xenophobia
• Ethnocentrism
• Campus to Corporate
• Cross Corporate Culture
• Transition Management
4 Module IV Visual Code / Social Etiquette 20%
• Power Dressing
• Fine Dining
• Office Party Etiquette
• Business Travel Etiquette
➢ Work Place and Business Etiquette
 • Proper Greetings
• Thank You Notes
• Telephonic Manners/ Voice Mail Etiquette
• Business Salutation Etiquette
• Guest Etiquette
• Cubicle Etiquette
• Business Card Etiquette
➢ Different Cultural Etiquette & Protocol
5 Student Learning Outcomes:
• The students will learn to respect other cultures and develop
rapport in a multi cultural society.
• The students will incorporate business etiquette and protocol as
an integral part of their personality.
6 Pedagogy for Course Delivery
• Workshop
• Presentation
• Group Discussion
• Lectures
7 Assessment/ Examination Scheme:
Theory L/T Lab/Practical/Studio End Term
(%) (%) Examination

100% NA 60%
Theory Assessment (L&T):

Continuous Assessment/Internal
End Term
Assessment
Examination
Components CT GD GP Attendance
(Drop down)
Weightage 10% 10% 15% 5% 60%
(%)

Text:
Lesikar & Flatley, Basic Business Communication, Tata McGraw- Hill
Edition
Meenakshi Raman &Prakash Singh, Business Communication, Oxford,
2006.
M. John Penrose, Business Communication for Managers: An Advanced
Approach, Thomson, 2003
Reference:
Ronald B. R. Adler, Understanding Human Communication, Oxford,
2005.
Guffey, Ellen Mary, Business Communication, Thomson (South Western)
Introductory Pages of the Series: “Lonely Planet” of Each Country.
Everyday English – A Counsil on Communicative English, Dorothy
Adams, Michele Crawford. Rachel Finnie, Katrina Gormley, Jasdeep
Kaur, Cengage Learning, 2009.

Additional Reading:
Newspapers and Journals
 LEADERSHIP & MANAGING EXCELLENCE
Course Code: MBA 443 Credit Units: 01

Course Objective:
This course aims to enable students to:
• Understand the concept and building of teams
• Understand the concept of Self Leadership and Leadership Excellence
• Understand the leadership Styles in organizations
• Facilitate better team management and organizational effectiveness through universal human values.

Course Contents:

Module I: Leadership Excellence

• Leadership
• Self Leadership
• Self Leadership Competencies

Module II: Teams: An Overview

• Team Design Features: Team vs. Group

• Effective Team Mission and Vision
• Life Cycle of a Project Team
• Rationale of a Team, Goal Analysis and Team Roles

Module III: Team Building for Leadership Excellence

• Types and Development of Team Building
• Stages of Team
• Profiling your Team: Internal & External Dynamics
• Team Strategies for organizational vision

Module IV: Team & Sociometry

• Patterns of Interaction in a Team

• Sociometry: Method of studying attractions and repulsions in groups
• Construction of sociogram for studying interpersonal relations in a Team
• Team communication

Module V: Team Leadership for Managing Excellence

• Leadership styles in organizations

• Situational Leadership Style
• Power to Empower : Team & Individual

Module VI: End-of-Semester Appraisal

▪ Viva – Voce based on personal journal
▪ Assessment of Behavioral change as a result of training
▪ Exit Level Rating by Self and Observer

Examination Scheme:
Components SAP A Mid Term VIVA Journal for
Test (CT) Success
(JOS)
Weightage (%) 20 05 20 30 25
Suggested Readings:
• Organizational Behaviour, Davis, K.
• Hoover, Judhith D. Effective Small Group and Team Communication, 2002,Harcourt
College Publishers
• LaFasto and Larson: When Teams Work Best, 2001, Response Books (Sage), New Delhi
• Dick, Mc Cann & Margerison, Charles: Team Management, 1992 Edition, viva books
• J William Pfeiffer (ed.) Theories and Models in Applied Behavioural Science, Vol 2, Group
(1996); Pfeiffer & Company
 FRENCH - IV

Course Code: MBA 444

Credit Units: 02
Course Objective:
To strengthen the language of the students with both oral and written
To provide the students with the know-how
• to master the tenses – present, past and future
• to express emotion
• to accomplish simple tasks of day-to-day programmes
• to prepare résumé

Course Contents:
Unité 7: pp. 106

Rédiger un résumé (Cf. Campus 2 – P.6, Français.Com, Intermédiaire- p.98)

Passer un entretien d’embauche. Français.Com, Intermédiaire – p.100

Contenu lexical: Unité 7: Tranches de vie

1. évoquer un souvenir
2. raconter une histoire
3. rapporter des événements marquants d’une vie professionnelle
4. expliquer une situation de stress, donner son avis
5. faire des projets

Contenu grammatical: 1. formation de l’imparfait, chaque/chacun

2. emploi du passé composé et de l’imparfait
3. relatifs qui, que, où, mise en relief, indicateurs de temps: depuis, il
y a,
pendant, pour, en
4. pronom en de quantité, propositions complétives: je pense que…,
je crois que …
5. futur simple, pronom y

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• le livre à suivre : Français.Com (Débutant)

 GERMAN - IV

Course Code: MBA 445

Credit Units: 02
Course Objective:
To enable the students to converse, read and write in the language with the help of the basic rules of grammar,
which will later help them to strengthen their language.
To give the students an insight into the culture, geography, political situation and economic
opportunities available in Germany.
Introduction to Advanced Grammar Language and Professional Jargon

Course Contents:
Module I: Present perfect tense
Present perfect tense, usage and applicability
Usage of this tense to indicate near past
Universal applicability of this tense in German

Module II: Letter writing

To acquaint the students with the form of writing informal letters.

Module III: Interchanging prepositions

Usage of prepositions with both accusative and dative cases
Usage of verbs fixed with prepositions
Emphasizing on the action and position factor

Module IV: Past tense

Introduction to simple past tense
Learning the verb forms in past tense
Making a list of all verbs in the past tense and the participle forms

Module V: Reading a Fairy Tale

Comprehension and narration
Rotkäppchen
Froschprinzessin
Die Fremdsprache

Module VI: Genitive case

Genitive case – Explain the concept of possession in genitive
Mentioning the structure of weak nouns

Module VII: Genitive prepositions

Discuss the genitive propositions and their usage: (während, wegen, statt, trotz)

Module VIII: Picture Description

Firstly recognize the persons or things in the picture and identify the situation depicted in the
picture;
Secondly answer questions of general meaning in context to the picture and also talk about
the personal experiences which come to your mind upon seeing the picture.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Wolfgang Hieber, Lernziel Deutsch

• Hans-Heinrich Wangler, Sprachkurs Deutsch
• Schulz Griesbach, Deutsche Sprachlehre für Ausländer
• P.L Aneja, Deutsch Interessant- 1, 2 & 3
• Rosa-Maria Dallapiazza et al, Tangram Aktuell A1/1,2
• Braun, Nieder, Schmöe, Deutsch als Fremdsprache 1A, Grundkurs
 SPANISH - IV

Course Code: MBA 446

Credit Units: 02
Course Objective:
To enable students acquire working knowledge of the language; to give them vocabulary,
grammar, voice modulations/intonations to handle everyday Spanish situations with ease.

Course Contents:
Module I
Revision of earlier semester modules
Introduction to Present Continuous Tense (Gerunds)

Module II
Translation with Present Continuous Tense
Introduction to Gustar, Parecer, Apetecer, doler

Module III
Imperatives (positive and negative commands of regular verbs)

Module IV
Commercial/ business vocabulary

Module V
Simple conversation with help of texts and vocabulary
En la recepcion del hotel
En el restaurante
En la agencia de viajes
En la tienda/supermercado

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• Español Sin Fronteras (Nivel – Elemental)

 JAPANESE - IV

Course Code: MBA 447

Credit Units: 02
Course Objective:
To enable the students to comfortably interact using basic Japanese.
Note: Teaching is done in roman as well as Japanese script, students will be taught katankana (another form of
script) in this semester i.e. to be able to write all the foreign words in Japanese.

Course Contents:
Module I
Comparison using adjectives, making requests

Module II
Seeking permission

Module III
Practice of conversations on:
Visiting people, Party, Meetings, After work, At a ticket vending machine etc

Module IV
Essays, writing formal letters

Learning Outcome
➢ Students can speak the language describing above-mentioned topics.

Methods of Private study /Self help

➢ Handouts, audio-aids, and self-do assignments, role-plays.
➢ Students are also encouraged to attend Japanese film festival and other such fairs and
workshops organized in the capital from time to time.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

Text:
• Teach yourself Japanese

References:
• Shin Nihongo no kiso 1
 CHINESE – IV

Course Code: MBA 448

Credit Units: 02
Course Objective:
How many characters are there? The early Qing dynasty dictionary included nearly 50,000
characters the vast majority of which were rare accumulated characters over the centuries. An
educate person in China can probably recognize around 6000 characters. The course aims at
familiarizing the student with the basic aspects of speaking ability of Mandarin, the language
of Mainland China. The course aims at training students in practical skills and nurturing them
to interact with a Chinese person.

Course Contents:
Module I
Dialogue Practice
Observe picture and answer the question
Pronunciation and intonation
Character writing and stroke order.
Electronic items

Module II
Traveling – The Scenery is very beautiful
Weather and climate
Grammar question with – “bu shi …. Ma?”
The construction “yao … le” (Used to indicate that an action is going to take place)
Time words “yiqian”, “yiwai” (Before and after).
The adverb “geng”.

Module III
Going to a friend house for a visit meeting his family and talking about their customs.
Fallen sick and going to the Doctor, the doctor examines, takes temperature and writes
prescription.
Aspect particle “guo” shows that an action has happened some time in the past.
Progressive aspect of an actin “zhengzai” Also the use if “zhe” with it.
To welcome someone and to see off someone …. I cant go the airport to see you off… etc.

Module IV
Shipment. Is this the place to checking luggage?
Basic dialogue on – Where do u work?
Basic dialogue on – This is my address
Basic dialogue on – I understand Chinese
Basic dialogue on – What job do u do?
Basic dialogue on – What time is it now?

Module V
Basic dialogue on – What day (date) is it today?
Basic dialogue on – What is the weather like here.
Basic dialogue on – Do u like Chinese food?
Basic dialogue on – I am planning to go to China.

Examination Scheme:
Components CT1 CT2 C I V A
Weightage (%) 20 20 20 20 15 5

C – Project + Presentation
I – Interaction/Conversation Practice

Text & References:

• “Elementary Chinese Reader, Part-2” Lesson 31-38

 DISSERTATION
Course Code: MBA 455 Credit
Units: 09
The aim of the dissertation is to provide you with an opportunity to further your intellectual
and personal development in your chosen field by undertaking a significant practical unit of
activity, having an educational value at a level commensurate with the award of your degree

The dissertation can be defined as a scholarly inquiry into a problem or issues, involving a
systematic approach to gathering and analysis of information / data, leading to production of a
structured report.

Selecting the Dissertation Topic

It is usual to give you some discretion in the choice of topic for the dissertation and the
approach to be adopted. You will need to ensure that your dissertation is related to your field
of specialization.

Deciding this is often the most difficult part of the dissertation process, and perhaps, you have
been thinking of a topic for some time.

It is important to distinguish here between ‘dissertation topic’ and ‘dissertation title’. The topic
is the specific area that you wish to investigate. The title may not be decided until the
dissertation has been written so as to reflect its content properly.

Few restrictions are placed on the choice of the topic. Normally we would expect it to be:
• relevant to business, defined broadly;
• related to one or more of the subjects or areas of study within the core program and
specialisation stream;
• clearly focused so as to facilitate an in-depth approach, subject to the availability of
adequate sources of information and to your own knowledge;
• of value and interest to you and your personal and professional development.

Planning the Dissertation

This will entail following:
• Selecting a topic for investigation.
• Establishing the precise focus of your study by deciding on the aims and objectives of the
dissertation, or formulating questions to be investigated. Consider very carefully what is
worth investigating and its feasibility.
• Drawing up initial dissertation outlines considering the aims and objectives of the
dissertation. Workout various stages of dissertation
• Devising a timetable to ensure that all stages of dissertation are completed in time. The
timetable should include writing of the dissertation and regular meetings with your
dissertation guide.

The Dissertation plan or outline

It is recommended that you should have a dissertation plan to guide you right from the outset.
Essentially, the dissertation plan is an outline of what you intend to do, chapter wise and
therefore should reflect the aims and objectives of your dissertation.

There are several reasons for having a dissertation plan

• It provides a focus to your thoughts.
• It provides your faculty-guide with an opportunity, at an early stage of your work, to make
constructive comments and help guide the direction of your research.
• The writing of a plan is the first formal stage of the writing process, and therefore helps
build up your confidence.
• In many ways, the plan encourages you to come to terms with the reading, thinking and
writing in a systematic and integrated way, with plenty of time left for changes.
• Finally, the dissertation plan generally provides a revision point in the development of your
dissertation report in order to allow appropriate changes in the scope and even direction of
your work as it progresses.

Keeping records
This includes the following:
• Making a note of everything you read; including those discarded.
• Ensuring that when recording sources, author’s name and initials, date of publication, title,
place of publication and publisher are included. (You may consider starting a card index or
database from the outset). Making an accurate note of all quotations at the time you read
them.
• Make clear what is a direct a direct quotation and what is your paraphrase.

Dissertation format
All students must follow the following rules in submitting their dissertation.
• Front page should provide title, author, Name of degree/diploma and the date of
submission.
• Second page should be the table of contents giving page references for each chapter and
section.
• The next page should be the table of appendices, graphs and tables giving titles and page
references.
• Next to follow should be a synopsis or abstract of the dissertation (approximately 500
words) titled: Executive Summary
• Next is the ‘acknowledgements’.
• Chapter I should be a general introduction, giving the background to the dissertation, the
objectives of the dissertation, the rationale for the dissertation, the plan, methodological
issues and problems. The limitations of the dissertation should also be hinted in this
chapter.
• Other chapters will constitute the body of the dissertation. The number of chapters and
their sequence will usually vary depending on, among others, on a critical review of the
previous relevant work relating to your major findings, a discussion of their implications,
and conclusions, possibly with a suggestion of the direction of future research on the area.
• After this concluding chapter, you should give a list of all the references you have used.
These should be cross - references with your text. For articles from journals, the following
details are required e.g.

Draper P and Pandyal K. 1991, The Investment Trust Discount Revisited, Journal of
Business Finance and Accounting, Vol18, No6, Nov, pp 791-832.

For books, the following details are required:

Levi, M. 1996, International Financial Management, Prentice Hall, New York, 3rd Ed, 1996

• Finally, you should give any appendices. These should only include relevant statistical data
or material that cannot be fitted into the above categories.

The Layout Guidelines for the Dissertation

• A4 size Paper
• Font: Arial (10 points) or Times New Roman (12 points)
• Line spacing: 1.5
• Top and bottom margins: 1 inch/ 2.5 cm; left and right margins: 1.25 inches/ 3 cm

Guidelines for the Assessment of the Dissertation

While evaluating the dissertation, faculty guide will consider the following aspects:

21. Has the student made a clear statement of the objective or objective(s).
22. If there is more than one objective, do these constitute parts of a whole?
23. Has the student developed an appropriate analytical framework for addressing the problem
at hand.
24. Is this based on up-to-date developments in the topic area?
25. Has the student collected information / data suitable to the frameworks?
26. Are the techniques employed by the student to analyse the data / information appropriate
and relevant?
27. Has the student succeeded in drawing conclusion form the analysis?
28. Do the conclusions relate well to the objectives of the project?
29. Has the student been regular in his work?
30. Layout of the written report.

Examination Scheme:
Contents & Layout of the Report 30
Conceptual Framework 10
Objectives & Methodology 15
Implications & Conclusions 15
Viva/ Presentations 30

TOTAL 100

MANAGING CORPORATE ENTREPRENEURSHIP

Course Code: MBA 402 Credit
Units: 03
Course Objective:
The main focus is to build intrapreneurs mindset in manager to think differently beyond the walls come out from
traditional managerial concept.

Course Contents:
Module I: Concept of Intrapreneurship
Meaning of Corporate Entrepreneurship or Intrapreneurship, Distinction between
Entrepreneurship & Intrapreneurship, Need & Importance.

Module II: Types of Intrapreneurship

Life cycle of Intrapreneur, Classification of Intrapreneur, Changing rate of traditional mangers

Module III: Stages of Corporate Entrepreneurs

Stages of Intrapreneurial Team Development- Solo Phase, Network Phase, bootleg Phase,
Format Team Phase, Changing Environment for corporate Intrapreneurs, Implications & Future
for Intrapreneur

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Raymond W Y Kao, Tan Wee Ling, Entrepreneurship and Enterprise Development in Asia,
Prentice Hall
• Mary Coulter, Entrepreneurship in Action, Prentice Hall.
• Gifford Pinchot (1985): Why you don’t have to leave the corporation to become an
entrepreneur, Harper & Row
• Schollhammer, Hans ( 1992): Internal Corporate Entrepreneurship,
• Kent. C., Sexton.D and K.Vesper (Eds.) Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall,
 FAMILY BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 403 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
This course addresses many of the unique situations family businesses face. These topics range from
successor ship & family dynamics to continuity planning and strategic performance. The course will
benefit family foundations and family investment offices, family firm successors, entrepreneurs,
consultants and advisers, and investors for the following reasons: Leading consulting firms are
developing family business practice areas. The class will involve case discussions, guest speakers,
field and research assignments, and class presentations of new ideas in family enterprises.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Understanding the Family Business in Indian Contexts;
Effective Governance and the Family Business, Capital Structure of Closely Held Firms, Cash,
Growth, and The Family Business, Issue and challenges in Family Business.

Module II: Developing Effective Governance

Understanding the Relationships between Family Business, Business and Ownership Issues
in Family Owned Business, Behavioural Issues In Closely Held and Family Owned Business &
Managed Business.

Module III: Growth Strategy

Growth Strategy for Family Owned Business, Different Models of Family Business, Developing
Team of Advisors, Boards of Directors and Corporate Governance

Module IV: Future Prospects

Involving Non-Family Members of the Firm Power Struggles in the Family Firm Issues of
Succession in a Family Firm Valuation of the Closely Held Firm the Changing Role of Family in
the Family Business.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Randel S. Cavlock, Ward John (2001), Strategic Planning for the Family Business.
• Dr. Alan Carsrud, Family Business Management Division, University of Florida.
• John L. Ward, Perpetuating Family Business, www. John L Ward. com
• Aruna Kaulgud, Entrepreneurship Management, Parallel Planning to unite the Family and
Business, Amazon Sales.
• Fager Mike, Mc Kinney Dave (2007); Succession Planning for the Family Owned Business
Amazon Sales.
 SMALL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT AND STRATEGIES
Course Code: MBA 404 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
To understand how to acquire, control, and use all necessary resources to build a growth
oriented SME by improving your ability to analyze, articulate, present, and defend various
business decisions. It is important to recognize that no one course of action is necessarily
correct nor the best.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction to Small Business

Orientation to small business, Small business in ecnomoy,Issues facing small businesses in
the 21st century
Consulting to the small/medium size firm, SME’s Act

Module II: Growth in Small Business

Strategic planning for the small business: planning is more than just writing a plan,
Developing competitive survival and growth strategies for small business, Hiring and firing:
human resources as the biggest asset

Module III: Role of Family

The role of the family in SME’s, Succession in Small Business, marketing and public relations
niche versus frontal assault

Module IV: Sustaining the Business

Compensation planning and financing the SME, Exit route for SME’s or extract money from a
business, Local government & the small business owner

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Gurdery Liska K. & Kickul Jill R.: Enterprenurship Strategy Changing Patterns is now
Venture Creation Growth and Reinvention, Sage Publications.
• Journal of Small Business Management.
• Hodgetts M. Richard (1982) Effective Small Business Management, Academic Press.
• Byrd Mary Jane (2008); Small Business Management: Entrepnurs Guide Book, Mc Graw
Hill,.
 FINANCING NEW VENTURES AND BUSINESSES
Course Code: MBA 405 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
To develop skills in upcoming entrepreneurs to select projects raise funds from various resourses. To
comprehensively understand the Bank/FI/VC/equity funding in India. Various bank/FI schemes for
entrepreneurs, Documents required by banks/FI, analysis of financial statements, preparation of project
reports, will be covered with an aim to helping the students to make sound financing decisions.

Course Contents:

Module I: Investment Environment

Banks and financial institutions, principles of lending, types of securities and methods of
charge creation.

Module II: Various Schemes of Govt./Semi Govt./State Govt./Banks/FI’s

Institutional/Financial Assistance, Schemes pertaining to: Term lending, Working capital finance, Bills
finance, Export & Import finance

Module III: Fund Raising

Fund raising from capital market, and foreign financial markets. VC Funding, Stages of VC funding,
types of VC’s, Angel Investors, Private Equity

Module IV: Techno Economic Viability of Project/Business Plan

Market and demand analysis, technical & financial analysis, estimation of project flows, analysis of risk,
appraisal criteria.

Module V: Evaluation Criteria of DPR/Business Plan

Understanding the evaluation criteria of detailed Project Report/Business plan by FI’s/Banks.
Submission of DPR/Business Plan to financial institution/bank for approval.

Module VI: Managing the Company Portfolio

Board of Directors, Advisors and consultants, Managerial change, Key-man life insurance, Buy-sell
agreements, Legal documentation, Term sheet, Investment agreement, Description of transaction,
Representation and warranties by company, Company’s covenants and undertakings, Registration
rights, rights of participation and indemnification, Conditions to closing, Terms of investment
securities, Principal terms of preferred stock, Principal terms of debt securities, Various agreements
and documents: Stockholders agreements, Employee stock purchase agreements

Examination Scheme:
 Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Thummuluri Siddaiah, (20110: Financial Services, Pearson

• P.Chandra, Latest Edition, Projects: Planning, Analysis, Selection, implementation and review. Tata
McGraw Hill
• Regular reading of Financial / RBI/SEBI/Bank Journals and Financial Dailies.
• P.N. Varshney (2010 ):Banking law and practice

CORPORATE TAX PLANNING

Course Code: MBA 406 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
At the end of the course, the students should be able to understand Indian accounting
Standards and the impact of USGAAP on Financial Statements. To create an understanding of
the accounting of Mergers and Acquisitions and Valuation of goodwill & Shares.
In addition to Corporate Accounting the students should be able to demonstrate an
understanding of the tax provisions enabling them to make use of legitimate tax shelters,
deductions, exceptions, rebates and allowances; with the ultimate aim of minimizing the
corporate tax liability.

Course Contents:
Module I: Accounting Norms
Various Accounting Standards in India and comparison with International accounting
Standards and US.GAAP.

Module II: Accounting for Merger and Acquisitions

Accounting for Acquisition of Business, Calculation of Purchase consideration and Profit
(Loss) Prior to Incorporation. Accounting for Amalgamation in the nature of Merger and in the
nature of Purchase.

Module III: Valuation of Goodwill and Shares

Valuation of Goodwill – Different Methods of Valuation of Goodwill, Valuation of Shares – Net
Asset Backing Method and Yield Method.

Module IV: Basic Concepts of Income Tax

Introduction to Income Tax Act, 1961, Residential Status, Exempted Incomes of Companies
An overview of various provisions of Business & profession & Capital gains – applicable to
companies

Module V: Assessment of Companies

Computation of taxable income, MAT, Set off & carry forward of losses in companies,
Deductions from Gross total income applicable to companies, Tax planning with reference to
new projects/expansions/rehabilitation plans including mergers, amalgamation or de-mergers
of companies, Concept of avoidance of double taxation.
Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Singhania V.K. & Singhania Kapil , Direct taxes law & practices, Taxmann
• Ravi M Kishore, Advanced Accounting, Taxmann.
• Lakhotia , R.N. & Lakhotia, Corporate Tax Planning, Vision books
• Singhania, V.K., Student’s guide to Income Tax, Taxmann
• International dictionary of taxation by Indian Tax Institute, 1st Edition.
• Maheshwari S.N and Maheshwari S.K Advanced Accountancy, Vikas Publishing House.

FINANCIAL ENGINEERING
Course Code: MBA 407 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
Finance has evolved as an exciting discipline in terms of innovations it has witnessed in recent past.
This aspect known as Financial Engineering starts where financial analysis ends. The objective of the
course is to enable the students to think in terms of innovative solutions to financial problems with
particular emphasis on understanding new risks, which the changing scenario of finance is creating
for individuals and firms and equip them with innovative tools of financial engineering called
derivatives and skills to use them in forming effective strategies to cope with the changing
environment and hedge against the financial risks.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction
Changing Environment and Increasing Price Risks, Financial Engineering as a response to Increased
Risks, Types of Risks and Risk Management, Tools of Risk Management, Conceptual and Physical
Tools of Financial Engineering, Effect of Speculation and Arbitrage on Market Efficiency, Derivative
Market in India

Module II: Futures and Forwards

The Futures Markets, Buying and Selling Futures, Devising a Hedging Strategy Using Futures, Stock Index
Futures, Value at Risk, Short Term and Long Term Interest Rate Futures, Foreign Currency Futures and
Commodity Futures

Module III: Swaps

Structure of a Swap, Interest Rate Swaps, Currency of Swaps, Commodity Swaps, Other Swaps,
Credit Risk, Role of a Swap Dealer.

Module IV: Options

Options Markets; Properties of Stock Option Prices; Option Pricing Models – Binomial Model, Black-
Scholes; Model, Single Period Options – Calls and Puts, Payoff Diagrams of Simple and Complex
Option Strategies, Cash Settled Options, Multi-Period Options – Caps, Floors, Collars, Captions,
Swaptions and Compound options, Cross-currency Futures and Options.

Module V: Other Innovations

Debt Market Innovations, Mortgage Backed Securities, Hybrid Securities, Asset-Liability Management

Module VI: Recent Trends

Exotic Options, Synthetic Instruments, Developments in Equity-Based Strategies, Direct and Cross
Hedges, Future Trends and Issues in Financial Engineering.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Hull, J. C. (1999), Introduction to Futures and Options Markets, Prentice Hall of India.
• Edwards, F. R. and Ma, C. W. (1992), Futures and Options, McGraw-Hill International.
• Rebonato, R. (1996), Interest Rate Option Models: Understanding, Analyzing and Using Models
for Exotic Interest Rate Options, John Wiley and Sons.
• Kolb, R. W. (1997), Understanding Futures Markets, Prentice Hall of India.
• Marshall, J. F. and Bansal, V. K. (2006). Financial Engineering: A Complete Guide to Financial
Innovation, Prentice Hall of India.
• Articles from selected journals and magazines.
 MANAGEMENT OF FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS
Course Code: MBA 408 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The aim of the course is to orient the finance students to the change in the financial industry. The

financial industry much like the computer industry is changing rapidly. A course that merely describes

the existing institutions will not prepare the students adequately for the change. Thus familiarization with

institutions of today & developing an understanding why they are the way they are, and why they are

changing is the core aim of the course. An Indian perspective will be added but conceptually the Global

frameworks will be used. At the end of this course the students will understand:

• The role of financial institutions in economic development

• The working of Financial Intermediaries
• International Banking
• The norms governing of Financial Intermediaries in India
• The basic principles of Lending & Investments in a Commercial Bank
• The working of Developmental Financial Institutions

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Financial institutions and economic development, Types of Money, Process of Capital
Formation, Technology of financial systems- Pooling, Netting, Credit substitution &
Delegation.

Module II: Financial intermediaries

Understanding Financial Intermediaries- Commercial Banks, Central Bank, Cooperative Banks,
Banking system in USA & India, International Banking, Banking Operations, Retail and
Wholesale Banking, Near Banks, Universal Banking, NBFC’s

Module III: Norms & Practices in the Banking Industry

Principles of Lending, Study of Borrowers, Balance Sheet Analysis, Project Appraisal Criteria,
Marketing of Bank Services, Prudential Norms - Narsimhan Committee Recommendations,
Performance Analysis of Banks, Regulatory Institutions RBI & SEBI, Lender’s Liability Act,
Banking Innovations, Basle Committee Recommendations, CAR - Risk Weighted Assets and
Risk Based Supervision, Asset Liability Management in Commercial Banks, Corporate Debt
Restructuring, Internet Banking, Mobile Banking, E-Banking Risks, E-Finance, Electronic
Money, Digital Signatures, RTGS, NEFT etc.

Module IV: Developmental Financial Institutions

Role of Developmental Banks in Industrial Financing, Resource Mobilization of Developmental
Banks, Project Examination by Developmental Banks.

Module V: Insurance Institutions

Role of Insurance companies in Industrial Financing, Life insurance & General insurance, New
developments in insurance as a sector in the Indian financial system, Bancassurance Models
in Europe and India

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Chandra, P. (1997), Financial Management: Theory & Practice, Tata McGraw Hill.
• Jakhotiya, G. P.(2000), Strategic Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House.
• Grundy, T., Johnson, G and Scholes, K. (1998), Exploring Strategic Financial Management,
Prentice Hall Europe.
• Shank, J. K. & Govindarajan, V. (1995), Strategic Cost Management: The New Tool for
Competitive Advantage, the Free Press.
• Pritchett, P; Robinson, D. and Clarkson, R. (1997), After The Merger: The Authoritative Guide for
Integration Success, McGraw Hill
• Geneen, H. and Bowers, B. (1997), The Synergy Myth and other ailments of Business Today, St.
Martin Press New York..
• Weston, Chung & Hoag, (1996), Mergers, Restructuring and Corporate Control, Prentice Hall of
India.
• Eccles, R. G. and Crane, D. B. (1995), Doing Deals: Investment Banks at Work, McGraw - Hill
International.

STRATEGIC FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 409 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course aims at helping overcome traditional distinction between Strategy and Financial
Management as two diverse disciplines of management. The strategy has gained prominence over
last two decades and focuses on the ambiguous, the uncertain, the less tangible and the qualitative.
Financial Management on the other hand, emphasizes the precise, the measurable and the tangible.
It is intended to develop an in-depth understanding, among the participants, of how to manage for
value by enabling financial management to play a more proactive role in Strategic Management. The
course also aims at developing an appreciation of how advancements in theory of finance have made
it converge more towards strategy.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Role of Finance and Strategy in Management Process, Strategic Droop, Management
Behaviour and Convergence between Strategic and Financial Analysis

Module II: Financial Decision Making

Value Analysis – A Strategic Perspective, Advances in Working Capital Management, Arriving
at an Optimal Capital Structure, Impact of Inflation on Financial Decisions, Dividends
Decisions – A Strategic Perspective

Module III: Corporate Valuation

Rationale for Shareholders’ Wealth Maximization, New performance Metrics like Economic
Value Added (EVA) and Market value Added (MVA), Various Approaches to Corporate
Valuation, Alignment of Interest of Various Stakeholders of a Firm.

Module IV: Corporate Restructuring

Restructuring and Merger & Acquisition, The Search Process, Valuation and Deal Structuring,
Accounting and Tax Implications, Post Merger Integration and Learning, Restructuring
through Privatization, Leveraged Buy-outs (LBOs) Restructuring of Sick Enterprises, Due
Diligence and certification.

Module V: Corporate Governance

Divergence of Interest, Devices for containing Agency Costs, Corporate Governance in
Developed world, Corporate Governance in India, Reforming Corporate Governance, Legal
Provisions and SEBI Code

Module VI: Strategic Cost Management

Transfer Pricing, Financial Aspects of Supply Chain Management, Operations Management
Perspective on Costs, Strategic Cost Analysis (Using Activity Based Costing, Target Costing
and Life Cycle Costing) and Product Pricing at Different Stages of Product’s Life Cycle.

Examination Scheme:
 Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Chandra, P. (1997), Financial Management: Theory & Practice, Tata McGraw Hill.
• Jakhotiya, G. P. (2000), Strategic Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House.
• Grundy, T., Johnson, G and Scholes, K. (1998), Exploring Strategic Financial Management,
Prentice Hall Europe.
• Shank, J. K. & Govindarajan, V. (1995), Strategic Cost Management: The New Tool for
Competitive Advantage, Free Press.
• Pritchett, P; Robinson, D. and Clarkson, R. (1997), After The Merger: The Authoritative Guide for
Integration Success, McGraw Hill
• Sadtler, D; Campbell, A. and Koch, R. (1997), Break Up: When Large Companies are More Worth
Dead Than Alive.
• Geneen, H. and Bowers, B. (1997), The Synergy Myth and other ailments of Business Today, St.
Martin Press New York..
• Weston, Chung & Hoag, (1996), Mergers, Restructuring and Corporate Control, Prentice
Hall of India.
• Eccles, R. G. and Crane, D. B. (1995), Doing Deals: Investment Banks at Work, McGraw -
Hill International.
COMMERCIAL BANKING
Course Code: MBA 410 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The aim of this course is to give the student an overview of banking industry and prepare him for
various roles in the banking sector.

Course Contents:
Module I: Principles of Banking
Retail Banking, Savings and Current Accounts, Loan Products, Plastic Money, Wholesale
Banking, Off Balance Sheet Business, International Banking, Correspondent Banking,
NOSTRO and VOSTRO accounts – SWIFT, CHIPS, CHAPS, FEDWIRE., Documentary Letter of
Credit, NRI Accounts, Remittances and Clearing,

Module II: Regulatory Framework

Negotiable Instruments Act, Banking Regulation Act, Reserve Bank of India Act, RBI’s
Monetary and Credit Policy

Module III: Treasury Management

Instruments in Treasury Market, Development of new financial products, control and
supervision of Treasury management; linkage of domestic operations with foreign operations,
Asset Liability Management, Banks Balance Sheet- Components of Assets/Liabilities and their
management, Liquidity Management, Interest Rate Management, RBI Guidelines on Asset
Liability Management; Stock options; debt instruments; bond portfolio strategy; risk control
and hedging instruments, Investments – Treasury bills – Money markets instruments such as
CDs, CPs, IBPs; Refinance and rediscounting facilities

Module IV: Credit

Principles of Lending, Working Capital and Term Loans, Financing SME/MSME, Microfinance,
Credit Appraisal Techniques, Credit Rating, Default Probabilities, Credit Spreads, Credit
Migration, Credit Monitoring, Documentation Procedures, NPA, Laws relating to securities-
valuation of securities-modes of charging securities- lien,pledge, mortgage, hypothecation etc,
The Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security
Interest Act

Examination Scheme:
 Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE
Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Varshney, P.N., 2010, Banking Law and Practise, S Chand and Sons
• Radhakrishnan, T.S.; 2005, Principals of Banking; Macmillan
• Mishra, R.K.; Banking Sector Reforms and Agricultural Finance; Sonali Publications
• Padhy Kishore C; Padhy Manoranjan; 2011; Banking Future; Dominant Publishers and
Distributors

COMPENSATION AND REWARD MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 411 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
This course helps students to learn how compensation system operates to attract, retain and
motivate competent work force.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Concept of Compensation, System of Compensating, Concept of Reward and Reward System,
Economic Theory of Wages, Limitations of Economic Theories. Wage and Salary
Administration at micro level, Wage concepts, Methods of Job Evaluation, Role of various
parties – Employees, Employers, Unions & Government, Overview of Legislations affecting
Compensation

Module II: Compensation Structure- Indian Practices

Salary Progression, Methods of Payment, Limitations of the Job Related Compensation,
Competency based Compensations, Performance linked Compensations- Performance
Appraisal

Module III: Elements of Compensation

Variable Compensation, Principles of Reward Strategy, Perquisites, Bonuses & Incentives
Scope and Process, Ethical Considerations, Social Security, Sharing Productivity Gains With
Employees, Gain Sharing, Team Based Pay, The Role of Compensation in Sales Force
Success

Module IV: Incentive Schemes / Payment by Results

Types of Incentive Schemes/ Systems and Plans, Merits and demerits of Incentives
Module V: Benefits and Services
Concept of Benefit- Strategic Perspectives on Benefits, Type of Benefits, Factor influencing
choice of benefit package, Administration of Benefits and Services

Module VI: Current Trends in Compensation and Reward Management

Elements of Managerial Compensation- A New Approach, VRS, Pay the Person, Rewarding
Excellence, Individualizing the Pay System.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Armstrong Michael & Murlis Helen (2005), Reward Management A Handbook of

Remuneration, Strategy and Practice, 5th Edition, Kogan Page
• Henderson Richard (2006), Compensation Management in a Knowledge - Based World, 10th
Edition, Prentice Hall India
• Milkovich & Newman (2005), Compensation, 8th Edition. McGraw-Hill
• Singh B.D. (2007). Compensation and Reward Management, Excel Books, New Delhi.
 MEASUREMENT IN HUMAN RESOURCE
Course Code: MBA 412 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
This course helps practice the tools and techniques which can be subsequently used to
quantify several parameters of the effective management of human capital, including the
functions of HR. It provides a set of powerful skills to communicate with and influence key
decision-makers within an organization.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction and the challenges of measurement
Introduction: Meaning & Definition of HR Measurement – Importance; Development of
Concept. HR measurement for HR Professionals; Investment in Human Resources. Efficient
use of Human Resource, Adopting the right perspective: Understanding the role of workforce
in strategy implementation

Module II: Developing measurement metrics

Understanding and developing the right metrics: Tools to manage the implementation of
strategy, implementing the metrics. Benchmarking HR .Different types of scorecards- Balance
Score Card, HR Score Card

Module III: Designing the metrics

Principles of good measurement. Cost-benefit analyses for HR interventions
Measuring HR alignment. Measuring hiring and staffing, Measuring the value of compensation
and benefits. Measurement of training and development

Module IV: Specific topics in measurement

Measuring the value of employee relations and retention program, Models for Assessing
Return on Investment, Assesing value of outsourcing and call centers .

Module V: TQM and HR Audit

Role of TQM in HR Measurement. HR Audit, Implementing HR Audit, Methodology and Issues,
HRD Scorecard, HRD Audit – The Indian experiences and cases, People Capability Maturity
Model (PCMM), Measuring Intellectual capital and web based HR systems

Module VI: Human Resource Information System

Role of information system in human resource Decision making, Designing and Implementation of HRIS,
Organizing data, personnel audit and personnel research, Computer applications in HRM functions (uses and
trends)

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Fitz-Enz Jac,(2001), How to Measure Human Resource Management, 3rd Edition, McGraw
Hill
• Mello Jeffrey A., (2008), Strategic Human Resource Management, Thompson Press
Publishing.
• Rao T.V.(1999), HRD Audit, 3rd Edition Response Books
 GLOBAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 413 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The main objective of this course is to inculcate deep understanding of International Human
Resources and to explore the dynamics of global business development. It also aims at
preparing students about examining significant business opportunities and maximization of
returns with understanding of cross cultural management, as primary causes of failure in
multinational ventures stem from lack of understanding of the essentials differences in
managing human Resources, at all levels in foreign environment.

Course Contents:
Module I: Internationalization
Evolution of International business, Stages of internationalization, Modes of entering
International business Relationship between International Strategy and SIHRM- International
Human Resource Management –
Major Economies and their HRM practices

Module II: Organisation Structure, International HRP, Recruitment and Selection

Organisation Structure and HRM, Global Human Resource Planning, Issues in supply of
International Human Resources, Recruitment and Selection

Module III: International Compensation Management

Complexities, Objectives of International Compensation Management, Component and
Structure of International Compensation package, Executive rewards and compensation,
Approaches to International Compensation Management,

Module IV: Human Resource Professional – Molester Navigation

Context for international perfect management, framework for performance management,
cross-cultural issues, North America, South America, some key pointers, Northern Europe,
Value based management in Nordic countries, China – the sleeping giant awakes, Japan – a
culture of enfolding relationship, South East Asia regional diversity.

Module V: Understanding Cross Culture: Issues & Perspectives

Understanding Culture, Introduction, Key Concepts, Determinants of Cultural Identity,
Frameworks for Mapping the Culture, Geert Hoefstede, Clyde Cluckhohn, TE Hall
Studies of National Culture, Managing Workforce diversity, Adjusting to the New Culture,
Competencies for Global Manager

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Aswathappa K, Dash Sadhna (2008), International Human Resource Management Text
&Cases, Tata McGraw Hill
• Bhatia S.K. (2005), International Human Resource Management, Deep & Deep Publications
• Evans Paul, Vladimir Pucik, Jean-Louis Barsoux (2010), The Global Challenge –
Frameworks for International Human Resource Management, Mc Graw Hill
• Rao PL, International Human Resource Management (2008), Excel Books
 ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGN AND STRUCTURAL PROCESSES
Course Code: MBA 414 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
To develop an understanding of the nature, functioning and design of organization as social collectives and to
develop theoretical & practical insights & problem solving capabilities for effectively managing the
organizational processes. This course aims to provide a comprehensive perspective on new emergent
organizational forms by discussing them in the context of environment, systems & processes.

Course Contents:

Module I: Overview of Organizations

Defining Organizations, Types of Organizations, Determinants of Organization Design,
Parameters of Organization Design, Definition of Organizational Structure, Complexity,
Formalization and Centralization

Module II: Organization & Environment

Organizational Environment, Specific and General Environment, Sources of Uncertainty in
Organizational Environment, Hyper-Turbulence; Networks and Business Eco-Systems;
Technological Discontinuities; Paradigm Shift

Module III: Types of Organization

Organization Design, Approaches to Organizational Design, Basic Challenges of
Organizational Design, Organizational Design for Different Excellences, New Design Option

Module IV: Organizational Effectiveness

Organizational Effectiveness- Definition, Importance and Approaches to Organizational
Effectiveness - The Goal Attainment Approach, The System Approach, The Strategic
Approach.

Module V: Emerging Organizational Forms

Organizations as Networks/ Clusters; Self Organizing Systems; Designing for Innovation and
Change.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Ackoff, R.L. (1999), Recreating the corporation: A Design of Organization for the 21 st
century. Oxford University Press.
• Banner, D.K. & Gague, T.E. (1995), Designing Effective Organizations, Sage Publications.
• Hall, R. H. (2002), Organizations: Structures, Processes and Outcomes, 8 th Edition.
Prentice Hall India
• Robbins Stephens (2009), Organization Structure, Design and Applications, Pearson
Educationw
 MANAGERIAL COUNSELLING
Course Code: MBA 415 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
To understand the concept and process so as to develop the professional counseling skills
among the students.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Introduction to managerial counseling, Goals of counseling, Self-Development of Managers as
Counselors, Barefoot Counseling, Assertiveness and Interpersonal Skills for Counselors,
Ethics in counseling, Counseling Relationship.

Module II: Approaches to Counseling

Introduction to the Important Schools of Counseling, Psychoanalytic Foundations,
Transactional Analysis, Gestalt Therapy, Rational Emotive Therapy, Person-Centered
Approach to Counseling, An Integrated Model

Module III: Counseling process & Skills

5 D Model, Development of Counseling Skill, Essentials of Skills, Nonverbal Clues, Empathy,
Listening and
Responding, Effective Feedback.

Module IV: Counseling at work

Counseling interventions in organisations- Performance Counseling, Counseling in Problem
Situations, Role Conflict in Counseling, Midlife Blues, Integration and Action Plan.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Welfel E.R. and Patterson Lewis E (2007), The Counselling Process, Thomson
• Singh Kavita (2010), Counselling Skills for Managers, Prentice Hall India
• Rao. S.N (2010), Counselling and Guidance, Tata McGraw Hill
• Felthman C. and Dryden W (2010), Brief Counselling- A Practical Integrative Approach, Tata
McGraw Hill
 FOREIGN TRADE POLICY

Course Code: MBA 416 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
Know the world’s top economies and their Trade Policies, Regional & bi-lateral agreement.; Learning the
direction, composition & procedures of India’s Foreign Trade Policy 2009-2014; Knowing which Assistance,
Promotion Schemes and Incentives exporters enjoy; knowing Import Tariffs & Customs duties; Learning
International Documentary & Govt. Regulatory compliances

Course Contents:
Module I: World Trade & Economic integration
Why Trade, Link between Trade & Economic growth, World’s leading economies, Complexities & Barriers to
free trade, World’s Top Trading Nations, Emerging markets. Free Trade Areas, Customs Union, Common
Markets, Economic Unions; Regional Economic Blocks- EU, NAFTA, MERCOSUR, SAARC, SAFTA, APEC,
ASEAN, ECOWAS, GCC, OPEC. Global integration, WTO, IMF, World Bank. Harmonized Commodity
Description & Coding System, ISO Currency codes.

Module II: Overview of India’s Foreign Trade Policy

The Foreign Trade (Development & Regulation) Act, Objectives of India’s Trade Policy 2009-2014, Post 1991
India’s Trade Liberalization, India’s Economic Indicators, Export/Import data & major Trading partner
countries. How to start an Export/Import business, Import Export Code (IEC), Registration cum Membership
Certificate (RCMC) with appropriate Export Promotion Council (EPC). Commercial, Financial, Transport,
Title, Govt., Insurance, Export Assistance Documents & Certificates used in Exports. Licenses & Customs
documents for imports.

Module III: India’s Export Policy

Fiscal, Financial, Special Schemes & General incentives provided to exporters. Status holders,
Focus Market Scheme, Free Trade Zones, Deemed Exports, Duty Drawback, Export Promotion
Capital Goods Scheme, Advance License, Standard input-output norms, Duty Exemption Pass
Book Scheme, Special Economic Zones, Export-oriented Units, Software Technology Parks,
Free Trade Zones.

Module IV: India’s Import Policy

Tariff structure and Customs Duties, Basic Duty, Additional Customs Duty, Education Cess, Anti-Dumping
duty, Safeguard duty etc. Bill of Entry, Bonded Warehouses, Import of Restricted goods, second-hand goods,
under Lease Finance, Replacement goods, samples, goods for Exhibitions, Fire Arms, Prototypes, Office
equipment, Tourism Industry, Individuals & NRI’s

Module V: Trade Policy of Leading Trade Economies vis-a-vis Indian Trade Policy
Indo European Union, US & China Trade Policy. Expansion of trade to Latin America, Africa & Asia.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• R.K. Jain (2010), Foreign Trade Policy and Handbook of Procedures (2009- 2014) (Vol 1), Jain Book
Depot
• Nabhi (2011-12)(1999), How to Export, Nabhi Publications
 INTERNATIONAL SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 417 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
Developing an understanding of the various components of an integrated supply chain management suited to
global markets; Teaching criticality of an efficient supply chain with “zero defects” in the WTO border-less
world ; Understanding the micro aspects of global distribution and logistics ; imparting knowledge of Multi-
modal Transport operators , ocean & air transportation in world trade.

Course Contents
Module I: Global Supply Chain – Overview
Introduction & Importance of Supply Chain Management, Developing Supply Chain as a Competitive
Tool for Customer Satisfaction and Corporate Profitability, Channel Structure, Supplier Network
Development, Outsourcing., Supply Chain Logistics Operations.

Module II: Strategic Issues in Supply Chain Management

Value chain and value delivery system, Concept of multi-modal transportation and infrastructure needs;
Transportation Choices and Third Party Logistics, Fourth Party Logistics Distribution Channel Design, Strategic
Alliances, Communication Flow of Supply Chain, Documentation needs and liabilities; Inter-functional
coordination, Inter-corporate cooperation, Outsourcing in Supply Chain; Vendor Management & Development,
Strategic Lead Time Management, Warehousing

Module III: International Logistic System

Concept, Objectives & Scope, The System Elements, International Transportation Issues, Warehousing,
Inventory Management, Packaging and Unitization Issues, Communication and Control, Centralized and
Decentralized Logistic Management, Third Party Logistics (3PL), Multimodal Transport Operator (M.T.O.)

Module IV: Air & Ocean Transport and Chartering

The General Structure of shipping industry, Characteristics of Shipping Industry, Liner and Tramp Operations
and Significance, World Seaborne Trade and World Shipping, Composition of World Seaborne Trade, Problems
of Developing Countries, Liner Freighting Practice, Principles – Freight Structure, Voyage Charter, Time
Charter, Barboat Charter. Indian Shipping, Growth and Perspective, Problems of Shipping Industry, Shipping
Policy, International Air Transport System, Air Transport and PDM Approach to Export Distribution,
International Set – up for Air Transport, Air Freight Rates, India’s Export – Import Trade by Air, Problems and
Prospects, Law Relating to Carriage of Goods

Module V: Managing the Supply Chain Performance

SCM and Information Technology, IT Enabled Supply Chain Management, Inter-firm Integration:
Implementation Issues, Application of ERP, JIT, Optimization of Supply Chain, Retailing Management,
Waste Elimination and Lean Thinking in Supply Chain; Supply chain performance measurement
systems; Supply Chain Balanced Score Card.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Bowersox, Closs and Cooper (2008), Supply Chain Logistics Management, Tata McGraw-
Hill
• Chopra, Meindl and Kalra (2008), Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning, and
Operation, Pearson Education
• Rangaraj, Raghuram and Srinivasan (2009), Supply Chain Management for Competitive
Advantage: Concepts and Cases, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Ray (2010). Supply Chain Management for Retail, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Shah (2009), Supply Chain Management: Text and Cases, Pearson Education
• Simchi-Levi, et al (2008), Designing and Managing the Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies
and Case Studies, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Wisner, Leong and Tan (2005), Principles of Supply Chain Management, Cengage

INTERNATIONAL CROSS CULTURE AND

DIVERSITY MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 418 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
Examine cross-cultural and international management issues; Analyzes problems of managing in an
international marketplace; Focuses on cultural and regional diversity and differences, political and economic
influences, global market factors, and other contingencies with which managers of multinational enterprises
must contend; Fet acquainted with an array of management practices – from human resource staffing, to
motivating a multi-cultural workforce, to creating strategic alliances for both large and small international
organizations.

Course Contents:
Module I: Global Cultural Diversity
Differences in organizational behavior and management practices across countries, Major perspectives and
frameworks underlying cross-cultural dimensions, Cultural convergence versus divergence, Business strategies
for effective management of cultural diversity in an international setting, Cultural values and their implications
for international management

Module II: HR issues of Cross Cultural Teams

Organizational culture in a global business environment, Emerging types of organizational structures in the
global economy, Interdependence of nations and cultures in a global business environment. Role of human
resources in an organization competing in the global economy, Corporate strategy and international human
resource management, Concerns of managing expatriate employees, Relation between cultural values and team
processes, Techniques to design and implement effective international teams

Module III: Cross-Cultural Perceptions & Communication

Theories of intercultural communication, Major barriers to effective cross-cultural communication, Perceptions
& Communication difference, Techniques to overcome barriers and develop intercultural communication
competence for North America, Europe, Middle-East, Latin America, Japan & China.

Module IV: Cross-cultural Business Negotiations

Negotiation process differences, Conflict handling and Negotiation techniques for North America, Europe,
Middle-East, Latin America, Japan & China.

Module V: Competencies for Global Managers

Tackling issues and problems in international assignments, Acclimatizing expatriate employee to local culture,
Identifying, grooming and motivating global Leadership, International management issues affecting women in
leadership roles across cultures.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• McFarlin, D. B., & Sweeney, P. D. (2006). International Management: Strategic opportunities and cultural
challenges. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin
• Daniels, J. D. and Radebaugh, L. H. (2004). International Business: Environments and Operations,
Prentice-Hall, Inc., New Jersey. ISBN: 0-13-121726-7. (Referred to as D&R)
• Hill, C. W. (2003). International Business: Competing in the Global Marketplace, McGraw-Hill. (referred
to as H)
• Griffin, R.W.and Pustay, M.W. (2002). International Business: A Managerial Perspective. FT/Prentice Hall.
• Griffin, R. W. and Pustay, M. W. (2005). International Business. FT/Prentice Hall.
• Hibbert, E. (1997). International Business Strategy and Operations. MacMillan Press Ltd.
• Henry, C. M. and Springborg, R. (2001). Globalization and the Politics of Development in the Middle East.
Cambridge University Press.
• Rugman, A. M. and Hodgetts, R. M. (2003). International Business. Pearson Education Limited. ISBN: 0-
273-67374-2. (referred to as R&H)
• Smith, A. (1937). The Wealth of Nations. New York: The Modern Library.
• Tayeb, M. (2003). International Management: Theories and Practice. Prentice Hall.
• Todaro, M. P. (2000). Economic Development, Pearson Education Limited. ISBN: 0-201-64858-X.
• Pandey, Janak,Sinha Durganand, (2001), Asian contributions to Cross-Cultural Psychology, SAGE
Publications
 GLOBAL OUTSOURCING: ISSUES AND PERSPECTIVES
Course Code: MBA 419 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
Knowing how to make sound decisions about global sourcing strategy; Analyse the Past,
Present & Future Landscape of Global Services Outsourcing, with particular focus on BPO’s
& IT services outsourcing; Study how to develop Strategy & Managerial Competence in Global
Sourcing using real world examples from Managerial Practice; help identify challenges of
Global Sourcing as well as costs, risks, rewards, and strategies involved in making sourcing
decisions.

Course Contents:
Module I: Historical and economic perspectives on Global Outsourcing
Origin of Globalization of Service Delivery ; Outsourcing- what & why, concept & scope of
outsourcing activities ; Significance & challenges/barriers in outsourcing, Sourcing
terminologies;

Module II: Sourcing Models

Sourcing Models; Insource vs. Outsource, Domestic vs Global; On-shore, near-shore & off-
shore – why, when & how? Benefits & trade-offs. Types of outsourcing in various sectors –
Manufacturing, Auto, Financial, Accounting, Insurance, Healthcare, HR, Media, Design, Retail,
Entertainment, Legal etc.

Module III: Sourcing different services from different geographies

Types of global outsourcing services (IT, BPO, Infrastructure), the vendor landscape
(local/multinational, niche players/generalists), Legal Issues: Contracts, Taxes, IP, Privacy,
Compliance, Critical success factors in managing outsourcing relationships, Managing
distributed work teams: overcoming distance, time, and culture.

Module IV: India’s BPO’s & IT Services Outsourcing experience

Outsourcing into India. India- A SWOT analysis ; India as a preferred destination ; Size,
statistics & experiences of the Indian BPO & IT service providers

Module V: Developing an outsourcing strategy for Future Challenges

Implementing Outsourcing: Guidelines for choosing outsourcing partners, Contracting,
Change Management, and Governance, Managing Globally Distributed Teams across Time,
Space, and Culture.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Alphesh Patel & Hemendra Aran (2005), Outsourcing Success: The Business Imperative,
TMI-ND
• Oshri, Kotlarsky, and Willcocks, (2009),The Handbook of Global Outsourcing and Offshoring
• Sarika Kulkarni, (2006), Business Process Outsourcing, Jaico Publishing House, Mumbai
 GLOBAL BUSINESS OPERATIONS
Course Code: MBA 465 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
Understand implications of global business operations for business firms and their
managers; Address complications associated with business operations in today's global
economy; Gain exposure to the terminologies, institutions & challenges of managers
operating in the global arena; Examine the different strategies that businesses can adopt to
compete in the global marketplace and enter specific foreign markets; Explore the role played
by marketing, operations, and human resource management within a Global Business
Operations.

Course Contents:
Module I: Global Opportunities
International Business challenges in the 21st Century, Emerging super powers, Opportunities
in the Liberalized Global Trade & Investment scenario, Why go global?, Stages of going
global, Barriers and complexities of Cross Border Operations.

Module II: International Eco system

The eco system, economic indicators and characteristics of operating in North America
(USA), Europe (EU), Asia (China), Latin America (Brazil), Africa (South Africa) & Middle-East
(UAE).

Module III: Structuring Global Operations & Strategic Alliances

Trade vs Invest, FDI vs FII route ; Route for strategic alliances - JV, equity, non-equity,
subsidiaries, branches etc ; Stages- Strategy Development, Partner Assessment, Contract
Negotiation, Alliance Operation, Alliance Termination etc ; Case studies of MNC’s operating
in India & Indian companies operating abroad.

Module IV: Global Cross-Culture & Value Issues

Cultural diversity & it’s challenges; Country-specific cultural challenges; Implications &
cultural adjustments
Managing cross-cultural diversity; Ethics, corruption & Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR);
Business culture & practices prevalent in U.S.A, U.K., China, Brazil, Russia & Saudi Arabia.

Module V: Global Mergers & Acquisition (M&A’s)

Case studies on corporate India’s Acquisitions & Mergers abroad. Role of Investment Banks &
Consultants in global A&M’s. Latest FDI & FII trends, FDI & reverse FDI within & outside India.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Manab Thakur, Gene E. Burton & B.N. Srivastava (1997), International Management, Concepts & Cases,
Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co
• Janet Morrison (2011), International Business Environment, Palgrave Macmillan
• Mia Mikic (2000), International Trade, Macmillan Press
 COMMERCIAL INSURANCE UNDERWRITING AND OPERATIONS

Course Code: MBA 466 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
The subject is designed by keeping in view the various aspects of the industrial, manufacturing and
business activity. The various non-life insurance for the same, safety and security and its impact in
terms of insurance ‘To Do and Not To Do’ in case of any claim and duties of insured for minimization
of loss at the time of loss and claim process.

Course Contents:
Module I: Property Insurance (FIRE)
Fire hazards of specific industries – Process; fire Hazards, loss prevention and requirements. General
fire hazards – Fire load, Hazards of resistance, Explosion, Air-conditioning, Boiler and furnaces/oven,
Electrical Equipments. Covers under various Fire policies, Special perils, Exclusions, Tariff
Regulations as per All India Fire Tariff 2001. Main factory plant its process, godowns and ware
houses, activity in any industrial unit. Special policies.

Module II: Property Insurance (Engineering)

Scope of Engineering insurance – application of basic principles. Scope of covers, rating underwriting
of various engineering policies Erection-all-Risk Marine-cum-Erection contractor-all-risk, Contractor
plant and machinery, Boiler plant and pressure vessels, Machinery breakdown, cold storage and
miscellaneous policies.

Module III: Claim Operations

Claim procedure - Duty of insured, assessment of loss, Proportionate calculation of loss in case of
double insurance and concurrent insurance policies. Ex-Gratia payments, Assignment of claim,
settlement and payment under various clauses

Module IV: Motor and Marine Insurance

History of motor insurance. Application of basic principles of insurance, Type of vehicle as per motor
insurance, Type of policies as per motor vehicle Act. Scope of cover under different type of policies.
Tariff rates and regulations, claim processing and settlement, MACT , Lok Adalat / Jald Rahat Yojna.
Marine insurance market in India and UK. Purpose, scope application of marine policies. Claim
procedure, Role of claim adjusters.

Module V: Miscellaneous Policies

Mediclaim, overseas mediclaim policies – benefit and conditions. Burglary insurance, Money in transit,
Jewellers block policies – cover, exclusions and conditions, rating and claims. Liability insurance
policies – Public liability, Product Liability –scope and underwriting. Special Contingency policy,
Householder policy, shopkeeper policy. Rural Insurance.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Bernstein, Peter L,Against the God, John Wiley & Sons, Inc
• Get your Claim Paid, Silver Lake Editor, Silver Lake Publishing
• Jody Ball, Java Ball, The Bible on Insurance Claims Investigation Step By Step
Techniques, Insight and Prospective
 INSURANCE ACCOUNTS AND FUND MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 467 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
To develop an understanding of final accounts pertaining to life & general insurance to enable the
students to have an insight as to how the insurance companies allocate & manage their financial
resources to meet their financial goals. To apprise the students of the tax related benefits
pertaining to both life & general insurance.

Course Contents:
Module I: Financial statements of Insurance Companies-Life & General
Introduction to insurance operating cycle, Accounting for revenues & expenses, accounting
for assets & liabilities, accounting for capital & surplus with special reference to GAAP &
relevant accounting standards.

Module II: Financial statement analysis

GAAP Ratios- Managing Solvency & Profitability, Regulatory Financial statement analysis-Statutory
ratios for Insurance Companies. Fund Management – Managing Cash Flows.

Module III: Valuation of Insurance Claims

Loss by Fire- Stock valuation, Loss of Profits policy-valuation.

Module IV: Tax related issues

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• LOMA Publications.
• III Publications
 INSURANCE MARKETING AND CLIENT MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 468 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The aim of this course is to help students develop among the students an understanding of
differences between traditional marketing concepts and concepts related to insurance
marketing. The distribution channels, new markets and product development with reference
to insurance will also be discussed. Acquiring customers and satisfying their needs being
crucial for success of insurance companies, it is aimed to discuss use of Customer
Relationship Management Technologies.

Course Contents:
Module I: Insurance Marketing Strategy
Basic Elements of Insurance Marketing Strategy, Marketing Environment Audit. Increasing the
willingness to buy, New Distribution Channels, New Target Markets, New Product
Development Program, Increasing Human Needs and Insurance Protection, Insurance
products versus other Financial Securities.

Module II: Insurance Marketing Process

Analyzing the Client’s Current Insurance Portfolios, Developing the Market Mix, Marketing
Planning, Marketing Implementation and Control, Use of Internet and Database Management
Services through AWP.

Module III: Insurance Advertising

Elements of the Advertising Program, Restrictions imposed by IRDA on Advertisements,
Advertising Objectives, Design and Execution Styles. Examination of Motivational Impact.

Module IV: Insurance Sales

Salesmanship Sales Interviews, Sales talk and Customer Response Developing Prospects into
clients Intermediates and then Role in Sales Promotion. Impact of Regulations on Insurance
Marketing and Sales.

Module V: Insurance Marketing Plan

Annual Marketing Plan Annual Sales Plan Profitability Objectives Comparing Actual
Performance and Planned Performance, Analyzing Sales Deviations, Marketing Modification.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Allen, S.B. Goodwin, D.W and Herrod, J.W. (1999), Life and Health Insurance Marketing.
LOMA.
 PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT AND PRICING
Course Code: MBA 469 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
To familiarize students with product and pricing concepts and strategies, the methods and tools used in
developing and programming. Enabling them to develop strategies and plans and to develop the judgment
parameters required in product and pricing management.

Course Contents:

Module I
Product: Concept, Classification and types; various levels of products.

Module II
Product Management - The concepts of product line, Product Mix- Length, Width, Depth and Consistency, Line
Stretching, Line Filling and Line Simplification.

Module III
Product Life Cycle - Concept, Stages and Relevant Strategies.

Module IV
New Product Launch Process-Idea Generation, Screening, Concept development, Prototype development, Test
marketing and Commercialization.

Module V
Pricing- Concept, Role, Factors influencing, Strategies and Methods. Price Setting Process.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Philip Kotler, Marketing Management, PHE Publications.

• Gary Armstrong & Philip Kotler, Marketing-An Introduction.
 SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
Course Code: MBA 470 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
This course covers the system development life-cycle (SDLC) phases, with respect to the
waterfall approach, also describes the prototype approach for developing software systems.
The object-oriented (OO) analysis and design concepts are also introduced. However, the
emphases will be on the following topics:

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to system analysis and design
Typical information system; Typical cases for analysis; problem-solving steps; gathering
information; starting a
Project. Introduction to different phase of SDLC.

Module II: Requirements specifications

Feasibility analysis; Data flow diagrams; describing Data; Entity relationship analysis; data
dictionary; physical and logical model of data; logical database design; and the importance of
normalization; consider stations in file design ; role of database management system.

Module III: System design

Concepts of logical and physical design. Files, Processes, Human-machine interface:
screens/dialogues, presentation of information, Forms and Reports design. Data Validation
and Audit features. New System Specifications. Database design and Module design.
Evaluating quality of design, e.g. cohesion, coupling.

Module IV: System Implementation

Testing and quality assurance. Software maintenance. Role of project management in the
system development cycle. Complete example. Production planning and control, accounting
principles: information flow; role of CAD/CAM; aggregate planning and master scheduling
Elements, Resources, Risk, Project ocumentation, and Some Tools e.g. Gantt charts and
PERT

Module V
Succeeding as System Analyst, Interpersonal kills, Management skills, Analytical skills and
Technical skills. Requirements analysis. System investigation. Process analysis.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Awad EM (2010), Systems Analysis and Design, Galgotia Publications (P) PLtd.
• Whitten JL & Bentley LD(2010), Systems Analysis and Design Methods , Galgotia
Publications (P) PLtd
• Valacich JS, George JF & Hoffer JA (2010), Essentials of Systems Analysis and Design,
Pearson Education, Inc
• Kendall K & KendallJ (2010), Systems Analysis and Design, Pearson Education., Inc..
 ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 471 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
Today Enterprise comprises of various stakes holders, such as employer, partners, customers
and managing them is the key factor. Today enterprise is better known as extended enterprise
and this course gears towards familiarizing the various components of Ext. Enterprises such
as ERP, KM, CRM, SCM, business intelligence etc.

Course Contents:
Module I
Enterprise Management, Components of Enterprise Management, ERP – A Manufacturing Perspective,
ERP Modules and their Benefits, ERP Implementation Life Cycle, Role of Vendors, Consultants and
Users, ERP Market and Future Directions

Module II
Understanding Supply Chain and its Drivers, Planning in Supply and Demand in Supply Chain
Planning and Managing Inventories in a Supply Chain, Transportation, Network Design and IT
in Supply Chain, E-Business and Supply Chain, Business Intelligence and Some Solutions

Module III
What is CRM and its Power?, The Customer Service/Sales Profile and Management of it
Choosing Your CRM Strategy, Tools for Capturing Customer Information, CRM on Internet,
Enterprise Application Integration, CRM in companies like Toyota, Walmart etc

Module IV
Knowledge and Management, Drivers of Knowledge Management, Classifying Knowledge,
Implementing Knowledge Management, Aligning KM and Business Strategy, Knowledge
Management Platform, Knowledge Management Tools

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Leon A (2010) Enterprise Resource Planning, Tata Mcgraw Hill Education Private Limited
• Greenberg, P (20101) Customer Relationship Management, at the Speed of Light; Tata
Mcgraw Hill Education Private Limited
• Fernandz !B & Sabherwal R (2010); Knowledge Management – systems and Processes; PHI
Learning Pvt Ltd.
• Frazelle, EH ((2010); Supply Chain Strategy; Tata Mcgraw Hill Education Private Limited
 INFORMATION SECURITY AND RISK MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 472 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
In today’s competitive global economy, Information is the key resource which is growing day –
by - day it is very critical to protect that information from all aspects. This course is designed
to familiarize students with the importance of information, Risk involved in managing them
and How to protect this information?

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction of Information Security
Goals of Computer Security. CIA triangle, Identifying the Assets, Threats, Impact,
vulnerabilities, User Authentication, System Access Control, Password Management,
Privileged User Management, User Account Management, Data Resource Protection, Sensitive
System Protection, Cryptography, Intrusion detection, Computer-Security Classifications

Module II: Computer Security

Hardening (Operating System and Application Code, File System Security, Local Security Policies,
Services, Default Accounts), Network Activity, Malicious Code, Firewall, Fault Tolerant System,
BACKUP and UPS

Module III: Network Security

Network security issues, threats & solutions, cryptography, algorithms (encryption, substitution,

sequential and random, transposition), crypto-analysis, methods of breaking these algorithms.

Module IV: Disaster Management

Types of Disaster, Challenge in Global operations, Understanding disaster recovery & business

continuity, Business Continuity Management, Preparing BCP – a 10 step process, case (eg WTC)

Module V: Management of Security taking Windows OS as example (Practical)

Security Management, Users and Groups Management, Managing Local and Global Groups,
Managing User Accounts, Windows NT Domain Management, Registry Management, Logical
Structure, Physical Structure, DNS Management, Managing Group Policy, User Authentication
Management, Creating Domain User Accounts, Files and Folder Management, Files and Folder
Permission Shared Resources Management, Encrypting File System (EFS).

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Vedpuriswar AV (2009), Enterprise Risk Management: A strategic approach to Derisking an

Enterprise, Vision Books.
• Whitman ME & Mattord HJ (2009), Principles and Practices of Information Security;
Cengage Learning

MARKETING OF IT SOLUTIONS
Course Code: MBA 473 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
“Marketing and Management of Software Solutions” course is in two parts, the first one
exposes the students to various typical features of solutions marketing and the second part to
the Management of software solutions.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to IT Sector
Introduction to software, industry, software business models: service, product, hybrid models

Module II: Solutions Marketing

IT marketing, internet marketing, sales cycle, service development lifecycle

Module III: Introduction to marketing strategies for cloud computing

PAAS, SAAS, IAAS

Module IV: Customer Handling

Writing proposals, handling proposals, customer handling strategies, account planning,
relationship building

Module V: IT investment and Budgeting

Product pricing, service pricing, CBA, TCO

Module VI: IT solutions – implementation and maintenance

PM, Implementation and Maintenance of IT solutions

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Bob H (2009), Software Project Management, Tata McGraw Hill

• Kelkar, SA (2009), Software Project Management, PHI
• Kishor Swapna(2010), Software Requirements & Destinations, Tata McGraw Hill
• Royce (2009), Software Project Management, Pearson Education

SOFTWARE QUALITY ASSURANCE

Course Code: MBA 474 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
Quality is the essence of life. Information Technology by virtue of its various products, broadly
software and hardware, is enabling quality in various aspects. It thus becomes more
imperative that the software, which is actually becoming life line of any organization, adheres
to certain quality norms. The students must understand the various aspects of quality, tools to
implement quality in software development and monitoring the same.

Course Contents:
Module I: Quality Concepts and Practices
Why Quality?, Cost of Quality, TQM concept, Quality Pioneers Approaches to Quality.

Module II: Software Quality

Software Development Process, S/w quality Attributes and significance of each attribute in
detail, Hierarchical Models of quality. Concept of Quality Assurance and Quality Control

Module III: Software Quality Assurance

Implementing an IT Quality function, Content of SQA Plan, Quality Tools, Quality baselines,
Model and assessment fundamentals, Internal Auditing and Quality assurance.

Module IV: Software Quality Control

Testing Concepts - ad hoc, white box, black box and integration, Cost Effectiveness of
Software Testing – credibility & ROI, right methods, Developing Testing Methodologies-
Acquire and study the test strategy, building the system test plan and unit plan , Verification
and Validation. Software Change Control- SCM, change control procedure, Defect Management
– causes, detection, removal and tracking,

Module V: Metrics and Measurement of Software Quality

Measuring Quality, measurement concepts- Standard unit of measure, software metrics,
Metrics Bucket, Problems with Metrics, Objective and subjective measurement, attributes of
good measurement, Installing measurement program, Risk Management- defining,
characterizing risk, managing risk, software risk management
Module VI: Quality Standards
Introduction to various Quality standards: ISO-9000 Series, Six Sigma, SEI CMMi Model.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Ben-Menachem M & Garry SM (2009), Software Quality – Producing Practical, Consistent

Software, Thomson Learning (Vikas)
• Godbole, NS (2009), Software Quality Assurance – Principles and practice, Narosa
• Shafer & Shafer (2009), Quality Software Project Management, Pearson Education
 ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION

Course Code: MBA 475 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
This course provides students an opportunity to gain an understanding of advertising and other
marketing communications practices. The course emphasizes on developing students' abilities to use
Advertising as a tool to Create Awareness, Position the Product, and make an impact in the
Consumers’ Minds. This comprehensive course also familiarizes students’ with Media Planning and
creativity in advertising.

Course Contents:

Module I: Introduction to Advertising

Concept and definition of advertisement – Social and Economic Implications of advertisements,
Setting advertisement objectives, Ad. Agencies – Selection and Remuneration, Types of
advertisement

Module II: Advertising Planning & Strategy

Advertising Department: Objectives and functions, Role of Advertisement Agencies: Selection and
Remuneration, Advertising Campaign, Budgeting Methods.

Module III: Advertising Media and Effectiveness

Media Planning, Scheduling, & Buying; Print, Broadcast & Interactive Online Media, Measuring
Advertising Effectiveness, Creativity in Advertising, Copy Writing.

Module IV: Sales Promotion

Rationale, Types - Consumer and Trade Promotions - Sales Promotion Strategies and Practices,
Cross Promotions

Module V: Integrated Marketing Communication

Other Promotional Tools, Public Relations, Event Marketing, Direct Marketing, Surrogate Advertising,
New Product Launches.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Belch, George E & Belch, Michael A. (2009). Advertising and Promotion. McGraw-Hill Irwin. 8th
edition.
• Wells W.D, Burnett J, & Moriarty S. (2009), Advertising Principles and Practice, Pearson Higher
Education
• Batra R, Myers G.J., Aaker D (2003), Advertising Management, Pearson Education.
 CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 476 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
This course examines customer relationship management as a key strategic process for
organizations. Composed of people, technology, and processes, an effective CRM optimizes the
selection or identification, acquisition, growth and retention of desired customers to maximize
profit. Anyone interested in being an architect of CRM within his or her organization, or
responsible for the development of any major aspect of CRM will find this course beneficial. CRM
discussions and projects will address both organizational customers (B2B) and
consumers/households (B2C).

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction and Significance of Customer Relationship Management
Evolution of CRM, Need for CRM, Benefits of CRM, Transaction vs. Relationship orientation,
Introduction and Objectives of a CRM Process, an Insight into CRM , e-CRM and m-CRM.

Module II: Managing Customer Relationship

Understanding Principles of Customer Relationship, Relationship Building Strategies, Building
Customer Relationship Management by Customer Retention, Stages of Retention, Sequences
in Retention Process, Understanding Strategies to Prevent Defection and Recover
Customers. Market share vs. Share of customers, Life Time Value of Customers.

Module III: CRM Process

The CRM cycle i.e. Assessment Phase; Planning Phase; The Executive Phase, Modules in
CRM, 4C’s (Elements) of CRM Process, Customer Acquisition Strategies, Customer Retention
Strategies (Zero defections), Cross selling and up selling strategies, Customer Equity,
Customer Metrics, Customer loyalty, Loyalty ladder, Customer Complaint Management.

Module IV: CRM practices in Business Economy (B 2 C and B 2 B Market)

Growth of Service in India, Service Customer Classification, Service Marketing Mix, Service
Recovery, Characteristics of Business Markets, Importance of CRM in B2B and B 2 C Markets,
Key Account Management, Supplier-Channel Management, CRM practices and application in
Banking Industry, Retail Industry, Aviation Industry, Hospitality Industry, Pharmaceutical
Industry, Telecom Industry and Product Markets.

Module V: Issues and Challenges in Implementation of CRM

CRM Implementation Road Map, CRM Roadblocks (4P’s), Phased development, learning from
customer defections, evaluating customer retention plan, Emerging trends in CRM.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Alok Kumar, Chhabi Sinha, Rakesh Sharma (2009) Customer Relationship Management –
Concepts and Application, Biztantra.
• Alok Kumar Rai (2009) Customer relationship Management Concepts and Cases, PHI
• G Shainesh & Jagdish N Sheth, (2006) Customer Relationship Management-A Strategic
Approach, Macmillan India, New Delhi.
• Jill Dyche (2006) The CRM Hand book (2006) Pearson Education.
• Judith W.Kincaid (2007) Customer Relationship Management- Getting it Right, Pearson
Education.
• Ronald S (2001), Accelerating Customer Relationships, Swift, PHI.
• S.Shajahan (2009) Relationship Marketing, Tata McGraw Hill

INDUSTRIAL MARKETING
Course Code: MBA 477 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
To provide an understanding of industrial market characteristics, evolution of strategies and to learn

practical application of different concepts of industrial market

Course Contents:
Module I
Introduction to industrial marketing, environment of industrial and consumer marketing,
nature of an industrial buyer, types of industrial products and services and their contextual
nature, standard product classification
Industrial buying behaviour, individual vs. group decision making, concept of buying center
and environmental & organizational influences, buy-grid framework and its practical
application, after-sales service (AMC)
Industrial market segmentation, targeting and positioning techniques; sequential
segmentation, niche market

Module II
Industrial channel, types, nature, difference between merchant, agents and broker, selection
criteria, channel conflicts, channel integration (VMS), marketing strategies, policy, sales
management practices training, motivation and examination., e-commerce
Industrial marketing communication, advertising, publicity and sales promotion

Module III
New product development through in-house (R&D) and technology transfer, different stages in
NPD, different types of test markets; IPRs, patent, copyright, non-disclosure agreement (NDA),
industrial PLC and effect of various external and internal environmental factors

Module IV
Different types of bids – tender and auction, two parts bid, price discovery mechanism under
different market scenarios, OEM and their impact on pricing policies, break-even point
calculation
Line of credit and mode of payment, its implication on working capital management

Module V
Industrial marketing research techniques, marketing intelligence, sales and demand forecast
in industrial market
Industrial marketing in international context, Incoterms, role of contingency factors affecting
industrial marketing decisions
Brief introduction to nature of turnkey and BOT projects, its contractual agreement; leasing

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Reeder, Brierty and Reeder, Industrial Marketing: Analysis, Planning and Control, PHI
Learning
• Krishna K. Havaldar, Industrial Marketing: Text and cases ,McGraw Hill
• Newspapers- Economic Times, Business Standard, Financial Express, Brand Equity
• Magazines- Advertising and Marketing, Business World, Business India
• Reading about following organizations/ standard reports/ publications is suggested:
1. Directorate General of Supplies and Disposals (DGS & D)
2. Business Monitor International (BMI)
3. National Industrial Classification (NIC)
4. International Standard Industrial Classification (ISIC)
5. Thomas Register (USA)
6. Business Marketing Association (BMA)
7. Directorate General of Commercial Intelligence and Statistics (DGCI&S)
8. Export Credit Guarantee Corporation (ECGC)
9. Minerals and Metals Trading Corporation of India Limited (MMTC)
10. M-Junction
11. Transport Corporation of India (TCI)

INTERNATIONAL MARKETING
Course Code: MBA 478 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
In today’s dynamic global scenario people who succeed will have to learn the art of managing
functions across domestic borders. Thus the course aims at exposing the students to the
international business activities. The course would develop a general perspective about
managing international business both in operational as well as strategic context.

Course Contents:
Module I: Overview
Need, Scope, Tasks, Domestic vs. International marketing, International trade Theories,
Importance of International Marketing, Management orientation (Ethnocentric, Polycentric,
Regiocentric & Geocentric)

Module II: International Marketing Environment

Economic Environment (World Economy, Stages of market & economic development, Income
& Purchasing Power parity, Economic Risk Analysis, Balance of payments, Trade patterns,
International trade alliances, WTO, World Bank, IMF, Regional Economic groups. Social &
Cultural environment – Culture, Cultural impact on Industrial & Consumer products. Political,
Legal & Regulatory Environment – Political Risk, IPR, Licensing & Trade Services, Dispute
Settlement & Litigation, Embargoes & Sanctions.

Module III: International Entry & Expansion Strategies

International Market Entry Strategies – Exporting, Sourcing, Licensing, JVs, Ownership &
control, Ownership/ Investment, Merger’s and Acquisitions, Stages of development models
(Domestic, International, Multinational, Global, Transnational) Strategies employed by Indian
companies to sustain Globally. Tariff and Non Tariff Barriers.

Module IV: Developing Product for International Market

The international product and its life cycle, Product positioning & Segmentation , Product
design consideration, Geographic expansion, Global branding and different positioning of the
same brand in different countries, New product development & testing . Dumping, Gray
market, Role of Services in global economy,

Module V: Promotion & Pricing Strategy for International Market

Channel development & Innovation. Role of International Advertising & Branding, PR, Trade
Fairs, Personal selling, Sales promotion, Exhibitions, Sponsorship promotion, Internet
Marketing.. Global pricing Objectives & methods, Pricing policies – Marginal cost, cost plus,
Market oriented, Export payment methods – L/C, Advance, DA/DP, FIBC, Counter trade,
Transfer price.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Keegan Warren & Bhargava Naval (2011), Global Marketing Management, Pearson
• Cateora Philip, Graham John & Salwan Prashant (2010), International Marketing, Mc
Graw Hill
• Paul Justin & Kapoor Ramneek (2010), International Marketing, Mc Graw Hill
• Joshi Rakesh Mohan (2009), International Business, Oxford Higher Education
• Vasudeva PK (2010), International Marketing, Excel Books
• Harvard Business Review, Global Business Review (Sage Publications), Global Forum –
ITC Geneva

MARKETING OF SERVICES
Course Code: MBA 479 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course has been designed to equip students to become more effective managers of any service
organization by familiarizing them with the basic characteristics of services, their implications on
design and delivery, and the ways to achieve sustainable competitive advantage by managing critical
parameters.

Course Contents:
Module I: Understanding Services and Consumer Behavior
Service Sector and its structure. Drivers of service sector growth. Nature of services:
Tangibility Spectrum; Defining the service offering; Flower of Service. Goods vs. Services; the
service marketing challenges and implications for marketers for each service characteristic.
Categorizing Service Processes. Self Service Technologies. Consumer behavior in services;
Search, Experience and Credence attributes. Service Encounters and the types; Moments of
Truth. The expanded Services Mix.

Module II: Focus on Customers

Customers’ expectations of service. Desired and Adequate service, Zone of Tolerance.
Managing customer expectations and perceptions in services. Service Quality Dimensions.
Customer Satisfaction vs. Service Quality. The impact of service failure and recovery. Types of
Customer Complaint Actions and Complainers. Service Guarantees. Service Recovery
Strategies.

Module III: Aligning Strategy, Design and Delivery

Service Blueprinting. Operational service product designing and adding value. Evidence of
service and Servicescape. The Service Triangle. Boundary–Spanning Roles. Strategies for
closing the delivery gap.

Module IV: Delivering Services through Intermediaries, Managing Demand and

Capacity. Pricing Services
Role of Distribution in Services. Channel Conflicts and other key problems. Key
Intermediaries for Service Delivery. Understanding Demand and Capacity
constraints. Strategies for matching Capacity and Demand. Approaches to Pricing
Services

Module V: Service Sector Study (Group Project)

Exposure to various growing Service Sectors, viz.: Banking, Insurance, Hospitality,
Education, Telecom, and Health Care etc. Live-Project by each group, on any one of
the growing sectors of services; Group Presentations/ Viva on assigned date.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Valarie A Zeithaml Mary Jo Bitner, Dwayne Gremler, Ajay Pandit. (2007), Services
Marketing: Integrating Customer Focus Across the Firm, Tata McGraw Hill
• Christopher Lovelock. (2010), Services Marketing: People, Technology, Strategy, Pearson
Education India.
• Rajendra Nargundkar, (2006),Services Marketing: Text and Cases, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Harsh V. Verma. (2010), Services Marketing:Text and Cases, Pearson Education.
 SERVICE OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Course Code: MBA 480 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective of the course is to understand the growing significance and impact of services on the growth and
economy and the scientific ways to run the operations so as to optimize the business and brand returns.

Course Contents:
Module I: Understanding Service Operations
Introduction; Nature & Role of Services in Economy; Service Operations and their Management Fundamentals;
Service Strategy; Positioning of Services in the Organisation Value Chain

Module II: Service Operation Infrastructure

Service Facility Design, Layout & Location, Off-shoring & Outsourcing; Technology in Services, Front-office
Back-office Interface; Human Factor in Services; External Associates in Service Processes

Module III: Service Process Management

Service Encounter Design and Control; Managing Service Processes; Experience Management in Service
Operations; Service Quality and Reliability Assurance; Service Process Improvement & the Associated
Methodologies; Experience Innovation Paradigm; New Service Development

Module IV: Improving Service Delivery Propositions

Service Growth and Globalisation; Forecasting Demand for Services; Capacity and Demand Management;
Customer Expectations and the Planned Provision in Service Delivery; Legal Aspects of Expectation-Delivery
Gaps; Service Waiting Line and Customer Relationship Management; Inventory Management for Improved
service Delivery

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Deborah (2008), Competitive Strategies for Service Businesses, New Delhi: Jaico
• Fitzsimmons & Fitzsimmons (2006), Service Management, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Haksever, et al. (2006), Service Management and Operations, Pearson Education
• Hollins (2007), Managing Service Operations, Sage Publications
• Johnston & Clark (2009), Service Operations Management, Pearson Education
• Metters, et al. (2006), Service Operations Management, Cengage Learning
• Davis & Heineke (2003), Managing Services: People and Technology,Tata McGraw Hill.
 OPERATIONS STRATEGY
Course Code: MBA 481 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The objective is to develop understanding about the practical aspects of operations strategy,
selection of process and infrastructure development. The aim of this course is to make the
students familiar with the changes required in the operational strategy with rapidly changing
environment.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction
Introduction, Role and Objectives of Operations Strategy, Incorporating Operations Strategy in
the Corporate Strategy, Dynamics of process-product life cycles, Defining a Operations
Strategy in Overall Environment, Manufacturing Implications of Corporate Marketing
Decisions.

Module II: Developing Operations Strategy

Principles and Concepts of Developing a Operations Strategy, Process of Operations Strategy
Formulation, Methodology of Developing Operations Strategy, Business Implication of
Process Choice, Product Profiling, Manufacturing Audit Approach, Manufacturing
Restructuring, Infrastructure Development.

Module III: Implementation of Operations Strategy

Principles and Concepts of Focused Manufacturing, Involvement of Human Aspects, Effect of
Technology Advancement and Technology Management, Integration of Operations Strategy
Planning and Technology Planning, Pre-requisites of Organized and Focused Manufacturing
Strategy & Unit.

Module IV: Redefining Operations Strategy

Value of Response Time and Product Variety in Operations Strategy, Management of Quality,
Planning and Controlling System, Accounting & Financial Perspectives and Manufacturing
System, Improving Manufacturing Process by Redefining & Restructuring Process Positioning

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Beckman / Barry (2008). Operations Strategy: competing in the 21st Century, McGraw-Hill Higher Ed,
978-0071274081.
• Brown / Lamming / Bessant / Jones (2005). Strategic Operations Management, Elsevier-India (Butterworth-
Heinemann), 978-075066199 / 978-81.312.0769.7
• Hayes / Pisano / Upton / Wheelwright (2004). Operations, Strategy, and Technology: Pursuing the
Competitive Edge, John Wiley, 978-0471655794.
• Klassen / Menor (2007). Cases in Operations management, Sage India, 978-81.7829.864.1
• Lowson (2002). Strategic Operations Management, Routledge (Taylor & Francis), 0415256550
• Mieghem (2008). Operations Strategy: Principles and Practice, Dynamic Ideas Llc, MA: Charlestown, 978-
0975914663
• Nicholas (2008). Competitive Manufacturing Management, Tata McGraw-Hill, 978-0070474154.
• Slack / Lewis (2008). Operations Strategy, 2/e, Prentice Hall / Pearson Education, 978-0273695196 / 978-
81.317.2572.6
• Walters (2006). Operations Strategy, Palgrave Macmillan -India, 978-0230224964
 LEAN SIX SIGMA

Course Code: MBA 482 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
At the end of this course the student will: Understand the importance of a measurement based
strategy, which focuses on process and sub-processes improvement through the application
of Principles and methods of Lean Six Sigma. Develop the understanding of technical skills
required to implement Lean Six Sigma and to implement them to significantly improved
business results. Learn to use Minitab software tool for analyzing data to help him evaluate
quality in an objective, quantitative way.

Course Contents:
Module I: Overview of Six Sigma and Organizational Goals
The history and methodology, philosophy and goals, Key drivers for business, project selection process,
introduction to DMAIC, DFSS, seven basic quality tools. Lean Principles: value chain, flow, pull,
perfection, tools commonly used to eliminate waste, kaizen, 5S, error proofing, value-stream mapping.
value-added and non-value added activities, excess inventory, space, test inspection, rework,
transportation, storage, cycle time, theory of constraints.

Module II: Define

Process components and boundaries, process owners, internal and external customers, other
stakeholders, translating customer feedback into project goals, Pareto chart, CTQ attributes,
VOC, QFD, affinity diagrams, interrelationship digraphs, tree diagrams, prioritization matrices,
matrix diagrams, PDPC charts, activity network diagrams, business results for projects,
process performance metrics, DPU, RTY, COPQ,DPMO sigma levels and process capability
indices, FMEA, RPN, Six Sigma teams, Black Belt, Master Black Belt, Green Belt, Champion,
executive, coach, facilitator, team member, sponsor.

Module III: Measure

Process maps, written procedures, work instructions, flowcharts, SIPOC, relational matrices,
techniques for assuring data accuracy and integrity, GR&R, measurement correlation, bias,
linearity, percent agreement, and P/T, natural process limits and specification limits, percent
defective, Cp and Cpk, Pp, Ppk, Cpm, short-term vs. long-term capability, 1.5 sigma shift,
sigma level for a process and its relationship to Ppk.

Module IV: Analyze

Multi-vari studies to interpret the difference between positional, cyclical, and temporal
variation; sampling plans to investigate the largest sources of variation, simple linear
correlation and regression, Hypothesis Testing - Tests for means, variances, and proportions,
paired-comparison tests, single-factor ANOVA, Chi square

Module V: Improve and Control

DOE, SPC, rational subgrouping , X Bar - R, p, np and c, implement and validate solutions,
measurement system capability, re-analysis, and post-improvement capability, developing a
control plan to document and hold the gains, implementing controls and monitoring systems.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Michael George, David Rowlands, Bill Kastle (2004), What is Lean Six Sigma, Tata
McGraw-Hill
• Michael George, John Maxey, David Rowlands, Malcolm Upton (2004), The Lean Six
Sigma Pocket Tool book: A Quick Reference Guide to 70 Tools for Improving Quality
and Speed, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Rajagopal, Amritanshu (2011), Product Strategy and Six Sigma: Challenges, Convergence
and Competence, Nova Science Publishing
• Basu, Ron (2011), Fit Sigma: A Lean Approach to Building Sustainable Quality Beyond Six
Sigma, Wiley

FACILITY PLANNING AND TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE

Course Code: MBA 483 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The aim of this course is to develop the understanding of the concept of facility planning and total
productive maintenance – its application and uses in business organizations.

Course Contents:
Module I: Introduction to Facility Planning
Facilities planning fundamentals and Objectives; Product, Process Flows and balancing activity
space; Facility Location, layout and workspace layout; Facilities systems and upkeep management

Module II: Facility Plan and Business Dynamics

Plant & Equipment – strategic consideration; Technological alignment, capacity balancing,
infrastructure and shared facilities; Service facilities and office facilities planning; Periodic review of
facilities performance; Facilities re-arrangements for new business induction.

Module III: TPM for Overall Equipment Effectiveness

Concept of maintenance and TPM; Types of maintenance; Analysis of Failure data; (Fuguai) F-tags
and defect maps; Time- and Condition-based maintenance; Reliability Centred Maintenance (RCM),
Universal Maintenance Standards; Overall Equipment Effectiveness; Timing Replacement Decisions

Module IV: Implementing TPM Programme

Steps in TPM Introduction in an Organization; TPM and maintenance manpower management;
Creating a productive team culture; 8 Pillars of TPM: 5S, Autonomous Maintenance (Jishu-Hozen),
Kaizen, Planned Maintenance, Quality Maintenance, Training, Office TPM, Safety, Health,
Environment.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Borris, (2006),Total Productive Maintenance, New York: McGraw-Hill

• Nicholas (2001), Competitive Manufacturing Management, Tata McGraw-Hill
• Sule (2008), Manufacturing Facilities( 3/e), CRC Press (Taylor & Francis)
• Tompkins(2003), et al., Facilities Planning (3/e), Wiley India
• Clark (2008), Facility Planning, Pearson India
• Francis(2009), Facility Layout and Location, Prentice Hall of India
• Kunders (2004), Facilities Planning & Management of Hospitals, Tata McGraw Hill
• Takahasi and Osada(1990), Total Productive Maintenance, Tokyo: Asian Productivity
Organization
• Wireman (2006), Total Productive Maintenance( 2/e), New York: Industrial Press, 2006

PROCESS ANALYSIS AND THEORY OF CONSTRAINTS

Course Code: MBA 484 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
This course is to familiarize students to the fundamentals of operational process analyses with
a view to improving productivity and performance towards fulfilling the overall business goals.
It is also to further enable them learn the concepts, principles, and application of the theory of
constraints approach in this regard.

Course Contents:
Module I: Process Structure, and Selection
Process Management Orientation in Operations; Processes and their functions, importance,
objectives of analysis, methods; Interface with other disciplines; Product-process matrix,
Production Process structures, Service Process structures.

Module II: Examination of processes & Benchmarking

Examination of processes; Parameters of Examination, Lead-time, Set-up time, Throughput
Cycle, Cycle time; Performance Measurement System, Cost, Quality, Flexibility, Capability;
Productivity and Profitability Improvement; Benchmarking.

Module III: Understanding Theory of Constraints (TOC)

TOC thinking process; Current Reality Tree, The Evaporating Cloud, Future Reality Tree,
Prerequisite Tree, Transition Tree: Application of thinking process tools; TOC and economic
decisions, Throughput accounting measures for decision making.

Module IV: Operations Improvements with Theory of Constraints

TOC applications in operations improvement; Relating TOC to Project Management, Critical
Chain project management; Production Scheduling with Drum-Buffer-Rope method; TOC in
supply chain management, Drum-Buffer-Rope distribution solution.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Dettmer, W.H. (1997). Goldratt’s Theory of Constraints, ASQ Quality press
• Evans, J.R. and D.A. Collier (2007). Operations Management, New Delhi: Cengage
Learning
• Goldratt, E.M. (1997). Critical Chain, Great Barrington, MA: North River Press
• Goldratt, E.M. (2008). The Goal II – It’s Not Luck, Chennai: Productivity & Quality
Publishing
• Goldratt, E.M. and J. Cox (2006). The Goal: A Process of Ongoing Improvement,
Chennai: Productivity
Quality Publishing
• Goldratt, E.M. Theory of Constraints, Great Barrington, MA: North River Press
• Goldratt, E.M., E. Schragenheim and C.A. Ptak (2000). Necessary But Not Sufficient,
Great Barrington,
MA: North River Press
• Heizer, J. and B. Render (2008). Operations Management, New Delhi: Pearson Education
• Keegan, R. and E. O’Kelley (2008). Applied Benchmarking for Competitiveness,
Mumbai: Jaico
• Mukhopadhyay, S. K. (2008). Theory of Constraints, Mumbai: Jaico
• Stein, R.E. (1997). The Theory of Constraints – Application in Quality and
Manufacturing, New York:
Marcel Dekker

MALL DYNAMICS AND REAL ESTATE MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 485 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course contents provide a detailed outline of Malls and its design and retail components.
Special emphasis is given to the practical aspects. The objective of the course is to impart
skills necessary for taking up positions in Mall administration. The student may also opt for
specific functional aspects like Marketing apart from being entrepreneurs by way of
developing Malls.

Course Contents:
Module I: Concept of Mall
Definition, types, genesis of malls, growth of malls globally, Diffusion of the concept to India,
growth of malls in India, future trends and projections, advantages of mall over other retail
formals, comparison of Us and the Indian Malls

Module II: Mall Design and Architecture

A description of the various components of mall architecture and their significance like
Facade, Atrium, parking, circulation path and utilities & traffic management inside & outside of
mall.

Module III: Mall Administration

Deciding tenant-mix and anchor tenant(s), concept planning and retail zoning, a comment on
suitability of popular retail formats as anchor tenants like Hyper markets, Department Stores,
Multiplexes and Eating joints.
Module IV: Components of Mall Management
Facilities & Utilities management, Security & information systems, Mall promotion & events
management.

Module V: Real Estate Management Introduction

Property Ownership and Interests .Broker Relationships. Sources for Finance, Leasing and
Space selling.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Levy & weitz, ( 2010) Retailing Management (5th ed), Tata McGraw Hi
• Barman & Evans, ( 2009) Retail Management-A strategic Approach (8th ed), (Pearson
Education)
• Sheikh arif & Fatima Kaneez (2008) Mall Management, Himalaya Publishing House.
• Susan Hudson-Wilson (Hardcover - Jun 2000), Modern Real Estate Portfolio Management
(Frank J. Fabozzi Series)
 VISUAL MERCHANDISING AND SPACE PLANNING
Course Code: MBA 486 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course contents highlight and explain the various design and display elements that
impact space management and merchandise display in retail outlets. It also focuses on
specific impact of each element on store profitability and efficiency. The aim is to prepare
students to take up jobs as creative visual merchandisers with majors retail players. Space
Management skills shall help them in being effective department, floor and store managers.

Course Contents:
Module I: Store location
Significance, factors affection choice of location and site, Design of retail store: significance
of design for a store, Architecture, Façade, Size and elevation.

Module II: Store Layout

Discussion on different types of layouts for retail stores with specific applications and
attributes. Space Planning and management: Allocation of space among various
departments/categories.

Module III: Merchandise Presentation

Fixtures, Displays and signage- description with discussion on specific attributes of each
option. Introduction to store Atmospherics: the key components, significance. In store traffic
management.

Module IV: Atmospheric components

Color, texture, lighting, temperature, music, fragrance, floor/ceiling designs. Retail Image.

Module V: Space Planning

Importance, Max. Space Productivity with relation to ROI. Implementing in store advertising,
Marketing & Merchandising Plan.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Levy & Weitz, (2008) Retailing Management, Tata McGraw Hill , Sixth edition.
• Berman & Evans ,(2009) Retail Management- A strategic Approach, Pearson Education
• Bajaj, Tuli & Srivastava , (2009) Retail Management, Oxford
 RETAIL SALES AND CATEGORY MANAGEMENT

Course Code: MBA 487 Credit

Units: 03

Course Objective:
The aim of this course is to develop the understanding of the various components of the integrated supply chain
from the perspective of Distribution Management. The learning is focused on developing the various models of
distribution and logistics.

Course Contents:
Module I
Introduction to Sales Management, review, Professionalism in sales, different types of sales jobs.
Discussion of sales careers and qualifications and skills required for success. Role of the sales
Manager.

Module II
Adaptive Selling, sales territory-zation, sales quotas, budgeting and costing, monitoring sales
expenses, sales theories.

Module III
The sales process - planning prospecting, planning the initial sales call, approaching the prospect and
initiation of discussing, negotiation and closing. Sales presentation, approaching the customer and
gaining the commitment of the customer. Role play. CRM and use of technology (database
marketing), encouraging critical encounters.

Module IV
Recruitment, selection and training of Salesperson. Motivation and retention of sales staff. Sales
force compensation, tools for sales supervision and control, Examination and appraisal of sales staff,
Evaluation of Sales price.

Module V
Category Management – Definition, Process, Components, Challenges, Category Manager –
Definition, Role, Challenges faced.

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Stern & El-Ansary (2009), Marketing Channels, PHI Publication.

• Ingram, Laforge, Avila, (2008), Professional Selling A trust based approach, Thomson.
 RETAIL BRANDING AND CRM
Course Code: MBA 488 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course involves the objective of imparting comprehensive understanding of the fundamentals of
building, measuring, and managing a brand. The emphasis is also on enhancing life time value of
customers and developing partnering relationships with profitable loyal customers.

Course Contents:
Module I: Concept of branding
Concept of branding, the challenges faced by brand managers, the value of a brand to customers and
the organization, Branding Challenges & Opportunities, Strategic Brand Management Process
Criteria to choose brand elements, Creation of brand personality, brand personality scale, brand
image sources, Brand identity dimensions

Module II: Brand Re-vitalization & Equity

Brand & Line Extensions, Marketing Mix for Brand Extensions, Co – Branding. Upward and
Downward stretching of brands, Components of retail image. Dynamics of creating and maintaining
retail image, The brand equity concept, Brand Equity Models – Customer Based Brand Equity, Aaker
Model, Brand hierarchy Brand Awareness, Brand Loyalty, Brand Associations, Brand Recognition,
Recall.

Module III: Planning Retail Promotional Strategy

Elements of retail promotional mix: Advertising, public relations, personal selling, sales
promotions. Point of purchase advertising, Determining promotional objectives. Establishing
an overall promotional budget. Selecting the promotional mix, Implementing the promotional
mix, Reviewing and revising the promotional plan.

Module IV: Creating Customer Value through CRM

Importance of CRM, Rationale and Benefits of CRM; Types of CRM; Emerging Issues and
Future Trends of CRM. Customer relationships and channel relationships. Customer
Satisfaction: Pre-requisite to customer Relationship; Customer Value; Value Chain Analysis;
Customer Life time Value: Concept and Measurement ; Measuring Equity in Customer
Relationships;

Module V: Customer retention strategies

Relationship retailing, Managing Service Recovery and Complaint Handling; Customer
Retention Strategy

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Keller K.L. (2008), Strategic Brand Management: Building, Measuring, and Managing
Brand Equity, Prentice Hall.
• Sengupta S. (2010), Brand Positioning, TATA McGraw-Hill
• Kapferer J. L. (1994), Strategic Brand Management, Free Press
• Sheth J.N, Parvatiyar A, Shainesh G. (2001), Customer Relationship Management, Tata McGraw
Hill.
• Dyche J. (2001), The CRM Handbook-A Business Guide to Customer Relationship
Management, Pearson Education.

E-RETAILING
Course Code: MBA 489 Credit
Units: 03

Course Objective:
The course is designed to explain the emergence, proliferation and prospects of E-retailing
across the globe, with special reference to India. After studying the course, students shall be
equipped with the basic knowledge to design, operate and manage e-retailing operations of a
retail enterprise.

Course Contents:
Module I
E-retailing: meaning, concept, significance, comparison with convention retailing, Brick &
Mortar, Click & Mortar and purely E-retailing, integration of e-retailing into an organization,
Multi-channel retailing.

Module II
E-retailing models, starting an E-store: weighing the options, approaches to building an E-
store, requirements of an effective E-store, E-store design: web atmospherics, navigability,
interactivity, retail information.

Module III
Marketing Strategies for E-stores: Branding on the web, offline marketing, cross selling,
referral services, permission marketing, E-greeting cards, Online payment processing,
internet payment gateways, internet security issues, E-malls, future of e-retailing.

Module IV
E-Customer Relation Management, E-Payment systems ,E-Supply chain management, Case
studies of companies like TELCO, ICICI HLL to manage e-retailing .

Examination Scheme:

Components CPA TP Q/S A ME EE

Weightage (%) 5 5 5 5 10 70

Text & References:

• Caroll & Broadhead, Selling Online: How to Become a Successful E-Commerce Merchant,
Dearborn publishers
• E-Commerce an Indian Perspective by P.T Joseph. S.J.PHI Publications.
• Janice Reynolds, The Complete E-Commerce Book: Design, Build, and Maintain a
Successful Web-Based Business, CMP Media.
• Dennis, Fenech & Merrilees, E-retailing, Routledge Press
• Levy & Weitz, Retailing Management, Tata McGraw Hill